Dell TSi 500, TSi 400 & TSi 300
Floorstanding Loudspeakers
Enceintes colonnes
Altavoces de piso
Standlautsprecher
Diffusori da pavimento
Caixas acústicas de piso
TSi 200 & TSi 100
Bookshelf Loudspeakers
Enceinte d’étagère
Altavoz de estantería
Regallautsprecher
Diffusori per Scaffale
Caixas Acústicas para Estantes
CS20 & CS10
Center Channel Loudspeakers
Enceintes Centrale
Altavoz de Canal Central
Center-Kanal-Lautsprecher
Diffusore per Canale Centrale
Caixa Acústica do Canal Central
Owner’s
Manual
-> Accéder au site Dell
-> Accéder aux Codes Promo et Bons de réduction Dell
-> Voir d'autres manuels Dell
Revenir à l'accueil
Accéder au Support :
http://snpi.dell.com/sna/manuals/A3683000.pdf
-> Commander sur Dell.com, Cliquez ici
Autres manuels :
Dell-Inspiron-1721-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-1520-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-1501-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XPS-710-H2C-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Laser-Printer-5100cn-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7010-Mini-tour-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-1300-B120-B130-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1955-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-6400-E1505-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Imprimante-personnelle-Tout-en-un-Dell-A920-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XPS-M1710-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerVault-DL2000-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-8600-Guide-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-5160-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-XPS-Gen-2-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-300m-Guide-du-proprietaire-Manuel
Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel
Dell-Inspiron-640M-E1405-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-8500-Guide-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-1000-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XPS-M2010-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-One-2330-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel
Dell-Inspiron-3000-Series-Service-Manual
Dell-Inspiron-3500-Portable-Computer-Service-Manual
Dell-Inspiron-5423-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-poweredge-r520-technical-guide
Dell-Pave-Tactile-Sans-Fil-Dell-TP713-Manuel-d-utilisateur
Dell-PowerVault-NX3300-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel
Dell-Inspiron-2600-et-2650-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Manuel
Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Adamo-XPS
Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-du-proprietairexps-13-l321x_owner_manual_fr-fr
Dell-xps-13-l321x_setup_guide_fr-fr.pdf-Manuel
Dell-Storage-Center-5.5-Guide-de-configuration-systeme
Dell-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-DE-BUREAU-ALIENWARE
Dell-Vostro-410-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide
Dell-ALIENWARE-M18x-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-PORTABLE
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M14x-MOBILE
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M11x-MOBILE
Dell-Configuration-de-votre-ecran-de-televiseur-LCD-Dell-W2607C-26-pouces
Dell-PERC-6-i-PERC-6-E-et-CERC-6-i-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Dimension-Serie-8300-Manuel
Dell-2145cn-Imprimante-multifonction-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-PowerEdge-C6220-Systems-Hardware-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-server-poweredge-m610-tech-guidebook
Dell-Vostro-270-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-Controleurs-RAID-Dell-PowerEdge-PERC-H310-H710-H710P-et-H810-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Laser-MFP-Dell-3333dn-et-3335dn-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-PowerVault-DL-Backup-to-Disk-Appliance-Powered-by-Symantec-Backup-Exec-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-XPS-015-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX3300-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-DE-REFERENCE
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Network-Attached-Storage-NAS-Guide-de-depannage
Dell-Commutateur-de-consoles-2161DS-Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-d-OSCAR-et-du-materiel
Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-PowerEdge-C8000XD-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-OptiPlex-755-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3200i-et-MD3220i-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-Latitude-E5400-et-E5500-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide
Dell-Set-Up-Your-Computer
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730-Manuel
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M620-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel
Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Getting-Started-With-Your-System
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-SUSE-Linux-Enterprise-Server-10-Instructions-d-installation
Dell-Utilitaires-de-gestion-du-Dell-OpenManage-Baseboard-Management-Controller-Version%204.6-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Guide-d-installation-de-la-version-7.1
Dell-Systeme-Dell-DR4000-Guide-de-l-administrateur
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge%20Red-Hat-Enterprise-Linux-6-x86_64-x86-Instructions-d-installation-et-informations-importantes
Dell-Integrated-Dell-Remote-Access-Controller-7-iDRAC7-Version-1.20.20-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Management-Plug-In-pour-VMware-vCenter-Version-1.5-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Projecteur-7700FullHD-Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Projecteur-Dell-1420X-1430X-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-Guide-de-l-administrateur
Dell-PowerEdge-Express-SSD-PCIe-Flash-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Update-Packages-DUP-Version-7.0-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-PowerEdge-R720-et-R720xd-Guide-de-mise-en-route-Manuel
Dell-PowerEdge-R320-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R510-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Precision-M4400-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-SCSI-Dell-EqualLogic-PS-Series-a-clusters-de-basculement-Microsoft-Windows-Server-Guide-d-installation-et-de-depannage-du-materie
Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Guide-de-mise-en-route-du-systeme
Dell-Moniteur-a-ecran-plat-Dell-U2713HM-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-P1913-P1913S-P2213
Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-Dell-E1913S-E1913-E2213
Dell-Systems-Service-and-Diagnostics-Tools-Version-7.0-Guide-d-installation-rapide
Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-S2740L-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-DE-CONFIGURATION
Dell-Dimension-Serie-8300
Dell-PowerEdge-R820-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-PowerEdge-C8000-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel-manuel
Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.1-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-PowerEdge-M1000e-M915-M910-M820-M710HD-M710-M620-M610x-M610-M520-et-M420-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.0-Guide-d-installation
Dell-Inspiron-15R-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX3200-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-Controller-PERC-S110-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Micrologiciel-Dell-Chassis-Management-Controller-Version-4-1-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Vostro-470-Manuel-du-proprietaire
/Dell-Systeme-Dell-PowerVault-NX3500-Guide-de-l-administrateur
Dell-Latitude-E6420-XFR-Guide-technique
Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-S2240M-S2340M
Dell-Systemes-Dell-DR4000-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel
Dell-PowerEdge-T320-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Precision-Workstation-T3600-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-DR4000-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel-manuel
Dell-Vostro-470-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-Projecteur-Dell-M110-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Upgrading-to-BackupExec-2012-PowerVault-DL-Backup-to-Disk-Appliance
Dell-PowerVault-NX3300-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerConnect-5500-Series-CLI-Reference-Guide
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-Series-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-Inspiron-One-2020-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XPS-14-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1900-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M620-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-R815-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-R720-and-R720xd-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-Micrologiciel-Dell-Chassis-Management-Controller-Version-4.0-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Inspiron-17R-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel
Dell-Inspiron-One-2020-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C5220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-Inspiron-660s-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel
Dell-PowerEdge-R820-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-270-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel
Dell-Systeme-Dell-PowerEdge-C6220-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-14R-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Guide-de-l-Utilisateur-de-l-Ecran-Large-Dell-IN1940MW
Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-S2440L-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Alienware-X51-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE-MANUAL
Dell-Emplacement-des-cavaliers-de-la-carte-systeme-des-systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R310-Mise-a-jour-des-informations
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-6950-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Alienware-M17x-R4-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-XPS-13-Owner-s-Manual
Dell-HBA-SAS-Dell-PowerEdge-6-Gb-s-et-Internal-Tape-Adapter-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R910-Mise-a-jour-des-informations
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T610-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Manuel-du-proprietaire
/Dell-PowerEdge-R905-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Imprimantes-laser-Dell-2350d-et-Dell-2350dn
Dell-XPS-430-Guide-de-reference-rapide
Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-Controller-PERC-H700-et-H800-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Lifecycle-Controller-2-Version-1.00.00-User-s-Guide
Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.0-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Solutions-NAS-Dell-FluidFS-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manue
Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-V525w
Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Adaptateurs-Brocade-Manuel-d-installation-et-de-reference
Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-NX3600-NX3610-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T410-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Latitude-ST-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel
Dell-OptiPlex-360-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide
Dell-PowerEdge-R810-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-Guide-d-installation-des-systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Modular-Disk-3000
Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-2230d-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C6105-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-Imprimante-personnelle-a-jet-d-encre-Dell-J740-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-2130cn-IMPRIMANTE-LASER-COULEUR
Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-de-la-station-de-travail-Dell-Precision-T3400
Dell-1235cn-Imprimante-Multifonction-Mode-d-emploi
Dell-Vostro-1310-1510-1710-et-2510-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide
Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-APC-Smart-UPS-750VA-1000VA-1500VA-100-120-230-V-CA-2U-Montage-en-baie-Onduleur
Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-Modele-TL24iSCSIxSAS%201Gb-iSCSI-a-SAS
Dell-Imprimantes-laser-Dell-1130-et-Dell-1130n
Dell-Precision-M6400-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide
Dell-M770mm-Color-Monitor-Quick-Set-up
Dell-Carte-de-gestion-reseau-AP9617-AP9618-AP9619-Manuel-d-installation-et-de-demarrage-rapide
Dell-Projecteur-Dell-1410X-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Imprimante-couleur-Dell-1350cnw
Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050-Manuel
Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-620
Dell-3D-VISION-MANUEL-D-UTILISATION
Dell-Inspiron-600m-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R805-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R900-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-2970-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C6145-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-Inspiron-660s-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-P513w-User-s-Guide-Francais-manuel
Dell-Inspiron-660-manuels
Dell-Serveur-de-sauvegarde-sur-disque-Dell-PowerVault-DL-optimise-par-CommVault-Simpana-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-P513w-User-s-Guide-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-manuel
Dell-Precision-Workstation-T1650-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-PORTABLE
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-de-Dell-PowerEdge-M905-M805-M600-et-M605
Dell-Inspiron-One-2330-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-1100-B110-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-270-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T320-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Station-de-travail-mobile-Dell-Precision-M4700-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XPS-8500-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-1230c-Imprimante-laser-couleur-mode-d-emploi-Manuel
Dell-Client-Management-Manuel
Dell-Studio-XPS-Setup-Guide-Manue
Dell-Adaptateur-hote-Dell-PCIe-SCSI-Ultra320-monocanal-Guide-d-utilisation-Manuel
Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-SETUP-GUIDE-Manuel
Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-GUIDE-DE-CONFIGURATION-Manuel
Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Inspiron-M4040-14-N4050-Manuel
Dell-Guide-de-l-administrateur-de-Dell-PowerVault-705N-Manuel
Dell-Vostro-420-220-220s-Guide-de-Configuration-et-de-Reference-Rapide-Manuel
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660f-Series-Guide-de-deploiement-Manuel
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Network-Attached-Storage-NAS-Guide-de-l-administrateur-Manuel
Dell-Latitude-D430-Guide-d-utilisation-Manuel
Dell-Studio-XPS-Guide-de-configuration-Manuel
Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Precision-Workstation-T1650-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R300-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes%20-Dell%20PowerEdge-T110-II-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-200-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Mini-Tower
Dell-Inspiron-531-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-DE-BUREAU-Francais
Dell-PowerEdge-R520-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Projecteur-Dell-1201MP-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-PowerEdge-R910-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-C521-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T605-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Mobile-Jamz
Dell-Inspiron-530-Series-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-3460-Manuels
Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWER-CENTER-1.1-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-PowerVault-MD3660f-Storage-Arrays-Manuels
Dell™ Ekran Yöneticisi Kullanıcı Kılavuzu
Dell-PowerEdge-R620-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-PowerEdge-R520-Guide-de-mise-en-route
DELL-POWERVAULT-MD1200-et-MD1220-TECHNICAL-GUIDEBOOK
Console-de-gestion-multi-onduleurs-Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-pour-l-installation-et-la-configuration
DELL-OPTIPLEX580-TECHNICAL-GUIDEBOOK-INSIDE-THE-OPTIPLEX-580
Dell-Inspiron-1720-manuels
Dell-PowerEdge-R720-et-R720xd-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Vostro-1540-1550-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Latitude-E5430-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell™ S2240L/S2340L Monitör Kullanıcı Kılavuzu
Dell PowerEdge Sistemleri İçin Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Önemli Bilgiler Kılavuzu
Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-Dell-S2240L-S2340L
Dell™ S320/S320wi Projektör Kullanım Kılavuzu
Dell-%20Vostro-270-Manuels
Dell-Vostro-3460-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Francais
Dell-Inspiron-9200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Inspiron-2600-et-2650-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Axim-X30-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Vostro-2520-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-1721-Manuel
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T710-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Precision-Workstation-T5600-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Solutions-NAS-Dell-FluidFS-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C5220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-Dimension-3000-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-R210-Technical-Guide
Dell-Inspiron-Manuels
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-Vostro-1700
Dell-Clavier-sans-fil-et-souris-Dell-KM713-Manuel-de-l'utilisateur
Dell-Systeme-de-navigation-GPS-Dell-Manuel-de-l'utilisateur
Dell-Logiciel-de-gestion-de-l-onduleur-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-pour-l-installation-et-la-configuration
Dell-Demarrage-rapide-du-moniteur-couleur-M990
Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-de-la-station-de-travail-Dell-Precision-370
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-2800-Guide-d-installation-et-de-depannage
Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-du-systeme-Dell-OptiPlex-SX280
Dell-Vostro-1440-1450-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Photo-Printer-540-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Streak-7-Francais-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Venue-Pro-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Imprimante-laser-personnelle-Dell-P1500-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-C5125-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel
Dell-Latitude-D630-Manuels
Dell-Vostro-400-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Mini-Tower
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T100-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7010-compact-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerVault%20NX3200-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-1200-et-2200-Manuel-de%20l-utilisateur
Dell-Vostro-1540-1550-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-8600-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerVault-Baie-de-stockage-MD1120-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-E521-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-9100-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-3360-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T300-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XPS-One-2710-manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Inspiron-1150-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Latitude-E5530-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-660-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Acceder-au-site-Dell
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG-Francais
Dell-OptiPlex-9010-Tout-en-un-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-3560-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T110-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-server-poweredge-m710-tech-guidebook_fr
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Latitude-5420-E5420-E5420m-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Latitude-E6320-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-8200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Francais
Dell-server-poweredge-r610-tech-guidebook_fr
Dell-server-poweredge-t710-technical-guide-book_fr
Dell-server-poweredge-m1000e-tech-guidebook_fr
Dell-server-poweredge-m610-tech-guidebook_fr
Dell-poweredge-r210-technical-guidebook-en_fr
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M15x-MOBILE-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Beats-By-dr.dre-Manuel-et-Garantie
Dell-Dimension-3100C-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Precision-Workstation-T3600-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-200-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Slim-Tower
Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-DE-BUREAU
Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWER-CENTER-1-1-Guide-d-utilisation
Dell-Vostro-360-Proprietaire-du-manuel
Dell-Dimension-3100C-Manuel-du-proprietaire
AlienwareArea-51Area-51ALX
Dell-Ordinateurs-de-Bureau-PC-Portables-Netbooks/AlienwareAurora-R3
AlienwareAurora-R4
lienwareAuroraAuroraALXAurora-R2
Chassis-RAID-Dell-PowerVault-MD3000i-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Baie-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD1000-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Boîtier-Dell-PowerEdge-M1000e-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Clavier-Axim-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-3100-E310-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-9200-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-E520-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-1100-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-M5200-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-Dell-5330dn-Mode-d-emploi
Dell-Imprimante-laser-multifonction-Dell-1600n-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-13z-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-17R-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-700m-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-1100-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Inspiron-1525-1526-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-5100-et-5150-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Inspiron-9300-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-9400-E1705-Manuel-du-proprietaire
http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/Dell-Ordinateurs-de-Bureau-PC-Portables-Netbooks/Dell-Laser-Printer-1700-1700n-Manuel-du-proprietaire.htm
Dell-Laser-Printer-1710-1710n-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Laser-Printer-3100cn-manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Latitude-ST-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Latitude-XT3-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Liste-des-manuels-et-de-la-documentation-Dell
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M11x-MOBILE-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M15x-MOBILE
Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE-francais
Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE
Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050
Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-du-Dell-XPS-420
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6220
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6520
Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6320
Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-N5110
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-Vostro-1500
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-XPS-M1330
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-Inspiron-1721
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-One
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-944-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-964-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer%20942-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Photo-Printer-720-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerEdge-R620-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-l-administrateur
Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Precision-Workstation-T7600-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Streak-7-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Streak-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-4150-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-8200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1950-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M420-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R210-II-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R410-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R710-Manuel-du-proprietaire%20-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T310-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T620-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell-Photo-924-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-360-Proprietaire-du-manuel
Dell-Vostro-3750-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Vostro-V131-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-XPS-630i-Manuel-du-proprietair
Dell-moniteur-D1920-Manuel-du-proprietaire
DellDimension1100Series
Imprimante-Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-922-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-S2500-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Imprimante-personnelle-Dell-AIO-A960-Manuel-du-proprietaire
alienwareX51
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6220
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-4150-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur
Dell-Streak-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730
Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-944-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-One
Dell-Clavier-Axim-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R410-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050
Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-N5110
Dell-Inspiron-1100-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-M5200-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Photo-Printer-720-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-1100-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-Vostro-1500
Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R710-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Inspiron-5100-et-5150-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6520
Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE
Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6320
Dell-Laser-Printer-3100cn-manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-d-utilisation
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1950-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG
Dell-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-Dell-5330dn-Mode-d-emploi
Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-l-administrateur
Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Guide-de-mise-en-route
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M11x-MOBILE-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M420-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement
Dell-Laser-Printer-1700-1700n-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-9400-E1705-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell-Photo-924-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Laser-Printer-1710-1710n-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Dimension-3100-E310-Manuel-du-proprietaire
Dell-Inspiron-1525-1526-Manuel-du-proprietaire
http://snpi.dell.com/sna/manuals/A3683000.pdf
http://snpi.dell.com/sna/manuals/A3099597.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_printers_main/esuprt_printers/dell-1130n_User's%20Guide_en-us.pdf
ftp://ftp.dell.com/Manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_cloud_products/poweredge-c8000_owner's%20manual3_en-us.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_printers_main/esuprt_printers/dell-2145cn_User's%20Guide_da-dk.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-md3200i_Setup%20Guide_cs-cz.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-md3200_Setup%20Guide_de-de.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-md3220i_Setup%20Guide_fr-fr.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_printers_main/esuprt_printers/dell-1815dn_User's%20Guide_fr-fr.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-dp500_owner's%20manual3_fr-fr.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/Manuals/Common/inspiron-5100_setup%20guide_fr-fr.pdf
http://support.dell.com/support/edocs/systems/Vos3360/fr/OM/om_fr.pdf
http://support.euro.dell.com/support/edocs/systems/Alw_dt_Area_51/en/sm/sm_en.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_laptop/esuprt_alienware_laptops/alienware-m11x_Reference%20Guide_fr-fr.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_laptop/esuprt_alienware_laptops/alienware-m18x_user's%20guide_fr-fr.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_rack_infrastructure/dell-line-interactive-tower-ups-500t_User's%20Guide9_fr-fr.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_poweredge/poweredge-2800_User's%20Guide12_fr-fr.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-md3220i_Owner's%20Manual_fr-fr.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_equallogic/dell-dx6000_Owner's%20Manual_fr-fr.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_rack_infrastructure/dell-line-interactive-tower-ups-500t_User's%20Guide10_fr-fr.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_laptop/esuprt_precision_mobile/precision-m4700_Owner's%20Manual_fr-fr.pdf
http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-md3200_Setup%20Guide_es-mx.pdf
http://snpi.dell.com/sna/manuals/A3683000.pdf
Owner’s
Manual
TSi 500, TSi 400 & TSi 300
Floorstanding Loudspeakers
Enceintes colonnes
Altavoces de piso
Standlautsprecher
Diffusori da pavimento
Caixas acústicas de piso
TSi 200 & TSi 100
Bookshelf Loudspeakers
Enceinte d’étagère
Altavoz de estantería
Regallautsprecher
Diffusori per Scaffale
Caixas Acústicas para Estantes
CS20 & CS10
Center Channel Loudspeakers
Enceintes Centrale
Altavoz de Canal Central
Center-Kanal-Lautsprecher
Diffusore per Canale Centrale
Caixa Acústica do Canal Central
TSi SER EI S2 For more information visit our website at www.polkaudio.comPolk Audio Customer Service: 1-800-377-7655 (Outside US & Canada: 410-358-3600) Monday-Friday, 9:00 AM-6:00 PM EST, polkcs@polkaudio.com 3
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
This product was designed and manufactured to meet strict quality and safety standards.
There are, however, some installation and operation precautions which you should be
particularly aware of.
1. Read Instructions. All the safety and operating instructions should be read
before the system is operated.
2. Retain Instructions. The safety and operating instructions should be retained
for future reference.
3. Heed Warnings. All warnings on the appliances and in the operating instructions
should be adhered to.
4. Follow Instructions. All operating and use instructions should be followed.
5. Cleaning. Unplug the appliance from wall outlet before cleaning. Do not
use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
6. Attachments. Do not use attachments not recommended by the product
manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
7. Water and Moisture. Do not use these appliances near water—for example,
near a bath tub, washbowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement,
or near a swimming pool, and the like.
8. Accessories. Do not place these appliances on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket,
or table. The audio/video products may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult,
and serious damage to the products. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or
table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the appliances. Any mounting
of the appliances should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use
mounting accessories recommended by the manufacturer.
9. Ventilation. Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure
reliable operation of the appliances and to protect them from overheating, and these
openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by
placing the products on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should
never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register. This product should not be
placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation
is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.
10. Power Sources. This product should be operated only from the type of power source
indicated on the marking labels. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to
your home, consult your appliance dealer or local power company.
11. Grounding or Polarization. This product is equipped with polarized alternating-current
line plugs (plugs having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power
outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully
into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your
electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose
of the polarized plug.
12. Power Cord Protection. Power-supply cord should be routed so that it is not likely
to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against it, paying particular
attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they
exit from the appliances.
13. Lightning. For added protection for this audio/video product during a lightning storm,
or when it is left un-attended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the
wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage
to the product due to lightning and power-line surges.
14. Power Lines. An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of
over-head power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into
such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care
should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with
them might be fatal.
15. Overloading. Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result
in a risk of fire or electric shock.
16. Object and Liquid Entry. Never push objects of any kind into this product through
openings, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that
could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on this
audio/video product.
17. Servicing. Do not attempt to service this product yourself, as opening or removing
covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing
to qualified service personnel.
18. Damage Requiring Service. Unplug this product from wall outlets and refer servicing
to qualified service personnel under the following conditions:
a. When the power supply cord or plug is damaged.
b. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product.
c. If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
d. If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions.
Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions, as
an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often
require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product
to its normal operation.
e. If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
f. When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance—
this indicates a need for service.
19. Replacement Parts. When replacement parts are required, be sure the service
technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or that the
parts have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions
may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards.
20. Safety Check. Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the
service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the products
are in proper operating condition.
21. Carts and Stands. The appliances should be used only with a cart or stand that is
recommended by the manufacturer. An appliance and cart combination should be
moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause
the appliance and cart combination to overturn. Use caution when moving the
cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
22. This product is not intended for use outdoors.
SAFE LIMITS OF OPERATION
Polk Audio specifies the recommended amplification range for each of its passive (non-amplified)
loudspeakers. Typically that specification will be expressed as a range of power such as 20-200 Watts
(per channel). It is important to understand what those numbers mean when choosing a receiver or
amplifier for your Polk loudspeakers. The lower number indicates the lowest continuous rated power
that will yield acceptable performance in a typical listening environment. The higher number indicates
the highest per channel power that should be used with your Polk speakers. That number should not
be confused with a “Power Handling” specification and it does not imply that the speaker will safely
handle that full amount of power on a long-term basis. We specify a wide range of power ratings because
not all electronics manufacturers use the same method for rating power. In fact, high quality lower-rated
amplifiers sound better and play louder than low quality units with higher power rating.
Automobile horsepower is good analogy. Your car probably has far more horsepower than it needs
for your daily commute and is likely capable of going well over 120mph (190km/hr). Having that
extra power is good for on-ramp acceleration and danger avoidance (like getting away from brain-eating
zombies) but that doesn’t mean that it is advisable to operate your car on North American highways at
full power and maximum speed for an extended period of time. Just ask your local state trooper if you
are in doubt. Similarly, we recommend using amplifiers and receivers with rated power above the Power
Handling limits of our speakers because having extra power available for short term peaks is conducive
to better sound quality, maximum dynamic range and effortless high volume output. But
we strongly urge you not to use the full power of your amplifier or receiver for daily listening.
Loudspeakers can be damaged when an amplifier, regardless of its wattage, is made to play at higher
listening levels than its power can clearly produce. Operation at this level can result in very high levels of
audible distortion originating in the amplifier, which can add a harsh, gritty sound to your listening material. If you hear distortion—turn the volume down or risk damaging your speakers. You can damage just about any speaker, regardless of power rating, if you drive an amplifier to or beyond the point of
distortion.
PRODUCT DISPOSAL
Certain international, national and/or local laws and/or regulations may apply regarding
the disposal of this product. For further detailed information, please contact the retailer
where you purchased this product or the Polk Audio Importer/Distributor in your country.
A listing of Polk Audio Importer/Distributors can be found on the Polk Audio website
www.polkaudio.com or by contacting Polk Audio at: 5601 Metro Drive, Baltimore,
Maryland 21215, USA—Phone: +1 410 358-3600.
TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE OR SERVICE
If, after following the hookup directions,you experience difficulty, please double-check all wire
connections. Should you isolate the problem to the speaker,contact the authorized Polk Audio dealer where
you made your purchase, orcontact Polk Audio Customer Service 800-377-7655 (M-F, 9-6 EST, US &
Canada only) orvia email polkcs@polkaudio.com. Outside the US & Canada,call 410-358-3600. More
detailed information—including audio how-to articles,FAQs, and online manuals are available on our
award-winning website www.polkaudio.com/home. Complete mounting instructionscome with each
stand.
TAKE INVENTORY
Inside each speaker container, you should find the following:
1. One TSi floorstanding speaker, two bookshelf speakers
or one center channel speaker
2. TSi Manual
3. Registration Card
4. Adhesive-backed rubber pads—
(8 for bookshelf speakers or 4 center channel speaker)
5. Wall Mount Template (for TSi100 bookshelf speakers only)
Important Note: If anything is missing or damaged, or if your speaker fails to operate, notify Polk Audio
Customer Support Services immediately at 800-377-7655.
ENGLISH4 For more information visit our website at www.polkaudio.com
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES
Este producto ha sido diseñado y fabricado para satisfacer estrictas normas de calidad
y seguridad. Sin embargo, hay ciertas precauciones de operación e instalación que usted
debe tener en cuenta en particular.
1. Lisez toutes les consignes de sécurité et d’utilisation avant d’utiliser cet appareil.
2. Conservez les instructions de sécurité et d’opération pour référence future.
3. Observez les consignes contenues dans ce manuel et affichées sur le produit.
4. Suivez toutes les instructions d’opération et d’utilisation
5. Nettoyage. Débranchez l’appareil avant de le nettoyer. N’utilisez jamais de nettoyant
liquide ou en aérosol. Utilisez un chiffon humide.
6. Accessoires. N’utilisez jamais d’accessoires non recommandés par le fabricant.
Ils pourraient provoquer un danger.
7. Eau et humidité. N’utilisez jamais cet appareil près d’une source d’eau ou d’humidité -
par exemple près d’une baignoire, d’un évier, d’un lavabo ou dans un sous-sol humide
ou près d’une piscine ou autre source d’eau.
8. Accessoires. Ne placez jamais ce produit audio-visuel sur un charriot, socle, meuble ou
support instable. Le produit pourrait tomber, s’endommager et/ou blesser grièvement
un enfant ou un adulte. Utilisez uniquement un charriot, socle, meuble ou support spéci
fié par le fabricant ou vendu avec le produit. Toute installation du produit doit se faire
selon les directives du fabricant et en utilisant des accessoires recommandés par le
fabricant.
9. Aération. Les ouvertures et les fentes situées sur le boîtier préviennent la surchauffe
et assurent la fiabilité du produit et ne doivent jamais être couvertes ou obstruées.
Elles ne doivent jamais être obstruées en plaçant le produit sur un lit, un sofa, un
tapis ou autre surface similaire. Ce produit ne doit jamais être installé sur ou à
proximité d’un radiateur ou d’un registre de chaleur. Ce produit ne doit pas être
installé dans un meuble, une bibliothèque ou un bâti à moins d’assurer une
aération adéquate ou d’observer les directives du fabricant.
10. Alimentation CA. Ce produit ne doit être utilisé qu’avec le type d’alimentation CA
spécifié sur l’étiquette apposée au produit. Si vous ne connaissez pas le type
d’alimentation utilisé dans votre région, communiquez avec le revendeur du
produit ou avec votre fournisseur local d’électricité.
11. Mise à la terre et polarisation. Ce produit est muni d’une fiche d’alimentation CA
polarisée (une des deux broches étant plus large que l’autre). Cette fiche ne peut être
in sérée dans la prise de courant que d’une seule façon. C’est un dispositif de sécurité.
Si vous ne parvenez pas à bien insérer la fiche dans la prise de courant, renversezla.
Si vous ne parvenez toujours pas à insérer la fiche dans la prise de courant, faites
remplacer la prise obsolète par un électricien. Ne contournez jamais le dispositif
de sécurité de mise à la terre de la fiche polarisée.
12. Protection du cordon d’alimentation CA. Les cordons d'alimentation CA doivent être
disposés hors des zones passantes où ils risquent d’être écrasés, pincés ou endom
magées, particulièrement à proximité des prises de courant, des blocs multiprises
et à la sortie de l’appareil.
13. Foudre et surtension. Pour assurer la protection de ce produit contre la foudre ou la
surtension lorsqu’il n’est pas utilisé pour de longues périodes, débranchez son cordon
d’alimentation de la prise de courant CA et déconnectez le système de câble ou
d’antenne.
14. Lignes électriques. Une antenne extérieure ne doit pas être installée à proximité de
lignes électriques aériennes ou autres dispositifs électriques ou d’éclairage sur lesquels
elle pourrait tomber. Lors de l’installation d’une antenne extérieure, il est impératif de
vousassurer que cette dernière ne pourra jamais entrer en contact avec de tels disposi
tifs ou lignes électriques. Il pourrait y avoir danger de mort.
15. Surcharge. Ne surchargez jamais les prises de courant, les rallonges ou les blocs
multiprises ; cela pourrait constituer un risque d’incendie ou de choc électrique.
16. Objets et liquides. N’insérez jamais d’objets dans les ouvertures de ce produit. Ils
pourraient entrer en contact avec des points de voltage dangereux ou provoquer des
courts-circuits ; cela pourrait provoquer un risque d’incendie ou de choc électrique.
Ne renversez jamais deliquides sur le produit.
17. Service. Ne tentez jamais de réparer ce produit vousmême car ouvrir son boîtier
ou en retirer le couvercle pourrait vous exposer à des voltages dangereux ou à
d’autres dangers. Confiez tout service à un technicien qualifié.
18. Dommages et service. Débranchez l’appareil de la prise CA et contactez un réparateur
qualifié lorsque :
a. le cordon d’alimentation a été endommagé.
b. un objet ou du liquide s’est introduit dans le produit.
c. le produit a été exposé à la pluie ou à de l’eau.
d. le produit ne fonctionne pas normalement selon les instructions du fabricant. Réglez
uniquement les contrôles spécifiés dans le manuel de l’utilisateur car le réglage
inapproprié de certains autres contrôles pourrait endommager le produit et requérir
l’intervention d’un réparateur qualifié pour le remettre en ordree. le produit a subi
une chute ou son boîtier a été endommagé.
e. le produit ne semble pas fonctionner normalement — ce qui indique la nécessité
de service.
19. Pièces de rechange - Lorsque des pièces de rechange sont requises, assurez-vous que le
technicien de service utilise des pièces de rechange spécifiées par le fabricant ou des
pièces ayant les mêmes caractéristiques que les pièces d'origine. Des substitutions non
autoriséesrisquent de provoquer un incendie, des chocs électriques ou d’autres dangers.
20. Contrôle de sécurité - Après chaque contrôle technique ou réparation de cet appareil,
demandez au technicien d'effectuer un contrôle pour assurer que l’appareil est en bon
état de fonctionnement.
21. Chariots et socles. Les appareils doivent être utilisés uniquement avec des chariots
ou des socles recommandés par le fabricant. Un appareil sur chariot doit être
déplacé avec soin. Des arrêts soudains, une poussée excessive ou une surface
inégale pourraient provoquer le renversement du chariot avec risque de blessures.
22. Ce produit n’est pas conçu pour utilisation extérieur.
LIMITES D’OPÉRATION
Polk Audio spécifie la gamme de puissance d’amplification recommandée pour chacun de ses haut-parleurs non amplifiés. Cette spécification est typiquement exprimée en watts par canal (par ex. 20-200
W/canal). Il est important de bien comprendre la signification de ces chiffres avant de choisir un amplificateur ou un récepteur pour vos haut-parleurs. Le premier chiffre indique la puissance nominale minimum
requise pour assurer une performance convenable dans une pièce normale. Le deuxième chiffre indique la
puissance nominale maximum admissible par vos haut-parleurs—ce chiffre ne doit pas être confondu
avec la spécification de «capacité de puissance» et n’implique pas que le haut-parleur peut soutenir cette
puissance de façon continue sans risque d’endommagement. Nous spécifions une gamme de puissance
d’amplification étendue parce que les fabricants de composants électroniques n’utilisent pas toujours la
même méthode pour déterminer la puissance admissible. En fait, les amplificateurs moins puissants de
qualité supérieure donnent un meilleur rendement que les amplificateurs plus puissants de qualité
inférieure.
L’automobile et les chevaux-vapeur sont une bonne analogie. Votre automobile a beaucoup plus de
chevaux-vapeur que ceux requis par son utilisation quotidienne, vous permettant probablement d’atteindre
les 190 km/h ou plus! Vous ne roulez pas pour autant à fond la caisse en tout temps (du moins nous l’espérons). Cependant, cette réserve de puissance vous permet de bien accélérer sur les rampes d’accès,
d’éviter les accidents et de doubler sécuritairement. C’est pour cette même raison que nous vous recommandons d’utiliser un amplificateur ou un récepteur d’une puissance nominale plus élevée que la capacité
de puissance spécifiée pour vos haut-parleurs. En effet, cette réserve de puissance leur permettra de
reproduire les crêtes sonores momentanées sans effort et sans distorsion,
assurant une gamme dynamique maximale et une performance optimale, même à très haut volume. Il est
quand même fortement déconseillé d’écouter votre chaîne audio «à fond la caisse» en tout temps.
Un haut-parleur peut être endommagé lorsqu’un amplificateur, quelle que soit sa puissance, est poussé au
delà de ses limites. L’amplificateur surchargé génère alors un niveau élevé de distorsion audible, le son
devenant rauque et éraillé. Si vous entendez de la distorsion, baissez le volume sinon vous
risquez d’endommager vos haut-parleurs. Un haut-parleur, quelle que soit sa capacité de puissance,
risque d’être endommagé lorsque l’amplificateur est poussé au delà de ses limites de distorsion.
RECUPERATION DU PRODUIT
Certaines lois ou certains règlements internationaux, nationaux et/ou région-aux pourraient s’appliquer à la récupération de ce produit. Pour plus d’infor-mation, communiquez
avec le revendeur de ce produit ou avec l’impor-tateur/distributeur de ce produit dans
votre pays. Vous trouverez la liste des importateurs/distri-buteurs des produits Polk
Audio sur le site www.polkaudio.com ou en communiquant avec Polk Audio: 5610
Metro Drive, Baltimore, Maryland 21215, USA—Tél.: +1 410 358-3600.
SERVICE OU ASSISTANCE TECHNIQUE
Si, après avoir suivi toutes les instructions, vous éprouvez des difficultés, vérifiez toutes vos connexions.
Si vous en concluez que le problème est relié au haut-parleur, communiquez avec votre revendeur Polk
Audio ou contactez le Service à la Clientèle de Polk Audio au 1-800-377-7655 (L-V, 9-18, HNE, Canada
et É.-U. seulement). À l’extérieur des É.-U. et du Canada, composez le 410-358-3600. Vous pouvez aussi
nous contacter par courriel à l’adresse: polkcs@polkaudio.com. Pour plus d’information—incluant des
chroniques pratiques, des FAQ et des manuels d’utilisation en ligne, visitez notre
site web primé: www.polkaudio.com/home.
INVENTAIRE
Chaque boîte de haut-parleur devrait contenir:
1. Une enceinte colonne TSi, deux enceintes d’étagère
ou une enceinte centrale
2. Un manuel TSi
3. Une carte d’enregistrement
4. Coussinets de caoutchouc autoadhésifs —
(8 pour les enceintes d’étagère ou 4 pour une enceinte centrale)
5. Gabarit pour installation murale (pour les enceintes d’étagère TSi100 seulement)
Note Importante: Si vous constatez des dommages ou l’absence de pièces, ou si votre enceinte
ne fonctionne pas, contactez le Service à la Clientèle de Polk Audio au 800-377-7655.
FRANÇAISPolk Audio Customer Service: 1-800-377-7655 (Outside US & Canada: 410-358-3600) Monday-Friday, 9:00 AM-6:00 PM EST, polkcs@polkaudio.com 5
INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD
Este producto ha sido diseñado y fabricado para satisfacer estrictas normas de calidad
y seguridad. Sin embargo, hay ciertas precauciones de operación e instalación que usted
debe tener en cuenta en particular.
1. Lea las instrucciones. Todas las instrucciones de seguridad y operación deben leerse
antes de operar el sistema.
2. Guarde las instrucciones. Las instrucciones de seguridad y operación deben guardarse
para poder consultarlas en el futuro.
3. Respete las advertencias. Todas las advertencias escritas en los aparatos y en las
instrucciones de operación deben respetarse.
4. Siga las instrucciones. Todas las instrucciones de operación y uso deben seguirse.
5. Limpieza. Antes de limpiar el aparato, desenchúfelo del tomacorriente. No use
limpiadores líquidos ni en aerosol. Limpie el producto con un paño húmedo.
6. Agregados. No utilice agregados que el fabricante del producto no haya
recomendado, porque pueden causar peligros.
7. Agua y humedad. No use el aparato cerca del agua; por ejemplo, cerca de una bañera,
lavabo, fregadero de cocina o lavandería, en un subterráneo húmedo, ni cerca de una
piscina o lugares similares.
8. Accesorios. No coloque el aparato en carritos, pedestales, trípodes, soportes o mesas
inestables. El producto de audio/video puede caerse y causar lesiones graves a niños o
adultos y daños graves al producto. Use el aparato solamente con el carrito, pedestal,
trípode, soporte o mesa recomendado por el fabricante o vendido con el aparato. Todo
montaje del aparato se debe hacer siguiendo las instrucciones del fabricante y con los
accesorios de montaje recomendados por el fabricante.
9. Ventilación. Las ranuras y aberturas de la caja son para ventilar el aparato, asegurar
su funcionamiento confiable y evitar que se sobrecaliente; por lo tanto, no se deben
ni bloquear ni cubrir. Las aberturas no se deben bloquear nunca poniendo el aparato
en una cama, un sofá, una alfombra u otra superficie similar. Este producto no se debe
colocar nunca sobre un radiador o una rejilla de calefacción. Este producto no se debe
instalar en una estructura empotrada, tal como una estantería o un librero, a menos
que se le dé ventilación apropiada o se respeten las instrucciones del fabricante.
10. Fuentes de alimentación. Este producto debe funcionar conectado exclusivamente a
una fuente de alimentación del tipo indicado en sus etiquetas. Si no está seguro del
tipo de fuente de alimentación de su casa, consulte al distribuidor de aparatos o a la
compañía local de electricidad.
11. (Sólo América del Norte) Conexión a tierra o polarización. Este producto viene equipado
con enchufes de línea de alimentación de corriente alterna polarizados (una pata más
ancha que la otra). Como medida de seguridad, este enchufe entra en el tomacorriente
de una manera solamente. Si no puede insertar completamente el enchufe, déle vuelta.
Si aun así no entra, consulte a un electricista para que cambie el tomacorriente obsoleto. No anule la seguridad implícita en el enchufe polarizado.
12. Protección del cordón de alimentación. Encamine el cordón de alimentación de manera
que sea poco probable que sea pisado o aplastado por objetos que se le coloquen
encima o se le apoyen, en particular cerca del enchufe, cerca del tomacorriente y
en el punto en que el cordón sale del aparato.
13. Rayos. Para aumentar la protección de este producto de audio/video durante una
tormenta eléctrica, o cuando se deje solo o no se use durante largos períodos de
tiempo, desenchúfelo del tomacorriente y desconecte la antena o el sistema de cable.
Esto evitará daños al producto causados por rayos o subidas de voltaje.
14. Líneas de alta tensión. El sistema de antena exterior no debe colocarse cerca de líneas
de alta tensión suspendidas u otros circuitos de alimentación o luz eléctrica, ni donde
al caer pueda hacer contacto con tales líneas o circuitos de alimentación. Cuando
instale un sistema de antena externa, debe tener sumo cuidado de evitar tocar tales
circuitos o líneas de alta tensión, pues tal contacto puede ser mortal.
15. Sobrecarga. No sobrecargue los tomacorrientes ni las extensiones, pues esto puede
dar como resultado un peligro de incendio o descarga eléctrica.
16. Entrada de objetos y líquidos. Nunca meta objetos de ningún tipo en este producto a
través de las aberturas, pues pueden hacer contacto con puntos de voltajes peligrosos
o hacer cortocircuitos que podrían causar un incendio o una descarga eléctrica. Nunca
derrame líquidos de ningún tipo sobre este producto de audio/video.
17. Servicio. No intente hacerle servicio a este producto usted mismo, pues abrirlo o
quitarle las cubiertas puede exponerlo a usted a voltajes peligrosos u otros peligros.
Encargue todo servicio al personal de servicio calificado.
18. Daños que requieren servicio. Desenchufe el producto y encargue el servicio al personal
de servicio calificado cuando:
a. Se haya dañado el enchufe o el cordón de alimentación.
b. Hayan caído líquidos u objetos dentro del aparato.
c. El producto haya sido expuesto a la lluvia o a la humedad.
d. El producto haya dejado de funcionar normalmente a pesar de que se hayan seguido
las instrucciones. Ajuste sólo los controles mencionados en las instrucciones de
operación, pues ajustar incorrectamente otros controles puede causar daños y, a
menudo, restablecer el funcionamiento normal del producto requerirá un extenso
trabajo técnico calificado.
e. El producto se haya dejado caer o la caja haya sido dañada.
f. El producto manifieste un cambio notable de rendimiento; esto indica
la necesidad de servicio.
19. Piezas de repuesto. Cuando se requieran piezas de repuesto, asegúrese de que
el técnico de servicio haya utilizado las piezas de repuesto especificadas por el
fabricante o que las piezas tengan las mismas características que la pieza original.
Las sustituciones no autorizadas pueden dar como resultado un incendio, una
descarga eléctrica u otros peligros.
20. Revisión de seguridad. Al terminar cualquier servicio o reparación de este producto,
pídale al técnico de servicio que lleve a cabo verificaciones de seguridad para
determinar que el producto esté en buenas condiciones de funcionamiento.
21. Carritos y pedestales. El aparato se debe utilizar solamente con el carrito o pedestal
recomendado por el fabricante. Las combinaciones de aparato y carrito deben
moverse cuidadosamente. Parar repentinamente, ejercer demasiada fuerza y pasar
por superficies desniveladas puede hacer que la combinación de aparato y carrito
se vuelque. Tenga cuidado cuando mueva la combinación de aparato y carrito para
evitar lesiones causadas por volcamiento.
22. Este producto no es para usar al aire libre.
LÍES SEGUROS DE OPERACIÓN
Polk Audio especifica el intervalo de amplificación recomendado para sus altavoces pasivos (no amplificados). Por lo general, la especificación se expresa como un cierto intervalo de potencia, tal como 20 a 200
W (por canal). Es importante entender lo que estos números significan cuando se escoge un receptor o un
amplificador para los altavoces Polk Audio. El número inferior indica la potencia nominal continua mínima
que produce un rendimiento aceptable en un ambiente acústico normal. El número superior indica la
potencia máxima por canal que se debe dar a los altavoces Polk Audio. Este número no debe confundirse
con la “administración de potencia” y no implica que el altavoz administre indefinidamente con seguridad
tal potencia máxima. Especificamos una amplia gama de valores nominales de potencia porque no todos
los fabricantes de aparatos electrónicos utilizan el mismo método para establecer el valor nominal de
potencia. De hecho, los amplificadores de alta calidad con valor nominal de potencia bajo suenan mejor y
más fuerte que las unidades de baja calidad con valor nominal de potencia alto.
La potencia de los automóviles en caballos de fuerza es una buena analogía. Su automóvil probablemente
tiene muchos más caballos de fuerza de los que necesita para ir diariamente al trabajo y es capaz de
desplazarse a velocidades de más de 120 mph (190 kph). Tener la potencia adicional es bueno para la
aceleración en las rampas de entrada a las autopistas y para evitar el peligro, pero no significa que sea
aconsejable conducir el automóvil por la carretera a toda velocidad y potencia durante largos períodos de
tiempo. No lo es. Si lo duda, pregúntele a su mecánico local o a la policía. De manera similar, recomendamos que use amplificadores y receptores con valor de potencia nominal mayor que los límites de
administración de potencia de nuestros altavoces, porque tener potencia adicional para máximos de poca
duración conduce a mejor calidad de sonido, máxima gama dinámica y salida de alto volumen sin esfuerzo. Pero le recomendamos enfáticamente que no aplique a diario a sus altavoces la potencia máxima de
su amplificador o receptor.
Los altavoces se pueden dañar cuando se hace funcionar un amplificador, independientemente de su
potencia en vatios, a más volumen del que puede producir con claridad. El funcionamiento a este volumen
puede producir altos niveles de distorsión audible originada en el amplificador, lo cual puede agregar un
sonido discordante y arenoso a lo que se está escuchando. Si oye distorsión, baje el volumen o
arriésguese a dañar los altavoces. Casi cualquier altavoz se puede dañar, independientemente de su
valor nominal de potencia, si se sube el volumen del amplificador o el receptor hasta la distorsión y más.
ELIMINACION DEL PRODUCTO
Es posible que haya leyes y/o reglamentos internacionales, nacionales y/o locales sobre
la eliminación de este producto. Para obtener información más detallada, comuníquese
con el distribuidor a quien le compró este producto de Polk Audio o al importador o distribuidor en su país. Puede obtener una lista de importadores y distri-buidores de Polk
Audio en el sitio Web de Polk Audio, www.polkaudio.com, o comuni-cándose con Polk
Audio: 5601 Metro Drive, Baltimore, Maryland 21215, USA. Teléfono: +1 410 358-3600.
ASISTENCIA O SERVICIO TECNICO
Si después de seguir las instrucciones de conexión usted sigue teniendo dificultades, vuelva a comprobar
todas las conexiones de cables. Si logra aislar el problema en el altavoz, comuníquese con el distribuidor
autorizado de Polk Audio donde compró el altavoz o con el Servicio al Cliente de Polk Audio llamando
al 800-377-7655 (de lunes a viernes de 9 a.m. a 6 p.m., hora estándar del Este, sólo en EE.UU.) o por
correo electrónico a polkcs@polkaudio.com. Fuera de los EE.UU., llame al 410-358-3600. Hay artículos
sobre cómo hacer las cosas en audio, preguntas frecuentes y manuales en línea en nuestro galardonado
sitio Web www.polkaudio.com/home.
HAGA INVENTARIO
Dentro de cada contenedor de altavoz, debe haber lo siguiente:
1. Un altavoz TSi de piso, dos altavoces de estantería o un altavoz de canal central
2. Un manual TSi
3. Una tarjeta de registro
4. Almohadillas adhesivas de goma (8 para altavoces de estantería o 4 para
altavoces de canal central)
5. Una plantilla de montaje en la pared (sólo altavoces de estantería TSi100)
Nota importante: Si alguna pieza falta o está dañada, o si el altavoz no funciona, comuníquese
inmediatamente con Servicios de Apoyo al Cliente, llamando al 800-377-7655.
ESPAÑOL6 For more information visit our website at www.polkaudio.com
WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSHINWEISE
Dieses Produkt wurde nach den strengsten Qualitäts- und Sicherheitsnormen entworfen und
hergestellt. Sie sollten aber bei der Installation und beim Betrieb einige Sicherheitshinweise
beachten.
1. Lesen Sie die Anleitung durch. Sie sollten vor Inbetriebnahme des Systems alle
Sicherheits- und Betriebshinweise lesen.
2. Heben Sie die Anleitung auf. Sie sollten die Sicherheits- und Betriebshinweise
aufheben, um in Zukunft auf sie zugreifen zu können.
3. Beachten Sie die Warnungen. Alle Warnungen an den Geräten und in den
Bedienungsanleitungen müssen befolgt werden.
4. Folgen Sie den Anweisungen. Alle Betriebsanweisungen müssen befolgt werden.
5. Reinigung. Ziehen Sie vor Reinigung des Geräts den Stecker aus der Steckdose.
Verwenden Sie keine flüssigen Reinigungsmittel oder Sprays. Benutzen Sie zur
Reinigung ein feuchtes Tuch.
6. Zubehör. Verwenden Sie ausschließlich vom Hersteller empfohlenes Zubehör, da
anderes Zubehör Gefahren hervorrufen könnte.
7. Wasser und Feuchtigkeit. Verwenden Sie diese Geräte nicht in der Nähe von Wasser –
beispielsweise nahe einer Badewanne, einem Waschbecken, einem Spülbecken,
einem Waschkessel, in einem feuchten Keller, in der Nähe eines Swimmingpools usw.
8. Zubehör. Stellen Sie diese Geräte nicht auf einen Wagen, einen Ständer, ein Stativ,
eine Halterung oder einen Tisch, wenn diese nicht stabil sind. Die Audio-/VideoProdukte könnten sonst herunterfallen und bei Kindern oder Erwachsenen schwere
Verletzungen verursachen sowie die Produkte schwer beschädigen. Verwenden Sie
ausschließlich Wagen, Ständer, Stative, Halterungen oder Tische, die vom Hersteller
empfohlen oder mit den Geräten verkauft wurden. Die Befestigung der Geräte sollte
entspechend den Herstelleranweisungen erfolgen und es müssen vom Hersteller
empfohlene Befestigungsteile verwendet werden.
9. Lüftung. Die Schlitze und Öffnungen am Gehäuse dienen der Lüftung und sichern den
zuverlässigen Betrieb der Geräte und schützen sie vor Überhitzung. Deshalb dürfen
diese Öffnungen nicht blockiert oder verdeckt werden. Man darf diese Öffnungen nie
dadurch blockieren, dass man die Produkte auf ein Bett, ein Sofa, einen Teppich oder
eine ähnliche Oberfläche stellt. Dieses Produkt sollte nie in der Nähe von Heizkörpern
oder Warmlufteintrittsöffnungen aufgestellt werden. Dieses Produkt sollte nie in ein
Bücherregal oder ein Rack eingebaut werden, es sei denn, es wurde für ausreichende
Lüftung gesorgt oder die Herstelleranweisungen wurden befolgt.
10. Stromversorgung. Dieses Produkt darf nur mit der auf den Etiketten angegebenen
Stromversorgung betrieben werden. Wenn Sie Fragen über die Stromversorgung in
Ihrem Heim haben, wenden Sie sich bitte an einen Fachhändler oder das örtliche
Stromversorgungsunternehmen.
11. Erdung oder Polarisierung (nur für Nordamerika). Dieses Produkt verfügt über polarisierte
Wechselstrom-Stecker (eine Klinke ist dicker als die andere). Dieser Stecker passt nur
auf eine Weise in die Steckdose. Dies stellt eine Sicherheitsfunktion dar. Wenn Sie den
Stecker nicht voll einstecken können, sollten Sie ihn umdrehen. Wenn der Stecker
immer noch nicht passt, sollten Sie die veraltete Steckdose durch einen Elektriker
ersetzen lassen. Sie sollten die Sicherheitsfunktion des polarisierten Steckers nicht
umgehen.
12. Schutz des Netzkabels. Das Netzkabel sollte so verlegt werden, dass es weder belastet
noch durch darauf oder dagegen platzierte Objekte geknickt wird, vor allem bei
Steckern, Zusatzsteckdosen und beim Ausgang aus dem Gerät.
13. Blitzschutz. Um dieses Audio-/Videoprodukt während eines Gewitters oder längerer
Perioden zu schützen, in denen es unbeaufsichtigt ist und nicht benutzt wird, sollten Sie
den Stecker herausziehen und das Antennen- oder Kabelsystem trennen. Dies verhindert
durch Blitzschlag und Überspannungen verursachte Schäden am Produkt.
14. Stromleitungen. Ein Außenantennensystem sollte sich nicht in der Nähe von
Stromleitungen oder anderen Stromkabeln befinden, oder an Stellen, von denen es auf
solche Stromquellen fallen könnte. Bei der Installation einer Außenantenne sollte man
extrem vorsichtig sein, keine Stromleitungen oder Stromkreise zu berühren, da dies
tödliche Folgen haben könnte.
15. Überlastung. Überlasten Sie Steckdosen und Verlängerungskabel nicht, da dies zu Feuer
oder Stromschlag führen könnte.
16. Eindringen von Objekten oder Flüssigkeiten. Schieben Sie nie Objekte durch Öffnungen
in das Produkt, da diese unter Spannung stehende Teile berühren oder Kurzschlüsse
erzeugen könnten, die zu Feuer oder Stromschlag führen. Lassen Sie nie irgendwelche
Flüssigkeiten in dieses Audio-/Videoprodukt eindringen.
17. Wartung. Versuchen Sie nicht, dieses Produkt selbst zu warten, da Sie nach dem Öffnen
und Entfernen der Abdeckungen gefährlichen Spannungen und anderen Gefahren
ausgesetzt wären. Lassen Sie alle Wartungen von geschulten Kundendiensttechnikern
durchführen.
18. Schäden, die eine Wartung erfordern. Trennen Sie das Produkt vom Stromnetz und
lassen Sie unter folgenden Bedingungen eine Wartung von geschulten
Kundendiensttechnikern durchführen:
a. Wenn das Netzkabel oder der Netzstecker beschädigt ist.
b. Wenn Flüssigkeit in das Produkt eingedrungen ist oder Objekte hineingefallen sind.
c. Wenn das Produkt Regen oder Feuchtigkeit ausgesetzt war.
d. Wenn das Produkt nicht richtig funktioniert, obwohl Sie der Betriebsanleitung folgen.
Stellen Sie nur die von der Betriebsanleitung behandelten Regler ein, da eine
Fehleinstellung anderer Regler zu Schäden führen kann und dann oft umfangreiche
Reparaturen durch einen Kundendiensttechniker nötig werden.
e. Wenn das Produkt fallengelassen oder das Gehäuse beschädigt wurde.
f. Wenn sich die Leistung des Produkts deutlich ändert – deutet dies daraufhin, dass
eine Wartung nötig ist.
19. Ersatzteile. Wenn Ersatzteile benötigt werden, müssen Sie sicherstellen, dass der
Kundendiensttechniker vom Hersteller empfohlene oder gleichwertige Ersatzteile
verwendet. Ein unzulässiger Austausch kann zu Feuer, Stromschlag oder anderen
Gefährdungen führen.
20. Sicherheitsüberprüfung. Nach Abschluss einer Wartung oder Reparatur dieses Produkts
sollten Sie den Kundendiensttechniker bitten, eine Sicherheitsüberprüfung
durchzuführen, um festzustellen, ob das Produkt betriebsbereit ist.
21. Wagen und Ständer. Das Gerät sollte nur mit einem vom Hersteller empfohlenen
Wagen oder Ständer verwendet werden. Gerät und Wagen sollten immer vorsichtig
bewegt werden. Schnelles Anhalten, zuviel Kraftanwendung und unebene Oberflächen können dazu führen, dass Gerät und Wagen umfallen. Beim Schieben des
Wagens/Geräts sollten Sie vorsichtig sein, damit Wagen und Gerät nicht umkippen
und Verletzungen verursachen.
22. Dieses Produkt ist nicht für den Einsatz im Freien vorgesehen.
SICHERE BETRIEBSGRENZWERTE
Polk Audio legt für jeden seiner passiven (nicht verstärkten) Lautsprecher einen empfohlenen Verstärkungsbereich fest. Normalerweise wird dieser Wert als Leistungsbereich ausgedrückt, wie etwa 20-
200 W (pro Kanal). Es ist wichtig, dass Sie bei der Auswahl eines Receivers oder Verstärkers für Ihre PolkLautsprecher verstehen, was diese Zahlen bedeuten. Die niedrigere Zahl ist die niedrigste Dauerleistung,
die in einer typischen Hörumgebung einen akzeptablen Sound bietet. Die höhere Zahl verweist auf die
höchste Leistung (pro Kanal), die mit Ihren Polk-Lautsprechern verwendet werden sollte. Diese Zahl sollte
nicht mit der Belastbarkeit verwechselt werden und sagt nicht aus, dass der Lautsprecher diese Leistung
langfristig verkraften kann. Wir geben einen breiten Belastungsbereich an, da nicht alle Elektronikhersteller die gleichen Messmethoden verwenden. Hochwertige Verstärker mit niedriger Belastbarkeit klingen
sogar besser und lauter als minderwertige Verstärker mit hoher Belastbarkeit.
Die PS-Leistung eines Autos wäre ein guter Vergleich. Ihr Auto hat wahrscheinlich viel mehr PS als für die
tägliche Fahrt zur Arbeit nötig ist und könnte mehr als 190 km/h erreichen. Diese Leistung ist für die
Beschleunigung bei der Einfahrt in die Autobahn und bei der Vermeidung von Gefahrensituationen nützlich, aber es ist nicht empfehlenswert, längere Zeit mit Volltempo zu fahren. Wirklich. Fragen Sie einfach
Ihren Automechaniker, wenn Sie das nicht glauben. Wir empfehlen analog dazu Verstärker und Receiver
mit einer Leistung, die über der Belastbarkeit unserer Lautsprecher liegt, da die für kurze Leistungsspitzen
verfügbare zusätzliche Leistung eine bessere Klangqualität, einen maximalen Dynamikbereich und eine
mühelose Wiedergabe hoher Lautstärken ermöglicht. Aber Sie sollten auf keinen Fall die volle Leistung
Ihres Verstärkers oder Receivers für den Dauerbetrieb verwenden.
Wenn ein Verstärker, ungeachtet seiner Leistung in Watt, lautere Musik abspielt, als er ohne Verzerrung
produzieren kann, kann dies die Lautsprecher beschädigen. Bei einem Betrieb mit dieser Lautstärke kann
der Verstärker sehr hohe, hörbare Verzerrungen erzeugen, welche die Musik rau und grob klingen lassen
können. Wenn Sie Verzerrungen hören, sollten Sie die Lautstärke reduzieren, damit Ihre Lautsprecher nicht beschädigt werden. Sie können praktisch jeden Lautsprecher (ungeachtet der Belastbarkeit) beschädigen, wenn Sie einen Verstärker bis zu dem Punkt aufdrehen,
wo Verzerrungen eintreten, oder noch darüber.
ENTSORGUNG
Die Entsorgung dieses Produkts kann bestimmten internation-alen, nationalen und/oder
örtlichen Gesetzen und/oder Vorschriften unterliegen. Detaillierte Informationen hierzu
erhalten Sie von dem Fachhändler, bei dem Sie dieses Produkt gekauft haben, oder vom
Polk Audio-Importeur/Vertrieb in Ihrem Land. Eine Liste von Importeuren/ Vertriebsfirmen
für Polk Audio erhalten Sie auf der Polk Audio-Website www.polkaudio.com oder von
Polk Audio, 5601 Metro Drive, Baltimore, Maryland 21215, USA –
Telefon: +1 410 358-3600.
TECHNISCHER KUNDENDIENST UND SERVICE
Wenn Sie Probleme haben, nachdem Sie den Installationsanweisungen gefolgt sind, sollten Sie alle
Kabelverbindungen nochmals prüfen. Wenn Sie zu dem Schluss kommen, dass das Problem am Lautsprecher liegt, kontak-tieren Sie bitte den autorisierten Polk Audio-Händler, bei dem Sie den Lautsprecher
gekauft haben, oder rufen den Polk Audio-Kundendienst unter 800-377-7655 (M-F, 9-18 Uhr USOstküstenzeit, nur USA) an oder senden eine E-Mail an polkcs@polkaudio.com. Von außerhalb der
USA rufen Sie +1 410-358-3600 an.Detaillierte Anweisungen, Antworten auf häufig gestellte Fragen
und Online-Handbücher finden Sie auf der preisgekrönten Website www.polkaudio.com/home.
INHALT
In jeder Lautsprecherpackung sollten Sie Folgendes finden:
1. Ein TSi-Standlautsprecher, zwei Regallautsprecher
oder ein Center-Kanal-Lautsprecher
2. TSi-Betriebsanleitung
3. Registrierungskarte
4. Selbstklebenden Gummifüßchen –
(8 für Regallautsprecher oder 4 für Center-Kanal-Lautsprecher)
5. Wandbefestigungsschablone (nur für TSi100-Regallautsprecher)
Wichtiger Hinweis: Falls Sie Schäden oder fehlende Teile bemerken, oder Ihr Lautsprecher nicht
funktioniert, kontaktieren Sie bitte sofort den Polk Audio-Kundendienst unter +800-377-7655 (nur USA
und Kanada, ansonsten +410-358-3600).
DEUTSCHPolk Audio Customer Service: 1-800-377-7655 (Outside US & Canada: 410-358-3600) Monday-Friday, 9:00 AM-6:00 PM EST, polkcs@polkaudio.com 7
ISTRUZIONI IMPORTANTI DI SICUREZZA
Questo prodotto è stato progettato e costruito in conformità a rigorosi standard di qualità
e sicurezza; tuttavia occorre tenere presenti alcune precauzioni relative all’installazione
e all’uso.
1. Prima di mettere in funzione l’impianto, leggere per intero le istruzioni per l’uso e la
sicurezza.
2. Conservare le istruzioni per l’uso e la sicurezza.
3. Attenersi alle avvertenze apposte all’apparecchio e a quelle riportate nelle istruzioni
per l’uso.
4. Seguire scrupolosamente tutte le istr
5. Pulizia: usare un panno umido per pulire l’apparecchio; prima di pulirlo scollegarlo
dalla presa di corrente. Non usare né detergenti liquidi né aerosol.
6. Accessori: non utilizzare accessori non raccomandati dal produttore, in quanto
possono creare pericoli.
7. Acqua e umidità: non usare l’apparecchio vicino all’acqua, ad esempio presso vasche
da bagno, catini, lavandini, piscine, scantinati bagnati o luoghi simili.
8. Accessori: non collocare l’apparecchio su carrelli, sostegni, treppiedi, staffe, tavoli
che non ne assicurino la stabilità; se cade, un apparecchio audio o video può causare
gravi lesioni personali o danni alle cose. Usare solo una base raccomandata dal
produttore o venduta insieme con l’apparecchio. Per qualsiasi operazione di fissaggio
si devono seguire le istruzioni del produttore e adoperare gli accessori raccomandati.
9. Ventilazione: l’apparecchio ha varie feritoie per la ventilazione che ne assicurano il
funzionamento affidabile prevenendo il surriscaldamento dei componenti e che non
devono essere né coperte né ostruite, ad esempio posandolo su un letto, un divano,
un tappeto o superfici simili. L’apparecchio non va mai messo vicino a un radiatore o
a una bocchetta di riscaldamento né collocato in una struttura già predisposta, come
uno scaffale o un rack, a meno che non si garantisca una ventilazione adeguata e si
seguano le istruzioni del produttore.
10. Alimentazione: l’apparecchio deve essere alimentato solo alla tensione e corrente
indicate sulla targa dati. Se non si è sicuri dei valori della tensione e corrente erogate
dalle prese di corrente, consultare il rivenditore o la società dell’energia elettrica.
11. Messa a terra o polarizzazione: l’apparecchio è dotato di una spina polarizzata (ossia
con uno spinotto più largo dell’altro) per corrente alternata, che può essere inserita
nella presa di corrente in un solo modo a scopo di sicurezza. Se è impossibile inserire
bene la spina, girarla; se ancora risulta impossibile inserirla, rivolgersi a un elettricista
per fare sostituire la presa di corrente obsoleta. Non annullare la caratteristica di
sicurezza della spina.
12. Cavo di alimentazione: collocarlo in modo da ridurre quanto più possibile il rischio che
faccia inciampare o sia schiacciato da altri oggetti; prestare particolare attenzione al
punto di entrata della spina nella presa di corrente e al punto di connessione tra il
cavo e l’apparecchio.
13. Fulmini: per ulteriore protezione durante i temporali o se si lascia l’apparecchio
incustodito e inutilizzato per lunghi periodi, scollegarlo dalla presa di corrente e
scollegare l’antenna o il cavo dell’impianto. Si prevengono così danni causati da
fulmini e sovracorrenti nella rete di alimentazione.
14. Linee elettriche: non collocare un impianto dotato di antenna esterna presso linee
elettriche aeree o altri circuiti di alimentazione o illuminazione oppure in un punto da
cui potrebbe andare a contatto di tali linee o circuiti. Quando si installa un impianto
con antenna esterna occorre fare estrema attenzione a evitare di toccare tali linee
o circuiti, in quanto il contatto può causare la morte.
15. Sovraccarico: per prevenire incendi e scosse elettriche, non sovraccaricare prese di
corrente o prolunghe.
16. Entrata di oggetti e liquidi: non inserire mai oggetti di nessun tipo nell’apparecchio
attraverso le feritoie, perché potrebbero toccare punti ad alta tensione o cortocircuitare
componenti, causando incendio o scosse elettriche. Evitare di versare liquidi di qualsiasi
tipo sull’apparecchio.
17. Manutenzione: non cercare di eseguire la manutenzione di questo prodotto, in quanto
aprendo o rimuovendo le coperture si può essere esposti ad alte tensioni o altri pericoli.
Rivolgersi sempre a personale qualificato.
18. Danni che richiedono un intervento: scollegare l’apparecchio dalla presa di corrente e
rivolgersi a personale qualificato nei seguenti casi.
a. Danni alla spina o al cavo di alimentazione.
b. Si è versato un liquido sull’apparecchio o è caduto un oggetto al suo interno.
c. L’apparecchio è rimasto esposto alla pioggia o all’acqua.
d. L’apparecchio non funziona normalmente quando si seguono le istruzioni per l’uso.
Agire solo sui comandi descritti nelle istruzioni, in quanto un uso improprio di altri
comandi potrebbe causare danni e spesso richiedere un intervento significativo da parte
di un tecnico qualificato.
e. L’apparecchio è caduto o l’involucro è stato danneggiato.
f. L’apparecchio presenta una variazione notevole rispetto alle prestazioni previste;
ciò indica la necessità di una manutenzione.
19. Ricambi: accertarsi che il tecnico addetto alla manutenzione usi ricambi specificati dal
produttore o aventi le stesse caratteristiche dei componenti originali. Una sostituzione
non autorizzata può causare incendio, scosse elettriche o altri pericoli.
20. Verifica di sicurezza: una volta completate eventuali operazioni di manutenzione o
riparazione, richiedere al tecnico addetto di eseguire le verifiche necessarie per
stabilire che l’apparecchio funzioni correttamente.
21. Carrelli e sostegni: l’apparecchio deve essere adoperato solo con un carrello o un
sostegno raccomandato dal produttore. Se l’apparecchio è collocato su un
carrello, il sistema va spostato con cautela; un arresto brusco, l’applicazione
di una forza eccessiva o una superficie irregolare possono farlo ribaltare e causare
lesioni personali.
22. Questo prodotto non è concepito per l’uso all’aperto.
LIMITI DI SICUREZZA IN RELAZIONE
AL FUNZIONAMENTO
Polk Audio specifica l’intervallo di amplificazione raccomandato per ciascuno dei suoi diffusori passivi (non
amplificati). In genere tale specifica viene espressa come un intervallo di potenza, ad esempio 20-200
watt (per canale). È importante capire il significato di questi valori quando si deve scegliere un ricevitore o
un amplificatore per un diffusore Polk. Il valore minimo indica il livello più basso di potenza continua che
assicura prestazioni accettabili in un tipico ambiente di ascolto, mentre il valore massimo indica il livello
più alto di potenza per canale che deve essere applicato con un diffusore Polk e non va confuso con la
“potenza nominale” né implica che al diffusore si possa applicare tale livello di potenza a lungo termine.
Polk Audio specifica un ampio intervallo di potenza in quanto non tutti i produttori di apparecchi elettronici
usano lo stesso metodo per specificare la potenza nominale; infatti, il suono di amplificatori di alta qualità
è migliore e più alto del suono di amplificatori di qualità inferiore, anche quando
questi ultimi hanno potenze nominali maggiori.
La potenza di un’automobile offre una buona analogia. Un’automobile può sviluppare una potenza di gran
lunga superiore a quella necessaria per il normale uso quotidiano in città e può raggiungere una velocità
superiore a 160 km/h. Poter disporre di questa potenza supplementare è utile quando si deve accelerare
su una rampa d'accesso di autostrada o per evitare un pericolo, ma ciò non significa che sia opportuno
viaggiare in autostrada alla massima potenza e velocità per lunghi periodi di tempo, come un meccanico o
la polizia stradale potrebbero subito confermare. Analogamente, è consigliabile adoperare amplificatori e
ricevitori con potenza nominale superiore a quella dei diffusori, in quanto poter disporre di una certa
potenza supplementare per picchi di breve durata consente di ottenere qualità migliore del suono, massima gamma dinamica e uscita senza problemi ad alto volume. Ma suggeriamo vivamente di non fare funzionare l’amplificatore o il ricevitore alla massima potenza per l’ascolto prolungato.
I diffusori possono danneggiarsi se l’amplificatore, indipendentemente dalla sua potenza nominale, viene
fatto funzionare a livelli di ascolto superiori a quelli generabili con nitidezza; i livelli molto alti e udibili
della distorsione che si genererebbe in queste condizioni nell’amplificatore potrebbero aggiungere ai suoni
tonalità stridenti. Se il suono è distorto, bisogna abbassare il volume per non rischiare di danneggiare i diffusori. Facendo funzionare un amplificatore oltre il punto di distorsione si può danneggiare
un diffusore indipendentemente dalla sua potenza nominale.
SMALTIMENTO DEL PRODOTTO
Seguire le norme internazionali, nazionali e locali per lo smal-timento di questo prodotto.
Per ulteriori informazioni, contattare il proprio rivenditore oppure l’importatore/distributore nel proprio Paese. Per ottenere un elenco di import-atori/distributori, visitare il sito
Web Polk Audio www.polkaudio.com oppure contattare Polk Audio all’indirizzo 5601
Metro Drive, Baltimore, Maryland 21215, USA -Telefono: +1 410 358-3600.
SERVIZIO DI ASSISTENZA
Se dopo aver seguito le istruzioni per il collegamento si hanno problemi, controllare di nuovo tutte le connessioni. Una volta isolato il problema al diffusore, contattare il rivenditore Polk Audio presso cui lo si è
acquistato o il centro di assistenza Polk Audio al numero 800-377-7655 (lunedì-venerdì, dalle 09.00
alle 18.00, fuso orario EST, solo negli Stati Uniti) o per e-mail all’indirizzo polkcs@polkaudio.com.
Fuori degli Stati Uniti chiamare il numero 001-410-358-3600. Per ulteriori informazioni, tra cui articoli
pratici sui sistemi audio, domande frequenti (FAQ) e manuali online, visitare il nostro sito Web
www.polkaudio.com/home.
CONTENUTO
La scatola di ciascun sistema deve contenere i seguenti componenti:
1. Un diffusore da pavimento TSi, due diffusori da scaffale e un diffusore
del canale centrale
2. Manuale del TSi
3. Scheda di registrazione
4. Piedini in gomma con striscia adesiva – (8 per i diffusori da scaffale
o 4 per il diffusore del canale centrale)
5. Dima per il fissaggio a parete (solo per i diffusori da scaffale TSi100)
Nota Bene: Se mancano componenti o si rilevano danni oppure se il diffusore non funziona,
contattare immediatamente il servizio clienti Polk Audio al numero 800-377-7655.
ITALIANO8 For more information visit our website at www.polkaudio.com
INSTRUÇÕES DE SEGURANÇA IMPORTANTES
Este produto foi projetado e fabricado para atender a rigorosos padrões de qualidade e
segurança. Entretanto, existem algumas precauções de instalação e operação específicas
que o usuário deve conhecer:
1. Leia a instruções. Todas as instruções de segurança e operação devem ser lidas antes
de usar o sistema.
2. Guarde as instruções. As instruções de segurança e operação devem ser guardadas
para consulta futura.
3. Fique atento aos avisos. Todos os avisos afixados aos aparelhos e presentes nas
instruções de operação devem ser observados.
4. Siga as instruções. Todas as instruções de operação e uso devem ser seguidas.
5. Limpeza. Desligue o aparelho da tomada elétrica antes de limpá-lo. Não use produtos
de limpeza líquidos nem aerossóis. Use um pano úmido para a limpeza.
6. Acessórios. Não use acessórios não recomendados pelo fabricante do produto,
pois podem colocar a segurança em risco.
7. Água e umidade. Não use estes aparelhos próximos de água – por exemplo, próximos
de uma banheira, lavabo, pia de cozinha ou tanque de lavar roupa, em um porão úmido
ou próximos de uma piscina ou locais semelhantes.
8. Bases de apoio. Não coloque estes aparelhos sobre carrinhos, pedestais, tripés,
suportes ou mesas instáveis. Os produtos podem cair, causando ferimentos graves
em crianças ou adultos, bem como ficar danificados. Use apenas com um carrinho,
pedestal, tripé, suporte ou mesa recomendado pelo fabricante ou vendido com os
aparelhos. Toda instalação deve ser feita segundo as instruções do fabricante e
deve-se usar os acessórios de instalação recomendados pelo fabricante.
9. Ventilação. Existem ranhuras e aberturas nas caixas para ventilação para assegurar o
funcionamento confiável dos aparelhos e protegê-los contra superaquecimento. Estas
aberturas não devem ser bloqueadas nem cobertas. Os produtos nunca devem ser
colocados sobre uma cama, sofá, tapete ou superfícies semelhantes, pois as aberturas
podem ser bloqueadas. Este produto nunca deve ser colocado próximo de um radiador
ou saída de ar quente e não deve ser colocado em uma superfície embutida, como uma
estante ou prateleira, a não ser que haja ventilação adequada ou as instruções do
fabricante tenham sido observadas.
10. Fontes de alimentação. Este produto deve ser alimentado apenas pelo tipo de fonte de
alimentação identificada nas etiquetas de especificação. Se tiver dúvidas quanto ao tipo
de fonte de alimentação de sua residência, consulte o revendedor do aparelho ou a
companhia de energia elétrica local.
11. Aterramento ou polarização. Este produto está equipado com plugue polarizado para
linha de corrente alternada (um pino mais largo que o outro). Este plugue só se
encaixará na tomada elétrica em uma posição específica. Este é um recurso de
segurança. Se não conseguir inserir o plugue totalmente na tomada, tente na posição
inversa. Se o plugue não se encaixar, entre em contato com um eletricista para trocar
a tomada obsoleta. Não anule a função de segurança do plugue polarizado.
12. Proteção do cabo de alimentação. O cabo de alimentação elétrica deve ser posicionado
de maneira a evitar que seja pisoteado ou prensado por artigos que encostem nele.
Deve-se dar atenção especial ao plugue, à extremidade conectada à tomada e à
extremidade fixada ao aparelho.
13. Raios. Para maior proteção para este produto de áudio/vídeo durante uma tempestade
elétrica ou quando for deixado sozinho e não for usado por longos períodos de tempo,
desligue-o da tomada e desconecte a antena ou o sistema de cabo. Isto evitará que o
produto seja danificado devido a raios e sobretensão na corrente elétrica.
14. Cabos elétricos. Não se deve instalar um sistema de antena externa próximo a cabos
elétricos suspensos nem a outros tipos de circuitos de iluminação ou alimentação
elétrica, nem onde possa cair sobre tais cabos ou circuitos elétricos. Ao instalar um
sistema de antena externa, deve-se tomar muito cuidado para que não toque em tais
cabos ou circuitos elétricos, pois o contato com eles pode ser fatal.
15. Sobrecarga. Não sobrecarregue as tomadas e extensões elétricas, poisisso pode gerar
risco de incêndio ou choque elétrico.
16. Entrada de objetos e líquido. Nunca force nenhum tipo de objeto neste produto pelas
aberturas, pois podem tocar em pontos com níveis de tensão elétrica perigosos ou
curto-circuitar componentes e provocar incêndio ou causar choque elétrico. Nunca
derrame qualquer tipo de líquido sobre este produto de áudio/vídeo.
17. Manutenção. Nunca tente fazer a manutenção deste produto por conta própria, pois
poderá se expor a tensões perigosas ou a outros riscos ao abrir ou retirar as coberturas
da unidade. Toda manutenção deve ser realizada por pessoal de manutenção
qualificado.
18. Danos que exigem reparos. Desligue este produto da tomada elétrica e envie-o a
pessoal de assistência técnica qualificado para serviços de manutenção nos
seguintes casos:
a. Quando o cabo ou o plugue de alimentação elétrica estiver danificado.
b. Caso líquido tenha sido derramado ou objetos tenham caído dentro do produto.
c. Se o produto tiver sido exposto à chuva ou água.
a. Se o produto não funcionar normalmente ao seguir as instruções de operação. Ajuste
apenas os controles descritos nas instruções de operação, pois o ajuste incorreto de
outros controles pode causar danos e, em geral, requerer uma quantidade significativa
de trabalho por parte de um técnico qualificado para restaurar o funcionamento normal
do produto.
e. Se o produto sofreu uma queda ou seu invólucro tiver sido danificado.
f. Quando o produto apresentar uma mudança clara em desempenho—isto indica a
necessidade de serviços de manutenção.
19. Peças de reposição. Quando for necessário trocar alguma peça, certifique-se de que o
técnico use peças de reposição especificadas pelo fabricante ou que as peças tenham
as mesmas características que a peça original. A troca não autorizada pode resultar
em incêndio, choque elétrico ou outros riscos.
20. Verificação de segurança. Após a conclusão de qualquer serviço ou reparos feitos a
este produto, solicite ao técnico que faça testes de segurança para determinar se
está funcionando corretamente.
21. Carrinhos e pedestais. Os aparelhos só devem ser usados com um carrinho ou
pedestal recomendado pelo fabricante. Quando usados em conjunto, mova o
aparelho e o carrinho com cuidado. Paradas repentinas, excesso de força e superfí
cies desniveladas podem fazer com que o aparelho e o carrinho virem. Ao usar o
carrinho, tome cuidado ao movê-lo com o aparelho para evitar se ferir caso caia.
22. Este produto não se destina ao uso ao ar livre.
LIMITES SEGUROS DE OPERAÇÃO
A Polk Audio especifica a faixa de amplificação para cada uma de suas caixas acústicas passivas (não
amplificadas). Esta especificação é normalmente expressa como uma faixa de potência, como 20-200 W
(por canal). É importante entender o significado desses números ao escolher um receiver ou um amplificador para as caixas acústicas Polk. O número menor indica a potência nominal contínua mais baixa que
produzirá um desempenho aceitável em um ambiente de audição comum. O número maior indica a potência mais elevada por canal que deve ser usada com as caixas acústicas Polk. Este número não deve ser
confundido com uma especificação de “potência máxima permissível” e não significa que a caixa acústica
terá capacidade de reprodução a longo prazo desta quantidade de potência. Especificamos uma ampla
gama de classificações porque nem todos os fabricantes de equipamentos eletrônicos usam o mesmo
método de classificação de potência. Na verdade, amplificadores de alta qualidade com menor classificação têm reprodução sonora melhor e mais alta do que unidades de baixa qualidade com classificação
mais elevada.
A potência do motor de um automóvel é uma boa analogia. Seu carro provavelmente tem muito mais
potência do que precisa para suas viagens diárias e provavelmente pode atingir uma velocidade bem
acima de 190 km/h. Ter esta potência adicional é útil para acelerar ao entrar em uma rodovia e evitar
perigos (como fugir de zumbis que se alimentam de cérebros), mas não significa que é aconselhável dirigilo nas estradas à plena potência e máxima velocidade durante um período prolongado. Se estiver em
dúvida, pergunte à polícia rodoviária. De maneira semelhante, recomendamos o uso de amplificadores e
receivers com potência nominal acima dos limites da potência máxima permissível das caixas acústicas,
pois a potência extra disponível para picos de curta duração promove melhor qualidade de som, máxima
faixa dinâmica e repro-dução de alto volume natural. No entanto, recomendamos enfaticamente que não
use a potência plena do amplificador ou receiver para as reproduções sonoras cotidianas.
Os alto-falantes podem ser danificados quando um amplificador, independentemente de sua potência, for
operado a níveis de reprodução mais elevados do que consegue produzir. A operação nesse volume pode
resultar em níveis muito elevados de distorção audível a partir do amplificador, o que pode acrescentar
um som desarmonioso e estridente ao áudio sendo reproduzido. Se ouvir distorção, reduza o volume
ou as caixas acústicas poderão ser danificadas. É possível danificar praticamente qualquer caixa
acústica, independentemente de sua potência, se o amplificador for utilizado além do ponto de distorção.
DESCARTE DO PRODUTO
Algumas leis ou regula-mentos internacionais, nacionais e/ou locais podem reger os
procedimentos para descarte deste produto. Para obter informações mais detalhadas,
entre em contato com a loja onde adquiriu o produto ou com o importador ou distribuidor da Polk Audio em seu país. Para obter uma lista dos importadores/distribuidores
da Polk Audio, visite nosso website em www.polkaudio.com ou entre em contato com
a Polk Audio pelo endereço 5601 Metro Drive, Baltimore, Maryland 21215, USA—
Telefone: +1 410 358-3600.
AJUDA OU ASSISTENCIA TECNICA
Se tiver alguma dificuldade depois de seguir as orientações de instalação, verifique as conexões dos
cabos. Caso consiga isolar o problema ao alto-falante, entre em contato com o revendedor autorizado
Polk Audio onde adquiriu o produto ou com o Serviço de Atendimento ao Cliente da Polk Audio
ligando para 1-800-377-7655 (de segunda a sexta-feira, das 9h00 às 18h00 do horário de Nova York—
apenas nos EUA) ou por e-mail pelo endereço polkcs@polkaudio.com. Caso esteja em outro país,
ligue para 1-410-358-3600. Nosso website premiado contém informações mais detalhadas, incluindo
artigos informativos com procedimentos passo a passo, perguntas freqüentes e manuais eletrônicos.
Para obter essas e outras informações sobre áudio, visite www.polkaudio.com/home.
VERIFIQUE O CONTEUDO
Cada embalagem de caixa acústica contém:
1. Uma caixa acústica de piso TSi, duas caixas acústicas
para estante ou uma caixa acústica de canal central
2. Manual da TSi
3. Cartão de registro
4. Suportes de borracha com adesivo—(8 para caixas acústicas
de estante ou 4 para caixa acústica de canal central)
5. Modelo para instalação em parede (apenas para caixas
acústicas de estante TSi100)
Observação importante: Se algum componente estiver danificado ou faltando, ou se a caixa
acústica não funcionar, avise imediatamente os Serviços de Suporte ao Cliente da Polk Audio pelo
número 1-800-377-7655.
PORTUGUESPolk Audio Customer Service: 1-800-377-7655 (Outside US & Canada: 410-358-3600) Monday-Friday, 9:00 AM-6:00 PM EST, polkcs@polkaudio.com 9
FIGURE 2
(CS20 & CS10)
Most popular placement, above the TV screen. TSi Series
Center Speakers are magnetically shielded for safe placement
near TV or video monitors. If you notice video distortion or
discoloration, immediately move the speakers away from
the video source and call Polk Audio Customer Service
800-377-7655 (US and Canada) or polkcs@polkaudio.com.
La ubicación más común es encima de la pantalla del televisor.
Los altavoces centrales de la serie TSi tienen blindaje magnético para poder ubicarlos con seguridad cerca de monitores
de televisión o de video. Si nota que hay distorsión o descoloración de la imagen, aleje inmediatamente los altavoces de
la fuente de video y contactez le Service à la Clientèle de Polk
Audio au 800-377-7655. Vous pouvez aussi nous contacter par
courriel à l’adresse: polkcs@polkaudio.com.
La ubicación más común es sobre la pantalla del televisor.
Los altavoces de canal central de la serie TSi tienen blindaje
magnético para que se puedan colocar sin problema cerca
de monitores de televisión o video. Si nota distorsión o decoloración de la imagen, aleje inmediatamente los altavoces de
la fuente de video y comuníquese con el Servicio al Cliente de
Polk Audio llamando al 800-377-7655 (en EE.UU. y Canadá)
o enviando un mensaje por correo electrónico a
polkcs@polkaudio.com.
Populärste Platzierung über dem Fernsehbildschirm. Lautsprecher der TSi-Serie sind magnetisch abgeschirmt und
können problemlos in der Nähe von Fernsehern oder
Videomonitoren aufgestellt werden. Wenn Sie aber Bildverzerrungen oder Farbfehler bemerken, sollten Sie die Lautsprecher
sofort weiter weg von der Videoquelle aufstellen und den Kundendienst von Polk Audio kontaktieren (+800-377-7655 in den
USA und Kanada, oder polkcs@polkaudio.com).
La collocazione più comune è quella sopra il televisore. I diffusori per canale centrale TSi sono schermati magneticamente e
quindi possono essere collocati vicino a schermi televisivi o
monitor, ma se si osservano alterazioni del colore o distorsioni
dell’immagine, allontanarli immediatamente dall’apparecchio
video e contattare il servizio clienti Polk Audio al numero 800-
377-7655 (negli Stati Uniti o in Canada) o per e-mail:
polkcs@polkaudio.com.
A localização mais comum é em cima da tela de televisão.
As caixas acústicas centrais da série TSi são magneticamente
blindadas para que possam ser colocadas com segurança próximas de televisores ou monitores de vídeo. Se notar distorção
ou descoloração da imagem, afaste imediatamente as caixas
acústicas da origem do vídeo e ligue para o Serviço de Atendimento do Cliente da Polk Audio pelo número 1-800-377-7655
(EUA e Canadá) ou envie um e-mail para
polkcs@polkaudio.com.
OR
F GI URE 2
FIGURE 1
(TSi 500, TSi 400, TSi 300, TSi 200 & TSi 100)
Create an equilateral triangle between the speakers and the
listening position. Toe-in to your listening preference. If you
notice video distortion or discoloration, immediately move
the speakers away from the video source and call Polk Audio
Customer Service 800-377-7655 (US and Canada) or
polkcs@polkaudio.com.
Créez un triangle équilatéral entre les deux enceintes et
votre position d’écoute puis orientez les enceintes selon
vos préférences. Cependant, si vous constatez de la distorsion
ou décoloration vidéo, éloignez immédiatement l’enceinte
de l’écran et contactez le service à la clientèle de Polk Audio
au (800) 377-7655 (É.U. et Canada) ou par courriel:
polkcs@polkaudio.com.
Forme un triángulo equilátero con los altavoces y la posición
del oyente. Oriente los altavoces de acuerdo con su preferencia. Si nota distorsión o decoloración de la imagen, aleje
inmediatamente los altavoces de la fuente de video y
comuníquese con el Servicio al Cliente de Polk Audio
llamando al 800-377-7655 (en EE.UU. y Canadá) o enviando
un mensaje de correo electrónico a polkcs@polkaudio.com.
Bilden Sie ein gleichseitiges Dreieck aus den Lautsprechern
und Ihrer Hörposition. Drehen Sie die Lautsprecher wie
gewünscht nach innen. Wenn Sie aber Bildverzerrungen oder
Farbfehler bemerken, sollten Sie die Lautsprecher sofort weiter
weg von der Videoquelle aufstellen und den Kundendienst
von Polk Audio kontaktieren (+800-377-7655 in den USA und
Kanada, oder polkcs@polkaudio.com).
Disporre i diffusori in modo da formare un triangolo equilatero con il punto di ascolto e orientarli secondo le proprie
preferenze. Ma se si osservano alterazioni del colore o distorsioni dell’immagine, allontanarli immediatamente dall’apparecchio video e contattare il servizio clienti Polk Audio al numero
800-377-7655 (negli Stati Uniti o in Canada) o per e-mail:
polkcs@polkaudio.com.
Crie um triângulo equilátero entre as caixas acústicas e a
posição favorita do ouvinte. Ajuste a convergência segundo
sua preferência de reprodução sonora. Se notar distorção
ou descoloração da imagem, afaste imediatamente as caixas
acústicas da origem do vídeo e ligue para o Serviço de Atendimento do Cliente da Polk Audio pelo número 1-800-377-7655
(EUA e Canadá) ou envie um e-mail para
polkcs@polkaudio.com.
Left Speaker Right Speaker
F GI URE 110 For more information visit our website at www.polkaudio.com
FIGURE 4
(TSi 500, TSi 400 & TSi 300)
Bi-wiring, or using separate speaker wire connections for
high and low frequency sections. Remove flat metal jumpers.
Bi-câblage: l’utilisation de câbles distincts pour alimenter
séparément les composants des hautes et des basses
fréquences de vos enceintes. Retirez les cavaliers
métalliques plats.
Cableado doble. Conexiones de cable de altavoz separadas
para las secciones de frecuencias altas y frecuencias bajas.
Quite los puentes de metal planos.
Bi-wiring, oder die Verwendung separater Lautsprecherdrähte
für den Hoch- und Niederfrequenzbereich. Nehmen Sie
flache Metallschaltdrähte heraus.
Cablaggio doppio, ossia uso di connessioni separate per le
sezioni ad alta e a bassa frequenza. Rimuovere i ponticelli
metallici piatti.
Bi-cabeamento, ou uso de conexões de cabos de caixas acústicas separadas para as seções de alta e baixa freqüência.
Retire os jumpers de metal planos.
F GI URE 4
FIGURE 3
Using binding post connections.
Utilisation des bornes de connexion.
Uso de conexiones con tornillos de presión.
Verwendung von Anschlussklemmen.
Uso dei terminali cilindrici.
Uso de conexões roscadas.
To use Banana Plugs
(US only):
Carefully pry out the binding post plugs
to expose banana plug holes.
(This is for US owners only.)
Tighten hex nut.
Serrer l’écrou.
Enrosque la tuerca
de nuevo.
Sechskantmutter
festschrauben.
Serrare il dado esagonale.
Aperte a porca hexagonal.
Do not insert insulated
section of speaker wire.
Ne pas insérer la partie
isolée du fil du haut-parleur.
No inserte la parte aislada
del cable de altavoz.
Isolation des Lautsprecherdrahtes nicht in das Loch
schieben.
Non inserire nel foro
un tratto isolato di cavo.
Não insira a seção isolada
do cabo da caixa acústica.
F GI URE 3
Loosen hex nut.
Desserrer l’écrou.
Afloje la tuerca hexagonal.
Sechskantmutter lösen.
Allentare il dado esagonale.
Solte a porca hexagonal.
Insert speaker wire
through hole.
Insérer le fil du hautparleur dans le trou.
Inserte el cable de altavoz
a través del agujero.
Lautsprecherdraht durch
das Loch schieben.
Inserire nel foro il cavo
dell’altoparlante.
Insira o cabo da caixa
acústica através do orifício.Polk Audio Customer Service: 1-800-377-7655 (Outside US & Canada: 410-358-3600) Monday-Friday, 9:00 AM-6:00 PM EST, polkcs@polkaudio.com 11
FIGURE 6
(TSi 200, TSi 100, CS20 & CS10)
Basic Bookshelf and Center Speaker hookup diagram.
Set Bookshelf and Center Speakers to “small” in your
receiver’s Bass Management settings.
Diagramme de connexion des enceintes d’étagère et de
l’enceinte centrale. Pour les enceintes d’étagère et centrale,
du menu de «gestion des graves» de votre récepteur
(Bass Management settings), sélectionnez «small».
Diagrama básico de cableado de altavoces de estantería
y de canal central. En la administración de bajos del receptor,
fije en “pequeño” (small) la configuración de los altavoces
de estantería y de canal central.
Grundlegendes Anschlussdiagramm für Regal- und
Center-Lautsprecher. Stellen Sie den Regal- und CenterLautsprecher im Bass-Management-Menü Ihres Receivers
auf „Small“ (Klein) ein.
Schema di collegamento base dei diffusori da scaffale
e per canale centrale. Nella configurazione di gestione
dei bassi del ricevitore, impostare il suono dei diffusori
da scaffale e per canale centrale su “livello basso.”
Diagrama de conexão básica das caixas acústicas
para estante e central. Configure as caixas acústicas
para estante e central como “small” nos ajustes
de controle de graves do receiver.
F GI URE 6
FIGURE 5
(TSi 500, TSi 400 & TSi 300)
Bi-amping, or using separate amplifiers for the low and
high frequency sections of your speakers. Remove flat
metal jumpers.
Bi-amplification: l’utilisation d’amplis distincts pour
alimenter séparément les composants des hautes et des
basses fréquences de vos enceintes. Retirez les cavaliers
métalliques plats.
Amplificación doble. Amplificadores separados para
las secciones de frecuencias altas y frecuencias bajas
de los altavoces. Quite los puentes de metal planos.
bi-amping, oder die Verwendung von unterschiedlichen Verstärkern für niedrige und hohe Frequenzen der Lautsprecher.
Nehmen Sie flache Metallschaltdrähte heraus.
Amplificazione doppia, ossia uso di amplificatori separati per
le sezioni ad alta e a bassa frequenza dei diffusori. Rimuovere
i ponticelli metallici piatti.
Bi-amplificação, ou uso de amplificadores separados para
as seções de baixa e alta freqüência das caixas acústicas.
Retire os jumpers de metal planos.
F GI URE 5 F GI URE 7
FIGURE 7
(TSi 200, TSi 100, CS20 & CS10)
Adhesive-backed rubber pads: peel and stick in corners of
speaker enclosure.
Tampons autoadhésifs en caoutchouc: retirez la pellicule
protectrice et appliquez les tampons aux quatre coins des
enceintes.
Almohadillas adhesivas por ambos lados: quíteles el recubrimiento y péguelas en las esquinas de la caja de altavoz.
Selbstklebenden Gummifüßchen: abziehen und an den Ecken
des Lautsprechergehäuses befestigen.
Piedini in gomma con striscia adesiva: staccare la striscia
e attaccare i piedini agli angoli della cassa.
Suportes de borracha com adesivo: retire a proteção da superfície com adesivo e cole nos cantos da base da caixa acústica.
TSi 200 & TSi 100 CS20 & CS1012 For more information visit our website at www.polkaudio.com
FIGURE 9a & 9b
(TSi 100)
Use #10 panhead screw for wall stud (9a), use #10 wall
anchors with appropriate weight rating + screw for no wall
stud (9b). Leave screws 1/4"- 1/8" (4mm) exposed.
Utilisez des vis #10 à tête cylindrique pour fixation sur un
montant de mur (9a). Utilisez des ancres de fixation #10 à
portance appropriée avec vis conforme s’il n’y a pas de montant à l’endroit choisi (9b). Laissez les vis dépasser de 1/4"
(6mm) à 1/8" (4mm).
Utilice tornillos n° 10 con cabeza troncocónica en paredes
con parales internos (9a). Utilice tornillos y anclas de pared
n° 10 con valor nominal de peso adecuado en paredes sin
parales internos (9b). Deje que el tornillo sobresalga
de 1/4 de plg. a 1/8 de plg. (6mm a 4mm).
Verwenden Sie eine Flachkopfschraube (Nr. 10) für Wände mit
Ständerprofil (9a), bzw. Dübel und Schrauben ausreichender
Stärke für Wände ohne Ständerprofil (9b). Lassen Sie die
Schrauben 4 mm herausstehen.
Se la parete è di legno, usare viti a testa tronco-conica N.
10 (9a), altrimenti usare viti e tasselli N. 10 (9b) adatti al peso
da sostenere. Lasciare le viti da 1/4" - 1/8" (4 mm) esposte.
Use um parafuso de cabeça cilíndrica no 10 para viga de
parede (9a); use buchas de parede no 10 com classificação
de peso apropriada + parafuso para locais sem viga de
parede (9b). Deixe 4 mm dos parafusos expostos.
[a] [b]
F GI URE 9
FIGURE 10
(TSi 100)
Slide the speaker down on the screw head to catch the
keyhole slots.
Glissez l’enceinte sur les têtes de vis jusqu’à ce que
les encoches en trou de serrure s’enclenchent.
Deslice el altavoz sobre las cabezas de los tornillos hasta
engancharlos en las ranuras en forma de cerradura de
los altavoces.
Schieben Sie den Lautsprecher auf die Schraube herunter,
so dass diese in das Befestigungsloch einrastet.
Fare scorrere il diffusore verso il basso sulla testa delle viti,
in modo che queste si inseriscano nelle apposite scanalature.
Deslize a caixa acústica para baixo sobre as cabeças dos
parafusos para que se encaixem nas ranhuras em forma
de fechadura.
F GI URE 10
FIGURE 8
(TSi 100)
Use template to mark mounting location.
Utilisez le gabarit pour marquer le lieu de fixation.
Marque la ubicación de montaje con la plantilla.
Verwenden Sie die Schablone zur Markierung der Befestigungsstelle.
Usare la dima per contrassegnare il punto di fissaggio.
Use o modelo para marcar a localização da instalação.
F GI URE 8Polk Audio Customer Service: 1-800-377-7655 (Outside US & Canada: 410-358-3600) Monday-Friday, 9:00 AM-6:00 PM EST, polkcs@polkaudio.com 13
F GI URE 11
FIGURE 11
Clean cabinet with a damp cloth. Do not use furniture polish on veneer.
Nettoyez l’enceinte aven un chiffon humide. N’utilisez pas de poli à meubles.
Limpie la caja con un paño húmedo. No limpie la caja con lustramuebles.
Gehäuse mit feuchtem Tuch reinigen. Verwenden Sie keine Möbelpolitur
für das Gehäuse.
Pulire la cassa con un panno umido. Non utilizzare prodotti lucidanti per mobili.
Limpe a caixa com um pano úmido. Não use polidor de móveis na caixa.
SPECIFICATIONS
For performance specifications on the TSi Series Speakers, visit our website
www.polkaudio.com.
FICHE TECHNIQUE
Pour la fiche technique des enceintes TSi Series, visitez notre site web:
www.polkaudio.com.
ESPECIFICACIONES
Para ver especificaciones de rendimiento de los altavoces de la serie TSi, visite
nuestro sitio Web www.polkaudio.com.
DATEN
Sie finden die Leistungsdaten der TSi-Lautsprecherserie auf unserer Website:
www.polkaudio.com.
DATI TECHNICI
Per i dati tecnici dei diffusori TSi visitare il nostro sito web, www.polkaudio.com.
ESPECIFICAÇOES
Para obter informações sobre as especificações das caixas acústicas da série
TSi, visite nosso website em www.polkaudio.com.14 For more information visit our website at www.polkaudio.com
LIMITED FIVE YEAR WARRANTY
Polk Audio, Inc., warrants to the original retail purchaser only. This warranty will terminate automatically prior to its stated expiration if the original retail purchaser sells or transfers the product to any other party.
Polk Audio, Inc., warrants, to the original retail purchaser only, that the LOUDSPEAKER(S), PASSIVE CROSSOVER COMPONENT(S) and ENCLOSURE on this Polk Audio Loudspeaker Product will be free from defects
in material and workmanship for a period of five (5) years from the date of original retail purchase from a Polk Audio Authorized Dealer.
Furthermore, Polk Audio, Inc., warrants, to the original retail purchaser only, that any AMPLIFIER OR OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENT that may be included in this Polk Audio Loudspeaker Product will be free
from defects in material and workmanship for a period of three (3) years years from the date of original retail purchase from a Polk Audio Authorized Dealer.
To allow Polk Audio to offer the best possible warranty service, please register your new product online at: www.polkaudio.com/registration or call Polk customer service 800-377-7655 in the USA and Canada
(outside the USA: 410-358-3600) within ten (10) days of the date of original purchase. Be sure to keep your original purchase receipt.
Defective Products must be shipped, together with proof of purchase, prepaid insured to the Polk Audio Authorized Dealer from whom you purchased the Product, or to the Factory at 2550 Britannia Boulevard,
Suite A, San Diego, California 92154. Products must be shipped in the original shipping container or its equivalent; in any case the risk of loss or damage in transit is to be borne by you. If upon examination at the
Factory or Polk Audio Authorized Dealer it is determined that the unit was defective in materials or workmanship at any time during this Warranty period, Polk Audio or the Polk Audio Authorized Dealer will, at its
option, repair or replace this Product at no additional charge, except as set forth below. All replaced parts and Products become the property of Polk Audio. Products replaced or repaired under this warranty will
be returned to you, within a reasonable time, freight prepaid.
This warranty does not include service or parts to repair damage caused by accident, disaster, misuse, abuse, negligence, inadequate packing or shipping procedures, commercial use, voltage inputs in excess
of the rated maximum of the unit, cosmetic appearance of cabinetry not directly attributable to defect in materials or workmanship, or service, repair, or modification of the Product which has not been authorized
or approved by Polk Audio. This warranty shall terminate if the Serial number on the Product has been removed, tampered with or defaced.
This warranty is in lieu of all other expressed Warranties. If this Product is defective in materials or workmanship as warranted above, your sole remedy shall be repair or replacement as provided above.
In no event will Polk Audio, Inc. be liable to you for any incidental or consequential damages arising out of the use or inability to use the Product, even if Polk Audio, Inc. or a Polk Audio Authorized Dealer
has been advised of the possibility of such damages, or for any claim by any other party. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the above limitation and exclusion
may not apply to you.
All implied warranties on this Product are limited to the duration of this expressed Warranty. Some states do not allow limitation on how long an implied Warranty lasts, so the above limitations may not apply
to you. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you also may have other rights which vary from state to state.
This Warranty applies only to Products purchased in Canada, the United States of America, its possessions, and U.S. and NATO armed forces exchanges and audio clubs.
The Warranty terms and conditions applicable to Products purchased in other countries are available from the Polk Audio Authorized Distributors in such countries.
GARANTIE LIMITÉE DE 5 ANS
La garantie de Polk Audio, Inc., n’est valide que pour l’acheteur au détail original. La garantie sera automatiquement annulée avant sa date d’expiration spécifiée si l’acheteur original vend ou transfère
le produit à tout autre parti.
Polk Audio, Inc., garantit - à l’acheteur au détail original seulement - que le ou les HAUT-PARLEUR(S), COMPOSANTE(S) DE FILTRE PASSIF et CAISSON(S) de ce produit Polk Audio seront exempts de tout défaut
attribuable aux pièces d’origine et à la main d’oeuvre pour une période de cinq (5) ans à partir de la date de l’achat au détail original chez un revendeur agréé Polk Audio.
En outre, Polk Audio, Inc., garantit - à l’acheteur au détail original seulement - que TOUT AMPLIFICATEUR OU TOUT AUTRE COMPOSANTE ÉLECTRONIQUE qui pourrait faire partie ce produit Polk Audio sera
exempt de tout défaut attribuable aux pièces d’origine et à la main d’oeuvre pour une période de cinq (3) ans à partir de la date de l’achat au détail original chez un revendeur agréé Polk Audio.
Pour permettre à Polk Audio de vous offrir le meilleur service de garantie possible, veuillez enregistrer votre nouveau produit en ligne à l’adresse web: www.polkaudio.com/registration - ou contactez le Service à la
Clientèle de Polk au 800-377-7655 aux États-Unis et au Canada (à l’extérieur des É.U.:410-358-3600) dans les dix (10) jours suivant la date de l’achat original. Assurez-vous de conserver votre reçu d’achat original.
Les produits défectueux doivent être expédiés, avec une preuve d’achat, francs de port et assurés, au revendeur agréé Polk Audio de qui vous avez acheté le produit, ou à l’usine Polk Audio,
2550 Britannia Boulevard, Suite A, San Diego, California 92154.
Les produits doivent être expédiés dans leur carton d’expédition original ou dans un contenant équivalent. Le propriétaire doit assumer tout risque de perte ou de dommage en transit.
Si, suite à l’examen du produit à l’usine Polk ou chez le marchand agréé Polk Audio, il est déterminé que la défectuosité est imputable aux matériaux d’origine ou à la main d’oeuvre au cours de la période
de la garantie spécifiée, Polk Audio ou le revendeur Polk Audio, à sa guise, réparera ou remplacera le produit sans frais additionnels et selon les conditions décrites ci-dessous.
Toute pièce ou produit remplacé devient la propriété de Polk Audio. Les produits réparés ou remplacés sous la garantie vous seront expédiés francs de port dans un délai raisonnable.
Cette garantie n’inclut pas le service ou les pièces nécessaires à la réparation des dommages provoqués par accident, désastre, abus, négligence, mode d'expédition ou emballage inadéquat, utilisation
commerciale, tensions supérieures au maximum prescrit pour l’unité, aspect visuel du meuble non directement attribuable à un défaut de pièces d’origine ou de main d’oeuvre, ou par le service, la réparation,
ou toute modification du produit qui n’a pas été autorisé ou approuvé par Polk Audio. Cette garantie sera annulée si le numéro de série sur le produit a été enlevé, altéré ou falsifié.
Cette garantie prend préséance sur toutes autres garanties énoncées. Si la défectuosité de ce produit est imputable aux pièces d’origine ou à la main d’oeuvre selon les conditions de la garantie exprimées
ci-dessus, votre seul recourt sera la réparation ou le remplacement selon les conditions décrites ci-dessus.
Dans aucun cas Polk Audio, Inc. pourra-t-elle être tenue responsable pour tout dommage accessoire ou indirect causé par l’utilisation ou par l’incapacité d’utilisation du produit, même si Polk Audio, Inc.
ou un revendeur agréé Polk Audio, a été avisé de la possibilité de tel dommage, ou pour toute réclamation par tout autre parti.
Certains états ne permettant pas l’exclusion ou la limitation des dommages indirects, les limitations et exclusions exprimées ci-dessus pourraient ne pas s'appliquer dans votre cas.
Toutes les garanties tacites sur ce produit sont limitées à la durée de la garantie énoncée. Certains états ne permettant pas la limitation de la durée d’une garantie tacite, les limitations ci-dessus pourraient
ne pas s’appliquer dans votre cas. Cette garantie vous accorde des droits légaux spécifiques; vous pourriez également avoir d’autres droits qui pourraient varier d’état en état.
Cette garantie s’applique seulement aux produits achetés au Canada, aux États-Unis d’Amérique et ses possessions, et dans les clubs audio et d’échange des forces armées des É.U. et de l’OTAN. Les modalités
et les conditions de garantie applicables aux produits achetés dans d’autres pays sont disponibles chez les distributeurs agréés Polk Audio établis dans ces pays.Polk Audio Customer Service: 1-800-377-7655 (Outside US & Canada: 410-358-3600) Monday-Friday, 9:00 AM-6:00 PM EST, polkcs@polkaudio.com 15
ENGLISH
Polk Audio is a Directed Electronics company which trades on NASDAQ under the symbol
DEIX. Investor information can be found at http://investor.directed.com.
Polk Audio, Polk, PowerPort, Dynamic Balance, F/X, Atrium, Big Speaker Sound Without The Big
Speaker, High Velocity Compression Drive, Acoustic Resonance Control, ARC Port, Casket Basket,
I-Sonic, SurroundBar & SDA are registered trademarks of Britannia Investment Corporation used
under license by Polk Audio, Incorporated. Polk Audio Designs & miDock are trademarks of
Britannia Investment Corporation used under license by Polk Audio, Incorporated.
FRANÇAIS
Polk Audio est une compagnie de la Directed Electronics inscrite à la NASDAQ sous
le symbole DEIX. Pour des informations boursières visitez: http://investor.directed.com.
Polk Audio, Polk, PowerPort, Dynamic Balance, F/X, Atrium, Big Speaker Sound Without The Big
Speaker, High Velocity Compression Drive, Acoustic Resonance Control, ARC Port, Casket Basket,
I-Sonic, SurroundBar & SDA sont des marques de commerces déposées de la Britannia Investment
Corporation utilisées sous license par Polk Audio, Incorporated. Polk Audio Designs et miDock
sont des marques de commerce de la Britannia Investment Corporation utilisées sous license
par Polk Audio, Incorporated.
ESPANOL
Polk Audio es una empresa de Directed Electronics, la cual tiene operaciones bursátiles en el índice
NASDAQ bajo el símbolo DEIX. Hay información para inversionistas en http://investor.directed.com.
Polk Audio, Polk, PowerPort, Dynamic Balance, F/X, Atrium, Big Speaker Sound Without The Big
Speaker, High Velocity Compression Drive, Acoustic Resonance Control, ARC Port, Casket Basket,
I-Sonic, SurroundBar y SDA son marcas comerciales registradas de Britannia Investment Corporation
usadas por Polk Audio Incorporated bajo licencia. Polk Audio Designs y miDock son marcas comerciales de Britannia Investment Corporation usadas por Polk Audio Incorporated bajo licencia.
DEUTSCH
Polk Audio ist ein Unternehmen der Directed Electronics-Gruppe, die bei NASDAQ unter dem
Symbol DEIX gehandelt wird. Investoreninformationen finden Sie unter http://investor.directed.com.
Polk Audio, Polk, PowerPort, Dynamic Balance, F/X, Atrium, Big Speaker Sound Without The Big
Speaker, High Velocity Compression Drive, Acoustic Resonance Control, ARC Port, Casket Basket,
I-Sonic, SurroundBar & SDA sind eingetragene Marken der Britannia Investment Corporation,
die unter Lizenz von Polk Audio, Incorporated verwendet werden. Polk Audio Designs & miDock
sind Marken der Britannia Investment Corporation, die unter Lizenz von Polk Audio, Incorporated
verwendet werden.
ITALIANO
Polk Audio è un’azienda Directed Electronics, quotata sul listino NASDAQ con il simbolo DEIX.
Per informazioni concernenti gli investitori visitare il sito http://investor.directed.com.
Polk Audio, Polk, PowerPort, Dynamic Balance, F/X, Atrium, Big Speaker Sound Without The Big
Speaker, High Velocity Compression Drive, Acoustic Resonance Control, ARC Port, Casket Basket,
I-Sonic, SurroundBar & SDA sono marchi registrati di Britannia Investment Corporation utilizzati
su licenza da Polk Audio, Incorporated. Polk Audio Designs e miDock sono marchi registrati
di Britannia Investment Corporation, utilizzati su licenza da Polk Audio, Incorporated.
PORTUGEUSE
A Polk Audio é uma empresa da Directed Electronics, negociada na NASDAQ com o símbolo
DEIX. Informações para investidores estão disponíveis em http://investor.directed.com.
Polk Audio, Polk, PowerPort, Dynamic Balance, F/X, Atrium, Big Speaker Sound Without The Big
Speaker, High Velocity Compression Drive, Acoustic Resonance Control, ARC Port, Casket Basket,
I-Sonic, SurroundBar e SDA são marcas registradas da Britannia Investment Corporation usadas
sob licença pela Polk Audio, Incorporated. Polk Audio Designs e miDock são marcas comerciais
da Britannia Investment Corporation usadas sob licença pela Polk Audio, Incorporated.5601 METRO DRIVE
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND 21215
800-377-7655 (US & CAN, OUTSIDE US 410-358-3600)
WWW.POLKAUDIO.COM
User Manual
Technical Support
Worldwide: www.sandisk.com/support
Knowedgebase: http://kb.sandisk.com Forum: http://forums.sandisk.com/sansa
For more information on this product, please visit www.sandisk.com/support/clipplus
Clip+UM809-ENG Table of Contents
Safety Tips & Cleaning Instructions........................................ 1
Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 Player Overview ........................................ 2
Features ........................................................................................2
Minimum System Requirements ........................................................2
Package Contents............................................................................3
Sansa®
Clip+ at a Glance .................................................................3
Main Menu Options ..........................................................................4
Playback Screen..............................................................................5
Battery ..........................................................................................5
Basic Usage ............................................................................ 7
Power Button..................................................................................7
Power On ............................................................................................. 7
Power Off ............................................................................................. 7
Lock Function........................................................................................ 7
Reset................................................................................................... 8
Connecting to your Computer ...........................................................8
Removing the player from your computer:..........................................9
Loading Content ................................................................... 10
Loading Music............................................................................... 10
Drag and Drop (Windows)......................................................................10
Drag and Drop (Mac) ............................................................................10
Windows Media Player ...........................................................................11
Playing Content .................................................................... 16
Playing Music................................................................................ 16
Playing music from a preloaded microSD™ Card ................................ 18
microSD™ card with content ..................................................................18
slotMusic™ card ...................................................................................18
slotRadio™ card ...................................................................................19
FM Radio............................................................................... 20
Listening to FM Radio..................................................................... 20
Programming FM Presets................................................................ 20
Recording ............................................................................. 21
Voice Recording ............................................................................ 21
Deleting Music Files.............................................................. 22Table of Contents
Settings ................................................................................ 23
Music Options ............................................................................... 23
Repeat................................................................................................23
Shuffle................................................................................................23
Music EQ .............................................................................................23
Replay Gain .........................................................................................23
Audiobook Options ........................................................................ 24
Ch. Mode.............................................................................................24
Speed.................................................................................................24
Radio Options ............................................................................... 24
Delete All Presets .................................................................................24
FM Region ...........................................................................................24
FM Mode .............................................................................................24
System Settings............................................................................ 24
Backlight.............................................................................................24
Power Saver ........................................................................................25
Sleep..................................................................................................25
Language ............................................................................................25
Date & Time ........................................................................................25
Brightness ...........................................................................................25
Volume ...............................................................................................25
Reset Factory Settings ..........................................................................25
Info ....................................................................................................25
USB Mode ...........................................................................................26
Format................................................................................................26
Press and Hold .....................................................................................26
Tips & Troubleshooting......................................................... 27
Learn More, Service, and Warranty Information................... 29
Getting Technical Support .............................................................. 29
SanDisk Limited Warranty .............................................................. 29
End User License Agreement........................................................... 331
Safety Tips & Cleaning Instructions 1
This chapter provides you the safety tips and cleaning instructions
for your Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player.
Safety Tips & Cleaning
Instructions
Read the safety instructions carefully before using your Sansa®
MP3 player.
1. Read this entire manual to ensure proper usage.
2. Keep this User Manual for future reference.
3. Do not use headphones/earphones while driving, cycling, or operating any motorized
vehicle. This may create a traffic hazard and may be illegal in some areas. It can also be
dangerous to play your music with headphones/earphones at high volume while walking,
or engaged in other activities. You should exercise extreme caution and discontinue use in
potentially hazardous situations.
4. Avoid using headphones/earphones at high volume. Hearing experts advise against
continuous loud and extended music play. Keep the volume at a moderate level, so that
you are better able to hear outside sound and are considerate of the people around you.
5. Keep your player away from sinks, drinks, bathtubs, showers, rain, and other sources of
moisture. Moisture can cause electric shocks with any electronic device.
6. Follow these tips to keep your player working well for a long time:
• Clean your player with a soft lint-free cloth.
• Do not allow young children to use your player unsupervised.
• Never force any connector into the ports of your player or your computer. Make sure
your connectors are the identical shape and size before you connect.
• Do not disassemble, crush, short-circuit or incinerate battery as it may cause fire,
injury, burns or other hazards.
Disposal Instructions
Do not dispose of this device with unsorted waste. Improper disposal may be harmful to the
environment and human health. Please refer to your local waste authority for information on
return and collection systems in your area. 2
Sansa®
Clip+ Overview 2
This chapter helps you familiarize yourself with the features and
functionality of your Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player.
Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 Player
Overview
Congratulations on your purchase of a Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player!
Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player is a sleek and wearable MP3 player with a removable clip and a
1.0” display screen. Additionally, you can listen to FM radio broadcasts and enjoy a built-in
microphone for voice recordings. The Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player comes with a built-in
rechargeable battery which can last up to 15 hours during typical use.*
Features
• Digital audio player – supports MP3, WAV, WMA, secure WMA, FLAC, Ogg-Vorbis,
and audiobook files.
• slotRadio
TM
playback - plays slotRadio
TM
cards
• FM radio – includes an integrated FM radio with digital tuner for listening to livebroadcast FM radio programs.
• Voice recorder – supports voice recording function with built-in microphone.
• EQ effect – select an EQ mode to personalize your music experience.
• Internal memory – store data on the internal memory.
• microSD™ card slot – add a microSD™ card for additional storage or insert a
slotMusic™ or slotRadio™ card with pre-loaded content.
• Music subscription compatible - works with most subscription services using
WMDRM10, such as Rhapsody®
.
• Supports gapless playback.
Minimum System Requirements
• Windows XP SP2 or Mac OS 10.3 (mass storage class)
• Windows Media Player v10 (for playlist creation and synchronizing library and device)
• Intel Pentium class PC or higher
• USB 2.0 port for hi-speed transfers and charging
*Based on continuous playback at 128 Kbps MP3; actual life and performance may vary depending upon usage and
settings; battery not replacaeable.
Package Contents
Please unpack your Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 Player and check that the following were included:
• Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player
• Earphones
• USB 2.0 Cable
• Quick Start Guide
Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 Player at a Glance
1 Display screen Displays the information and status here
2 Up/Play/Pause Press to move up one item, play, or pause
3 Left/Previous/Rewind Press for previous track, rewind, or move left
4 Select Press to select the item
5 Down/Submenu Press to move down or to open sub-menu options
6 Right/Forward Press for next track, fast forward, or move right
7 Home Returns to the Main Menu; press-and-hold to lock or unlock
8 microSDHC™ card slot Insert microSD™, microSDHC™, slotMusic™ or slotRadio™ card
Sansa®
Clip+ Overview 3
here
9 Earphone Port Connect earphones here to listen
10 Power Press-and-hold to turn the player on or off
11 Microphone Built-in microphone for voice recording
12 USB Port Plug USB cable here to connect to the computer
13 Volume Up Turns up the volume
14 Volume Down Turns down the volume
15 Clip Attach player to clothes, a bag, or another convenient place.
Main Menu Options
Music – browse and listen to music, audio
books, or recordings
Radio (if applicable) – listen to FM broadcast
radio and save presets
Voice – record voice using built-in
microphone
Settings – view or customize the Sansa player
features
slotRadio – playback slotRadio™ cards
Sansa®
Clip+ Overview 4
Playback Screen
1 Shuffle Indicates that the Shuffle function is enabled
2 Repeat Indicates that the Repeat function is enabled
3 Current/Total Tracks Displays the current track number and the total number of tracks
4 Battery Indicator Displays the battery status
5 Artist Name Displays the artist name
6 Title Displays the track name
7 Play Time Displays the elapsed time
8 Progress Bar Displays the progress of the current track
9 Play/Pause Displays the music or recording playback status
Battery
The Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player comes with an internal rechargeable battery. To use the player
for the very first time, remember to fully charge the battery. You can charge your Sansa®
player through the USB port of your computer, a car adapter (not included), or AC adapter
(not included).
Charging
To charge the battery, please follow these steps:
1. Connect the larger end of the USB cable into an available USB port on the PC.
2. Connect the smaller end of the USB cable into the Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player.
3. The computer must be on for most USB ports to charge your battery. Your Sansa®
will show connected and the yellow charging indicator will appear. The battery
level indicator will blink while charging. You will not be able to play music while
the player is connected to a computer.
4. To stop recharging, disconnect the USB cable.
Sansa®
Clip+ Overview 5
Sansa®
Clip+ Overview 6
The battery can also be charged using an AC adapter (not included) or a car adapter
(not included). You will be able to play your device while charging with one of the
adapters.
If your device is not recognized by your computer, make sure you have Windows
Media™ Player version 10 or higher installed. You can also change the USB Mode to
MSC if you do not have Windows Media Player. For Mac, ensure that USB Mode is set
to Auto Detect or MSC mode. See Section 9 – Settings for more details.
NOTE: Some low-power USB ports may not be able to provide enough charge
power. Also note that the rechargeable battery included inside the player is not
replaceable. 3
Basic Usage
This chapter provides you the basic usage instructions for your
Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player.
Basic Usage
Power Button
The power button is located on the top of the player. It can turn the player on or off, lock or
unlock the buttons, or reset the player.
Power On
Press the Power button once to turn on the player. The Main Menu will appear after it
has been booted up.
Power Off
Press and hold the Power button for approximately 2 seconds to turn off the player.
Lock Function
All function keys will be disabled once Lock is engaged by pressing-and-holding the
Home button once while the player is powered on. All the buttons on the Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player will not operate when Lock is active. Please note that the Lock
function only works when the player is on.
The following message will appear on the display screen if any buttons is pressed
while the player is in the locked position. Music should continue to play even if the
player is locked.
To unlock the player, press-and-hold the Home button until an “Unlocked” message
appears.
7
Reset
If the Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player freezes up for any reasons, press the Power button
and hold it for approximately 15 seconds. This is similar a power down of the player.
However, be aware that once you perform the reset, any adjustments you made
during the last operation will be lost.
Connecting to your Computer
To connect the Sansa®
player to your PC, follow these instructions:
1. Connect the larger end of the USB cable into an available USB port on the PC.
2. Connect the smaller end of the USB cable into the dock connector of the player.
3. The player will show “Connected” on its display screen.
4. The player will appear in My Computer as Sansa Clip+. (In Mac OS, the player will
appear on your desktop as a removable disk named SANSA CLIPP.)
NOTE: For Mac OS, the Clip+ player must be set to Auto Detect or MSC mode in the
USB Mode settings. See Section 9 – Settings for more details.
Auto Detect or MTP mode
Basic Usage 8
Basic Usage
MSC mode
Removing the player from your computer:
WARNING: Do not disconnect the player while it’s transferring data. Disconnecting the
player from the computer while data are being transferred may damage the player.
Windows – Simply disconnect the USB cable from the player after you have finished
charging, transferring, firmware upgrading, or synchronizing files.
Mac – Eject the removable disk by dragging the icon to the Trash and then disconnect the
USB cable.
94
Loading Contents 10
This chapter shows you how to transfer music files from your
computer to your Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player.
Loading Content
Loading Music
You can transfer music from your computer to the Sansa®
MP3 player using the drag-anddrop method or using music management software like Windows Media Player.
Drag and Drop (Windows)
Follow these steps to drag-and-drop music to your Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player:
1. Connect your Sansa®
Clip+ player to your PC.
2. Select Open device to view files using Windows Explorer on initial
connection or by going to My Computer.
3. Double-click on the Sansa Clip+ MP3 player.
4. Double-click on Internal Memory.
5. Double-click on the Music folder.
6. Drag and drop music files from your computer to the Sansa®
MP3 player’s Music
folder.
You can also drag and drop files to a microSD™ card inside your player by going to
My Computer > Sansa Clip+ > External uSD Card. You can only drag and drop
files to the card if you have write permissions for the card.
Drag and Drop (Mac)
Follow these steps to drag-and-drop music to your Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player:
1. Connect your Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player to your Mac computer.
2. Double-click on the removable disk named SANSA CLIPP that appears on your
desktop.
3. Double-click on the Music folder.
4. Drag and drop music files from your computer to the player’s Music folder.
NOTE: Remember to eject the removable disk before disconnecting your player. You can also drag and drop files to a microSD™ card inside your player by doubleclicking the second removable disk that appears when you connect your Sansa®
Clip+
MP3 player.
NOTE: The second removable disk will display with the card’s name, just as if you
connected it via a card reader. You can only drag and drop files to the card if you
have write permissions for the card.
Windows Media Player
Before you can create playlists and transfer (or synchronize) them to your Sansa®
MP3 player, you need to show Windows Media Player where your songs are located.
Adding Music Files to Library…
1. To add music files to WMP 11’s library, follow these steps:
2. Click the arrow below the Library tab.
3. Make sure Music is selected then click Add to Library…
4. In the Add to Library dialog box, select one of these options then click OK.
- My personal folders:
Use this option to monitor the digital media files stored in your personal
Music folder as well as any files stored in the public Music folders that
everyone who uses your computer has access to.
- My folders and those of others that I can access:
Use this option to monitor the digital media files stored in your personal
Music folder, the files stored in the public Music folders, as well as the files
stored in the personal Music folders that belong to other users on your
computer.
Creating Playlists
To create playlists for Windows Media Player, follow these steps:
Loading Contents 111. Launch Windows Media Player.
2. Clear the List pane by clicking the Clear List Pane button.
3. Click the arrow below Library Tab then select Create Playlist.
4. Type in the name of your Playlist.
5. Click Songs from your Library then drag them to the List Pane.
6. To re-arrange the songs, drag them up or down in the List Pane.
Loading Contents 127. Click Save Playlist.
Transferring Playlists
To transfer playlists to your Sansa®
MP3 player, follow these steps:
1. Connect your Sansa®
player to the PC.
2. Select Sync digital media files to this device using Windows Media
Player on initial connection.
3. Right-click on Sansa Clip+, and then select Set Up Sync.
Loading Contents 134. Click to select the Sync this device automatically check box.
5. Select Personal Playlists from the dropdown menu on the left pane.
6. Highlight any playlists that you want to transfer to your player, click Add then
Finish.
7. Synchronization will start as soon as you click Finish. To see sync status, click
on the Sansa Clip+ MP3 player, and then click Sync Results.
Loading Contents 14Loading Contents
155
Playing Contents 16
This chapter shows you how to play music on your Sansa®
Clip+
MP3 player.
Playing Content
Playing Music
Follow these steps to play music, audiobooks, and voice recordings:
1. Select Music from the Main Menu. Voice recordings are located in Recordings.
2. Select Play All, Recently Added, Artists, Albums, Songs, Genres, My Top Rated,
Playlists, Podcasts, Audiobooks, Recordings (Voice), or Folders.
3. Highlight and select the desired track or file to play.
4. Press the >>| button to skip to the next song or press-and-hold to fast forward.
5. Press the |<< button once to go back to the beginning of the current song or press |<<
button twice to go back to the previous song. Press-and-hold the |<< button to rewind.
6. The following options are available during music playback by pressing the Submenu
button (but not during slotRadio™ card playback, which permits skipping but not
repeating of songs).
Add song to GoList
1. Select Add Song to GoList.
2. Press the |<< button to return to the playback screen.
Remove song from GoList
This option is only available when the current song is already added to the GoList.
1. Select Remove Song from GoList.
2. Press the |<< button to return to the playback screen.
Rate Song
3. Select Rate Song.
4. Press the Up or Down button to select a rating.
5. Press Select.
6. Press the |<< button to return to the playback screen.
Repeat
1. Move down to Repeat.
2. Press Select to toggle and choose a repeat mode: • Off: No repeat of tracks
• Song: Repeat the current track
• All: Repeat all selected tracks
3. Press the |<< button to return to the playback screen.
Shuffle
1. Move down to Shuffle.
2. Press the Select button to toggle between Shuffle on and Shuffle off (to play
songs in random order, set Shuffle to ON).
3. Press the |<< button to return to the playback screen.
Music EQ
The Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player provides various EQ modes such as: Rock, Pop, Jazz,
Classical, Funk, Hip Hop, Dance, Full Bass, Full Treble, and Custom.
1. Select Music EQ.
2. Select an equalizer mode.
3. Press the |<< button to return to the playback screen.
Replay Gain
Replay Gain is a method of maintaining a constant perceived volume level during
playback. For more information on Replay Gain, please visit our Knowledgebase
(kb.sandisk.com).
1. Select Replay Gain.
2. Press select on Mode to apply Replay Gain on Song, Album, or disable Replay
Gain.
3. Press select on Pre-Gain to select the Replay Gain level.
4. Press the |<< button once to return to the previous menu or press |<< button
twice to return to the playback screen.
Delete Song
1. Select Delete Song.
2. Select Yes to confirm.
Track Info
1. Select Track Info.
2. Press the Up or Down button to scroll through the track information.
3. Press the |<< button once to return to the previous menu or press |<< button
twice to return to the playback screen.
Playing Contents 17Playing music from a preloaded microSD™ Card
Note: The microSD logo will appear upside-down when properly oriented to insert into
the microSD card slot.
microSD™ card with content
1. Insert a microSD card with content
into the microSD card slot. The player
will display the message: “Refreshing
your media.”
2. Select Music.
3. Select Artists, Albums, Songs,
Genres or Recently Added to
navigate to the music you wish to
listen to.
4. Alternately, from the Music menu,
select Folders > External uSD Card,
and select either Play All or continue
navigating through the folders to the
file name of the song you want.
Individual songs will display with a card icon to indicate they are stored on the
external microSD™ card. Artists and Albums will not display an icon.
slotMusic™ card
1. Insert a slotMusic™ card into the
microSD™ card slot. The player will
display the message: “Refreshing your
media.”
2. Select the slotMusic icon that appears
in the main menu. This replaces the
slotRadio icon that normally appears in
the menu.
3. All songs on the card will be listed.
Select a song to begin playing through
the slotMusic album.
Playing Contents 18Playing Contents
slotRadio™ card
slotRadio™ cards contain hundreds of songs arranged into playlists called Channels.
Your Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player can play slotRadio cards, but playback behavior will
differ from your standard media per the instructions below. You can also go to
www.slotradio.com to learn more about slotRadio cards and available titles.
1 Current/Total Channels Display the current channel number and the total
number of channels
2 Battery Indicator Display the battery status
3 Channel Name Display the channel name
4 Artist Name - Title Display the song’s artist name and title
1. Insert a slotRadio™ card into the
microSD™ card slot. The player will
display the message: “Refreshing your
media.”
2. From the Main Menu, select
slotRadio.
3. Press the Select button to begin
playing.
4. Press the Submenu button to skip to
the next channel.
5. Press the >>| button to skip to the
next song within a channel.
6. Press >|| to pause or resume
playback.
Pressing select toggles the screen view from now playing to a graphic equalizer to
the next song preview.
NOTE: In slotRadio™ mode, the |<< button will not function. You cannot restart
a song or go to the previous song. All songs eventually repeat randomly on their
own.
196
FM Radio 20
This chapter provides you instructions on how to listen to FM
broadcast radio and to program the preset stations on the Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player.
FM Radio
The Sansa®
MP3 player includes an integrated FM radio for listening to live broadcast FM
stations.
Listening to FM Radio
To listen to live broadcast FM station, follow these steps:
1. From the Main Menu, select FM Radio.
2. A radio frequency menu will appear.
3. Press |<< or >>| to adjust and search for the desired frequency, or select preset by
pressing Select.
4. For fast search, press and hold the |<< or >>| buttons.
Programming FM Presets
You can program up 40 preset stations. To program the preset stations on your player,
follow these steps:
1. Press the Submenu button in Radio mode.
2. Select Add Preset to save current frequency into presets.
3. Select Delete Preset to remove current frequency from presets. This option is only
available when the current frequency is already added.
4. Select Auto Presets to allow the player to automatically search and store stations with
the strongest broadcast signals as the preset favorite stations.
5. Select View All Presets to view all stored presets.
a. Select Delete All Presets to erase all stored preset stations. 7
Recording (if applicable) 21
This chapter shows you how to use your Sansa®
Clip+MP3
player’s built-in microphone.
Recording
Voice Recording
The Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player has a built-in microphone allowing you to record your own
voice, an interview, or other speech.
To start voice recording, follow these steps:
1. From the Main menu, select Voice.
2. Select Record Now.
3. To pause recording, press the >|| button.
4. To resume, press the >|| button again.
5. To stop recording, press Select. A pop-up window will appear on the screen. Select Yes
to save recording. The recording will be saved in the RECORD/VOICE folder.
6. Press |<< button to return to the previous menu.
NOTE: For Home and Personal Use
This product is intended to be used for recording and playback for your home and personal
enjoyment. Copying and commercial use of copyrighted material without permission of the
copyright owner may be prohibited by law. Use of your media player, in compliance with all
copyright and applicable intellectual property laws, remains the responsibility of the user of
the product.8
Deleting Music Files 22
This chapter shows you how to delete contents on your Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player.
Deleting Music Files
There are 2 ways to delete music files. You can delete them from the player directly or using
the computer.
To delete music files directly from the Sansa®
MP3 player, follow these steps:
1. In playback mode, press Submenu button.
2. Select the Delete Song item.
To delete music files using a computer, follow these steps:
1. Connect your Sansa®
to the computer.
2. Select Open device to view files using Windows Explorer on initial connection.
3. Locate the folder where your music files are stored.
4. Highlight and delete the music files or folder. 9
Settings 23
This chapter shows you how to customize your Sansa®
Clip+ MP3
player’s settings
Settings
You can personalize your Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player by selecting Settings from the Main
Menu.
Music Options
From the Settings menu, select Music Options.
Repeat
1. Move down to Repeat.
2. Press Select to toggle and choose a repeat mode:
• Off: No repeat of tracks
• Song: Repeat the current track
• All: Repeat all selected tracks
Shuffle
1. Move down to Shuffle.
2. Press Select to toggle between Off and On.
Music EQ
1. Select Music EQ.
2. Select a desired equalizer mode.
Replay Gain
1. Select Replay Gain.
2. Select Mode (Off, Song or Album) and a Pre-Gain volume (0dB to 12dB) to
increase the player’s volume output for songs with replay gain information stored
in their ID3 tags. This helps normalize the volume across tracks with varying
loudness levels. You can learn more about Replay Gain at
http://www.replaygain.org/. Audiobook Options
From the Settings menu, select Audiobook Options.
Ch. Mode
When Chapter Mode is on, it allows you to skip chapters in an audiobook by pressing
the |<< or >>| button.
1. Highlight Ch. Mode.
2. Press the Select button to toggle between Off and On.
Speed
1. Highlight Speed.
2. Press the Select button to toggle between Normal, Fast, and Slow audiobook
playback.
Radio Options
From the Settings menu, select Radio Options.
Delete All Presets
1. Select Delete All Presets.
2. Select Yes to confirm.
FM Region
1. Press Select on FM Region to toggle between USA or World.
FM Mode
1. Press Select on FM Mode to toggle between Stereo or Mono.
System Settings
From the Settings menu, select System Settings.
Backlight
After being idle for a predefined time, the player will trigger the backlight timer
program automatically to turn off the backlight. You can press any button to reactivate the backlight.
1. Select Backlight.
2. Press the |<< or >>| button to select desired backlight timer (5 seconds to 1
hour).
3. Press Select and confirm your choice by selecting Yes or No.
Settings 24Power Saver
The Power Saver function turns the player off automatically when it has been idle for
a defined period of time.
1. Select Power Saver.
1. Press the |<< or >>| button to select desired time (off to 120 minutes) before
power off. The player will not enter the power saver mode if it is set to off.
2. Press Select and confirm your choice by selecting Yes or No.
Sleep
The Sleep function turns the player off automatically after a defined period of
playback time.
2. Select Sleep.
3. Press the |<< or >>| button to select desired playback time before power off.
The player will not enter the sleep mode if it is set to off.
4. Press Select and confirm your choice by selecting Yes or No.
Language
1. Select Language.
2. Select a desired language.
Date & Time
1. Select Date & Time.
2. Set the Month, Date, Year, Hour, Minute, and time format.
Brightness
To adjusting the display brightness for better viewing in different lighting environment,
follow these steps:
1. Select Brightness.
2. Press the |<< or >>| button to set the contrast level.
3. Press Select and confirm your choice by selecting Yes or No.
Volume
1. Select Volume.
2. Select Normal or High, and then press Select button.
Reset Factory Settings
1. Select Reset Factory Settings.
2. Confirm your choice by selecting Yes or No.
Info
This displays information regarding your Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player (such as firmware
version, available/free memory, number of contents loaded in the player, and the
battery status)
Settings 25Settings 26
USB Mode
USB Mode determines how your player communicates with your computer. Auto
Detect is selected by default. You can also choose to always connect in MTP (Media
Transfer Protocol) or MSC (Mass Storage Class) modes. Windows can use MTP or MSC
mode, but Mac OS will only work with MSC mode. If you set the USB Mode to Auto
Detect, make sure you are running Windows Media Player version 10 or higher.
1. Select USB Mode.
2. Select Auto Detect, MTP, or MSC.
Format
WARNING: Formatting will erase all your data.
1. Select Format.
2. Confirm your choice by selecting Yes or No.
Press and Hold
Determine whether pressing and holding the select button during playback will add a
song to the GoList or allow you to rate the song. (Note that neither choice will
function during playback of a slotRadio™ card.)
1. Select Press and Hold.
2. Select Add Song to GoList or Rate Song. 10
Tips & Troubleshooting 27
This chapter helps you get the most from your Sansa®
Clip+ MP3
player with tips and troubleshooting.
Tips & Troubleshooting
What music file formats does the Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player
support?
The Sansa®
MP3 Player will support MP3, WAV, WMA, secure WMA, FLAC, Ogg Vorbis, and
audiobook formats.
How do I drag music files to my Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player?
As long as the files are WMA, MP3, FLAC, or Ogg Vorbis, they can be dragged into the Music
folder. Secure WMA files cannot be dragged and dropped. Use Windows Media™ Player 10 or
higher to sync protected files.
Which bit rates will the Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player support?
The Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player will support 64-320Kbps for MP3 and 32-192Kbps for WMA.
FLAC and Ogg Vorbis are variable bit rate.
Why should I update the firmware?
You should always update the player to the latest firmware to ensure that it functions
correctly and has all the latest features. Visit www.sandisk.com/clipplus to download the
Sansa Firmware Updater.
Some of my music files are on my player, but cannot be played.
When I select them, another song begins to play. What is wrong?
You may not have purchased the rights to play the song on an additional device. To test this,
try to play a song that you have copied from an older CD and converted to MP3 format. If
you can play that song, but not the song that will not play, then you need to purchase the
rights to play the song.
Is the player compatible with podcasts?
As long as the podcasts are in MP3 format and an appropriate bit rate (32-320 kbps), then
the player should be capable of playing the files.Why does my player say unknown artist/album?
Normally this is because the ID3 tags or WMA meta-data information is missing. On your
computer, right-click the song, choose Properties, Summary tab then Advanced. Then you
can input the data such as Artist, Album, Song Title, Track Number, Genre, and Year.
How do I reset my Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player?
Press-and-hold the Power button for approximately 20 seconds, and then release the power
button.
Why can't I drag and drop OGG files to my Sansa®
Clip+ MP3
player using Windows Media Player?
To drag and drop OGG files to the Sansa®
Clip player, you need to upgrade your Windows
Media Player to version 11.
Why won’t my Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player play music?
Check to verify if the audio file type is supported. If the file type is supported, make sure
that the file is not corrupted and that its license is up to date.
Why isn’t my Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player being charged or detected
by my computer when I connect it?
Verify that you are using Windows Media Player version 10 or higher, reset your player, and
try again.
Tips & Troubleshooting 28This chapter provides information to help you get service and
support for your Sansa®
Clip+ MP3 player.
Learn More, Service, and
Warranty Information
Getting Technical Support
Before you contact Technical Support, we encourage you to read the Tips &
Troubleshooting section to see if your question is covered there.
If you have questions about the use or features of your Sansa player as well as other
SanDisk products, please visit our Knowledgebase at kb.sandisk.com.
You can also call the SanDisk Technical Support Center for US: 1-866-SanDisk (1-866-726-
3475), Worldwide: see www.sandisk.com/support for local country phone numbers. When
you call us for support, please include as much information as you can from your packaging
material. This will allow us to help you more quickly.
SanDisk Manufacturer’sLimited Warranty
SanDisk warrants to the end user, that this product, excluding content and or software
supplied with or on the product, will be free from material defects in manufacture, will
conform to SanDisk’s published product specifications and be fit for normal use during the
Warranty Period specified in the table commencing on the date of purchase provided that
the product is legally placed on the market.
To make a warranty claim please contact SanDisk at the telephone number in the table or
support@SanDisk.com within the Warranty Period and provide proof of purchase (showing
date and place of purchase and name of the reseller) and product name, type and number.
You may return the product after first obtaining a Return Material Authorization number and
following any other guidelines listed. For further information see www.sandisk.com and
select “support”.
SanDisk may at its option repair this product or provide you with an equivalent product; and
if unable to repair or replace the product, will refund the purchase price. SanDisk will not
be liable for indirect or consequential damage (including loss of data), or for damage caused
by improper use (including use in an incompatible device and use not in accordance with the
instructions), or by improper installation, unprofessional repair, modification or accident.
This constitutes SanDisk’s entire liability which will never exceed the price you paid for it,
plus the necessary costs you made for the warranty claim. SanDisk products must not be
used in applications where failure could threaten injury or life, such as life support systems.
SANDISK DISCLAIMS ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT
PERMITTED BY LAW. IF SANDISK CANNOT DISCLAIM IMPLIED WARRANTIES UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, THEN TO THE EXTENT POSSIBLE, SUCH IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE
LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. THE WARRANTY DURATION ON
Tips & Troubleshooting 29ANY REPLACED PRODUCT WILL BE THAT PORTION OF THE WARRANTY PERIOD REMAINING
ON YOUR ORIGINAL PRODUCT.
National, state and local laws may grant you other rights that are not affected by this
warranty.
Warrantor
N. America, Canada, S. America:
SanDisk Corporation
601 McCarthy Boulevard
Milpitas, CA 95035
Tel: 1-866-SANDISK (1-866-726-3475)
Europe, Middle East & Africa & Asia Pacific:
SanDisk International, Ltd.,
Lakeshore Drive, Swords, Co
Dublin, Ireland
Tel: +353-1-813-6070
Japan:
SanDisk Limited (SDKK)
8F Nisso 15 Bldg. 2-17-19 Shin-Yokohama
Kohoku-ku, Yokohama, Japan 222-0033
Product Name Warranty Period (Years)
SanDisk Extreme® Line
SanDisk Extreme® III SDHC™ Cards Lifetime** (10 EMEA***)
SanDisk Extreme® III 30MB/s Edition SDHC™
Cards Lifetime** (10 EMEA***)
SanDisk Extreme® SDHC™ Cards Lifetime** (30****)
SanDisk Extreme® CompactFlash® Cards Lifetime** (30****)
SanDisk Extreme® III CompactFlash® Cards Lifetime** (10 EMEA***)
SanDisk Extreme® IV CompactFlash® Cards Lifetime** (30 EMEA***)
SanDisk Extreme® FireWire® Reader 3
SanDisk Extreme® USB 2.0 Reader 2
SanDisk Extreme® Memory Stick PRO-HG
Duo™ Lifetime** (10 EMEA***)
SanDisk Extreme® Ducati Edition SD™ Plus
Card; SanDisk Extreme® Ducati Edition
CompactFlash® Card; and SanDisk Extreme®
Ducati Edition USB Flash Drive. Lifetime** (30****)
SanDisk Ultra®/ SanDisk Ultra® II Line
SanDisk Ultra®/ SanDisk Ultra® II SD™ Cards Lifetime** (10 EMEA***)
SanDisk Ultra®/ SanDisk Ultra® II SDHC™
Cards Lifetime** (10 EMEA***)
Tips & Troubleshooting 30SanDisk Ultra®/ SanDisk Ultra® II
CompactFlash® Cards Lifetime** (10 EMEA***)
SanDisk Ultra®/ SanDisk Ultra® II Memory
Stick PRO-HG Duo™ Cards Lifetime** (10 EMEA***)
SanDisk Ultra®/SanDisk Ultra® II SanDisk®
Video HD™ Cards Lifetime** (10 EMEA***)
SanDisk® Multi-Use (Standard Line)
SanDisk® SD™ Cards 5
SanDisk® SDHC™ Cards 5
SanDisk® Memory Stick PRO Duo™ Cards 5
SanDisk® xD-Picture Card™ Type M Cards 1
SanDisk® microSD™ and SanDisk®
microSDHC™ Cards 5
Gaming
SanDisk® Gaming SD™ Cards for Wii™ Cards 5
SanDisk® Gaming Memory Stick PRO Duo™
Cards 5
Nintendo® DSi™ SDHC™ Cards 5
Netbook
SanDisk® SDHC™ Cards 5
Cruzer® Line
SanDisk® Cruzer® Micro USB Flash Drive 2
SanDisk® Cruzer® Micro Skin USB Flash Drive 2
SanDisk® Cruzer® Titanium USB Flash Drive 5
Mobile Line
SanDisk® microSD™ and SanDisk®
microSDHC™ Cards 5
SanDisk® microSD™ Mobile Memory Kit 5
SanDisk® Memory Stick Micro™ (M2™) Cards 5
SanDisk® Mobile Ultra™ microSD™ Cards 10
SanDisk® Mobile Ultra™ microSDHC™ Cards 10
SanDisk® Mobile Ultra™ Memory Stick Micro™
(M2™) Cards 10
SanDisk® Mobile Premier microSD™ Cards 10
SanDisk® Mobile Premier microSDHC™ Cards 10
Tips & Troubleshooting 31SanDisk® Mobile Premier Mobile Memory Kit 10
MobileMate™ Micro Reader 2
MobileMate™ SD™ Plus Reader 2
MobileMate™ SD™ Plus Reader 2
MobileMate™ Memory Stick® Plus Reader 2
Audio Visual Players
Sansa® Clip Player 1 U.S.; 2 EMEA
Sansa® View Player 1 U.S.; 2 EMEA
Sansa® Fuze™ Player 1 U.S.; 2 EMEA
slotMusic™ Player 90 (days) U.S.; 2 EMEA
slotRadio™ Player 1 U.S.; Canada
slotRadio™ To Go Player and Card 90 (days) U.S.; 2 EMEA
** Lifetime
*** EMEA and regions not recognizing lifetime
**** Germany and regions not recognizing lifetime
For Technical Support over the Internet, visit: www.sandisk.com and select “support”
Technical Support in the United States and Canada can be contacted by calling:
1-866-726-3475.
Technical Support in other regions can be obtained by contacting:
Support
Argentina (AR) #08006662931
Australia (AU) 866 680 4007
Belarus (BY) 8-800101-- 8008539045
Brazil (BR) #08008914506
Chile (CL) #1230-020-0404
China (CN) North
China (CN) South
10800 852 1251
10800 152 1251
Columbia (CO) #018005180538
Estonia (EE) + 1 407 253 3479
France (FR) +33 (0) 171 230 328
Germany (DE) +49 (0) 69 50072840
Greece (GR) 407 253 3476
Hong Kong (H/K) 30027886
India (IN) 0008001003277
Israel (IL) 1 809 440513
Italy (IT) +(39) 026-9682-725
Japan (JP) 866 349 2698
Korea (KR) 080-688-0880
Mexico (MX) #0018662122012
Netherlands (NL) (31) 202 015 029
Tips & Troubleshooting 32New Zealand (NZ) + 1 866 698 0701
Portugal (PT) +351 214159093
Romania (RO) + 1 407 253 3477
Russia (RU) +7 (8) 495-795-0847
Saudi Arabia (SA) 866 514 2521
Singapore (SG) 800-852-3607
South Africa (ZA) 0800980949
Spain (ES) +34 914534311
Sweden (SE) 020-79 52 02
Switzerland (CH) 0800 564811
Taiwan (TW) 00801-85-6062
Turkey (TR) 902124140820
UAE/Dubai (AE) 8000 4414358
UK (GB) +44 (0) 207-365-4193
End User License Agreement
SANDISK CORPORATION
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
DO NOT DOWNLOAD, INSTALL OR USE THE SOFTWARE UNTIL YOU HAVE CAREFULLY READ
THE TERMS OF THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”). BY DOWNLOADING,
USING OR INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS OF THIS
AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS, DO NOT DOWNLOAD, INSTALL
OR USE THE SOFTWARE AND, IF APPLICABLE, PROMPTLY RETURN IT TO YOUR PLACE OF
PURCHASE FOR A REFUND. IF THE SOFTWARE WAS INCLUDED WITH YOUR PURCHASE OF
HARDWARE, YOU MUST RETURN THE ENTIRE HARDWARE/SOFTWARE PACKAGE IN ORDER
TO OBTAIN A REFUND. IF THE SOFTWARE WAS ACCESSED ELECTRONICALLY, CLICK “NOT
ACCEPT” TO STOP THE DOWNLOAD PROCESS.
The firmware, computer programs, device drivers, data or information (“Software”) is
provided to each person who downloads, uses or installs the Software (“you” or “your”)
under the terms of this Agreement between you and SanDisk Corporation (“SanDisk,” “we,”
or “us”), and may be subject to additional terms and conditions in an agreement between
you and SanDisk’s third party licensors (“Licensors”). The Software is owned by SanDisk or
its Licensors. The Software is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties,
as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties.
1. Software License. Subject to the terms and conditions contained herein, SanDisk grants
to you a limited, non-exclusive, non-sub licensable, transferable in accordance with these
terms, royalty-free license under SanDisk’s intellectual property rights to use the Software in
executable form solely for your personal use only with a SanDisk product and only on a
single computer or other hardware device at any given time (the "License"). The Software is
“in use” when it is either downloaded, copied, loaded into RAM or installed into the hard disk
or other permanent memory of a computer or other hardware device.
2. Restrictions. SanDisk and its Licensors retain all rights in the Software not expressly
granted to you. You may not modify, adapt, translate or create derivative works (new
versions) of the Software. No source code is provided under this Agreement. You may not
Tips & Troubleshooting 33reverse engineer, disassemble, decompile, rent, lease, or encumber the Software, or recreate or discover the source code of the Software. You may not embed or combine the
Software within any other software product or device. The Software contains proprietary and
confidential information of SanDisk and its Licensors, which you agree not to discover or
reveal to others. Any and all permitted copies of the Software that you make or distribute
must be unmodified, must contain all of the original Software’s proprietary notices, and must
include or be accompanied by this Agreement. You may not separate the Software into
component parts for sublicense, distribution or transfer to a third party.
3. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE
LAW, THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE” WITH NO WARRANTIES
AND NEITHER SANDISK NOR ITS LICENSORS MAKE ANY REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY,
STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, IN LAW OR FROM THE COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF
TRADE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NON-INTERFERENCE, OR NONINFRINGEMENT OF ANY THIRD PARTY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS, OR EQUIVALENTS
UNDER THE LAWS OF ANY JURISDICTION. YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE
QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU, AND NOT SANDISK, ITS LICENSORS OR RESELLERS, ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR, OR CORRECTION.
4. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT
WILL SANDISK OR ITS LICENSORS, OR THEIR RESPECTIVE DIRECTORS, OFFICERS,
EMPLOYEES, CONSULTANTS, LICENSORS, LICENSEES OR AFFILIATES, BE LIABLE FOR ANY
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, ARISING
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE DOWNLOAD, DISTRIBUTION, USE OR PERFORMANCE
OR NON-PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF SANDISK HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY SHALL
APPLY NOTWITHSTANDING ANY FAILURE OF ANY REMEDY PROVIDED FOR HEREUNDER IN
ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL SANDISK’S OR ITS LICENSORS’ TOTAL
LIABILITY TO YOU EXCEED THE AMOUNT YOU PAID TO US FOR THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE.
4. The Software is provided with “RESTRICTED RIGHTS.” Use, duplication or disclosure by
the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 52.227-14 and DFARS 252.227-
7013 et seq. Use of the Software by the Government constitutes acknowledgement of
SanDisk’s proprietary rights therein. Contractor or Manufacturer is SanDisk Corporation, 601
McCarthy Blvd. Milpitas, CA 95035.
5. Transfer. If you sell or otherwise transfer the SanDisk product that incorporates the
Software as a whole, you may transfer the Software as fully integrated into such product
provided that you also supply this Agreement to the purchaser or recipient of the product, at
which time all of your rights under this Agreement will immediately cease. Except as stated
above, you may not assign or transfer this Agreement in part or in whole, and any attempt
to do so shall be void.
6. Termination. We may terminate this Agreement and the license immediately and without
notice if you breach it. Upon termination of this Agreement, you must delete or destroy all
copies of the Software.
7. High Risk Activities. The Software is not fault-tolerant and is not designed or intended for
use in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, or any other application in
which the failure of the Software could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe
physical or property damage (collectively, “High Risk Activities”). SANDISK AND ITS
LICENSORS DISCLAIM ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR HIGH RISK
Tips & Troubleshooting 34Tips & Troubleshooting 35
ACTIVITIES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LIABILITIES OR DAMAGES ARISING FROM
SUCH USE.
8. General. This Agreement contains the entire understanding between the parties with
respect to your use of the Software. If any part of this Agreement is found void and
unenforceable, it will not affect the validity of the balance of this Agreement, which shall
remain valid and enforceable according to its terms. This Agreement is governed by and
construed under the laws of the State of California and controlling U.S. federal law without
regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof. The U.N. Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not apply to this Agreement. Any action or proceeding
arising from or relating to this Agreement shall be adjudicated in the state or federal courts
of Santa Clara County, California, and the parties hereby agree to the exclusive jurisdiction
and venue of such courts. You will not remove or export from the United States or re-export
from anywhere any part of the Software or any direct product thereof to any country in
violation of U.S. Export Administration Regulations, or a successor thereto, except in
compliance with and with all licenses and approvals required under applicable export laws
and regulations including, without limitation, those of the U.S. Department of Commerce.
Any waivers or amendments of this Agreement shall be effective only if made in writing and
signed by an authorized representative of each party. You agree that the Licensors are third
party beneficiaries of this Agreement to enforce your performance of the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. The provisions of Sections 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9 shall
survive the termination or expiration of this Agreement.
FCC Regulation
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and then on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
1. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
2. Correct the equipment to a different outlet so that the equipment and receiver are on
different branch circuits.
3. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help.
Copyright
Safety information
About this user’s guide
Features of your new product
Introduction
Getting started
Network setup (Dell 1130n only)
Basic setup
Media and tray
Printing
Management tools
Maintenance
Troubleshooting
Supplies
Specifications
Appendix
Glossary
www.dell.com | www.support.dell.com
Dell 1130
Dell 1130nadjusting
tray size
booklet printing
booklets
change percentage of your document
cleaning
inside
outside
cleaning a machine
control panel
convention
duplex printing (manual)
printer driver
Embedded Web Service
general information
favorites settings, for printing
features
features
machine features
power saving feature
print media feature
printer driver
supplied software
font setting
front view
glossary
jam
clearing paper
tips for avoiding paper jams
Linux
common Linux problems
driver installation for network connected
driver installation for USB cable connected
printer properties
printing
supplied softwares
system requirements
unifled driver configurator
loading
paper in manual tray
paper in the tray1
special media
Macintosh
common Macintosh problems
driver installation for network connected
adjusting
tray size
booklet printing
booklets
change percentage of your document
cleaning
inside
outside
cleaning a machine
control panel
convention
duplex printing (manual)
printer driver
Embedded Web Service
general information
favorites settings, for printing
features
features
machine features
power saving feature
print media feature
printer driver
supplied software
font setting
front view
glossary
jam
clearing paper
tips for avoiding paper jams
Linux
common Linux problems
driver installation for network connected
driver installation for USB cable connected
printer properties
printing
supplied softwares
system requirements
unifled driver configurator
loading
paper in manual tray
paper in the tray1
special mediaCopyright
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
©2010 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly
forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, and Dell Toner Management System are trademarks of Dell Inc.;
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, and Windows Server are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries. Adobe and Acrobat Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to the entities claiming the marks and names
of their products.
Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own.
Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source license information.
REV. 1.00Safety information
These warnings and precautions are included in order to prevent injury to you and others, as well as preventing any
potential damage to your machine. Be sure to read and understand all of these instructions before using the machine.
Use common sense for operating any electrical appliance and whenever using your machine. Also, follow all warnings
and instructions marked on the machine and in the accompanying literature. After reading this section, keep it in a safe
place for future reference.
Important safety symbols
This section explains the meanings of all icons and signs in the user's guide. These safety symbols are in order,
according to the degree of danger.
Explanation of all icons and signs used in the user’s guide:
Warning Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death.
Caution Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage.
Do not attempt.
Do not disassemble.
Do not touch.
Unplug the power cord from the wall socket.
Make sure the machine is grounded to prevent electric shock.
Call the service center for help.
Follow directions explicitly.
Operating environment
Warning
Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the
electrical outlet is not grounded.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not bend, or place heavy
objects on the power cord.
Stepping on or allowing the
power cord to be crushed by a
heavy object could result in electric shock
or fire.
Do not place anything on top of the machine (water, small
metal or heavy objects, candles, lit cigarettes, etc.).
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not remove the plug by
pulling on the cord; do not
handle the plug with wet
hands.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke, makes
strange noises, or generates an odd odor, immediately
turn off the power switch and unplug the machine.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Caution
During an electrical storm or for a period
of non-operation, remove the power plug
from the electrical outlet.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do
not attempt to force it in.
Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this
could result in electric shock.
Be careful, the paper output area is hot.
Burns could occur.
Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or
PC interface cords.This could result in electric shock or fire and/or injury to
your pet.
If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet
appears damaged, unplug the machine from all
interface connections and request assistance from
qualified service personnel.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
If the machine does not operate properly after these
instructions have been followed, unplug the machine from
all interface connections and request assistance from
qualified service personnel.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct
change in performance, unplug the machine from all
interface connections and request assistance from
qualified service personnel.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
Operating method
Caution
Do not forcefully pull the paper
out during printing.
It can cause damage to the
machine.
When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the
paper output area may get hot. Do not allow children to
touch.
Children may be burned.
Be careful not to put your hand
between the machine and paper
tray.
You may get injured.
When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers or
sharp metal objects.
It can cause damage to the machine.
Do not block or push objects into the
ventilation opening.
This could result in elevated component
temperatures which can cause damage or
fire.
Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output
tray.
It could cause damage to the machine.
Use care to avoid paper cuts when
replacing paper or removing jammed paper.
You may get hurt.
This machine's power interception device is the power cord.
To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from the
electrical outlet.
Installation / Moving
Warning
Do not place the machine in an area with dust, humidity or water leaks.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Caution
When moving the machine, turn
the power off and disconnect all
cords; then lift the machine with
at least two people.
The machine could fall, causing human injury
or machine damage.
Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight
location, such as a closet.
If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire.
Do not place the machine on an unstable
surface.
The machine could fall, causing human injury
or machine damage.
Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical
outlet.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
The machine should be connected to the
power level which is specified on the label.
If you are unsure and want to check the
power level you are using, contact the
electrical utility company.
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords.
This can diminish performance, and could result in electric shock or
fire.
Use only No.26 AWG
[a]
or larger,
telephone line cord, if necessary.
Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe operation.
If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters (79”) with a
140V machine, then the gauge should be 16 AWG or larger.Otherwise, it can cause damage to the
machine. Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could result in
electric shock or fire.
[a]
AWG: American Wire Gauge
Maintenance / Checking
Caution
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the
inside of the machine. Do not clean the machine with benzene,
paint thinner or alcohol; do not spray water directly into the
machine.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Keep cleaning supplies
away from children.
Children may get hurt.
When you are working inside the machine replacing supplies or
cleaning the inside, do not operate the machine.
You may get injured.
Do not disassemble,
repair or rebuild the
machine by yourself.
It can cause damage to
the machine. Call a certified
technician when the machine needs
repair.
Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean from dust
or water.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
To clean and operate the
machine, strictly follow the user's
guide provided with the machine.
Otherwise, it can cause damage to
the machine.
Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with screws.
The machine should only be repaired by Dell service technician.
Supply usage
Caution
Do not disassemble the toner cartridge.
Toner dust can be dangerous to humans.
When storing supplies such as toner
cartridges, keep them away from
children.
Toner dust can be dangerous to
humans.
Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner
cartridge or fuser unit.
It can cause an explosion or fire.
Using recycled supplies, such as toner, can
cause damage to the machine.
In case of damage due to the use of recycled
supplies, a service fee will be charged.
When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper,
be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes.
Toner dust can be dangerous to humans.About this user’s guide
This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each
step during actual usage.
Read the safety information before using the machine.
If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting chapter. (See Troubleshooting.)
Terms used in this user’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter. (See Glossary.)
All illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models.
The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows XP.
Convention
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:
Document is synonymous with original.
Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.
Machine refers to printer or MFP.
The following table offers the conventions of this guide:
Convention Description Example
Bold For texts on the display or button names on the machine. Cancel
Note Provides additional information or detailed specification of the
machine function and feature.
The date format may differ from
country to country.
Caution Gives users information to protect the machine from possible
mechanical damage or malfunction.
Do not touch the green underside
of the toner cartridge.
Footnote Provides additional more detailed information on certain words
or a phrase.
a. pages per minute
(“Crossreference”)
Guides users to a reference page for the additional detailed
information.
(See Finding more information.)
Finding more information
You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the following resources, either as a print-out or
on screen.
Material
name
Description
Quick
Install
Guide
This guide provides information on setting up your machine and this requires that you follow the
instructions in the guide to prepare the machine.
User’s
Guide
This guide provides you with step-by-step instructions for using your machine’s full features, and
contains information for maintaining your machine, troubleshooting and replacing supplies.
Printer
Driver
Help
This help provides you with help information on printer driver and instructions for setting up the options
for printing. (See Using help.)
Dell
website
If you have Internet access, you can get help, support, printer drivers, manuals, and order information
from the Dell websites www.dell.com or support.dell.com.Features of your new product
Your new machine is equipped with a number of special features that improve the quality of the documents you print.
Special Features
Print with excellent quality and speed
You can print with a resolution of up to 1,200 x 600 dpi (Dell 1130) and up to 1,200 x 1,200 dpi
(Dell 1130n) effective output.
Dell 1130 prints up to 18 ppm, A4-sized paper or up to 19 ppm, letter sized paper. Dell 1130n
prints up to 24 ppm, A4-sized paper and letter-sized paper.
Handle many different types of printable material
Manual tray supports plain paper in various sizes, letterhead, envelopes, labels, custom-sized
media, postcards, and heavy paper.
The 250-sheet tray supports plain paper.
Create professional documents
Print Watermarks. You can customize your documents with words, such as “Confidential”. (See
Using watermarks.)
Print Posters. The text and pictures of each page of your document are magnified and printed
across the sheet of paper and can then be taped together to form a poster. (See Printing posters.)
You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain paper. (See Using overlay.)
Save time and money
To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper. (See Printing multiple
pages on one sheet of paper.)
This machine automatically conserves electricity by substantially reducing power consumption when
not in use.
To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper (Manual). (See Printing on both sides of
paper (Manual).)
Print in various environments
You can print with Windows as well as Linux and Macintosh systems.
Your machine is equipped with a USB interface.
The Dell 1130n comes with a built-in Network interface, 10/100 BaseTX.
IPv6
This machine supports IPv6 (Dell 1130n only).Features by Models
The machine is designed to support all of your document needs from printing to more advanced networking solutions
for your business.
Features by models include:
FEATURES Dell 1130 Dell 1130n
Hi-Speed USB 2.0
●
[a] ●
Network Interface Ethernet 10/100 BaseTX wired LAN ●
Duplex (2-sided) printing (Manual) ● ●
[a]
USB 1.1
( ●: Included, Blank: Not available)Introduction
This chapter gives you an overview of your machine:
This chapter includes:
Machine overview
Control panel overview
Understanding the control panel
Machine overview
Front view
This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model.
1 Document output tray 6 Manual feeder
2 Control panel 7 Manual feeder guide
3 Front cover handle 8 Output support
4 Front cover 9 Toner cartridge
5 Tray 1
Rear viewThis illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model.
1 Rear cover 3 USB port
2 Network Port
[a]
4 Power receptacle
[a]
Dell 1130n only.
Control panel overview
This control panel may differ from your machine depending on its model.
1 Jam Shows the status of jam occurrence of your machine. (See LEDs.)
2 Online/Error Shows the status of your machine. (See LEDs.)
3 Cancel Stops an operation at any time. Also there are more functions. (See Understanding the
control panel.)
4 Power Turns power on or off. (See Understanding the control panel.)
Understanding the control panel
LEDs
The color of the LEDs indicates the machine's current status.
LED Status Description
Jam ( ) Orange On A paper jam has occurred. (See Clearing paper jams.)
Online/Error
( )
Off The machine is off-line.Green On The machine is in power saver mode.
The machine is on-line and can receive data from the computer.
Blinking When the LED blinks slowly, the machine is receiving data from the computer.
When the LED blinks rapidly , the machine is printing data.
Red On The cover is open. Close the cover.
There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray.
The machine has stopped due to a major error.
Your system has some problems. If this problem occurs, contact your service
representative.
The toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life
[a]
. It is
recommended to replace the toner cartridge. (See Replacing the toner
cartridge.)
Blinking A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be
cleared. When the problem is cleared, the machine resumes.
Toner is low. Replace the cartridge. The estimated cartridge life
[a]
of toner is
close. Prepare a new cartridge for replacement. You may temporarily increase
the printing quality by redistributing the toner. (See Redistributing toner.)
[a]
Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average
capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19752. The number of pages may be affected by
operating environment, printing interval, media type, and media size. Some amount of toner may remain in the
cartridge even when red LED turned on and the printer stops printing.
Dell does not recommend using non-genuine Dell toner cartridge such as refilled or re-manufactured. Dell
cannot guarantee non-genuine Dell toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of using nongenuine Dell toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty.
All printing errors will be appear in the Printer Status Monitor program window. If the problem persists, call for
service.
Buttons
(Cancel button)
By pressing the (cancel button), you can:
Function Description
Printing
demo
page
[a]
In Ready mode, press and hold this button for about 2 seconds until the status LED blinks slowly,
and release. (See Printing a demo page.)
Printing
configuration
sheet
[b]
In Ready mode, press and hold this button for about 5 seconds until the status LED blinks fast, and
release. (See Printing a machine report.)
Printing a
cleaning
sheet
[b]
In Ready mode, press and hold this button for about 10 seconds until the status LED blinks slowly,
and release. (See Cleaning the inside.)
Cancel print
job
Press (cancel button) during printing. The red LED blinks while the print job is cleared from both
the machine and the computer and then the machine returns to ready mode. This may take some
time depending on the size of the print job.
Manual print Press (cancel button) each time you load a sheet of paper in the
manual tray when you select Manual Feeder for Source from your software application.
[a]
When you print the demo page for Dell 1130, configuration sheet is printed as well.
[b]
Dell 1130n only
(Power button)
This button must be used to turn the machine on/off.
Turning on the machine
1. Plug in the power cord.
2. Press (power) on the control panel.If you want to turn the power off, press and hold this button for 1 second.Getting started
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the USB connected machine and software.
This chapter includes:
Setting up the hardware
Printing a demo page
Supplied software
System requirements
Installing USB connected machine’s driver
Sharing your machine locally
Setting up the hardware
This section shows the steps to set up the hardware, as is explained in the Quick Install Guide. Make sure you read the
Quick Install Guide first and follow the steps below:
Location
1. Select a stable location.
Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. Allow extra space to open covers and trays.
The area should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not
set the machine close to the edge of your desk or table.
Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1,000 m (3,281 ft). Refer to the altitude setting to optimize your printing.
(See Altitude adjustment.)
Place the machine on a flat, stable surface so that there is no incline greater than 2 mm (0.08 inch). Otherwise,
printing quality may be affected.
2. Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.3. Remove tape holding the machine.
4. Install the toner cartridge.
5. Load paper. (See Loading paper in the tray.)
6. Make sure that all cables are connected to the machine.
7. Turn the machine on. (See Turning on the machine.)
This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails.
Printing a demo page
Print a demo page to make sure that the machine is operating correctly.
To print a demo page:
In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 2 seconds.
Supplied software
After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer, you must install the printer software using the
supplied CD. The software CD provides you with the following software.
OS Contents
Windows Printer driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine’s features.
Printer Status Monitor: This program allows you to monitor the machine’s status and alerts you
when an error occurs during printing.
Printer Settings Utility (Dell 1130n only): This program allows you to set up printer’s other options
from your computer desktop.
Dell Toner Management System™: Displays the status of the printer and the name of the job when
send a job to print. The Dell Toner Management System™window also displays the level of toner
remaining and allows you to order replacement toner cartridge.
Firmware Update Utility: This program helps you to update printer’s firmware.
SetIP (Dell 1130n only): Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP addresses.
Macintosh Printer Driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine’s features.
Linux Unified Linux Driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine’s features.
System requirements
Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following requirements:
Microsoft® Windows®
Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems.
OPERATING
SYSTEM
Requirement (recommended)
CPU RAM
free HDD
space
Windows 2000 Intel® Pentium® II 400 MHz (Pentium III 933 MHz) 64 MB (128
MB)
600 MB
Windows XP Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (256
MB)
1.5 GB
Windows Server®
2003
Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (512
MB)
1.25 GB to 2
GB
Windows Server
2008
Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz) 512 MB (2048
MB)
10 GB
Windows Vista® Intel® Pentium® IV 3 GHz 512 MB (1024
MB)
15 GB
Windows 7 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher 1 GB (2 GB) 16 GB
Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme).
DVD-R/W Drive
Windows Server Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (x86) or 1.4 GHz (x64) processors 512 MB (2048 10 GB2008 R2 (2 GHz or faster) MB)
Internet Explorer® 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems.
Administrator rights are required to install the software.
Windows Terminal Services is compatible with this machine.
Macintosh
OPERATING
SYSTEM
Requirements (recommended)
CPU RAM
free HDD
space
Mac OS X 10.3 ~
10.4
Intel Processors
PowerPC G4/ G5
128 MB for a PowerPC based Mac
(512 MB)
512 MB for a Intel-based Mac (1 GB)
1 GB
Mac OS X 10.5 Intel Processors
867 MHz or faster Power PC
G4/ G5
512 MB (1 GB) 1 GB
Mac OS X 10.6 Intel Processors 1 GB (2 GB) 1 GB
Linux
Item Requirement (recommended)
Operating system RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64 bit)
Fedora Core 2~10 (32/64 bit)
SuSE Linux 9.1 (32 bit)
OpenSuSE 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2, 10.3, 11.0, 11.1 (32/64 bit)
Mandrake 10.0, 10.1 (32/64 bit)
Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 (32/64 bit)
Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10 (32/64 bit)
SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9, 10 (32/64 bit)
Debian 3.1, 4.0, 5.0 (32/64 bit)
CPU Pentium IV 2.4 GHz (Intel Core™2)
RAM 512 MB (1024 MB)
Free HDD space 1 GB (2 GB)
Installing USB connected machine’s driver
A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer using the USB cable. If your machine is
attached to a network, skip the following steps below and go on to installing network connected machine’s driver. (See
Installing network connected machine’s driver.)
Only use an USB cable shorter than 3 m (118 in. ).
Windows
You can install the machine software using the typical or custom method.
The following steps below are recommended for most users who use a machine directly connected to your computer.
All components necessary for machine operations will be installed.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the computer and powered on.
If the “Found New Hardware Wizard” window appears during the installation procedure, click Cancel in
close the window.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.
The software CD should automatically run and an installation window should appear.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X”
with the letter which represents your CD/DVD drive. Click OK.
If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents your CD/DVD drive and click OK.If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account Control
windows.
3. Click Next.
If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
4. Select Typical installation for a local printer. Then, click Next.
The Custom allows you to select the machine’s connection and choose individual component to install. Follow
the on-screen instructions.
If your machine is not connected to the computer, the following window will appear.After connecting the machine, click Next.
If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click Next, and No on the following screen. The
installation starts and a test page will not print at the end of the installation.
The installation window in this user guide may differ depending on the machine and interface in use.
5. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test
page, select the checkbox and click Next. Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 7.
6. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.
7. Click Finish.
If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to repair or reinstall the driver.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and powered on.
2. From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer
driver name > Maintenance.
3. Select the option as you wish, follow the instruction on the window.
Macintosh
The software CD that came with your machine provides you with the PPD file that allows you to use the CUPS driver
or Apple LaserWriter driver (only available when you use a machine which supports the PostScript driver) for printing
on a Macintosh computer.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.
3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.
4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
6. Enter the password and click OK.
7. The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue.
8. Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for most users. All components necessary
for machine operations will be installed.
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to install.
9. When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, click Continue.
10. After the installation is finished, click Quit.
11. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility.
For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax.
12. Click Add on the Printer List.
For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click the “+” icon; a display window will pop up.
13. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the USB tab.
For Mac OS X10.4, click Default Browser and find the USB connection.
For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click Default and find the USB connection.14. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Dell in Printer Model and your machine name
in Model Name.
For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Dell in Print Using and your machine
name in Model.
For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Select a driver to use... and your
machine name in Print Using.
Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default machine.
15. Click Add.
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.
Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.
3. Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.
4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
6. Enter the password and click OK.
7. The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue.
8. Select Uninstall and click Uninstall.
9. When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, Click
Continue.
10. When the uninstall is done, click Quit.
Linux
Follow the steps below to install the driver for Linux. While installing the driver, the Unified Linux Driver package will
automatically be installed as well.
The supplied software CD provides you with the Unified Linux Driver package for using your machine with a
Linux computer easily in UI based management tool. (See Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator.)
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
2. When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the Login field and enter the system password.
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you are not a super user, ask your
system administrator.
3. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.
The software CD will run automatically.
If the software CD does not run automatically, click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal
screen appears, type in the following:
If the software CD is secondary master and the location to mount is /mnt/cdrom,
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/cdrom
[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux
[root@localhost Linux]#./install.sh
If you still failed to run the software CD type the followings in sequence:
[root@localhost root]#umount /dev/hdc
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/cdrom
The installation program runs automatically if you have an autorun software package installed and
configured.
4. When the welcome screen appears, click Next.5. When the installation is complete, click Finish.
The installation program has added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon and the Unified Driver group to the
system menu for your convenience. If you have any difficulties, consult the on screen help that is available through
your system menu or can otherwise be called from the driver package Windows applications, such as Unified Driver
Configurator or Image Manager.
Installing the driver in the text mode:
If you do not use the graphical interface or have been unable to install the driver, you have to use the driver
in the text mode.
Follow the steps 1 to 3, then type [root@localhost Linux]# ./install.sh. Follow the instructions on the
terminal screen. The installation is completed.
When you want to uninstall the driver, follow the installation instructions above, but type [root@localhost
Linux]# ./uninstall.sh on the terminal screen.
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.
Follow the steps below steps to uninstall the driver for Linux.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
2. When the Administrator Login window appears, type in “root” in the Login field and enter the system
password.
You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the printer driver. If you are not a super user, ask
your system administrator.
3. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.
The software CD will run automatically.
If the software CD does not run automatically, click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the
Terminal screen appears, type in:
If the software CD is secondary master and the location to mount is /mnt/cdrom,
[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/cdrom
[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux
[root@localhost Linux]#./uninstall.sh
The installation program runs automatically if you have an autorun software package installed and
configured.
4. Click Uninstall.
5. Click Next.
6. Click Finish.
Sharing your machine locally
Follow the steps below to set up the computers to share your machine locally.
If the Host computer is directly connected to the machine with USB cable and is also connected to the local network
environment, the client computer connected to the local network can use the shared machine through the host
computer to print.1 Host computer A computer which is directly connected to the machine by USB cable.
2 Client computers Computers which use the machine shared through the host computer.
Windows
Setting up a host computer
1. Install your printer driver. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver, Installing network connected
machine’s driver.)
2. Click the Windows Start menu.
3. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes.
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers.
4. Right click your printer icon.
5. For Windows XP/Server 2003/ Server 2008/Vista, press Properties.
For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printer properties.
If Printer properties item has ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected
printer.
6. Select the Sharing tab.
7. Check the Change Sharing Options.
8. Check the Share this printer.
9. Fill in the Share Name field. Click OK.
Setting up a client computer
1. Install your printer driver. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver, Installing network connected
machine’s driver.)
2. Click the Windows Start menu.
3. Select All programs > Accessories > Windows Explorer.
4. Enter the IP address of the host computer in the address bar and press Enter in your keyboard.
In case host computer requires User name and Password, fill in User ID and password of the host
computer account.
5. Right click the printer icon you want to share and select Connect.
6. If a set up complete message appears, click OK.
7. Open the file you want to print and start printing.
Macintosh
The following steps are for Mac OS X 10.5~10.6. Refer to Mac Help for other OS versions.
Setting up a host computer
1. Install your printer driver. (See Macintosh.)
2. Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax.
3. Select the printer to share in the Printers list.
4. Select Share this printer.
Setting up a client computer1. Install your printer driver. (See Macintosh.)
2. Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax.
3. Click the “+” icon.
A display window showing the name of your shared printer appears.
4. Select your machine and click Add.Network setup (Dell 1130n only)
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the network connected machine and software.
This chapter includes:
Network environment
Introducing useful network programs
Using a wired network
Installing network connected machine’s driver
IPv6 Configuration
Network environment
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine.
The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine:
Item Requirements
Network interface Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX
Network operating system Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista/7/2008 Server R2
Various Linux OS
Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.6
Network protocols TCP/IPv4
DHCP, BOOTP
DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP
Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR, IPP
SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec
TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec
(See IPv6 Configuration.)
Introducing useful network programs
There are several programs available to setup the network settings in network environment.
Before using the programs below, set the IP address first.
Embedded Web Service
Web server embedded on your network machine, which allows you to:
Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to various network environments.
Customize machine settings.
(See Using Embedded Web Service (Dell 1130n only).)
SetIP
This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually configure the IP addresses for use with
the TCP/IP protocol. (See IP setting using SetIP Program)
TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program.
Using a wired network
You must set up the network protocols on your machine to use it on your network. This chapter will show you how this
is accomplished.
You can use network after connecting network cable to a corresponding port on your machine.Printing network configuration report
You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine's control panel that will show the current
machine’s network settings. This will help you to set up a network and troubleshooting problems.
To print the report:
In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s MAC address
and IP address.
For example:
MAC Address : 00:15:99:41:A2:78
IP Address : 192.0.0.192
Setting IP address
Firstly, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements. In most cases a new IP address
will be automatically assigned by a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located on the network.
In a few situations the IP address must be set manually. This is called a static IP and is often required in corporate
Intranets for security reasons.
DHCP IP assignment: Connect your machine to the network, and wait a few minutes for the DHCP server to
assign an IP address to the machine. Then, print the Network Configuration Report as explained above. If the
report shows that the IP address has changed, the assignment was successful. You will see the new IP address in
the report.
Static IP assignment: Use SetIP program to change the IP address from your computer.
In an office environment, we recommend that you contact a network administrator to set this address for you.
IP setting using SetIP Program
This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your machine using its MAC address to
communicate with the machine. A MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and can
be found in the Network Configuration Report.
For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing by performing the following:
1. Open Start > All programs > Control Panel.
2. Double click Security Center.
3. Click Windows Firewall.
4. Disable the firewall.
Installing the program
1. Insert the supplied software CD provided with your machine. When the driver CD runs automatically, close
that window.
2. Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive. (X represents your CD/DVD drive.)
3. Double-click Application > SetIP.
4. Double-click Setup.exe to install this program.
5. Click OK. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
6. Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation.
Starting the program
1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
2. Turned on the machine.
3. From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Dell Printers > SetIP > SetIP.
4. Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP configuration window.
5. Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as follows. In a corporate intranet, you
may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding.MAC Address : Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8.
IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer.
For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150, enter 192.168.1.X. (X is number between 1
and 254 other than the computer’s address.)
Subnet Mask: Enter a Subnet Mask.
Default Gateway: Enter a Default Gateway.
6. Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration Report.
Confirm that all the settings are correct.
7. Click Exit to close the SetIP program.
8. If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall.
Network parameter setting
You can also set up the various network settings through the network administration programs such as Embedded
Web Service.
Restoring factory default settings
You may need to reset the machine to the factory default settings when machine that you are using is connected to
new network environment.
Restoring factory default settings using Embedded Web Service
1. Start a web browser and enter your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
For example,
2. When the Embedded Web Service window opens, click Network Settings.
3. Click Reset. Then, click Clear for network.
4. Turn off and restart machine to apply settings.
Installing network connected machine’s driver
Windows
You can set up the machine driver, follow the steps below.
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered on.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.
The software CD should automatically run and an installation window appear.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X”
with the letter which represents your drive. Click OK.
If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive and click OK.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account Control
windows.
3. Click Next.
If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
4. Select Typical installation for a network printer. Then, click Next.
The Custom Installation allows you to select the machine’s connection and choose individual component to
install. Follow the guide on the window.
5. The list of printers available on the network appears. Select the printer you want to install from the list and then
click Next.If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add
your printer to the network. To add the printer to the network, enter the port name and the IP address for
the printer.
To verify your printer’s IP address, print a Network Configuration page. (By pressing the (cancel button)
for about 5 seconds, then release. (Example IP Address is 13.121.52.104)
To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name
manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button.
If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn off the firewall and click Update.
For Windows operating system, Start > Control Panel and start windows firewall, and deactivate this
option. For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide.
6. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test
page, select the checkbox and click Next. Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 8.
7. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.
8. Click Finish.
After the driver setup, you may enable firewall.
If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to repair or reinstall the driver.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and powered on.
2. From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer
driver name > Maintenance.
3. Select the option as you wish, follow the instruction on the window.
Macintosh
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address
should have been set.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.
3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.
4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
6. Enter the password and click OK.
7. The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue.
8. Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for most users. All components necessary
for machine operations will be installed.
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to install.
9. The message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears. Click Continue.
10. After the installation is finished, click Quit.
11. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility.
For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax.12. Click Add on the Printer List.
For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click the “+” icon; a display window will pop up.
13. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the IP Printing tab.
For Mac OS X10.4, click IP Printer.
For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click IP.
14. Select Socket/HP Jet Direct in Printer Type.
When printing a document containing many pages, printing performance may be enhanced by choosing
Socket for Printer Type option.
15. Enter the machine’s IP address in the Printer Address field.
16. Enter the queue name in the Queue Name field. If you cannot determine the queue name for your machine
server, try using the default queue first.
17. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Dell in Printer Model and your machine name
in Model Name.
For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Dell in Print Using and your machine
name in Model.
For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Select a driver to use... and your
machine name in Print Using.
Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default machine.
18. Click Add.
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.
Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.
3. Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.
4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
6. Enter the password and click OK.
7. The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue.
8. Select Uninstall and click Uninstall.
9. When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, Click
Continue.
10. When the uninstall is done, click Quit.
Linux
Install Linux Driver
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address
should have been set.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.
3. Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Linux desktop.
4. Double-click the Linux folder.
5. Double-click the install.sh icon.
6. The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue.
7. The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.
8. Select Network printer and click Search button.
9. The Printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field.
10. Select your machine and click Next.
Add network Printer
1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator.
2. Click Add Printer…
3. The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.
4. Select Network printer and click the Search button.
5. The printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field.
6. Select your machine and click Next.
Input the printer description and Next7.
8. When the add printer is done, click Finish.
IPv6 Configuration
TCP/IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher.
If the IPv6 network seems not working, set all the network setting to the factory defaults and try again. (See
Restoring factory default settings.)
To use the IPv6 network environment, follow the next procedure to use the IPv6 address:
The machine is provided with IPv6 feature on.
1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
2. Turned on the machine.
3. Print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control panel that will check IPv6 addresses.
4. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers > Add Printer.
5. Click Add a local printer on the Add Printer windows.
6. Follow the instruction on the window.
If the machine does not work in the network environment, activate IPv6. Refer to the next section followed by.
Printing network configuration report
You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine's control panel that will show the current
machine’s network settings. This will help you to set up a network and troubleshooting problems.
To print the report:
In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s MAC address
and IP address.
For example:
MAC Address : 00:15:99:41:A2:78
IP Address : 192.0.0.192
Setting IPv6 addresses
Machine supports following IPv6 addresses for network printing and managements.
Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address. (Address starts with FE80.)
Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network router.
Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server.
Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user.
Manual address configuration
1. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL. (See Using Embedded
Web Service (Dell 1130n only).)
For IPv4, enter the IPv4 address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or
click Go.
2. When the Embedded Web Service window opens, click Network Settings.
3. Click TCP/IP.
4. Enable the Manual Address In the TCP/IPv6 section.
5. Select the Router Prefix and click the Add button, then the router prefix will automatically be entered into the
address field.
Enter the rest of address. (ex: 3FFE:10:88:194::AAAA. “A” is the hexadecimal 0 through 9, A through F.)
6. Click the Apply button.
Installing printer driver
Driver installation for network printer in IPv6 network environment is same as TCP/IPv4. (See Installing network
connected machine’s driver.)
Select TCP/IP Port and when the list of machines is displayed, simply select your machine's IPv6 address.
Using Embedded Web Service
1. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL .
2. Select one of the IPv6 addresses (Link-local Address, Stateless Address, Stateful Address, Manual
Address) from Network Configuration Report.3. Enter the IPv6 addresses. (ex: http://[FE80::215:99FF:FE66:7701])
Address must be enclosed in '[]' brackets.Basic setup
After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine’s default settings. Refer to the next section if you would
like to set or change values. This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the machine.
This chapter includes:
Altitude adjustment
Setting the default tray and paper
Changing font setting (Dell 1130n only)
Altitude adjustment
The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined by the height of the machine above sea
level. The following information will guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality of
print.Before you set the altitude value, find the altitude where you are using the machine.
1. High 1
2. High 2
3. High 3
4. Normal
For Dell 1130
1. Install the driver. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver or Installing network connected machine’s
driver.)
2. Click the Windows Start menu.
For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers.
3. Select the your machine’s driver and right-click to open Properties.
4. In printer driver properties, select Device Options.
5. Select necessary options in the Altitude Adjustment drop-down list.
6. Click OK.
For Dell 1130n
You can altitude adjustment in Printer Settings Utility.
1. You can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your
printer driver name > Printer Settings Utility.
2. Select necessary options in the Altitude Adjustment drop-down list.
3. Click the Apply button.
This can also be adjusted via Embedded Web Service.
Setting the default tray and paper
You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing job.In the computer
Windows
1. Click the Windows Start menu.
2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers.
3. Right-click your machine.
4. For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, press Printing Preferences.
For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printing Preferences.
If Printing Preferences item has ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected
printer.
5. Click Paper tab.
6. Select tray and its options, such as paper size and type.
7. Press OK.
Macintosh
Macintosh does not support this function. Macintosh users need to change the default setting manually each time
they want to print using other settings.
1. Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print.
2. Open the File menu and click Print.
3. Go to Paper Feed pane.
4. Open the File menu and click Print.
5. Go to Paper Feed.
6. Set appropriate tray from which you want to print.
7. Go to Paper pane.
8. Set paper type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print.
9. Click Print to print.
Using power saving feature
When you are not using the machine for a while, use this feature to save power.
For Dell 1130
1. Install the driver. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver or Installing network connected machine’s
driver.)
2. Click the Windows Start menu.
For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers.
3. Select the your machine’s driver and right-click to open Properties.
4. In printer driver properties, select Device Options.
5. Select the time you want, in the Power Save drop-down list.
6. Click OK.
For Dell 1130n
You change power save in Printer Settings Utility.
1. You can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your
printer driver name > Printer Settings Utility.
2. Click Power Save. Select the appropriate value from the dropdown list, and then click Apply.
Changing font setting (Dell 1130n only)Your machine has preset font setting depending on your region or country.
If you want to change the font or set the font for special condition, such as the DOS environment, you can change the
font setting as follows:
1. Ensure that you have installed the printer driver with the provided software CD.
2. If you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell >
Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Printer Settings Utility.
3. Click Emulation Type.
4. Select your preferred font.
5. Click Apply.
Following information shows the proper font list for corresponding languages.
Russian: CP866, ISO 8859/5 Latin Cyrillic
Hebrew: Hebrew 15Q, Hebrew-8, Hebrew-7 (Israel only)
Greek: ISO 8859/7 Latin Greek, PC-8 Latin/Greek
Arabic & Farsi: HP Arabic-8, Windows Arabic, Code Page 864, Farsi, ISO 8859/6 Latin Arabic
OCR: OCR-A, OCR-BMedia and tray
This chapter provides information on how to load print media into your machine.
This chapter includes:
Selecting print media
Changing the tray size
Loading paper in the tray
Printing on special media
Using the output support
Selecting print media
You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies. Always use print
media that meet the guidelines for use with your machine.
Guidelines to select the print media
Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this user’s guide may cause the following problems:
Poor print quality
Increased paper jams
Premature wear on the machine.
Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are important factors that affect the machine’s
performance and the output quality. When you choose print materials, consider the following:
The type, size and weight of the print media for your machine are described in print media specifications. (See
Print media specifications.)
Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate for your project.
Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce sharper, more vibrant images.
Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how crisp the printing looks on the paper.
Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and still not produce satisfactory results. This
may be the result of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels, or other variables
over which cannot be controlled.
Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it meets the requirements specified in this
user’s guide.
Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs
are not covered by the warranty or service agreements.
The amount of paper put into the tray may differ according to media type used. (See Print media
specifications.)
Media sizes supported in each mode
Mode Size Type Source
Simplex printing For details about paper size, see Print
media specifications.
For details about paper type, see Print
media specifications.
tray 1
manual
tray
Duplex printing
(Manual)
[a]
Letter, A4, Legal, US Folio, Oficio Plain, Color, Preprinted, Recycled, Bond,
Archive
tray 1
[a]
75 to 90 g/m2
(20~24 lb bond) only
Changing the tray size
The tray is preset to Letter or A4 size, depending on your country. To change the size, you need to adjust the paper
guides.1. Support guide
2. Paper length guide
3. Guide lock
4. Paper width guide
1. With one hand press and hold the guide lock, and with the other hand, hold the paper length guide and support
guide together. Slide the paper length guide and support guide to locate them in the correct paper size slot.
2. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading papers. Insert the paper into the tray.
3. After inserting paper into the tray, adjust the support guide so that it lightly touches the paper stack.
4. Squeeze the paper width guides and slide them to the desired paper size marked at the bottom of the tray.
Do not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to warp.
If you do not adjust the paper width guide, it may cause paper jams.Do not use a paper with more than 6 mm curl.
Loading paper in the tray
Tray 1
1. Pull out the paper tray . And adjust the tray size to the media size you are loading. (See Changing the tray size.)
2. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading papers.
3. And place paper with the side you want to print facing down.
4. Set the paper type and size for the tray 1. (See Setting the default tray and paper.)
If you experience problems with paper feeding, check whether the paper meets the media specification. (See
Print media specifications.)
Manual tray
The manual tray can hold special sizes and types of print material, such as postcards, note cards, and envelopes. It
is useful for single page printing on letterhead or colored paper.
Tips on using the manual tray
If you select Manual Feeder for Source from your software application, you need to press (cancel button)
each time you print a page and load only one type, size and weight of print media at a time in the manual
tray.
To prevent paper jams, do not add paper while printing. This also applies to other types of print media.
Print media should be loaded face up with the top edge going into the manual tray first and be placed in the
center of the tray.
Always load the specified print media only to avoid paper jams and print quality problems. (See Print media
specifications.)
Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading them into the manual tray.
1. Load the paper in the manual tray.Do not force the paper beyond the surface with mark when loading.
When printing the special media, you must follow the loading guideline. (See Printing on special
media.)
When papers overlap when printing using manual tray, open tray 1 and remove overlapping papers
then try printing again.
When paper does not feed well while printing, push the paper in manually until it starts feeding
automatically.
2. Squeeze the manual tray paper guides and adjust them to the width of the paper. Do not force them too
much, or the paper will bent resulting in a paper jam or skew.
3. To print in application, open an application and start the print menu.
4. Open Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.)
5. Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences, and select an appropriate paper type.
For example, if you want to use a label, set the paper type to Label.
6. Select Manual Feeder in paper source, then press OK.
7. Start printing in application.
If you are printing multiple pages, load the next sheet after the first page prints out, and press the
(cancel button). Repeat this step for every page to be printed.
Printing on special media
The table below shows the available special media for each tray.
When using special media, we recommend you feed one paper at a time. Check the maximum input number of
media for each tray. (See Print media specifications.)
Types Tray 1 Manual tray
Plain ● ●
Thick ● ●
Thin ● ●
Bond ●
Color ●
CardStock ●
Labels ●
Transparency ●
Envelope ●
Preprinted ●
Cotton ●
Recycled ● ●
Archive ● ●
( ●: supported, Blank: Not supported)
The media types are shown in the Printing Preferences. This paper type option allows you to set the type of paper to
be loaded in the tray. This setting appears in the list, so that you can select it. This will let you get the best quality
printout. If not, the desired print quality may not be achieved.
2Plain: 60 to 120 g/m (16 to 32 lb) Normal plain paper.
Thick: 90 (24 lb) thick paper.
Thin: 60 to 70 g/m2
(16 to 19 lb) thin paper.
Bond: 105 to 120 g/m2
(28 to 32 lb) bond.
Color: 75 to 90 g/m2
(20 to 24 lb) color-backgrounded paper.
CardStock: 105 to 163 g/m2
(24 to 43 lb) cardstock.
Labels: 120 to 150 g/m2
(32 to 40 lb) labels.
Transparency: 138 to 146 g/m2
(37 to 39 lb) transparency paper.
Envelope: 75 to 90 g/m2
(20 to 24 lb) envelope.
Preprinted: 75 to 90 g/m2
(20 to 24 lb) preprinted/letterhead paper.
Cotton: 75 to 90 g/m2
(20 to 24 lb) cotton paper.
Recycled: 75 to 90 g/m2
(20 to 24 lb) recycled paper.
When you use recycled paper, printouts might be wrinkled.
Archive: 70 to 90 g/m2
(19 to 24 lb) If you need to keep the print-out for a long period time, such as archives,
select this option.
Envelope
Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes.
To print an envelope, the stamp area is on the left side and the end of the envelope with the stamp area enters the
printer first and center of the manual tray.
If envelopes are printed out with wrinkles, crease or black bold lines, open the rear cover and pull down the pressure
lever and try printing again. Keep the rear cover opened during printing.
1. Pressure lever
When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors:
Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90 g/m2
otherwise, jam may occur.
Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl, and should not contain air.
Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked, nor damaged.
Temperature: Use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the machine during
operation.
Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp-and well-creased folds.
Do not use stamped envelopes.
Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining, self-adhesive seals, or other synthetic
materials.Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.
Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the corner of the envelope.
1. Acceptable
2. Unacceptable
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives
compatible with the machine’s fusing temperature about 170°C (338 °F) for 0.1 second. The extra flaps and
strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams, and may even damage the fuser.
For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm from the edges of the envelope.
Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet.
Transparency
To avoid damaging the machine, only use transparencies designed for use in laser printers.
Transparencies used in the machine must be able to withstand machine’s fusing temperature.
Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine.
Do not leave unused transparencies in the paper tray for long periods of time. Dust and dirt may accumulate on
them, resulting in spotty printing.
To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle them carefully.
To avoid fading, do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged sunlight.
Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled, or have any torn edges.
Do not use transparencies that separates from the backing sheet.
To prevent transparencies from sticking to each other, do not let the printed sheets stack up as they are begin
printed out.
Labels
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for use in laser machines.
When selecting labels, consider the following factors:
Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at your machine’s fusing temperature about 170°C (338
°F).
Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them. Labels can peel off sheets that have
spaces between the labels, causing serious jams.
Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of curl in any direction.
Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of separation.
Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels. Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off
during printing, which can cause paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine components.
Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The adhesive backing is designed for only a
single pass through the machine.Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged.
Card stock/Custom-sized paper
Postcards, cards and other custom-sized materials can be printed with this machine.
Do not print on media smaller than 76 mm (3.00 inches) wide or 127 mm (5.00 inches) long.
In the software application, set margins at least 6.4 mm (0.25 inches) away from the edges of the material.
If media weight is over 160 g/m2
(43 lb), try printing in the rear cover (face up).
Letterhead/Preprinted paper
Single-sided Double-sided
Tray1 Face down Face up
Manual tray Face up Face down
Letterhead/ Preprinted paper must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt, vaporize, or release
hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine’s fusing temperature about 170°C (338 °F) for 0.1 second.
Letterhead/ Preprinted paper ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely affect machine rollers.
Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage.
Before you load letterhead/preprinted paper, verify that the ink on the paper is dry. During the fusing process,
wet ink can come off preprinted paper, reducing print quality.
Photo
Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine. It could cause damage to the machine.
Glossy
Load one paper to the manual tray at a time, glossy side facing up.
Recommended media: Glossy paper (Letter) for this machine by HP Brochure Paper (Product: Q6611A) only.
Recommended media: Glossy paper (A4) for this machine by HP Superior Paper 160 glossy (Product:
Q6616A).
Using the output support
The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large number of pages at once. Make sure that you
do not touch the surface, and do not allow children near it.
The printed pages stack on the output support, and the output support will help the printed pages to align. The printer
sends output to the output tray by default. To use the output tray, make sure that the rear cover is closed.If you are using A5 paper, fold the output tray. Otherwise, printed pages might be mis-aligned or jammed.Printing
This chapter explains common printing tasks.
This chapter includes:
Printer driver features
Basic printing
Opening printing preferences
Using help
Using special print features
Changing the default print settings
Setting your machine as a default machine
Printing to a file (PRN)
Macintosh printing
Linux printing
The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows XP.
Printer driver features
Your printer drivers support the following standard features:
Paper orientation, size, source, and media type selection
Number of copies
In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following table shows a general overview of features
supported by your printer drivers:
Some models or operating system may not support the certain feature(s) in the following table.
Printer driver
Feature Windows
Machine quality option ●
Poster printing ●
Multiple pages per sheet ●
Booklet printing (manual) ●
Fit to page printing ●
Reduce and enlarge printing ●
Different source for first page ●
Watermark ●
Overlay ●
Double-sided printing (manual) ●
( ●: supported, Blank: Not supported)
Basic printing
Your machine allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh, or Linux applications. The exact steps for printing a
document may vary depending on the application you use.
Your Printing Preferences window that appears in this user’s guide may differ depending on the machine in
use. However, the composition of the Printing Preferences window is similar. Check the operating system(s)
that are compatible with your machine. Refer to the OS compatibility section of Printer Specifications. (See
System requirements.)
When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see a warning mark, , or . An exclamationmark ( ) means you can select that certain option but it is not recommended, and ( ) mark means you
cannot select that option due to the machine’s setting or environment.
The following procedure describes the general steps required for printing from various Windows applications.
Macintosh basic printing. (See Macintosh printing.)
Linux basic printing. (See Linux printing.)
The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows XP. Your Printing Preferences window may
differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are using.
1. Open the document you want to print.
2. Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears.
3. Select your machine from the Select Printer list.
The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range are selected within the Print window.
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in
the application’s Print window to change the print setting. (See Opening printing preferences.)
4. To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window.
Canceling a print job
If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as follows:
1. Click the Windows Start menu.
2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers.
3. For Windows 2000, XP, Server 2003 and Vista, double-click your machine.
For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, right click your printer icon > context menus > See what’s
printing.
If See what’s printing item has ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected
printer.
4. From the Document menu, select Cancel.
You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon ( ) in the Windows task bar.
You can also cancel the current job by pressing on the control panel.
Opening printing preferencesYou can preview the settings you selected on the upper right of the Printing Preferences.
1. Open the document you want to print.
2. Select Print from the file menu. The Print window appears.
3. Select your machine from the Select Printer.
4. Click Properties or Preferences.
Using a favorite setting
The Presets option, which is visible on each preferences tab except for Dell tab, allows you to save the current
preferences settings for future use.
To save a Presets item:
1. Change the settings as needed on each tab.
2. Enter a name for the item in the Presets input box.
3. Click Add. When you save Presets, all current driver settings are saved.
If you click Add, the Add button changes to Update button. Select more options and click Update, settings will be
added to the Presets you made.
To use a saved setting, select it from the Presets drop down list. The machine is now set to print according to the
setting you selected.
To delete saved setting, select it from the Presets drop down list and click Delete.
You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by selecting Default Preset from the Presets drop down
list.Using help
Click the question mark from the upper-right corner of the window and click on any option you want to know about.
Then a pop up window appears with information about that option's feature which is provided from the driver.
If you want to search information via a keyword, click the Dell tab in the Printing Preferences window, and enter a
keyword in the input line of the Help option. To get information about supplies, driver update or registration and so
on, click appropriate buttons.
Using special print features
Special print features include:
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper.
Printing posters.
Printing booklets (Manual).
Printing on both sides of paper (Manual).
Change percentage of your document.
Fitting your document to a selected paper size.
Using watermarks.
Using overlay.
Advanced Options.
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the
pages will be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing
preferences.)
2. Click the Basic tab, select Multiple Pages Per Side in the Type drop-down list.
3. Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet (2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) in the Pages per Side drop-down list.
4. Select the page order from the Page Order drop-down list, if necessary.
5. Check Print Page Border to print a border around each page on the sheet.
6. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type.
7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Printing posters
This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4, 9, or 16 sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting
the sheets together to form one poster-size document.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing
preferences.)
2. Click the Basic tab, select Poster Printing in the Type drop-down list.
3. Select the page layout you want.
Specification of the page layout:
Poster 2x2: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 4 pages.
Poster 3x3: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 9 pages.
Poster 4x4: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 16 pages.
4. Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button
on the upper right of Basic tab to make it easier to paste the sheets together.5. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type.
6. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
7. You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together.
Printing booklets (Manual)
This feature prints your document on both sides of a paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded
in half after printing to produce a booklet.
If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized print media.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access the Printing Preferences. (See Opening
printing preferences.)
2. Click the Basic tab, select Booklet Printing from the Type drop-down list.
3. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type.
The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. In order to find out the available paper size
for this feature, select the available paper size in the Size option on the Paper tab.
If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be automatically canceled. Select only available
paper. (paper without or mark).
4. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
5. After printing, fold and staple the pages.
Printing on both sides of paper (Manual)
You can print on both sides of a paper; duplex. Before printing, decide how you want your document oriented. You
can use this feature with Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized paper. (See Print media specifications.)
We recommend not to print on both sides of the special media, such as labels, envelopes, or thick paper to
print on both sides of paper. It may cause a paper jam or damage the machine.
The Double-Sided Printing (Manual) feature is available only for the tray 1.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing
preferences.)
2. Click the Advanced tab.
3. From the Double-Sided Printing (Manual) section, select the binding option you want.
None
Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding.
Short Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in calendars.
4. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type.
5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
If your machine does not have a duplex unit, you should complete the printing job manually. The machine
prints every other page of the document first. After that, a message appears on your computer. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the printing job.
Change percentage of your document
You can change the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by typing in a percentage
you want.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing
preferences.)
2. Click the Paper tab.
3. Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box.
You can also click the up/down arrows to select the scaling rate.
4. Select the Size, Source, and Type in Paper Options.
5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Fitting your document to a selected paper size
This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the document size.
This can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing
preferences.)
2. Click the Paper tab.
3. Select the paper size you want from the Fit to Page.
4. Select the Size, Source, and Type in Paper Options.
5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Using watermarks
The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you use it when you want to
have large gray letters reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a
document.
There are several predefined watermarks that come with the machine. They can be modified, or you can add new
ones to the list.
Using an existing watermark
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening
printing preferences.)
2. Click the Advanced tab, and select the desired watermark from the Watermark drop-down list. You will see
the selected watermark in the preview image.
3. Click OK or Print until you exit the print window.
Creating a watermark
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening
printing preferences.)
2. From the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window
appears.
3. Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box. You can enter up to 256 characters. The message
displays in the preview window.When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark prints on the first page only.
4. Select watermark options.
You can select the font name, style, size, and shade from the Font Attributes section, as well as set the
angle of the watermark from the Message Angle section.
5. Click Add to add a new watermark to the Current Watermarks list.
6. When you have finished editing, click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
To stop printing the watermark, select None from the Watermark drop-down list.
Editing a watermark
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening
printing preferences.)
2. Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window
appears.
3. Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark
message and options.
4. Click Update to save the changes.
5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Deleting a watermark
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening
printing preferences.)
2. Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window
appears.
3. Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete.
4. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Using overlay
An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be
printed on any document. Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper. Rather than using
preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing exactly the same information that is currently on your
letterhead. To print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in
the machine just print the letterhead overlay on your document.
Creating a new page overlay
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image.
1. Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a new page overlay. Position the items
exactly as you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay.
2. To save the document as an overlay, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.)
3. Click the Advanced tab, and select Edit from the Text drop-down list. Edit Overlay window appears.
4. In the Edit Overlay window, click Create.
5. In the Save As window, type a name of up to eight characters in the File name box. Select the destination
path, if necessary. (The default is C:\Formover.)
6. Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List.
7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
8. The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk drive.
The overlay document size must be the same as the document you print with the overlay. Do not create an
overlay with a watermark.
Using a page overlay
After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with your document. To print an overlay with a
document:
1. Create or open the document you want to print.
2. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Openingprinting preferences.)
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list.
5. If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop-down list, select Edit from the list and click
Load. Select the overlay file you want to use.
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source, you can also load the file when you
access the Open window.
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing.
Select the overlay from the Overlay List box.
6. If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If this box is checked, a message window
appears each time you submit a document for printing, asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on
your document.
If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the overlay automatically prints with your
document.
7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
The selected overlay prints on your document.
The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the
overlay.
Deleting a page overlay
You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.
1. In the Printing Preferences window, click the Advanced tab.
2. Select Edit in the Overlay drop down list.
3. Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box.
4. Click Delete.
5. When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.
6. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Advanced Options
Use the following Graphics options to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing
preferences.)
2. Click the Graphics tab.
This options you can select may vary depending on your printer model.
Refer to the online help for each option’s information provided from the Printing Preferences.
Font/ Text: Select Darken Text to print texts darker than on a normal document. Use All Text Black to
prints solid black, regardless of the color it appears on the screen.
Advanced (Dell 1130n only): You can set advanced settings by clicking the Advanced button.
True Type Options: This option determines what the driver tells the printer about how to image the
text in your document. Select the appropriate setting according to the status of your document.
Download as Outline: When this option is selected, the driver will download any TrueType fonts
that are used in your document not already stored (resident) on your printer. If, after printing a
document, you find that the fonts did not print correctly, choose Download as bit image and
resubmit your print job. The Download as bit image setting is often useful when printing Adobe®.
Download as Bit Image: When this option is selected, the driver will download the font data as
bitmap images. Documents with complicated fonts, such as Korean or Chinese, or various other
fonts, will print faster in this setting.
Print as Graphics: When this option is selected, the driver will download any fonts as graphics.
When printing documents with high graphic content and relatively few TrueType fonts, printing
performance (speed) may be enhanced in this setting.
Use Printer Fonts: When Use Printer Fonts is checked, the printer uses the fonts that are stored in
its memory (resident fonts) to print your document, rather than downloading the fonts used in your
document. Because downloading fonts takes time, selecting this option can speed up your printing time.
When using Printer fonts, the printer will try to match the fonts used in your document to those stored
in its memory. If, however, you use fonts in your document that are very different from those resident
in the printer, your printed output will appear very different from what it looks like on the screen.
Graphic Controller: Fine Edge allows user to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving
readability.
Toner Save: Selecting this option extends the life of your toner cartridge and reduces your cost per pagewithout a significant reduction in print quality.
Printer Setting: If you select this option, this feature is determined by the setting you’ve made from
the machine.
On: Select this option to allow the printer to use less toner on each page.
Off: If you do not need to save toner when printing a document, select this option.
Darkness: The option adjusts the toner density on print outputs. The values are Normal, Light, and Dark.
For Dell 1130n, you change darknesss in the Printer Settings Utility.
3. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Changing the default print settings
Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the printer driver. Change all print settings
available in the software application first, and change any remaining settings using the printer driver.
1. Click the Windows Start menu.
2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes.
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers.
3. Right-click your machine.
4. For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, press Printing Preferences.
For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printing preferences.
If Printing preferences item has ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer.
5. Change the settings on each tab.
6. Click OK.
If you want to change the settings for each print job, change it in Printing Preferences.
Setting your machine as a default machine
1. Click the Windows Start menu.
2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes.
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers.
3. Select your machine.
4. Right-click your machine and select Set as Default Printer.
For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2
If Set as default printer item has ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected
printer.
Printing to a file (PRN)
You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file.
To create a file:
1. Check the Print to file box at the Print window.2. Click Print.
3. Type in the destination path and the file name, and then click OK.
For example c:\Temp\file name.
If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically saved in My Documents. The saved folder may
differ, depending on your operating system.
Macintosh printing
This chapter explains how to print using Macintosh. You need to set the print environment before printing.
USB connected (See Macintosh.)
Network connected (See Macintosh.)
Printing a document
When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer driver setting in each application you use. Follow the
steps below to print from a Macintosh:
1. Open an application and select the file you want to print.
2. Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in some applications).
3. Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, other options, and make sure that your machine is selected. Click
OK.4. Open the File menu and click Print.
5. Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you want to print.
6. Click Print.
Changing printer settings
You can use advanced printing features when using your machine.
Open an application and select Print from the File menu. The machine name, which appears in the printer
properties window may differ depending on the machine in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer
properties window is similar to the following.
The setting options may differ depending on printers and Macintosh OS version.
Layout
The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears on the printed page. You can print multiple
pages on one sheet of paper. Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the following
features.
Pages per Sheet: This option determines how many pages to be printed on one page. (See Printing multiple
pages on one sheet of paper.)
Layout Direction: This option allows you to select the printing direction on a page similar to the examples on
UI.
Border: This option allows you to print a border around each page on the sheet.
Reverse Page Orientation: This option allows you to rotate paper 180 degrees.
Graphics
The Graphics tab provides options for selecting Resolution. Select Graphics from the drop-down list under
Orientation to access the graphic features.
Resolution (Quality): This option allows you to select the printing resolution. The higher the setting, thesharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics. The higher setting also may increase the time it takes
to print a document.
Darkness: This option allows you to enhance printouts. The available options are Normal, Light, and Dark.
Paper
Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print. This will let you get
the best quality printout. If you load a different type of print material, select the corresponding paper type.
Printer Settings
Printer Settings tab provides Toner Save Mode, Reprint When Jammed, and Power Save options. Select
Printer Settings from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the following features:
Toner Save Mode: Selecting this option extends the life of your toner cartridge and reduces your cost per
page without a significant reduction in print quality.
Printer Setting: If you select this option, this feature is determined by the setting you’ve made from the
machine.
On: Select this option to allow the printer to use less toner on each page.
Off: If you do not need to save toner when printing a document, select this option.
Reprint When Jammed: When this option is checked, the machine retains the image of a printed page until
the machine signals that the page has successfully exited the machine. If a paper jam occurs, the printer will
reprint the last page sent from the computer after you have cleared the jam. (Dell 1130 only)
Power Save: When this option is checked, the machine turns to the power save mode after the selected
time.
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature provides a cost-effective way to print
draft pages.
1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu.
2. Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In the Pages per Sheet drop-down list, select the
number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper.3. Select the other options you want to use.
4. Click Print, then the machine prints the selected the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper.
Linux printing
Printing from applications
There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You can
print on your machine from any such application.
1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu.
2. Select Print directly using lpr.
3. In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your machine from the printer list and click Properties.
4. Change the print job properties using the following four tabs displayed at the top of the window.General: This option allows you to change the paper size, the paper type, and the orientation of the
documents. It enables the duplex feature, adds start and end banners, and changes the number of pages
per sheet.
Text: This option allows you to specify the page margins and set the text options, such as spacing or
columns.
Graphics: This option allows you to set image options that are used when printing images/files, such as
color options, image size, or image position.
Advanced: This option allows you to set the print resolution, paper source and special print features.
If an option is grayed out, it means that the grayed out option is not supported.
5. Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window.
6. Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing.
7. The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the status of your print job.
To abort the current job, click Cancel.
Printing files
You can print many different types of files on your machine using the standard CUPS way, directly from the
command line interface. The CUPS lpr utility allows you to do that. But the drivers package replaces the standard lpr
tool by a much more user-friendly LPR GUI program.
To print any document file:
1. Type lpr from the Linux shell command line and press Enter. The LPR GUI window appears.
When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select file(s) to print window appears first. Just select any files
you want to print and click Open.
2. In the LPR GUI window, select your machine from the list, and change the print job properties.
3. Click OK to start printing.
Configuring printer properties
Using the Printer Properties window provided by the Printers configuration, you can change the various
properties for your machine as a printer.
1. Open the Unified Driver Configurator.
If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.
2. Select your machine on the available printers list and click Properties.
3. The Printer Properties window opens.The following five tabs display at the top of the window:
General: This option allows you to change the printer location and name. The name entered in this tab
displays on the printer list in Printers configuration.
Connection: This option allows you to view or select another port. If you change the machine port from USB
to parallel or vice versa while in use, you must re-configure the machine port in this tab.
Driver: Allows you to view or select another printer driver. By clicking Options, you can set the default
device options.
Jobs: This option shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to cancel the selected job and select the
Show completed jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list.
Classes: This option shows the class that your machine is in. Click Add to Class to add your machine to a
specific class or click Remove from Class to remove the machine from the selected class.
4. Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties window.Management tools
This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine.
This chapter includes:
Introducing useful management tools
Using Embedded Web Service (Dell 1130n only)
Using the Printer Status Monitor
Introducing useful management tools
Using the printer settings utility
Firmware update utility
Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator
Introducing useful management tools
The programs below help you to use your machine conveniently.
Using Embedded Web Service (Dell 1130n only).
Using the Printer Status Monitor.
Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator.
Using Embedded Web Service (Dell 1130n only)
Your Embedded Web Service window that appears in this user’s guide may differ depending on the machine in use.
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP network parameters correctly, you can manage
the machine via Embedded Web Service, an embedded web server. Use Embedded Web Service to:
View the machine’s device information and check its current status.
Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters.
Change printer preference.
Set the email notifications advising of the machine’s status.
Get support for using the machine.
To access Embedded Web Service:
1. Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go.
2. Your machine’s embedded website opens.
Embedded Web Service overview
Information tab: This tab gives you general information about your machine. You can check things, such as the
machine’s IP address, remaining amount of toner, ethernet information, firmware version, and so on. You can
also print reports such as an error report and so on.
Machine Settings tab: This tab allows you to set options provided by your machine.
Network Settings tab: This tab allows you to view and change the network environment. You can set things,
such as TCP/IP, enabling EtherTalk and so on.
Maintenance tab: This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware and setting security
information.
Support tab: This tab allows you to set contact information for sending email. You can also connect to Dell
website or download drivers by selecting Link.
E-mail notification setup
You can receive emails about your machine’s status by setting this option. By setting information such as IP
address, host name, e-mail address and SMTP server information, the machine status (toner cartridge shortage or
machine error) will be sent to the specified e-mail address automatically. This option may be used more frequently
by a machine administrator.1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go.
2. Your machine’s embedded website opens.
3. From the Machine Settings, select E-mail Notification Setup.
4. Set required settings.
Set SMTP server information and other settings to use E-mail notification function. After setting the network
environment, select the recipient list. And just by clicking a radio button, you can select in what case you want to
receive an alert.
5. Click Apply.
Setting the contact information
Set the machine administrator information and this setting is necessary to use E-mail notification option.
1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go.
2. Your machine’s embedded website opens.
3. Select Support.
4. Enter the name of machine administrator, phone number, location or E-mail address.
5. Click Apply.
If the firewall is activated, the E-mail may not be sent successfully. In that case, contact the a network
administrator.
Using the Printer Status Monitor
The Printer Status Monitor program can only be used in the Windows system.
Printer Status Monitor is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine status. Printer Status Monitor is
installed automatically when you install the machine software.
To use this program, you need the following system requirements:
Windows. Check for windows operating system(s) compatible with your machine. (See System requirements.)
Understanding Printer Status Monitor
If an error occurs while printing, you can check the error from the Printer Status Monitor.
You can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer
driver name > Printer Status Monitor.
The Printer Status Monitor program displays the current status of the machine, the estimated level of toner
remaining in the toner cartridge(s), and various other types of information.
1
Printing
Status
The Printer Status Monitor displays the current status of the printer.
2 Toner Level View the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s).
3
Order
Supplies
Order replacement toner cartridge(s) online.
4
Help me When error occurs, Help me button appears. You can directly open troubleshooting section in
the user’s guide.
Opening the Troubleshooting Guide
Find solutions for problems by using the Troubleshooting Guide.Right-click the Printer Status Monitor icon and select Troubleshooting Guide.
Changing the Printer Status Monitor Program Settings
Right-click the Printer Status Monitor icon and select Options. Select the settings you want from the Options
window.
Using the Dell Toner Management System™
The printer status monitor displays the status of the printer (printer ready, printer offline, and error-check printer) and
the toner level (100%, 50%, Toner Low) for your printer. .
Using the printer settings utility
When you install the Dell software, the Printer Settings Utility is automatically installed.
To open the Printer Settings Utility.
If you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell
Printers > your printer driver name > Printer Settings Utility.
The Printer Settings Utility window provides several features.
For more information, click the help icon button.
Firmware update utility
Firmware Update Utility allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware.
If you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell
Printers > your printer driver name > Firmware Update Utility.
Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator
The supplied software CD provides you with the Unified Linux Driver package for using your machine with a Linux
computer.
Unified Linux Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring machine devices.
After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the Unified Linux Driver Configurator icon will automatically be
created on your desktop.
Opening the Unified Driver Configurator
1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop.
You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Dell Unified Driver > Unified Driver Configurator.
2. Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding configuration window.
1. Printers Configuration
2. Ports ConfigurationTo use the on screen help, click Help.
3. After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the Unified Driver Configurator.
Printers configuration
Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes.
Printer tab
View the current system’s printer configuration by clicking on the machine icon button on the left side of the
Unified Driver Configurator window.1 Switches to Printers configuration.
2 Shows all of the installed machine.
3 Shows the status, model name and URI of your machine.
The printer control buttons are, as follows:
Refresh: Renews the available machines list.
Add Printer: Allows you to add a new machines.
Remove Printer: Removes the selected machine.
Set as Default: Sets the current selected machine as a default machine.
Stop/Start: Stops/starts the machine.
Test: Allows you to print a test page to ensure the machine is working properly.
Properties: Allows you to view and change the printer properties.
Classes tab
The Classes tab shows a list of available machine classes.1 Shows all of the machine classes.
2 Shows the status of the class and the number of machines in the class.
Refresh: Renews the classes list.
Add Class: Allows you to add a new machine class.
Remove Class: Removes the selected machine class.
Port configuration
In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check the status of each port and release a port that is
stalled in a busy state when its owner has terminated the job for any reason.1 Switches to Ports configuration.
2 Shows all of the available ports.
3 Shows the port type, device connected to the port, and status.
Refresh: Renews the available ports list.
Release port: Releases the selected port.Maintenance
This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge.
This chapter includes:
Printing a machine report
Using toner low alert (Dell 1130n only)
Cleaning a machine
Storing the toner cartridge
Tips for moving & storing your machine
Printing a machine report
You can print a configuration page to view current printer settings, or to help troubleshoot printer problems.
In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 5 seconds.
A configuration page prints out.
For Dell 1130 this information is provided on the demo page.
Using toner low alert (Dell 1130n only)
If the amount of toner in the cartridge is low, the LED blinks red. You can set the option for this LED to
blink or not.
1. Install the driver. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver or Installing network connected machine’s driver.)
2. You can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer
driver name > Printer Settings Utility.
3. Click Toner Low Alert. Select the appropriate setting and then click Apply.
Cleaning a machine
If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty environment, you need to clean your machine
regularly to keep the best printing condition and use your machine longer.
Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol, solvent, or
other strong substances can discolor or distort the cabinet.
If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner, we recommend you use cloth or tissue
dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows in the air and might be harmful to
you.
Cleaning the outside
Clean the machine cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth. Dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let
any water drip onto or into the machine.
Printing a cleaning sheet (Dell 1130n only)
If you are experiencing blurred or smeared printouts, you can clear the problem by printing a cleaning sheet,
provided by your machine.
To print the cleaning sheet:
In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 10 seconds.
OPC cleaning sheet: Cleans the OPC drum of the toner cartridge.
This process will produce a page with toner debris, which should be discarded.
Your machine automatically picks up a sheet of paper from the tray and prints out a cleaning sheet with dust or
toner particles on it.
Cleaning the inside
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine. This buildup can
cause print quality problems, such as toner specks or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and
reduces these problems.1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down.
2. Open the front cover and pull the toner cartridge out. Set it on a clean flat surface
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover
it with a piece of paper, if necessary.
Do not touch the green surface underside of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to
avoid touching this area.
3. With a dry, lint-free cloth, wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the toner cartridge area.
While cleaning the inside of the machine, be careful not to damage the transfer roller or any other inside
parts. Do not use solvents such as benzene or thinner to clean. Printing quality problems can occur and
cause damage to the machine.
4. Locate the long strip of glass (LSU) inside the machine and gently swab the glass to see if dirt turns the white
cotton black.
5. Reinsert the toner cartridge and close the front cover.
6. Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on.
Storing the toner cartridge
Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light, temperature, and humidity. Dell suggests users follow
the recommendations to ensure the optimum performance, highest quality, and longest life from your new Dell toner
cartridge.Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used in; this should be in controlled office
temperature and humidity conditions. The toner cartridge should remain in its original, unopened package until
installation – If original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of the cartridge with paper and store in a dark
cabinet.
Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf and operating life. Do not store on the
floor. If the toner cartridge is removed from the printer, always store the cartridge:
Inside the protective bag from the original package.
Store lying flat (not standing on end) with the same side facing up as if they were installed in the machine.
Do not store consumables in;
Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F).
Humidity range less than 20% nor not greater than 80%.
An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.
Direct sunlight or room light.
Dusty places.
A car for a long period of time.
An environment where corrosive gases are present.
An environment with salty air.
Handling instructions
Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge.
Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock.
Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this can cause internal damage and toner
spillage.
Use of non-Dell and refilled toner cartridge
Dell does not recommend or approve the use of non-Dell brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic,
store brand, refilled, or remanufactured toner cartridges.
Dell’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused by the use of a refilled, remanufactured,
or non-Dell brand toner cartridge.
Estimated cartridge life
Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require.
The actual print-out number may vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating
environment, printing interval, media type, and/or media size. For example, if you print a lot of graphics, the
consumption of the toner is high and you may need to change the cartridge more often.
Tips for moving & storing your machine
When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be
contaminated by toner, which can cause damage to the machine or bad print quality.
When moving the machine, make sure at least two people are holding the machine securely.Troubleshooting
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.
This chapter includes:
Redistributing toner
Tips for avoiding paper curls
Tips for avoiding paper jams
Clearing paper jams
Solving other problems
Redistributing toner
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life:
White streaks or light printing occurs.
The LED blinks red.
If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge. In
some cases, white streaks or light printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner.
1. Open the front cover.
2. Pull the toner cartridge out.
3. Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner
into fabric.
Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this
area.
4. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into the opening in the machine.
Tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the machine will guide the cartridge into the
correct position until it locks into place completely.5. Close the front cover. Ensure that the cover is securely closed.
Tips for avoiding paper curls
1. Open the rear cover.
2. Pull down the pressure lever on each side.
1. Pressure lever
Keep the rear cover opened during printing.
Only use when the printout has more than 20 mm curl.
Tips for avoiding paper jams
By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided. When a paper jam occurs, refer to the next
guidelines.
Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly. (See Loading paper in the tray.)
Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray.
Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.
Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.
Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.
Do not mix paper types in a tray.
Use only recommended print media.
Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing down in the tray, or facing up in the manual tray.
Clearing paper jams
If a paper jam occurs, the LED on the control panel lights orange. Find and remove the jammed paper.
To resume printing after clearing paper jams, you must open and close the front cover.
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently. Follow the instructions in the following
sections to clear the jam.In tray
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
1. Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper is automatically ejected from the machine.
If the paper does not exit, go to the next step.
2. Pull out tray.
3. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper in this area, check the fuser area
around the toner cartridge. (See Inside the machine.)
4. Insert tray back into the machine until it snaps into place. Printing automatically resumes.
In the manual tray
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
1. If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out of the machine.
2. Open and close the front cover to resume printing.Inside the machine
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.
1. Open the front cover and pull the toner cartridge out, lightly pushing it down.
2. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.
3. Replace the toner cartridge and close the front cover. Printing automatically resumes.
In exit area
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
1. Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper is automatically ejected from the machine.
If you do not see the jammed paper, go to next step.
2. Gently pull the paper out of the output tray.
If you do not see the jammed paper or if there is any resistance when you pull, stop and go to the next step.
3. Open the rear cover.
4. Pull the pressure levers down and remove the paper.
Return the pressure levers to their original position.1. Pressure lever
If you do not see the jammed paper, go to next step.
5. Pull the fuser cover levers down and remove the paper.
Return the fuser cover levers to their original position.
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.
6. Close the rear cover.
7. Open and close front cover, printing automatically resumes.
Solving other problems
The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the recommended solutions. Follow the suggested
solutions until the problem is corrected. If the problem persists, call for service.
Power problems
Click this link to open an animation about power problems.
Condition Suggested solutions
The machine is not receiving power,
or the connection cable between the computer and the
machine is not connected properly.
Plug in the power cord and press (power) on the
control panel.
Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it.
For Local PrintingFor Network Printing (Dell 1130n only)
Paper feeding problems
Condition Suggested solutions
Paper jams during printing. Clear the paper jam. (See Clearing paper jams.)
Paper sticks together. Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray. (See Print media specifications.)
Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper. (See Print media
specifications.)
Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper.
Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together.
Multiple sheets of paper do
not feed.
Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray. Load paper of only one type, size,
and weight.
Paper does not feed into
the machine.
Remove any obstructions from inside the machine.
Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove paper from the tray and reload it
correctly.
There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray.
The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the
machine. (See Print media specifications.)
The paper keeps jamming. There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. If you
are printing on special materials, use the manual tray.
An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper that meets the
specifications required by the machine. (See Print media specifications.)
There may be debris inside the machine. Open the front cover and remove any
debris.
Transparencies stick
together in the paper exit.
Use only transparencies specifically designed for laser printers. Remove each
transparency as it exits from the machine.
Envelopes skew or fail to
feed correctly.
Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes.
Printing problems
Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions
The machine does not
print.
The machine is not
receiving power.
Check the power cord connections.
The machine is not
selected as the default
machine.
Select your machine as your default machine in your
Windows.
Check the machine for the following:
The front cover is not closed. Close the front cover.Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam. (See Clearing paper jams.)
No paper is loaded. Load paper. (See Loading paper in the tray.)
The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the toner cartridge.
If a system error occurs, contact your service representative.
The connection cable
between the computer
and the machine is not
connected properly.
Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it.
The connection cable
between the computer
and the machine is
defective.
If possible, attach the cable to another computer that is
working properly and print a job. You can also try using a
different machine cable.
The port setting is
incorrect.
Check the Windows printer setting to make sure that the
print job is sent to the correct port. If the computer has
more than one port, make sure that the machine is attached
to the correct one.
The machine may be
configured incorrectly.
Check the Printing Preferences to ensure that all of the
print settings are correct. (See Opening printing
preferences.)
The printer driver may be
incorrectly installed.
Repair the machine software. (See Installing USB connected
machine’s driver, Installing network connected machine’s
driver.)
The machine is
malfunctioning.
Check the LEDs on the control panel to see if the machine
is indicating a system error. Contact a service
representative.
Checking an error message is also possible from the
Printer Status Monitor on your computer.
The machine does not
print.
The document size is so
big that the hard disk
space of the computer is
insufficient to access the
print job.
Get more hard disk space and print the document again.
The output tray is full. It can hold up to 80 sheets of plain paper. Once the paper is
removed from the output tray, the machine resumes printing.
The machine selects
print materials from the
wrong paper source.
The paper option that
was selected in the
Printing Preferences
may be incorrect.
For many software applications, the paper source selection is
found under the Paper tab within the Printing Preferences.
Select the correct paper source. See the printer driver help
screen. (See Opening printing preferences.)
A print job is extremely
slow.
The job may be very
complex.
Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print
quality settings.
Half the page is blank. The page orientation
setting may be incorrect.
Change the page orientation in your application. See the
printer driver help screen.
The paper size and the
paper size settings do not
match.
Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings
matches the paper in the tray.Or, ensure that the paper size
in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in
the software application settings you use.
The machine prints, but
the text is wrong,
garbled, or incomplete.
The machine cable is
loose or defective.
Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect. Try a print job
that you have already printed successfully. If possible, attach
the cable and the machine to another computer that you
know works and try a print job. Finally, try a new machine
cable.
The wrong printer driver
was selected.
Check the application’s printer selection menu to ensure that
your machine is selected.
The software application
is malfunctioning.
Try printing a job from another application.
The operating system is
malfunctioning.
Exit Windows and reboot the computer. Turn the machine off
and back on again.
If you are in a DOS
environment, the font
setting for your machine
may be set incorrectly.
See Changing font setting (Dell 1130n only).Pages print, but they are
blank.
The toner cartridge is
defective or out of toner.
Redistribute the toner, if necessary. If necessary, replace the
toner cartridge.
The file may have blank
pages.
Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages.
Some parts, such as the
controller or the board,
may be defective.
Contact a service representative.
The machine does not
print PDF file correctly.
Some parts of graphics,
text, or illustrations are
missing.
Incompatibility between
the PDF file and the
Acrobat products.
Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print.
Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options.
It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an
image.
The print quality of
photos is not good.
Images are not clear.
The resolution of the
photo is very low.
Reduce the photo size. If you increase the photo size in the
software application, the resolution will be reduced.
Before printing, the
machine emits vapor
near the output tray.
Using damp paper can
cause vapor during
printing.
This is not a problem. Just keep printing.
The machine does not
print special- sized
paper, such as billing
paper.
Paper size and paper size
setting do not match.
Set the correct paper size in the Edit... in the Paper tab in
the Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing
preferences.)
Printing quality problems
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly, there might be a reduction in print quality.
See the table below to clear the problem.
Condition Suggested Solutions
Light or faded print If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page, the toner
supply is low. You may be able to temporarily extend the toner cartridge
life. (See Redistributing toner.) If this does not improve the print quality,
install a new toner cart
The paper may not meet paper specifications; for example, the paper may
be too moist or rough. (See Print media specifications.)
If the entire page is light, the print resolution setting is too low or the toner
save mode is on. Adjust the print resolution and turn the toner save mode
off. See the help screen of the printer driver.
A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner
cartridge needs cleaning. (See Cleaning the inside.)
The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. (See Cleaning
the inside.)
Toner specks The paper may not meet specifications; for example, the paper may be too
moist or rough. (See Print media specifications.)
The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine. Contact
a service representative.
The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a service representative.
Dropouts If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on the page:
A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try reprinting the job.
The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots
on its surface. Try a different brand of paper. (See Print media
specifications.)
The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to
reject toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper.
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click
Paper tab, and set type to Thick. (See Opening printing preferences.)
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
White Spots If white spots appear on the page:
The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a paper falls to the inner
devices within the machine, so the transfer roller may be dirty. Clean theinside of your machine. (See Cleaning the inside.)
The paper path may need cleaning. (See Cleaning the inside.)
Vertical lines If black vertical streaks appear on the page:
The surface (drum part) of the toner cartridge inside the machine has
probably been scratched. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one.
(See Replacing the toner cartridge.)
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:
The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. (See Cleaning
the inside.)
Black background If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable:
Change to a lighter weight paper. (See Print media specifications.)
Check the environmental conditions: very dry conditions or a high level of
humidity (higher than 80% RH) can increase the amount of background
shading.
Remove the old toner cartridge and, install a new one. (See Replacing the
toner cartridge.)
Toner smear If toner smears on the page:
Clean the inside of the machine. (See Cleaning the inside.)
Check the paper type and quality. (See Print media specifications.)
Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a new one. (See Replacing the
toner cartridge.)
Vertical repetitive defects If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals:
The toner cartridge may be damaged. If you still have the same problem,
remove the toner cartridge and, install a new one. (See Replacing the toner
cartridge.)
Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If the defects occur on the
back of the page, the problem will likely correct itself after a few more
pages.
The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact a service representative.
Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the
printed page.
The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a different batch of paper. Do
not open packages of paper until necessary so that the paper does not
absorb too much moisture.
If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the printing layout to
avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams on the reverse side.
Printing on seams can cause problems.
If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page,
adjust the print resolution through your software application or in Printing
Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.)
Misformed characters If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images, the paper
stock may be too slick. Try different paper. (See Print media specifications.)
Page skew Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
Check the paper type and quality. (See Print media specifications.)
Ensure that the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper
stack.
Curl or wave Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperature and humidity can
cause paper curl. (See Print media specifications.)
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in
the tray.
Wrinkles or creases Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
Check the paper type and quality. (See Print media specifications.)
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in
the tray.
Back of printouts are dirty Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the machine. (See Cleaning the
inside.)
Solid Color or Black pages The toner cartridge may not be installed properly. Remove the cartridge and
reinsert it.
The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install
a new one. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.)
The machine may require repair. Contact a service representative.
Loose toner Clean the inside of the machine. (See Cleaning the inside.)
Check the paper type and quality. (See Print media specifications.)
Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a new one. (See Replacing the
toner cartridge.)
If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service
representative.
Character Voids Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid
black:
If you are using transparencies, try another type of transparency. Because
of the composition of transparencies, some character voids are normal.
You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper. Remove the paper
and turn it around.
The paper may not meet paper specifications. (See Print media
specifications.)
Horizontal stripes If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear:
The toner cartridge may be installed improperly. Remove the cartridge and
reinsert it.
The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install
a new one. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.)
If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service
representative.
Curl If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine:
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in
the tray.
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click
Paper tab, and set type to Thin. (See Opening printing preferences.)
An unknown image repetitively
appears on a few sheets or loose
toner, light print, or
contamination occurs.
Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft) or
above.The high altitude may affect the print quality, such as loose toner or light
imaging. Change the correct altitude setting to your machine. (See Altitude
adjustment.)
Common Windows problemsCondition Suggested solutions
“File in Use” message appears
during installation.
Exit all software applications. Remove all software from the startup group, then
restart Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.
“General Protection Fault”,
“Exception OE”, “Spool 32”, or
“Illegal Operation” messages
appear.
Close all other applications, reboot Windows and try printing again.
“Fail To Print”, “A printer
timeout error occurred”
messages appear.
These messages may appear during printing. Just keep waiting until the machine
finishes printing. If the message appears in ready mode or after printing has
been completed, check the connection and/or whether an error has occurred.
Refer to Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows
error messages.
Common Linux problems
condition Suggested solutions
The machine
does not print.
Check if the printer driver is installed in your system. Open Unified Driver Configurator and
switch to the Printers tab in Printers configuration window to look at the list of available
machines. Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list. If not, open Add new printer
wizard to set up your device.
Check if the machine is started. Open Printers configuration and select your machine on the
printers list. Look at the description in the Selected printer pane. If its status contains
Stopped string, press the Start button. After that normal operation of the machine should be
restored. The “stopped” status might be activated when some problems in printing occurred.
Check if your application has special print option such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified in the
command line parameter, then remove it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select “print” -
> “Setup printer” and edit command line parameter in the command item.
The machine
does not print
whole pages,
and output is
printed on half
the page.
It is a known problem that occurs when a color machine is used on version 8.51 or earlier of
Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and has been reported to bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug
688252. The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v. 8.52 or above. Download the latest version
of AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this
problem.
I encounter
error “Cannot
open port
device file”
when printing
a document.
Avoid changing print job parameters (via LPR GUI, for example) while a print job is in progress.
Known versions of CUPS server break the print job whenever print options are changed and then
try to restart the job from the beginning. Since Unified Linux Driver locks the port while printing,
the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and unavailable for subsequent print
jobs. If this situation occurs, try to release the port by selecting Release port in Port
configuration window.
Refer to Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages.
Common Macintosh problems
condition Suggested solutions
The machine does not print PDF files correctly.
Some parts of graphics, text, or illustrations are
missing.
Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print.
Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options.
It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an
image.
The document has printed, but the print job has
not disappeared from the spooler in Mac OS X
10.3.2.
Update your Mac OS to OS Mac OS X 10.3.3. or higher.
Some letters are not displayed normally during
the Cover page printing.
Mac OS cannot create the font during the Cover page printing.
The English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally on the
Cover page.
When printing a document in Macintosh with
Acrobat Reader 6.0 or higher, colors print
incorrectly.
Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver
matches the one in Acrobat® Reader®.
Refer to Macintosh User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Macintosh error
messages.Supplies
This chapter provides information on purchasing supplies and maintenance parts available for your machine.
This chapter includes:
How to purchase
Available supplies
Replacing the toner cartridge
Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of
available accessories.
How to purchase
To order Dell-authorized supplies and accessories visit www.dell.com/supplies, or contact your local Dell dealer or
the retailer where you purchased your machine. You can also visit www.dell.com or support.dell.com, select your
country/region, and obtain information on calling for service.
Available supplies
When supplies reach their lifespan, you can order the following types of supplies for your machine:
Type Average yield
[a] Part name
Standard capacity toner cartridge Approx. 1,500 pages 3J11D
High capacity toner cartridge Approx. 2,500 pages 2MMJP
[a]
Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.
To replace a toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge.
Depending on the options and job mode used, the toner cartridge’s lifespan may differ.
You must purchase supplies, including toner cartridges, in the same country where you purchased your machine.
Otherwise, supplies will be incompatible with your machine since the system configuration of these vary from
country to country.
Dell does not recommend using non-genuine Dell toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured. Dell cannot
guarantee non-genuine Dell toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of using non-genuine
Dell toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty.
Replacing the toner cartridge
Click this link to open an animation about replacing a toner cartridge.
When the toner cartridge reaches its estimated cartridge life:
The Printer Status Monitor program window appears on the computer telling you the toner cartridge needs to be
replaced.
The machine stops printing.
At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine. (See
Available supplies.)
1. Open the front cover.
2. Pull the toner cartridge out.3. Take a new toner cartridge out of its package.
4. Remove the paper protecting the toner cartridge by pulling the packing tape.
5. Locate the sealing tape at the end of the toner cartridge. Carefully pull the tape completely out of the cartridge and
discard it.
The sealing tape should be longer than 60 cm when correctly removed.
Holding the toner cartridge, pull the sealing tape straight to remove it from the cartridge. Be careful not
to cut the tape. If this happens, you cannot use the toner cartridge.
Refer to the helpful pictures on the cartridge wrapping paper.
6. Slowly shake the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge. It will assure
maximum copies per cartridge.
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner
into fabric.
Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this
area.
7. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into the opening in the machine.
Tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the machine will guide the cartridge into the
correct position until it locks into place completely.8. Close the front cover. Make sure that the cover is securely closed.Specifications
This chapter guides you about this machine’s specifications.
This chapter includes:
Hardware specifications
Environmental specifications
Electrical specifications
Print media specifications
The specification values here are based on preliminary data. See www.dell.com or support.dell.com for current
information.
Hardware specifications
Item Description
Dimension Height 197 mm (7.76 inches)
Depth 389 mm (15.31 inches)
Width 360 mm (14.17 inches)
Weight Machine with consumables Dell 1130: 7.25 Kg (15.98 lbs)
Dell 1130n: 7.30 Kg (16.09 lbs)
Package weight Paper 1.23 Kg (2.70 lbs)
Plastic 0.19 Kg (0.42 lbs)
Environmental specifications
Item Description
Noise Level
[a] Ready mode 26 dB(A)
Printing mode Dell 1130: 49 dB(A)
Dell 1130n: 50 dB(A)
Temperature Operation 10 to 32 °C (50 to 90 °F)
Storage (unpacked) 0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F)
Humidity Operation 20 to 80% RH
Storage (unpacked) 10 to 80% RH
[a]
Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: machine basic installation, A4 paper, simplex printing.
Electrical specifications
Power requirements are based on the country/region where the device is sold. Do not convert operating voltages.
Doing so might damage the device and void the product warranty.
Item Description
Power rating
[a]
110 volt models AC 110 - 127 V
220 volt models AC 220 - 240 V
Power consumption Average operating mode Less than 360 W
Ready mode Dell 1130: Less than 45 W
Dell 1130n: Less than 60 W
Power save mode Dell 1130: Less than 4.5 WDell 1130n: Less than 6.5 W
Power off mode Less than 0.8 W
[a]
See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage, frequency (hertz) and type of current for your
machine.
Print media specifications
Type Size Dimensions
Print media weight
[a]
/Capacity
[b]
Tray1 Manual tray
Plain paper Letter 216 x 279 mm
(8.50 x 11.00
inches)
60 to 120 g/m2
(16 to 32 lb bond)
250 sheets of
80 g/m2
(20 lb
bond)
60 to 220 g/m2
(16
to 43 lb bond)
1 sheet stacking
Legal 216 x 356 mm
(8.50 x 14.00
inches)
US Folio 216 x 330 mm
(8.50 x 13.00
inches)
A4 210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.69
inches)
Oficio 216 x 343 mm
(8.50 x 13.50
inches)
JIS B5 182 x 257 mm
(7.17 x 10.12
inches)
60 to 90 g/m2
(16
to 24 lb bond)
150 sheets of
80 g/m2
(20 lb
bond)
ISO B5 176 x 250 mm
(6.93 x 9.84
inches)
Executive 184 x 267 mm
(7.25 x 0 inches)
A5 148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.27
inches)
A6 105 x 148 mm
(4.13 x 5.83
inches)
Envelope Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm
(3.87 x 7.50
inches)
Not available in
tray1.
75 to 90 g/m2
(20
to 24 lb bond)
1 sheet stacking
Envelope No. 10 105 x 241 mm
(4.12 x 9.50
inches)
Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm
(4.33 x 8.66
inches)
Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm
(6.38 x 9.02
inches)
Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm
(4.49 x 6.38
inches)
Thick paper Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain
paper section
90 g/m2
(24 lb
bond)
90 g/m2
(24 lb
bond)
1 sheet stacking
Thin paper Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain
paper section
60 to 70 g/m2
(16 60 to 70 g/m2
(16to 19 lb bond) to 19 lb bond)
1 sheet stacking
Transparency Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain
paper section
Not available in
tray1.
138 to 146 g/m2
(36.81 to 38.91 lb
bond)
1 sheet stacking
Labels
[c] Letter, Legal, US Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO
B5, Executive, A5, Statement
Refer to the Plain
paper section
Not available in
tray1.
120 to 150 g/m2
(32 to 40 lb bond)
1 sheet stacking
Card stock Letter, Legal, US Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO
B5, Executive, A5, Statement, PostCard
4x6
Refer to the Plain
paper section
Not available in
tray1.
105 to 163 g/m2
(
28 to 43 lb bond)
1 sheet stacking
Minimum size (custom) 76 x 127 mm
(3.00 x 5.00
inches)
60 to 163 g/m2
(16 to 43 lb bond)
Maximum size (custom) 216 x 356 mm
(8.50 x 14.02
inches)
[a]
If media weight is over 120 g/m2
(32 lb), load a paper into the tray one by one.
[b]
Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness and environmental conditions.
[c]
Smoothness: 100 to 250 (sheffield).Appendix
Dell technical support policy
Technician-assisted technical support requires the cooperation and participation of the customer in the troubleshooting
process and provides for restoration of the Operating System, application software, and hardware drivers to the
original default configuration as shipped from Dell, as well as the verification of appropriate functionality of the printer
and all Dell-installed hardware. In addition to this technician assisted technical support, online technical support is
available at Dell Support website at support.dell.com. Additional technical support options may be available for
purchase.
Dell provides limited technical support for the printer and any Dell-installed software and peripherals. Support for thirdparty software and peripherals is provided by the original manufacturer, including those purchased and/or installed
through Software & Peripherals (DellWare), ReadyWare, and Custom Factory Integration (CFI/DellPlus).
Contacting Dell
For customers in the United States, call 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355).
If you do not have an active Internet connection, you can find contact information on your purchase invoice,
packing slip, bill, or Dell product catalog.
Dell provides several online and telephone-based support and service options. Availability varies by country and
product, and some services may not be available in your area. To contact Dell for sales, technical support, or customer
service issues:
1. Visit support.dell.com, and verify your country or region in the Choose A Country/Region drop-down menu at the
bottom of the page.
2. Click Contact Us on the left side of the page, and select the appropriate service or support link based on your
need.
Warranty and return policy
Dell Inc. (“Dell”) manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are new or equivalent to new in
accordance with industry-standard practices. For information about the Dell warranty for your printer, refer to the
Product Information Guide.Glossary
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used
with printing as well as mentioned in this user’s guide.
802.11
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN) communication, developed by the IEEE
LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802).
802.11b/g
802.11b/g can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps;
802.11g up to 54 Mbps. 802.11b/g devices may occasionally suffer interference from microwave ovens, cordless
telephones, and Bluetooth devices.
Access point
Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that connects wireless communication devices
together on wireless local area networks (WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio
signals.
ADF
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a mechanism that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so
that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once.
AppleTalk
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for computer networking. It was included in
the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
BIT Depth
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a
bitmapped image. Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits increases, the
number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as
monochrome or black and white.
BMP
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem (GDI), and used
commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform.
BOOTP
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically. This is
usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP servers
assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to
obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system.
CCD
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to
hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine.
Collation
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is selected, the device prints an entire
set before printing additional copies.
Control Panel
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed. They are
typically found in front of the machine.Coverage
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For example, 5% coverage means that an
A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of
text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as the coverage.
CSV
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to exchange data between disparate
applications. The file format, as it is used in Microsoft Excel, has become a pseudo standard throughout the
industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms.
DADF
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a mechanism that will automatically feed and flip over an original
sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper.
Default
The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state, reset, or initialized.
DHCP
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides
configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the client
host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client
hosts.
DIMM
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds memory. DIMM stores all the data within the
machine like printing data, received fax data.
DNS
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a
distributed database on networks, such as the Internet.
Dot Matrix Printer
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page
and prints by impact, striking an ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.
DPI
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI
results in a higher resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.
DRPD
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a
single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers.
Duplex
A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print (or scan) on both
sides of the paper. A printer equipped with a Duplex can print double-sided of paper.
Duty Cycle
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month. Generally the printer has
the lifespan limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually
within the warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days,
a printer limits 2,400 pages a day.
ECM
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It
automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephoneline noise.
Emulation
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another.
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system, so that the second system behaves
like the first system. Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is in contrast to
simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its internal state.
Ethernet
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and
signaling for the physical layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control (MAC)/data link
layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN
technology in use during the 1990s to the present.
EtherTalk
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It was included in the original
Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
FDI
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin
operated device or a card reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your machine.
FTP
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the
TCP/IP protocol (such as the Internet or an intranet).
Fuser Unit
The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media. It consists of a hot roller and a back-up
roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner
stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer.
Gateway
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and a telephone line. It is very
popular, as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network.
Grayscale
A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to
grayscale; colors are represented by various shades of gray.
Halftone
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly colored areas consist of a large
number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots.
HDD
Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is a non-volatile storage device which
stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.
IEEE
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international non-profit, professional organization
for the advancement of technology related to electricity.
IEEE 1284
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The
term "1284-B" refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral
(for example, a printer).
IntranetA private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and possibly the public telecommunication
system to securely share part of an organization's information or operations with its employees. Sometimes the
term refers only to the most visible service, the internal website.
IP address
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with
each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard.
IPM
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of
single-sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute.
IPP
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print jobs, media
size, resolution, and so forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers, and also
supports access control, authentication, and encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing
solution than older ones.
IPX/SPX
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the
Novell NetWare operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX
protocol having similarities to IP, and SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for local area
networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP
on a LAN).
ISO
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international standard-setting body composed of
representatives from national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards.
ITU-T
The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and
regulate international radio and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization, allocation of the radio
spectrum, and organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone
calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication.
ITU-T No. 1 chart
Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile transmissions.
JBIG
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality,
which was designed for compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used on other
images.
JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for
photographic images. It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web.
LDAP
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory
services running over TCP/IP.
LED
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine.
MAC address
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter. MAC address is a
unique 48-bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-34-11-
4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as anaid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks.
MFP
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body,
so as to have a printer, a copier, a fax, a scanner and etc.
MH
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted
between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-based run-length
encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this
minimizes the transmission time of most faxes.
MMR
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.6.
Modem
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also demodulates such a carrier signal
to decode transmitted information.
MR
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using
MH. The next line is compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the differences are encoded and
transmitted.
NetWare
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various
services on a PC, and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack. Today NetWare
supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.
OPC
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted
from a laser printer, and it is usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped.
An exposing unit of a drum is slowly worn away by its usage of the printer, and it should be replaced
appropriately since it gets scratches from grits of a paper.
Originals
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text, etc, which is copied, reproduced or
translated to produce others, but which is not itself copied or derived from something else.
OSI
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the International Organization for Standardization
(ISO) for communications. OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides the required
set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom,
Application, Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, Data Link and Physical.
PABX
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone switching system within a private
enterprise.
PCL
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol
and has become an industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has been released in
varying levels for thermal, matrix printer, and page printers.
PDF
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two
dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format.PostScript
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and
desktop publishing areas. - that is run in an interpreter to generate an image.
Printer Driver
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer.
Print Media
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used on a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a
copier.
PPM
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works, meaning the
number of pages a printer can produce in one minute.
PRN file
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input/output
system calls, which simplifies many tasks.
Protocol
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer between two
computing endpoints.
PS
See PostScript.
PSTN
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world's public circuit-switched telephone
networks which, on industrial premises, is usually routed through the switchboard.
RADIUS
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for remote user authentication and accounting.
RADIUS enables centralized management of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA
(authentication, authorization, and accounting) concept to manage network access.
Resolution
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the dpi, the greater the resolution.
SMB
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, printers, serial ports, and
miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-process
communication mechanism.
SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a
relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are specified, and then the
message text is transferred. It is a client-server protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the
server.
SSID
Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network (WLAN). All wireless devices in a WLAN
use the same SSID in order to communicate with each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a maximum
length of 32 characters.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is thenetwork address and which part is the host address.
TCP/IP
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP); the set of communications protocols that
implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run.
TCR
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each transmission such as job status, transmission
result and number of pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions.
TIFF
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image format. TIFF describes image data that
typically come from scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image
that is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been
made by various image processing applications.
Toner Cartridge
A kind of bottle within a machine like printer which contains toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and
photocopiers, which forms the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be melted by the heat of the
fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper.
TWAIN
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant
program, a scan can be initiated from within the program.; an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple
Macintosh operating systems.
UNC Path
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft
products. The format of a UNC path is: \\\\
URL
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet. The first part
of the address indicates what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where
the resource is located.
USB
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect
computers and peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer
USB port to multiple peripherals.
Watermark
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light.
Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by papermakers to identify their
product, and also on postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting.
WEP
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802.11 to provide the same level of
security as that of a wired LAN. WEP provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is
transmitted from one end point to another.
WIA
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in Windows Me and
Windows XP. A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant scanner.
WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless (Wi-Fi) computer networks, which was
created to improve upon the security features of WEP.WPA-PSK
WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small business or home users. A shared key, or
password, is configured in the wireless access point (WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop devices. WPA-PSK
generates a unique key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more advanced
security.
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Dell™ Inspiron™ 1150
Manual del propietario
Modelo PP08LNotas, Avisos y Precauciones
NOTA: Una NOTA proporciona información importante que le ayuda a utilizar su equipo de la mejor manera posible.
AVISO: Un AVISO indica la posibilidad de daños en el hardware o pérdida de datos, y le explica cómo evitar el
problema.
PRECAUCIÓN: Una PRECAUCIÓN indica un posible daño material, lesión corporal o muerte.
Abreviaturas y siglas
Para obtener una lista completa de las abreviaturas y siglas, consulte el archivo Dell™ Inspiron™ Help (Ayuda de
Dell™ Inspiron™). Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9.
Si ha adquirido un equipo Dell™ Serie n, todas las referencias que aparecen en este documento relativas a los
sistemas operativos de Microsoft®
Windows®
no son aplicables.
____________________
La información contenida en este documento puede modificarse sin aviso previo.
© 2004 Dell Inc. Todos los derechos reservados.
Queda estrictamente prohibido realizar cualquier tipo de reproducción sin el consentimiento por escrito de Dell Inc.
Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell, el logotipo de DELL, AccessDirect, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex, Latitude,
PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect, PowerVault, Axim, TrueMobile y DellNet son marcas comerciales de Dell Inc.; Intel, Pentium, y Celeron
son marcas comerciales registradas de Intel Corporation; Microsoft y Windows son marcas comerciales registradas de Microsoft Corporation;
EMC es una marca comercial registrada de EMC Corporation; Bluetooth es una marca comercial propiedad de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. que Dell
Inc. utiliza bajo licencia.
Este documento puede incluir otras marcas y nombres comerciales para referirse a las entidades que son propietarias de los mismos o a sus
productos. Dell Inc. renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la propiedad de marcas y nombres comerciales que no sean los suyos.
Modelo PP08L
Noviembre de 2004 N/P F7577 Rev. A01Contenido 3
Contenido
Localización de información . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1 Descripción del equipo
Vista anterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Vista lateral izquierda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Vista lateral derecha. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Vista posterior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Vista inferior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2 Configuración de su equipo
Conexión a Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Configuración de la conexión a Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Problemas con el módem y con la conexión a Internet . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Problemas con el correo electrónico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Instalación de una impresora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Cable de la impresora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Conexión de una impresora USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Problemas con la impresora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Dispositivos para protección de la alimentación . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Supresores de sobrevoltaje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Acondicionadores de línea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Cómo apagar el equipo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3 Uso de la batería
Rendimiento de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Comprobación de la carga de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Contenido
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Medidor de energía . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Advertencia de bajo nivel de carga de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Carga de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Extracción de una batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Instalación de una batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Almacenamiento de una batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Problemas de alimentación eléctrica y de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Si la batería no se carga. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Si la batería dura poco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4 Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil
Botón Dell™ AccessDirect™. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Reprogramación del botón. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Teclado numérico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Métodos abreviados del teclado . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Funciones del sistema. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Bandeja de CD o de DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Funciones de la pantalla. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Administración de energía. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Funciones de la tecla con el logotipo de Microsoft
®
Windows
®
. . . . . 35
Superficie táctil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Personalización de la superficie táctil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Problemas con la superficie táctil o el ratón . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Problemas con el teclado externo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Caracteres inesperados . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
5 Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia
Cómo utilizar los CD y DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Problemas con los CD o DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Si no puede reproducir un CD, CD-RW o DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Si no puede expulsar la bandeja de la unidad de CD, CD-RW o DVD . . . 39Contenido 5
Si oye un sonido de roce o chirrido inusual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Si la unidad de CD-RW deja de grabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Problemas con el sonido y los altavoces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Si tiene problemas con los altavoces integrados . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Si tiene problemas con los altavoces externos . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Cómo copiar CD y DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Cómo copiar un CD o DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Cómo utilizar CD-R y CD-RW vacíos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Consejos prácticos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
6 Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina
Conexión de un adaptador de red. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Asistente para configuración de redes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Problemas con la red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Conexión a una red de área local inalámbrica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Establecimiento del tipo de red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Conexión a una red inalámbrica en Microsoft
®
Windows
®
XP . . . . . 45
7 Solución de problemas
Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Cuándo utilizar los Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Mensajes de error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Problemas con el vídeo y la pantalla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Si la pantalla aparece en blanco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Si resulta difícil leer la pantalla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Si sólo se puede leer parte de la pantalla. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Problemas con el escáner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Problemas con las unidades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Si no puede guardar un archivo en una unidad de disco flexible . . . . . 55
Si tiene problemas con una unidad de disco duro . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Problemas con la tarjeta PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Problemas generales del programa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566 Contenido
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Un programa se bloquea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Un programa no responde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Aparecen mensajes de error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Solución de otros problemas técnicos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Si el equipo se moja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Si el equipo se cae o se daña . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Controladores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
¿Qué es un controlador?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Identificación de controladores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Volver a instalar los controladores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Reinstalación manual de controladores para Windows XP . . . . . . . 60
Cómo resolver incompatibilidades de software y hardware . . . . . . . . . 61
Restauración de su sistema operativo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Cómo utilizar la función Restaurar sistema de MicrosoftWindows XP . . 61
Cómo utilizar la función Restaurar PC de Dell por Symantec . . . . . . . 62
8 Adición y sustitución de piezas
Antes de empezar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Herramientas recomendadas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Apagar el equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Unidad de disco duro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Devolución de una unidad de disco duro a Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Memoria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Módem y minitarjeta PCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Cómo cambiar el módem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Cómo agregar una minitarjeta PCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Unidad de CD o DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Teclado . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
9 Apéndice
Especificaciones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Contenido 7
Utilización del programa Configuración del sistema. . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Visión general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Visualización de las pantallas de configuración del sistema . . . . . . . 87
Pantallas de configuración del sistema. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Opciones más utilizadas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Optimización del rendimiento de la batería y el sistema . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Información general sobre el rendimiento del sistema . . . . . . . . . 88
Optimización del consumo de energía y del tiempo de carga
de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Velocidad variable del ventilador. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Política de soporte técnico de Dell (sólo EE.UU.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Definición de software y dispositivos periféricos “instalados por Dell” . . 90
Definición de software y dispositivos periféricos “de terceros” . . . . . 90
Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Índice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098 Contenido
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mLocalización de información 9
Localización de información
NOTA: Es posible que algunas funciones no estén disponibles para su equipo o en determinados países.
NOTA: Su equipo puede incluir información adicional.
¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontrará
• Información sobre la garantía
• Términos y condiciones (sólo en EE.UU.)
• Instrucciones de seguridad
• Información reglamentaria
• Información ergonómica
• End User License Agreement (Contrato de licencia de
usuario final)
Guía de información del producto Dell™
• Cómo instalar mi equipo Diagrama de instalación10 Localización de información
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
• Consejos sobre la utilización de Microsoft®
Windows®
• Cómo reproducir CD y DVD
• Cómo utilizar el modo de espera y el modo de
hibernación
• Cómo cambiar la resolución de la pantalla
• Cómo limpiar el equipo
Archivo de ayuda
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Ayuda y soporte
técnico.
2 Haga clic en Guías del usuario y del sistema y en Guías
del usuario.
3 Haga clic en Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell
Inspiron).
• Etiqueta de servicio y código de servicio rápido
• Etiqueta de licencia de Microsoft Windows
Etiqueta de servicio y licencia de Microsoft Windows
Estas etiquetas están situadas en el panel inferior de su
equipo.
• Utilice la etiqueta de
servicio para
identificar el equipo
cuando utilice
support.dell.com o
póngase en contacto
con el servicio de asistencia técnica.
• Escriba el código de servicio urgente para dirigir su
llamada cuando se ponga en contacto con el servicio de
asistencia técnica.
¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontraráLocalización de información 11
• Soluciones — Consejos y sugerencias para la solución de
problemas, artículos de técnicos, cursos en línea y
preguntas más frecuentes
• Comunidad — debates en línea con otros clientes de
Dell
• Actualizaciones — Información de actualización para
componentes como, por ejemplo, la memoria, la unidad
de disco duro y el sistema operativo
• Atención al cliente — Información de contacto, llamada
de servicio y estado de los pedidos, garantía e
información de reparación
• Servicio y asistencia — Historial de asistencia y estado
de las llamadas de servicio, contrato de servicio, debates
en línea con el personal de asistencia técnica
• Referencia — Documentación del equipo, detalles en la
configuración de mi equipo, especificaciones del
producto y documentación técnica
• Descargas — Controladores certificados, revisiones y
actualizaciones de software
• —Si vuelve a instalar el sistema operativo del equipo,
también debe volver a instalar la utilidad NSS.
NSS proporciona actualizaciones importantes del
sistema operativo y asistencia para las unidades de
disquete de 3,5 pulgadas de Dell™, procesadores Intel®
Pentium®
M, unidades ópticas y dispositivos USB. La
utilidad NSS es necesaria para el correcto
funcionamiento de su equipo Dell. El software detecta
automáticamente su equipo y sistema operativo e instala
las actualizaciones apropiadas a su configuración.
Sitio web Dell Support — support.dell.com
NOTA: Seleccione su región para ver el sitio web de
asistencia adecuado.
NOTA: Los clientes de empresas, instituciones
gubernamentales y educativas también pueden utilizar el
sitio web personalizado Dell Premier Support de
premier.support.dell.com. Es posible que este sitio web no
esté disponible en todas las regiones.
• Cómo utilizar Windows XP
• Documentación de mi equipo
• Documentación para los dispositivos (como, por
ejemplo, un módem)
Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Ayuda y soporte
técnico.
2 Escriba una palabra o frase que describa el problema y, a
continuación, haga clic en el icono de flecha.
3 Haga clic en el tema que describa el problema.
4 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla.
¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontrará12 Localización de información
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mDescripción del equipo 13
Descripción del equipo
Vista anterior
SE G U R O D E L A P A N T A L L A — Mantiene la pantalla cerrada.
PA N T A L L A — Para obtener más información sobre la pantalla, consulte la sección relativa al uso de la
pantalla en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9.
Seguro de la pantalla
Pantalla
Altavoces (2)
Indicadores de
estado del teclado
Teclado
Indicadores de
estado del
dispositivo
Superficie táctil
Botones de la
superficie táctil
Botón de
alimentación
Botón Dell
AccessDirect14 Descripción del equipo
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
INDICADORES DE ESTADO DEL TECLADO
Los indicadores luminosos verdes situados sobre el teclado indican lo siguiente:
TE C L A D O — El teclado incluye tanto un teclado numérico como la tecla con el logotipo de Microsoft®
Windows®
. Para obtener información sobre los métodos abreviados de teclado, consulte la página 34.
AL T A V O C E S — Para ajustar el volumen de los altavoces integrados, pulse los métodos abreviados de
teclado de control del volumen. Para obtener más información, consulte la página 34.
Se ilumina cuando el teclado numérico está activado.
Se enciende cuando Bloq Mayús está activado.
Se ilumina cuando el bloqueo de desplazamiento está
activado.
9
ADescripción del equipo 15
INDICADORES DE ESTADO DEL DISPOSITIVO
Si el equipo está conectado a una toma de alimentación eléctrica, el indicador funciona de la
siguiente manera:
– Luz verde continua: la batería se está cargando.
Si el equipo utiliza alimentación de la batería, el indicador funciona de la siguiente manera:
– Apagado: la batería está cargada de forma correcta (o el equipo está apagado).
– Luz naranja parpadeante: la carga de la batería está baja.
– Luz naranja continua: la carga de la batería está demasiado baja.
BO T O N E S D E L A S U P E R F I C I E T Á C T I L — Los botones de la superficie táctil ofrecen las mismas funciones
que un mouse. Consulte la página 36 para obtener más información.
SU P E R F I C I E T Á C T I L — La superficie táctil y sus botones ofrecen las mismas funciones que un ratón.
Consulte la página 36 para obtener más información.
Se enciende al encender el equipo. Parpadea o se apaga en modo de
administración de energía.
Se ilumina cuando el equipo lee o escribe datos.
AVISO: Para evitar que se produzcan pérdidas de datos, no apague
nunca el equipo si el indicador parpadea.
Parpadea para indicar el estado de carga de la batería.16 Descripción del equipo
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
BO T Ó N D E A L I M E N T A C I Ó N — Pulse el botón de alimentación para encender el equipo o para activar o
desactivar un modo de administración de energía. Para obtener más información, consulte la sección
relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de
ayuda, consulte la página 9.
AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos, guarde y cierre todos los archivos abiertos y salga de todos los
programas abiertos antes de cerrar el equipo (consulte la página 28).
Si el equipo deja de responder, mantenga pulsado el botón de alimentación hasta que el equipo se apague
totalmente (esto puede tardar unos segundos).
BO T Ó N DE L L™ AC C E S SDI R E C T™ — Pulse este botón para iniciar un programa que se utiliza con
frecuencia, como herramientas educativas y de soporte. Si lo desea, puede reprogramar el botón para que
inicie el programa que prefiera. Para obtener más información, consulte la página 33).
Vista lateral izquierda
RA N U R A P A R A T A R J E T A PC — Admite una PC Card, como un módem o un adaptador de red. Para
obtener más información, consulte la sección relativa al uso de tarjetas PC en el archivo de ayuda de Dell
Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9.
Ranura
para la PC Card
Conectores de audio (2)
Unidad CD o DVDDescripción del equipo 17
CONECTORES DE AUDIO
UN I D A D D E CD O DVD — Admite una unidad de CD, una unidad de DVD, una unidad de CD-RW o
una unidad combinada CD-RW/DVD.
Vista lateral derecha
BA T E R Í A/C O M P A R T I M E N T O D E L A B A T E R Í A — Si tiene instalada una batería, puede utilizar el equipo sin
conectarlo a una toma de corriente. Consulte la página 29.
Conecte los auriculares o los altavoces al conector
Conecte un micrófono al conector
Batería/
compartimento
de la batería Conector para módem
Rejillas de ventilación
Ranura para cable
de seguridad18 Descripción del equipo
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
CONECTOR DEL MÓDEM
RE J I L L A S D E V E N T I L A C I Ó N — El equipo utiliza un ventilador interno para permitir
que el aire circule a través de las rejillas y evitar así un sobrecalentamiento.
NOTA: El ventilador puede funcionar continuamente y su velocidad puede variar
según cómo se use. El ruido de los ventiladores es normal y no indica ningún
problema del equipo o de los ventiladores.
PRECAUCIÓN: No introduzca objetos ni permita que el polvo se acumule en las
rejillas de ventilación ni las bloquee. No almacene el equipo en un entorno con
poca ventilación, como un maletín cerrado, mientras esté en funcionamiento. La
circulación restringida de aire podría dañar el equipo o provocar un incendio.
RA N U R A P A R A C A B L E D E S E G U R I D A D — Sirve para conectar al equipo un
dispositivo antirrobo disponible en el mercado. Para obtener más información,
consulte las instrucciones incluidas con el dispositivo.
AVISO: Antes de comprar un dispositivo antirrobo, asegúrese de que encajará
en la ranura del cable de seguridad del equipo.
Conecte la línea telefónica al conector de módem.
Para obtener más información sobre el uso del módem,
consulte la documentación en línea del mismo incluida con
el equipo.Descripción del equipo 19
Vista posterior
RE J I L L A S D E V E N T I L A C I Ó N — El equipo utiliza un ventilador interno para permitir que el aire circule a
través de las rejillas y evitar así un sobrecalentamiento.
NOTA: El ventilador puede funcionar continuamente y su velocidad puede variar según cómo se use. El
ruido de los ventiladores es normal y no indica ningún problema del equipo o de los ventiladores.
PRECAUCIÓN: No introduzca objetos ni permita que el polvo se acumule en las rejillas de ventilación
ni las bloquee. No almacene el equipo en un entorno con poca ventilación, como un maletín cerrado,
mientras esté en funcionamiento. La circulación restringida de aire podría dañar el equipo o provocar
un incendio.
CO N E C T O R P A R A E L A D A P T A D O R D E CA — Conecte un adaptador de CA al equipo.
NOTA: Utilice sólo el adaptador de CA proporcionado con el equipo.
El adaptador de CA convierte la corriente alterna en la corriente continua que necesita el equipo. Puede
conectar el adaptador de CA al equipo independientemente de que esté encendido o apagado.
Conectores USB (2) Conector de red
Conector de vídeo
Conector del
adaptador de CA
Rejillas de
ventilación
Conector del adaptador de CA
Adaptador de CA20 Descripción del equipo
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
PRECAUCIÓN: El adaptador de CA funciona con tomas de alimentación eléctrica de todo el mundo.
No obstante, los conectores de alimentación y los enchufes múltiples varían de un país a otro. El uso de
un cable incompatible o la conexión incorrecta del cable al enchufe múltiple o a la toma eléctrica
puede dañar el equipo o provocar un incendio.
PRECAUCIÓN: Cuando utilice el adaptador de CA para suministrar alimentación al equipo o para
cargar la batería, sitúelo en un área ventilada, como un escritorio o en el suelo. No cubra el adaptador
de CA con papeles u otros objetos que reduzcan la ventilación; no utilice el adaptador de CA dentro de
un maletín.
AVISO: Cuando desconecte el cable del adaptador de CA del equipo, sujete el conector (no el cable) y
tire de él firmemente pero con cuidado, procurando no dañar el cable.
CONECTORES USB
CONECTOR DE VÍDEO
CONECTOR DE RED
AVISO: El conector de red es ligeramente más grande que el conector de módem. Para evitar dañar el
equipo, no conecte una línea telefónica al conector de red.
Conecta dispositivos USB, como un ratón, un teclado o una
impresora.
Conecta un monitor externo. Para obtener más información,
consulte la sección relativa al uso de la pantalla en el archivo
de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda,
consulte la página 9.
Conecta el equipo a una red. Los indicadores luminosos del
conector indican la actividad de las comunicaciones de red
con cable e inalámbricas.
Para obtener información sobre el uso del adaptador de red,
consulte la documentación en línea del mismo incluida con
el equipo.Descripción del equipo 21
Vista inferior
CU B I E R T A D E L A M I N I T A R J E T A PCI/M Ó D E M — Cubre el compartimento que contiene el módem y la
minitarjeta PCI. Consulte la página 71.
BA T E R Í A/C O M P A R T I M E N T O D E L A B A T E R Í A — Si tiene instalada una batería, puede utilizar el equipo sin
conectarlo a una toma de corriente. Consulte la página 29.
RE J I L L A S D E V E N T I L A C I Ó N — El equipo utiliza un ventilador interno para permitir que el aire circule a
través de las rejillas y evitar así un sobrecalentamiento.
NOTA: El ventilador puede funcionar continuamente y su velocidad puede variar según cómo se use. El
ruido de los ventiladores es normal y no indica ningún problema del equipo o de los ventiladores.
PRECAUCIÓN: No introduzca objetos ni permita que el polvo se acumule en las rejillas de ventilación
ni las bloquee. No almacene el equipo en un entorno con poca ventilación, como un maletín cerrado,
mientras esté en funcionamiento. La circulación restringida de aire podría dañar el equipo o provocar
un incendio.
SE G U R O D E L I B E R A C I Ó N D E L A B A T E R Í A — Libera la batería. Consulte la página 31 para obtener
instrucciones.
CU B I E R T A D E L M Ó D U L O D E M E M O R I A — Cubre el compartimiento que contiene los módulos de
memoria y el pasador de liberación de la unidad de CD o DVD. Consulte la página 68.
UN I D A D D E D I S C O D U R O — Almacena software y datos.
Cubierta del
módulo de memoria
Seguro de liberación
de la batería
Cubierta del
módem/minitarjeta
PCI
Batería/
compartimento
de la batería
Unidad de
disco duro
Rejilla de
ventilación22 Descripción del equipo
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mConfiguración de su equipo 23
Configuración de su equipo
Conexión a Internet
NOTA: Los ISP y sus ofertas varían según el país.
Para conectarse a Internet, se necesita un módem o una conexión de red y un proveedor de servicios
de Internet (ISP), como por ejemplo, AOL o MSN. El ISP ofrecerá una o varias de las siguientes
opciones de conexión a Internet:
• Conexiones telefónicas que proporcionan acceso a Internet a través de una línea telefónica.
Las conexiones telefónicas son considerablemente más lentas que las conexiones ADSL y de
módem por cable.
• Conexiones ADSL que proporcionan acceso a Internet de alta velocidad a través de la línea
telefónica existente. Con una conexión ADSL, se puede acceder a Internet y utilizar el
teléfono en una sola línea simultáneamente.
• Conexiones de módem por cable que proporcionan acceso a Internet de alta velocidad a
través de la línea de TV por cable local.
Si utiliza una conexión telefónica, enchufe una línea telefónica al conector de módem del equipo y
a la toma de teléfono de la pared antes de configurar la conexión a Internet. Si utiliza una conexión
ADSL o de módem por cable, póngase en contacto con su ISP para obtener instrucciones de
configuración.
Configuración de la conexión a Internet
Para configurar una conexión para AOL o MSN:
1 Guarde y cierre los archivos que tenga abiertos y salga de todos los programas.
2 Haga doble clic en el icono MSN Explorer o AOL del escritorio de Microsoft®
Windows®
.
3 Siga las instrucciones de la pantalla para realizar la configuración.
Si el escritorio no contiene ningún icono MSN Explorer o AOL, o si desea configurar una conexión
a Internet con un ISP diferente:
1 Guarde y cierre los archivos que tenga abiertos y salga de todos los programas.
2 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Internet Explorer.
Aparece la ventana Asistente para conexión nueva
3 Haga clic en Conectarse a Internet.24 Configuración de su equipo
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
4 En la siguiente ventana, haga clic en la opción correspondiente:
• Si no dispone de un ISP y desea seleccionar uno, haga clic en Elegir de una lista de
proveedores de servicios Internet [ISP].
• Si el ISP ya le ha proporcionado la información de configuración, pero no ha recibido el
CD de instalación, haga clic en Establecer mi conexión manualmente.
• Si dispone de un CD, haga clic en Usar el CD que tengo de un proveedor de servicios
Internet [ISP].
5 Haga clic en Siguiente.
Si ha seleccionado Establecer mi conexión manualmente, siga con el step 6. De lo contrario,
siga las instrucciones de la pantalla para realizar la configuración.
NOTA: Si no sabe qué tipo de conexión seleccionar, póngase en contacto con su ISP.
6 Haga clic en la opción adecuada dentro de ¿Cómo desea conectar a Internet? y, a
continuación, haga clic en Siguiente.
7 Utilice la información de configuración proporcionada por el ISP para realizar la
configuración.
Si conectarse a la internet le está dando problemas, consulte el apartado “Problemas con el módem
y con la conexión a Internet”. Si no puede conectarse a internet pero lo ha podido hacer
anteriormente, puede ser que el ISP esté sufriendo una interrupción de servicio. Póngase en
contacto con su ISP para comprobar el estado de servicio o intente conectarse más tarde.
Problemas con el módem y con la conexión a Internet
AVISO: Conecte el módem únicamente a una toma de teléfono de pared analógica. Si conecta el módem
a una red de telefonía digital, se dañará.
AVISO: Los conectores de módem y de red tienen un aspecto similar. No conecte una línea telefónica al
conector de red.
NOTA: Si se puede conectar con el proveedor de servicios de Internet (ISP), esto quiere decir que el
módem funciona correctamente. Si está seguro de que el módem funciona correctamente y, aun así,
tiene problemas, póngase en contacto con su ISP.
CO M P R U E B E L A T O M A D E T E L É F O N O D E L A P A R E D — Desconecte la línea telefónica del módem y
conéctela a un teléfono. Espere el tono de marcado. Asegúrese de que tiene un servicio telefónico por
tonos. Intente conectar el módem a otra clavija de teléfono.
Las velocidades de conexión lentas pueden deberse a ruido telefónico, así como a las condiciones de la línea
telefónica o de la red. Póngase en contacto con su compañía telefónica o su administrador de red para
obtener más información.Configuración de su equipo 25
CO N E C T E E L M Ó D E M D I R E C T A M E N T E A L A T O M A D E T E L É F O N O D E L A P A R E D — Si dispone de otros
dispositivos telefónicos que comparten la línea, por ejemplo, un contestador automático, una máquina de
fax, un supresor de sobrevoltaje o un divisor de línea, omítalos y utilice la línea telefónica para conectar el
módem directamente a la toma de teléfono de la pared.
CO M P R U E B E L A C O N E X I Ó N — Verifique que la línea telefónica está conectada al módem.
CO M P R U E B E L A L Í N E A T E L E F Ó N I C A — Pruebe a utilizar otra línea telefónica. Si utiliza una línea con una
longitud de 3 metros (10 pies) o más, pruebe con una más corta.
TO N O D E M A R C A D O I R R E G U L A R — Si tiene servicio de buzón de voz, es posible que oiga un tono de
marcado irregular cuando tenga mensajes. Póngase en contacto con la compañía telefónica para obtener
instrucciones sobre la restauración del tono de marcado.
DE S A C T I V E L A L L A M A D A E N E S P E R A (T E L É F O N O D E R E T E N C I Ó N D E L L A M A D A) — Consulte en la
documentación de la compañía telefónica las instrucciones sobre cómo desactivar esta función. A
continuación, ajuste las propiedades de la conexión de acceso telefónico a redes.
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Panel de control.
2 Haga clic en Impresoras y otro hardware, en Opciones de teléfono y módem, seleccione la ficha Reglas de
marcado y, a continuación, haga clic en Editar....
3 En la ventana Editar ubicación, asegúrese de que la opción Deshabilitar llamada en espera al marcar: está
activada y, a continuación, seleccione el código adecuado según aparece en la guía telefónica.
4 Haga clic en Aplicar y en Aceptar.
5 Cierre la ventana Opciones de teléfono y módem.
6 Cierre la ventana Panel de control.
CO M P R U E B E Q U E E L M Ó D E M S E C O M U N I C A C O N WI N D O W S —
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Panel de control.
2 Haga clic en Impresoras y otro hardware y, a continuación, en Opciones de teléfono y módem.
3 Haga clic en la pestaña Módems.
4 Haga clic en el puerto COM para el módem.
5 Haga clic en Propiedades, en la pestaña Diagnósticos y en Consultar módem para comprobar que el
módem se comunica con Windows.
Si todos los comandos reciben respuestas, significa que el módem funciona correctamente.
Problemas con el correo electrónico
CO M P R U E B E Q U E E S T Á C O N E C T A D O A IN T E R N E T — Con el programa de correo electrónico Outlook
Express abierto, haga clic en Archivo. Si la opción Trabajar sin conexión está activada, desactívela y
conéctese a Internet.
Instalación de una impresora
AVISO: Complete la configuración del sistema operativo antes de conectar una impresora al equipo.
Consulte la información de configuración en la documentación proporcionada con la impresora, en
la que se describe cómo realizar las siguientes operaciones:
• Obtener e instalar controladores actualizados
• Conectar la impresora al equipo26 Configuración de su equipo
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
• Cargar el papel e instalar el cartucho de tóner o de tinta
• Ponerse en contacto con el fabricante para obtener asistencia técnica
Cable de la impresora
Es posible que la impresora se entregue sin ningún cable, por lo que si adquiere uno por separado,
asegúrese de que sea compatible con la impresora. Si ha adquirido un cable de la impresora al
mismo tiempo que el equipo, es posible que el cable se incluya en la caja del equipo.
Conexión de una impresora USB
NOTA: Puede conectar dispositivos USB con el equipo encendido.
1 Finalice la configuración del sistema operativo, en el caso de que todavía no lo haya hecho.
2 Instale el controlador de la impresora, si es necesario. Consulte la documentación incluida
con la impresora.
3 Conecte el cable de la impresora USB a los conectores USB del equipo y de la impresora. Los
conectores USB admiten sólo una posición de encaje.
Problemas con la impresora
CO M P R U E B E L A S C O N E X I O N E S D E L O S C A B L E S D E L A I M P R E S O R A — Asegúrese de que el cable de la
impresora está conectado correctamente al equipo (consulte la página 26).
PR U E B E L A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Asegúrese de que la toma de corriente eléctrica funciona;
para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara.
Cable de la
impresora
USB
Conector USB del
equipo
Conector USB
de la impresoraConfiguración de su equipo 27
CO M P R U E B E Q U E L A I M P R E S O R A E S T Á E N C E N D I D A — Consulte la documentación que se proporciona
con la impresora.
CO M P R U E B E Q U E WI N D O W S
®
R E C O N O C E L A I M P R E S O R A —
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio.
2 Haga clic en Panel de control.
3 Haga clic en Impresoras y otro hardware.
4 Haga clic en Ver impresoras o impresoras de fax instaladas. Si aparece el modelo de la impresora, haga clic
con el botón derecho del ratón en el icono de la impresora.
5 Pulse Propiedades y, a continuación, pulse la ficha Puertos. Asegúrese de que la opción Imprimir en los
siguientes puertos es USB 001 (Puerto de la impresora).
VU E L V A A I N S T A L A R E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E L A I M P R E S O R A — Consulte la página 59.
Dispositivos para protección de la alimentación
Existen varios dispositivos que protegen contra las interrupciones y las fluctuaciones de la
alimentación eléctrica:
• Supresores de sobrevoltaje
• Acondicionadores de línea
• Sistemas de alimentación ininterrumpida (SAI)
Supresores de sobrevoltaje
Los supresores de sobrevoltaje y los enchufes múltiples equipados con protección contra
sobrevoltajes ayudan a evitar los daños derivados de los picos de voltaje, que pueden producirse
durante las tormentas con aparato eléctrico o inmediatamente después de las interrupciones en la
alimentación eléctrica. El nivel de protección suele ser proporcional al precio del supresor de
sobrevoltaje. Algunos fabricantes de supresores de sobrevoltaje proporcionan cobertura de garantía
para cierto tipo de daños. Lea con atención la garantía del dispositivo al elegir un supresor de
sobrevoltaje. Un dispositivo con una clasificación en julios más alta ofrece más protección.
Compare las clasificaciones en julios para determinar la efectividad relativa de los diferentes
dispositivos.
AVISO: La mayoría de los supresores de sobrevoltaje no protegen contra las fluctuaciones e
interrupciones de la alimentación eléctrica causadas por rayos. Cuando se produzca una tormenta con
aparato eléctrico, desconecte la línea telefónica de la toma de teléfono de pared y desenchufe el equipo
de la toma de corriente.
Muchos supresores de sobrevoltaje disponen de una toma de teléfono para proteger el módem.
Consulte la documentación del supresor de sobrevoltaje para obtener instrucciones sobre la
conexión del módem.
AVISO: No todos los supresores de sobrevoltaje ofrecen protección para el adaptador de red.
Desconecte el cable de red de la toma de red de pared durante una tormenta con aparato eléctrico.28 Configuración de su equipo
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Acondicionadores de línea
AVISO: Los acondicionadores de línea no protegen contra las interrupciones de la alimentación
eléctrica.
Los acondicionadores de línea están diseñados para mantener el voltaje de CA a un nivel bastante
constante.
Sistemas de alimentación ininterrumpida
AVISO: La interrupción de la alimentación eléctrica mientras se están guardando datos en la unidad de
disco duro puede provocar que se pierdan datos o que el archivo resulte dañado.
NOTA: Para prolongar al máximo el tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería, conecte únicamente el
equipo al SAI. Los demás dispositivos, como la impresora, puede conectarlos a un enchufe múltiple
independiente que proporcione protección contra sobrevoltajes.
Un SAI protege contra las fluctuaciones y las interrupciones de la alimentación eléctrica. Los
dispositivos SAI contienen una batería que proporciona alimentación eléctrica temporal a los
dispositivos conectados cuando se interrumpe la alimentación eléctrica. La batería se carga siempre
que haya alimentación de CA disponible. Consulte la documentación del fabricante del SAI para
obtener información sobre el tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería y asegurarse de que el
dispositivo está aprobado por Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
Cómo apagar el equipo
AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos, guarde y cierre todos los archivos abiertos y salga de todos los
programas abiertos antes de cerrar el equipo.
NOTA: Si lo prefiere, en vez de apagar el equipo, puede configurarlo para que entre en el modo de
suspensión o de hibernación. Para obtener más información, consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help
(Ayuda de Dell Inspiron). Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9.
1 Guarde y cierre los archivos abiertos, salga de todos los programas, haga clic en el botón Inicio
y luego en Apagar equipo.
2 En la ventana Apagar equipo, haga clic en Apagar.
El equipo se apaga cuando concluye el proceso de cierre del sistema.Uso de la batería 29
Uso de la batería
Rendimiento de la batería
NOTA: Las baterías de los equipos portátiles sólo están cubiertas durante el primer año de validez de la
garantía limitada del equipo. Para obtener más información sobre la garantía de Dell de su equipo,
consulte la Guía de información del producto.
Utilice una batería para suministrar energía al equipo cuando no esté conectado a una toma de
alimentación eléctrica. Se proporciona una batería en su compartimento correspondiente como
equipamiento estándar.
NOTA: El tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería (el tiempo que la batería puede mantener una carga)
disminuye con el tiempo. En función de la frecuencia y las condiciones de uso de la batería, es posible
que deba comprar una nueva batería durante la vida útil del equipo.
El tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería varía en función de las condiciones de funcionamiento.
La autonomía de la batería puede reducirse significativamente cuando se realizan, entre otras, las
siguientes operaciones:
NOTA: Se recomienda conectar el equipo a una toma de corriente eléctrica mientras se graba en un CD.
• Uso de unidades ópticas, especialmente unidades de DVD y CD-RW.
• Uso de dispositivos de comunicaciones inalámbricas, tarjeta PC o dispositivos USB.
• Uso de configuraciones de pantalla de mucho brillo.
• Uso de protectores de pantalla 3D u otros programas que utilizan mucha energía, como
juegos 3D y programas de ingeniería.
• Ejecución del equipo en modo de rendimiento máximo. Para obtener más información,
consulte la sección relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de ayuda de Dell
Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 10.
Puede establecer las opciones de administración de energía para que se le avise cuando la carga de
la batería esté baja.
PRECAUCIÓN: El uso de baterías incompatibles puede aumentar el riesgo de incendio o explosión.
Sustituya la batería únicamente por baterías de Dell. La batería de iones de litio está diseñada para
funcionar con equipos Dell™. No utilice la batería de otros equipos en su equipo.
PRECAUCIÓN: No deseche las baterías en la basura doméstica. Cuando la batería ya no pueda
cargarse, solicite información a una empresa local de gestión de residuos o al departamento
responsable en materia de medio ambiente sobre el modo de desechar las baterías de iones de litio.
Consulte las instrucciones para desechar las baterías en la Guía de información del producto.
PRECAUCIÓN: El uso incorrecto de la batería puede aumentar el riesgo de incendio o quemadura
química. No perfore, incinere, desmonte o exponga la batería a temperaturas superiores a 65°C (149 °F).
Mantenga la batería fuera del alcance de los niños. Tenga mucho cuidado con las baterías dañadas o
que goteen. Las baterías dañadas pueden gotear y causar lesiones personales o daños en el equipo. 30 Uso de la batería
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Comprobación de la carga de la batería
La ventana y el icono del medidor de energía de Microsoft® Windows®
, y la advertencia de
batería baja proporcionan información sobre la carga de la batería.
Medidor de energía
El medidor de energía de Windows indica la carga que le queda a la batería. Para consultar el
medidor de energía, pulse dos veces en el icono de la barra de tareas. Para obtener más
información sobre la ficha Medidor de energía, consulte la sección relativa a la administración de
energía en el archivo de Ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la
página 10.
Si el equipo está conectado a una toma de corriente, aparece un icono .
Advertencia de bajo nivel de carga de la batería
AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos o que éstos resulten dañados, tras una advertencia de batería
baja guarde inmediatamente el trabajo. A continuación, conecte el equipo a una toma de corriente
eléctrica. Si la carga de la batería se agota por completo, el modo de hibernación se activa
automáticamente.
Cuando se ha agotado aproximadamente un 90 % de la carga, una ventana emergente se lo
advierte. Para obtener más información sobre alarmas de bajo nivel de carga de batería, consulte la
sección relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder
al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 10.
Carga de la batería
NOTA: el adaptador de CA tarda 3 horas aproximadamente en cargar una batería totalmente
descargada con el equipo apagado. El tiempo de carga es significativamente superior si el equipo está
encendido y funciona a una alta velocidad de procesador y niveles elevados de actividad del sistema. Si
se utiliza el equipo con niveles elevados de actividad durante un periodo prolongado de tiempo, puede
ser que la batería no se cargue.
Cuando se conecta el equipo a un enchufe de alimentación eléctrica o se instala una batería
mientras el equipo está conectado a una toma de corriente, éste comprueba la carga y la
temperatura de la batería. Si es necesario, el adaptador de CA cargará la batería y mantendrá la
carga.
Si la batería está caliente porque se ha estado usando en el equipo o porque ha permanecido en un
ambiente donde la temperatura es elevada, puede ser que no se cargue cuando se conecte el equipo
a una toma de alimentación eléctrica.
Si el indicador parpadea alternando entre el verde y el naranja, la batería está demasiado
caliente para iniciar la carga. Desconecte el equipo de la toma de corriente y espere a que tanto éste
como la batería se enfríen hasta alcanzar la temperatura ambiente. A continuación, conecte el
equipo a una toma de corriente y continúe cargando la batería.
NOTA: Puede dejar la batería en el equipo todo el tiempo que desee. Los circuitos internos de la batería
impiden que se sobrecargue.Uso de la batería 31
Para obtener más información sobre la resolución de problemas de la batería, consulte la sección
relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al
archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 10.
Extracción de una batería
PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de realizar estos procedimientos, desconecte el módem del enchufe telefónico
de pared.
1 Compruebe que el equipo está apagado o conectado a una toma de corriente eléctrica.
2 Deslice y sostenga el pasador de la batería.
3 Extraiga la batería.
Instalación de una batería
Inserte la batería en el compartimento de la batería hasta que el pasador haga un “clic”.
Almacenamiento de una batería
Extraiga la batería cuando vaya a guardar el equipo durante un período largo. Las baterías se
descargan durante los almacenamientos prolongados. Tras un periodo prolongado de
almacenamiento, deberá cargar la batería completamente antes de utilizarla.
Problemas de alimentación eléctrica y de la batería
NOTA: Consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron) para obtener información sobre el
modo de espera. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 10.
Seguro de la
batería
Batería32 Uso de la batería
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
CO M P R U E B E E L I N D I C A D O R D E A L I M E N T A C I Ó N — Si el indicador de alimentación está encendido o
parpadea, significa que el equipo recibe alimentación. Si el indicador de alimentación parpadea, el equipo
está en modo de espera; pulse el botón de alimentación para salir del modo de espera. Si el indicador está
apagado, pulse el botón de alimentación para encender el equipo o para activar o desactivar un modo de
administración de energía. Si el equipo no se enciende, pulse y mantenga pulsado el botón de alimentación
durante unos segundos.
CA R G U E L A B A T E R Í A — Puede que la carga de batería se haya agotado.
1 Vuelva a instalar la batería.
2 Utilice el adaptador de CA para conectar el equipo a una toma de corriente.
3 Encienda el equipo.
CO M P R U E B E E L I N D I C A D O R D E E S T A D O D E L A B A T E R Í A — Si el indicador parpadea en color naranja o
muestra un color naranja continuo, significa que la carga de la batería está baja o agotada. Conecte el
equipo a un enchufe eléctrico.
Si el indicador parpadea en colores verde y naranja, significa que la batería está demasiado caliente para
cargarla. Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28), desconéctelo de la toma de corriente y, a continuación,
espere a que tanto éste como la batería se enfríen hasta alcanzar la temperatura ambiente.
Si el indicador de estado de la batería parpadea rápidamente en color naranja, puede que la batería esté
defectuosa. Póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90).
PR U E B E L A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Asegúrese de que la toma de corriente eléctrica funciona;
para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara.
CO M P R U E B E E L A D A P T A D O R D E CA — Compruebe las conexiones de cable del adaptador de CA. Si el
adaptador de CA tiene una luz, asegúrese de que esté encendida.
CO N E C T E E L E Q U I P O D I R E C T A M E N T E A U N A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Omita los dispositivos
protectores de la alimentación, regletas de enchufes y alargadores para comprobar que el equipo se
enciende.
EL I M I N E L A S P O S I B L E S I N T E R F E R E N C I A S — Apague los ventiladores, luces fluorescentes, lámparas
halógenas u otros aparatos cercanos.
AJ U S T E L A S P R O P I E D A D E S D E L A A L I M E N T A C I Ó N — Consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de
Dell Inspiron) o busque la palabra clave en espera en el Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico. Para acceder a la
ayuda, consulte la página 10.
VU E L V A A C O L O C A R L O S M Ó D U L O S D E M E M O R I A — Si el indicador de alimentación del equipo se
enciende pero en la pantalla no se ve nada, vuelva a colocar los módulos de memoria (consulte la
página 68).
Si la batería no se carga
AP A G U E E L E Q U I P O — El tiempo de carga es significativamente superior si el equipo está encendido y
funciona a una alta velocidad de procesador y niveles elevados de actividad del sistema. Si se utiliza el
equipo con niveles elevados de actividad durante un periodo prolongado de tiempo, puede ser que la
batería no se cargue.
Si la batería dura poco
CO N S U L T E E L A P A R T A D O “RE N D I M I E N T O D E L A B A T E R Í A” E N L A P Á G I N A 29 — El tiempo de
funcionamiento puede reducirse significativamente bajo determinadas condiciones.
OP T I M I Z A C I Ó N D E L R E N D I M I E N T O D E L P R O C E S A D O R Y C O N S U M O D E E N E R G Í A — Consulte la
página 88.Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil 33
Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil
Botón Dell™ AccessDirect™
Presione este botón para iniciar un programa que se utiliza con frecuencia, como las herramientas
de soporte técnico y de formación o el explorador de Internet predeterminado.
Reprogramación del botón
Para cambiar la configuración del botón reprogramable o buscar información sobre el uso del
botón:
1 Pulse el botón Inicio → Panel de control → Impresoras y otro hardware → Teclado.
2 Pulse la ficha AccessDirect.
3 Pulse el botón Ayuda y siga las instrucciones que aparecen en la pantalla.
Teclado numérico
El teclado numérico funciona como el teclado numérico de un teclado externo. Cada tecla del
teclado numérico tiene varias funciones. Los números y símbolos del teclado numérico están
marcados en azul en la parte derecha de las teclas.
Teclado numérico34 Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Para activar el teclado, pulse . El indicador indica que el teclado numérico está
activo.
Para utilizar la función numérica cuando el teclado numérico esté activado, pulse y la tecla
que desee.
Para desactivar el teclado numérico, pulse de nuevo.
Métodos abreviados del teclado
Funciones del sistema
Bandeja de CD o de DVD
Funciones de la pantalla
Administración de energía
Abre la ventana Administrador de tareas de
Windows
Activa y desactiva el teclado numérico
Activa y desactiva el bloqueo de desplazamiento
Expulsa la bandeja fuera de la unidad.
Cambia la imagen de vídeo a la siguiente opción de
pantalla. Entre las opciones están la pantalla integrada,
un monitor externo y las dos pantallas a la vez.
Si está reproduciendo un DVD o viendo un vídeo,
está desactivado.
y tecla de flecha
hacia arriba
Aumenta el brillo únicamente en la pantalla integrada
(no en un monitor externo)
y tecla de fecha
hacia abajo
Reduce el brillo únicamente en la pantalla integrada (no
en un monitor externo)
Activa un modo de administración de energía. Puede
reprogramar este método abreviado de teclado para
activar otro modo de administración de energía
utilizando la ficha Opciones avanzadas de la ventana
Propiedades de Opciones de energía. Para obtener más
información, consulte la sección relativa a la
administración de energía en el archivo de ayuda de Dell
Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la
página 9.
9Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil 35
Funciones de los altavoces
Funciones de la tecla con el logotipo de Microsoft®
Windows®
Para ajustar el funcionamiento del teclado, como la velocidad de repetición de los caracteres, pulse
el botón Inicio → Panel de control → Impresoras y otro hardware → Teclado. Siga las
instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla.
Aumenta el volumen de los altavoces integrados y de los
altavoces externos (si los hay)
Disminuye el volumen de los altavoces integrados y de
los altavoces externos (si los hay)
Activa y desactiva los altavoces integrados y los altavoces
externos (si los hay)
Tecla del logotipo de
Windows y
Minimiza todas las ventanas abiertas
Tecla del logotipo de
Windows y
Maximiza todas las ventanas
Tecla del logotipo de
Windows y
Ejecuta el Explorador de Windows
Tecla del logotipo de
Windows y
Abre el cuadro de diálogo Ejecutar
Tecla del logotipo de
Windows y
Abre el cuadro de diálogo Resultados de la búsqueda
Tecla del logotipo de
Windows y
Abre el cuadro de diálogo Resultados de búsquedaPC si el equipo está conectado a una red
Tecla del logotipo de
Windows y
Abre el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades del sistema36 Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Superficie táctil
La superficie táctil detecta la presión y el movimiento del dedo para permitir desplazar el cursor por
la pantalla. Utilice la superficie táctil y sus botones del mismo modo que un mouse.
• Para mover el cursor, deslice ligeramente el dedo por la superficie táctil.
• Para seleccionar un objeto, toque suavemente la superficie táctil o utilice el pulgar para
presionar el botón izquierdo de la misma.
• Para seleccionar y mover (o arrastrar) un objeto, sitúe el cursor sobre él y toque abajo-arribaabajo en la superficie táctil. En el segundo toque abajo, deje el dedo sobre la superficie táctil y
deslícelo por la superficie para mover el objeto seleccionado.
• Para hacer doble clic en un objeto, sitúe el cursor en él y, a continuación, toque dos veces la
superficie táctil o pulse el botón izquierdo de la misma dos veces.
Personalización de la superficie táctil
Puede desactivar la superficie táctil o ajustar su configuración utilizando la ventana Propiedades
del ratón.
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, en Panel de control y en Impresoras y otro hardware.
2 Haga clic en Ratón
3 En la ventana Propiedades del ratón, pulse la ficha Configuración de dispositivo.
Para desactivar la superficie táctil o el mouse, resalte el dispositivo y pulse Deshabilitar.
Superficie
táctil
Botones de la
superficie táctilUso del teclado y de la superficie táctil 37
Para cambiar la configuración de la superficie táctil o el mouse, resalte el dispositivo, pulse
Configuración, seleccione la configuración que desee y, a continuación, pulse Aplicar.
4 Pulse Aceptar para guardar la configuración y cerrar la ventana y, a continuación, pulse de
nuevo Aceptar para salir de la ventana Propiedades del ratón.
Problemas con la superficie táctil o el ratón
CO M P R U E B E L A C O N F I G U R A C I Ó N D E L A S U P E R F I C I E T Á C T I L —
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, en Panel de control y en Impresoras y otro hardware.
2 Haga clic en Ratón
3 Ajuste la configuración.
CO M P R U E B E E L C A B L E D E L M O U S E — Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28). Desconecte el cable del
ratón y examínelo para ver si está dañado. Vuelva a conectar el cable firmemente.
Si utiliza un cable alargador para el mouse, desconéctelo y conéctelo directamente al equipo.
PA R A C O M P R O B A R Q U E S E T R A T A D E U N P R O B L E M A C O N E L M O U S E , E X A M I N E L A S U P E R F I C I E
T Á C T I L —
1 Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28).
2 Desconecte el mouse.
3 Encienda el equipo.
4 En el escritorio de Windows, use la superficie táctil para mover el cursor, seleccione un icono y ábralo.
Si la superficie táctil funciona correctamente, esto quiere decir que el mouse debe estar defectuoso.
RE I N S T A L E E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E L A S U P E R F I C I E T Á C T I L — Consulte la página 59.
Problemas con el teclado externo
NOTA: Cuando conecta un teclado externo, el teclado integrado sigue conservando toda su
funcionalidad.
CO M P R U E B E E L C A B L E D E L T E C L A D O — Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28). Desconecte el cable
del teclado y examínelo para ver si está dañado. Vuelva a conectar correctamente el cable.
Si utiliza un cable alargador para el teclado, desconéctelo y conecte el teclado directamente al equipo.
CO M P R U E B E E L T E C L A D O E X T E R N O —
1 Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28), espere 1 minuto y vuelva a encenderlo.
2 Compruebe que los indicadores de números, mayúsculas y bloqueo de desplazamiento del teclado
parpadean durante la rutina de arranque.
3 En el escritorio de Windows®
, pulse el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas, seleccione Accesorios
y pulse Bloc de notas.
4 Escriba algunos caracteres con el teclado externo y compruebe que aparecen en pantalla.
Si no puede seguir estos pasos, puede que tenga un teclado externo defectuoso. 38 Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
PA R A C O M P R O B A R Q U E S E T R A T A D E U N P R O B L E M A C O N E L T E C L A D O E X T E R N O, E X A M I N E E L T E C L A D O
I N T E G R A D O —
1 Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28).
2 Desconecte el teclado externo.
3 Encienda el equipo.
4 En el escritorio de Windows, pulse el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas , Accesorios y Bloc de
notas.
5 Escriba algunos caracteres con el teclado externo y compruebe que aparecen en pantalla.
Si los caracteres aparecen ahora, pero no con el teclado externo, puede que tenga un teclado externo
defectuoso. Póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90).
Caracteres inesperados
DE S A C T I V E E L T E C L A D O N U M É R I C O — Pulse para desactivar el teclado numérico si se
muestran números en lugar de letras. Compruebe que el indicador luminoso del bloqueo numérico no esté
encendido.Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia 39
Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos
multimedia
Cómo utilizar los CD y DVD
Para obtener información sobre cómo utilizar CD y DVD en el equipo, consulte el archivo Dell
Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron). Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9.
Problemas con los CD o DVD
Si no puede reproducir un CD, CD-RW o DVD
NOTA: Debido a los diferentes tipos de archivo que se utilizan en todo el mundo, no todos los DVD
funcionan en todas las unidades de DVD.
La vibración de las unidades de CD de alta velocidad es normal y puede ocasionar ruido. Dicho
ruido no indica ningún defecto en la unidad o el CD.
AS E G Ú R E S E D E Q U E WI N D O W S
®
R E C O N O Z C A L A U N I D A D — Haga clic en el botón Inicio y, a
continuación, en Mi PC. Si no aparece la unidad, haga una búsqueda completa con el software antivirus
para comprobar si hay virus y eliminarlos. A veces los virus pueden impedir que Windows reconozca la
unidad. Inserte un disco de inicio y reinicie el equipo. Compruebe si el indicador de la unidad
parpadea, lo cual indica que el funcionamiento es correcto.
UT I L I C E O T R O D I S C O — Inserte otro disco para descartar la posibilidad de que el disco original sea
defectuoso.
ASEGÚRESE DE QUE EL CD ESTÉ BIEN ENCAJADO EN EL EJE DE LA BANDEJA DE LA UNIDAD DE CD
AJ U S T E E L C O N T R O L D E V O L U M E N D E WI N D O W S — Haga doble clic en el icono de altavoz que se
encuentra en la esquina inferior derecha de la pantalla. Asegúrese de que ha subido el volumen y no ha
silenciado el sonido.
LI M P I E L A U N I D A D O E L D I S C O — Consulte la sección relativa a la limpieza del equipo en el archivo Dell
Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron) para obtener instrucciones. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda,
consulte la página 9.
Si no puede expulsar la bandeja de la unidad de CD, CD-RW o DVD
1 Compruebe que el equipo está apagado (consulte la página 28).
2 Enderece un clip sujetapapeles e introduzca un extremo en el orificio de expulsión situado en la parte
frontal de la unidad; empuje firmemente hasta que se expulse parcialmente la bandeja.
3 Tire de la bandeja hacia afuera suavemente hasta que se detenga.40 Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Si oye un sonido de roce o chirrido inusual
• Asegúrese de que el sonido no se debe al programa que se está ejecutando.
• Asegúrese de que el disco esté insertado correctamente.
Si la unidad de CD-RW deja de grabar
DE S A C T I V E E L M O D O D E S U S P E N S I Ó N E N WI N D O W S A N T E S D E G R A B A R E N U N CD-RW — Busque la
palabra clave en espera en el centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows. Para acceder a la ayuda,
consulte la página 9.
CA M B I E L A V E L O C I D A D D E G R A B A C I Ó N A U N A V E L O C I D A D I N F E R I O R — Consulte los archivos de ayuda
relativos al software de creación de CD.
SA L G A D E L R E S T O D E P R O G R A M A S A B I E R T O S — Para mitigar el problema, salga del resto de programas
abiertos antes de grabar en el CD-RW.
Problemas con el sonido y los altavoces
Si tiene problemas con los altavoces integrados
AJ U S T E E L C O N T R O L D E L V O L U M E N D E WI N D O W S
®
— Haga doble clic en el icono de altavoz que se
encuentra en la esquina inferior derecha de la pantalla. Asegúrese de que ha subido el volumen y no ha
silenciado el sonido. Ajuste los controles de volumen para eliminar la distorsión.
AJ U S T E E L V O L U M E N U T I L I Z A N D O M É T O D O S A B R E V I A D O S D E T E C L A D O — Pulse para
desactivar (quitar el sonido) o volver a activar los altavoces integrados.
VU E L V A A I N S T A L A R E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E S O N I D O (A U D I O) — Consulte la página 59.
Si tiene problemas con los altavoces externos
NOTA: El control de volumen de algunos reproductores de MP3 anula la configuración de volumen de
Windows. Si ha estado escuchando canciones MP3, asegúrese de que el control de volumen no está
puesto al mínimo ni se ha desactivado.
CO M P R U E B E L A S C O N E X I O N E S D E L O S C A B L E S D E L O S A L T A V O C E S — Consulte el diagrama de
instalación proporcionado con los altavoces.
PR U E B E L A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Asegúrese de que la toma de corriente eléctrica funciona;
para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara.
CO M P R U E B E Q U E L O S A L T A V O C E S E S T Á N E N C E N D I D O S — Consulte el diagrama de instalación
proporcionado con los altavoces.
AJ U S T E E L C O N T R O L D E V O L U M E N D E WI N D O W S — Haga doble clic en el icono de altavoz que se
encuentra en la esquina inferior derecha de la pantalla. Asegúrese de que ha subido el volumen y no ha
silenciado el sonido. Ajuste los controles de volumen para eliminar la distorsión.
PR U E B E L O S A L T A V O C E S — Conecte el cable de audio del altavoz al conector de salida de línea del
equipo. Asegúrese de que el control de volumen de los auriculares esté activado. Reproduzca un CD de
música.
EJ E C U T E L A A U T O P R U E B A D E L O S A L T A V O C E S — En algunos sistemas de altavoces, el altavoz para bajas Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia 41
frecuencias incluye un botón de autoprueba. Consulte la documentación incluida con los altavoces con el
fin de obtener las instrucciones para realizar autoprueba.
EL I M I N E L A S P O S I B L E S I N T E R F E R E N C I A S — Apague las luces fluorescentes, lámparas halógenas o
ventiladores cercanos para comprobar si se producen interferencias.
VU E L V A A I N S T A L A R E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E S O N I D O (A U D I O) — Consulte la página 59.
Cómo copiar CD y DVD
NOTA: Asegúrese de no incumplir la legislación sobre copyright al crear un CD.
Esta sección se aplica sólo a equipos que disponen de una unidad de CD-R, CD-RW, DVD+RW,
DVD+R o una unidad combinada de DVD/CD-RW.
Las siguientes instrucciones indican cómo realizar una copia exacta de un CD o DVD. También
puede utilizar Sonic RecordNow con otros fines, como la creación de CD de archivos de audio en el
equipo y la creación de CD de archivos MP3. Si desea obtener instrucciones, consulte la
documentación de Sonic RecordNow incluida en su equipo. Abra Sonic RecordNow, haga clic en el
icono de signo de interrogación de la parte superior derecha de la ventana y, a continuación, haga
clic en RecordNow Help (Ayuda de RecordNow) o RecordNow Tutorial (Guía de aprendizaje de
RecordNow).
Cómo copiar un CD o DVD
NOTA: Si dispone de una unidad combinada de DVD/CD-RW y tiene problemas de grabación,
compruebe si hay revisiones de software disponibles en el sitio web de soporte de Sonic:
support.sonic.com.
NOTA: La mayoría de los DVD comerciales están protegidos por las leyes de copyright y no se pueden
copiar con Sonic RecordNow.
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas→ Sonic→ RecordNow!→
RecordNow!
2 Haga clic en la ficha de datos o de audio, según el tipo de CD que desee copiar.
3 Haga clic en Exact Copy (Copia exacta).
4 Para copiar el CD o DVD:
• Si tiene una unidad de CD o DVD, asegúrese de que la configuración sea correcta y haga
clic en Copy (Copiar). El equipo lee el CD o DVD de origen y lo copia en una carpeta
temporal de la unidad de disco duro del equipo.
Cuando se le solicite, inserte un CD o DVD vacío en la unidad de CD o DVD y haga clic
en OK (Aceptar).
• Si dispone de dos unidades de CD o DVD, seleccione la unidad en la que ha insertado el
CD o DVD de origen y haga clic en Copy (Copiar). El equipo copia los datos del CD o
DVD en el CD o DVD vacío.42 Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Después de finalizar la copia del CD o DVD de origen, se expulsa automáticamente el CD o
DVD que ha creado.
Cómo utilizar CD-R y CD-RW vacíos
La unidad de CD-RW puede grabar dos tipos distintos de medios de grabación: discos CD-R y
CD-RW. Utilice CD-R vacíos para grabar música o almacenar permanentemente archivos de datos.
Después de crear un CD-R, no puede grabar en ese CD-R de nuevo sin cambiar el método de
grabación (consulte la documentación de Sonic para obtener más información). Utilice discos CDRW vacíos para grabar en CD, borrar, regrabar o actualizar datos en los CD.
Consejos prácticos
• Utilice el Explorador de Microsoft®
Windows®
para arrastrar y soltar archivos en un CD-R o
CD-RW sólo después de haber iniciado Sonic RecordNow y haber abierto un proyecto de
RecordNow.
• Utilice discos CD-R para grabar los CD de música que desee reproducir en equipos estéreo
normales.
Los discos CD-RW no se reproducen en la mayoría de los equipos estéreo domésticos o para
automóvil.
• No se pueden crear DVD de audio con Sonic RecordNow.
• Los archivos MP3 de música sólo se pueden reproducir en reproductores de MP3 o en equipos
en que se haya instalado software de BMP3.
• No ocupe toda la capacidad de un CD-R o CD-RW vacío al grabar; por ejemplo, no copie un
archivo de 650 MB en un CD vacío de 650 MB. La unidad de CD-RW necesita 1 ó 2 MB del
CD vacío para finalizar la grabación.
• Utilice un CD-RW vacío para practicar la grabación en CD hasta que se familiarice con las
técnicas de grabación en CD. Si comete un error, puede borrar los datos del CD-RW e
intentarlo de nuevo. También puede utilizar discos CD-RW vacíos para probar un proyecto
de archivos de música antes de grabarlos de forma permanente en un CD-R vacío.
• Consulte el sitio web de asistencia técnica de Sonic en support.sonic.com para obtener más
información.Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina 43
Configuración de una red particular y una
red de oficina
Conexión de un adaptador de red
Antes de conectar el equipo a una red, es preciso instalar un adaptador de red y conectar un cable
de red.
Para conectar el cable de red:
1 Conecte el cable de red al conector del adaptador de red del equipo.
NOTA: Inserte el cable hasta que encaje en su posición y, a continuación, tire de él suavemente para
asegurarse de que está bien encajado.
2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable de red a un dispositivo de conexión de red, como una toma
de red de pared.
NOTA: No utilice un cable de red en una toma telefónica de la pared.
Asistente para configuración de redes
El sistema operativo Microsoft®
Windows®
XP proporciona un asistente para la configuración de
la red que le guiará en el proceso de compartición de archivos, impresoras o una conexión de
Internet entre equipos en un entorno doméstico o de pequeña oficina.
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas→ Accesorios→
Comunicaciones y, a continuación, haga clic en Asistente para configuración de redes.
2 En la pantalla de bienvenida, haga clic en Siguiente.
3 Haga clic en Lista de comprobación para crear una red.44 Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
NOTA: Al seleccionar el método de conexión Este equipo está conectado directamente a Internet, se
activará el servidor de seguridad integrado que incluye Windows XP.
4 Complete la lista de comprobación y los preparativos necesarios, y vuelva a la pantalla del
Asistente para configuración de red.
5 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla.
Problemas con la red
NOTA: Un indicador de conexión verde o parpadeante también podría indicar la presencia de un enlace
de red inalámbrica en el área.
CO M P R U E B E E L C O N E C T O R D E L C A B L E D E R E D — Asegúrese de que el conector del cable de red está bien
conectado al conector del equipo y al enchufe de red de la pared.
CO M P R U E B E L O S I N D I C A D O R E S D E R E D D E L C O N E C T O R D E R E D — El color verde indica que la conexión
de red está activa. Si el indicador de estado no está en verde, pruebe a reemplazar el cable de red. El color
ámbar indica que el controlador del adaptador de red está cargado y que el adaptador detecta actividad.
CA M B I E E L C A B L E D E R E D — Pruebe a utilizar otro cable. Si hay más de un conector de red disponible,
intente enchufar el cable en un conector diferente.
RE I N I C I E E L E Q U I P O — Vuelva a intentar conectarse a la red.
PÓ N G A S E E N C O N T A C T O C O N E L A D M I N I S T R A D O R D E L A R E D — Compruebe que la configuración de la
red es correcta y que la red está en funcionamiento.
Conexión a una red de área local inalámbrica
NOTA: Estas instrucciones sobre la red no se aplican a los productos Bluetooth™ ni celulares.
Establecimiento del tipo de red
NOTA: La mayoría de las redes inalámbricas son redes de infraestructura. Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina 45
Las redes inalámbricas se clasifican en dos categorías: redes de infraestructura y redes ad-hoc. Las
redes de infraestructura usan enrutadores o puntos de acceso para conectar varios equipos. Las
redes ad-hoc no usan enrutadores o puntos de acceso y se componen de equipos que difunden de
uno a otro.
Conexión a una red inalámbrica en Microsoft ®
Windows®
XP
La tarjeta inalámbrica requiere el software y los controladores adecuados para conectarse a una red.
El software ya está instalado. Si el software se extrae o se daña, siga las instrucciones que se incluyen
en la guía del usuario de su tarjeta de red inalámbrica. La guía del usuario también está disponible
en el sitio web Dell Support en support.dell.com.
Cuando encienda el equipo, aparecerá un mensaje emergente del icono de red en el área de
notificación siempre que se detecte una red en la zona para la que su equipo no esté configurado.
1 Haga clic en el mensaje emergente o en el icono de la red con el fin de configurar el equipo
para una de las redes inalámbricas disponibles.
La ventana Conexiones de red inalámbricas muestra las redes inalámbricas disponibles en la
zona.
Red de infraestructura Red ad-hoc46 Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
2 Haga clic en la red que desee configurar y, a continuación, haga clic en Conectar o haga doble
clic en el nombre de red de la lista. Si selecciona una red segura (identificada por un icono
), debe especificar una clave WEP o WPA cuando se le pida.
NOTA: La configuración de seguridad de la red es exclusiva de su red. Dell no puede proporcionar esta
información.
La red se configura automáticamente.
NOTA: Es posible que el equipo tarde hasta un minuto en conectarse a la red.
Después de configurar el equipo para la red inalámbrica que ha seleccionado, otro mensaje
emergente le notificará que el equipo está conectado a la red seleccionada. Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina 47
Por lo tanto, cada vez que se conecte al equipo en el área de la red inalámbrica, el mismo
mensaje emergente le notificará la conexión a la red inalámbrica. 48 Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mSolución de problemas 49
Solución de problemas
Dell Diagnostics
PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las
instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de información del producto.
Cuándo utilizar los Dell Diagnostics
Si tiene problemas con el equipo, realice las comprobaciones de la sección “Solución de problemas”
y ejecute los Dell Diagnostics antes de ponerse en contacto con Dell para solicitar asistencia
técnica.
AVISO: Los Dell Diagnostics sólo funcionan en los equipos Dell™.
Los Dell Diagnostics están situados en una partición oculta para la utilidad de diagnóstico
(Diagnostic) de la unidad de disco duro.
NOTA: Si el equipo no muestra ninguna imagen en la pantalla, póngase en contacto con Dell.
1 Apague el equipo.
2 Si el equipo está conectado (acoplado) a un dispositivo de acoplamiento, desacóplelo. Si
desea instrucciones, consulte la documentación incluida con el dispositivo de acoplamiento.
3 Conecte el equipo a un enchufe eléctrico.
4 Encienda el equipo. Cuando aparezca el logotipo de DELL™, pulse inmediatamente.
NOTA: Si no aparece nada en la pantalla, mantenga pulsado y pulse el botón de encendido del
equipo para iniciar Dell Diagnostics. El equipo ejecutará automáticamente la evaluación del sistema
previa al inicio.
Si espera demasiado y aparece el logotipo de Microsoft®
Windows®
, siga esperando hasta que
aparezca el escritorio de Windows. A continuación, apague el equipo mediante el menú
Inicio y vuelva a intentarlo.
5 Cuando aparezca la lista de dispositivos de inicio, resalte Diagnostics (Diagnósticos)y pulse
.
El equipo ejecutará la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio, una serie de pruebas iniciales de
la tarjeta del sistema, el teclado, la unidad de disco duro y la pantalla.
• Durante la evaluación, responda a las preguntas que puedan formularse.
• Si se detecta un fallo, el equipo se detiene y emite pitidos. Para detener la evaluación y
reiniciar el equipo, pulse ; para continuar con la siguiente prueba, pulse ; para
volver a probar el componente que falló, pulse . 50 Solución de problemas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
• Si se detectaron fallos durante la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio, anote el código o
códigos de error y póngase en contacto con Dell antes de continuar con los Dell
Diagnostics.
Si la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio se realiza correctamente, recibirá el mensaje
Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue
(Iniciando la partición de la utilidad Dell Diagnostic. Pulse cualquier tecla para continuar).
6 Presione cualquier tecla para iniciar los Dell Diagnostics desde la partición para la utilidad de
diagnóstico del disco duro.
7 Cuando aparezca el Main Menu (Menú principal) de Dell Diagnostics, seleccione la prueba
que desea ejecutar.
Menú principal de los Dell Diagnostics
1 Una vez se hayan cargado los Dell Diagnostics y aparezca la pantalla Main Menu (Menú
principal), haga clic en el botón de la opción que desea.
2 Si se produce un problema durante una prueba, aparecerá un mensaje con un código de error
y una descripción del problema. Anote el código de error y la descripción del problema, y siga
las instrucciones de la pantalla.
Si no puede resolver la condición del error, póngase en contacto con Dell.
NOTA: La etiqueta de servicio para su equipo está situada en la parte superior de cada pantalla de
prueba. Si se pone en contacto con Dell, el servicio de asistencia técnica le pedirá su etiqueta de
servicio.
Opción Función
Express Test (Prueba
rápida)
Realiza una prueba rápida de los dispositivos. Esta
prueba suele tardar de 10 a 20 minutos y no requiere
ninguna acción por parte del usuario. Ejecute primero
Express Test (Prueba rápida) para incrementar la
posibilidad de rastrear el problema rápidamente.
Extended Test (Prueba
extendida)
Realiza una prueba completa de los dispositivos. Esta
prueba suele tardar una o varias horas y requiere que
usted responda de manera periódica a una serie de
preguntas.
Custom Test (Prueba
personalizada)
Prueba un dispositivo específico. Puede personalizar las
pruebas que desee ejecutar.
Symptom Tree (Árbol de
síntomas)
Hace una lista de los síntomas más habituales que se
pueden encontrar y le permite seleccionar una prueba
basándose en el síntoma del problema que usted tiene.Solución de problemas 51
3 Si ejecuta una prueba desde la opción Custom Test (Prueba personalizada) o Symptom Tree
(Árbol de síntomas), haga clic en la pestaña correspondiente que se describe en la tabla
siguiente para obtener más información.
4 Cuando las pruebas hayan finalizado, cierre la pantalla de prueba para volver a la pantalla
Main Menu (Menú principal). Para salir de los Dell Diagnostics y reiniciar el equipo, cierre la
pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal).
Mensajes de error
Si el mensaje no aparece en la lista, consulte la documentación del sistema operativo o el programa
que se estaba ejecutando en el momento en que apareció el mensaje.
Ficha Función
Results (Resultado) Muestra el resultado de la prueba y las condiciones de
error encontradas.
Errors (Errores) Muestra las condiciones de error encontradas, los códigos
de error y la descripción del problema.
Help (Ayuda) Describe la prueba y puede indicar los requisitos para
ejecutarla.
Configuration
(Configuración)
Muestra la configuración de hardware del dispositivo
seleccionado.
Dell Diagnostics obtiene la información de configuración
de todos los dispositivos a partir de la configuración del
sistema, la memoria y varias pruebas internas, y la
muestra en la lista de dispositivos del panel izquierdo de
la pantalla. La lista de dispositivos puede que no muestre
los nombres de todos los componentes instalados en el
equipo o de todos los dispositivos conectados al equipo.
Parameters (Parámetros) Permite personalizar la prueba cambiando su
configuración.
TH E F I L E B E I N G C O P I E D I S T O O L A R G E F O R T H E D E S T I N A T I O N D R I V E (EL A R C H I V O Q U E S E E S T Á
C O P I A N D O E S D E M A S I A D O G R A N D E P A R A L A U N I D A D D E D E S T I N O) — El archivo que está
intentando copiar es demasiado grande y no cabe en el disco, o el disco está lleno. Pruebe a copiar el
archivo en otro disco o en un disco con mayor capacidad.
A F I L E N A M E C A N N O T C O N T A I N A N Y O F T H E F O L L O W I N G C H A R A C T E R S: \ / : * ? “ < > | (UN N O M B R E
D E A R C H I V O N O P U E D E C O N T E N E R N I N G U N O D E L O S C A R A C T E R E S S I G U I E N T E S: \ / : * ? “ < > |) —
No utilice estos caracteres en los nombres de archivo.52 Solución de problemas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Problemas con el vídeo y la pantalla
Si la pantalla aparece en blanco
NOTA: Si utiliza un programa que requiere una resolución superior a la que admite el equipo, se
recomienda conectar un monitor externo.
IN S E R T B O O T A B L E M E D I A (IN S E R T E U N M E D I O D E A R R A N Q U E) — El sistema operativo está
intentando arrancar desde un disquete o CD que no es de arranque. Inserte un disco o un CD de inicio.
IN V A L I D C O N F I G U R A T I O N I N F O R M A T I O N-P L E A S E R U N SYS T E M SE T U P PR O G R A M (IN F O R M A C I Ó N D E
C O N F I G U R A C I Ó N N O V Á L I D A; E J E C U T E E L P R O G R A M A D E C O N F I G U R A C I Ó N D E L S I S T E M A) — La
información de configuración del sistema no coincide con la configuración de hardware. Este mensaje
es más probable tras instalar un módulo de memoria. Corrija las opciones apropiadas del programa de
configuración del sistema. Consulte el apartado “Utilización del programa Configuración del sistema”
en la página 86.
KE Y B O A R D C L O C K L I N E F A I L U R E (FA L L A D E L A L Í N E A D E R E L O J D E L T E C L A D O) — Para teclados
externos, compruebe la conexión del cable. Ejecute la prueba Keyboard Controller (Controladora de
teclado) tal como se describe en “Dell Diagnostics” (consulte la página 49).
KE Y B O A R D C O N T R O L L E R F A I L U R E (FA L L A D E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E L T E C L A D O) — Para teclados
externos, compruebe la conexión del cable. Reinicie el equipo y evite tocar el teclado o el mouse
durante la rutina de inicio. Ejecute la prueba Keyboard Controller tal como se describe en “Dell
Diagnostics” (consulte la página 49).
KE Y B O A R D D A T A L I N E F A I L U R E (FA L L A D E L A L Í N E A D E D A T O S D E L T E C L A D O) — Para teclados
externos, compruebe la conexión del cable. Ejecute la prueba Keyboard Controller tal como se describe
en “Dell Diagnostics” (consulte la página 49).
KE Y B O A R D S T U C K K E Y F A I L U R E (FA L L A D E T E C L A B L O Q U E A D A D E L T E C L A D O) — Para teclados
externos, compruebe la conexión del cable. Reinicie el equipo y evite tocar el teclado o las teclas
durante la rutina de inicio. Ejecute la prueba Stuck Key (Tecla bloqueada ) tal como se describe en
“Dell Diagnostics” (consulte la página 49).Solución de problemas 53
Si resulta difícil leer la pantalla
CO M P R U E B E E L I N D I C A D O R — Si el indicador parpadea significa que el equipo recibe
alimentación.
• Si el indicador parpadea, el equipo está en modo de espera. Pulse el botón de alimentación para
salir del modo de espera.
• Si el indicador está apagado, pulse el botón de alimentación.
• Si el indicador está encendido, puede que la configuración de administración de energía haya
hecho que se apague la pantalla. Pulse cualquier tecla o mueva el cursor para salir del modo de
suspensión.
CO M P R U E B E L A B A T E R Í A — Si utiliza una batería para la alimentación del equipo, puede que se haya
agotado. Conecte el equipo a un enchufe eléctrico con el adaptador de CA y enciéndalo.
PR U E B E L A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Asegúrese de que la toma de corriente eléctrica
funciona; para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara.
CO M P R U E B E E L A D A P T A D O R D E CA — Compruebe las conexiones de cable del adaptador de CA. Si el
adaptador de CA tiene un indicador, asegúrese de que está encendido.
CO N E C T E E L E Q U I P O D I R E C T A M E N T E A U N A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Omita los
dispositivos protectores de la alimentación, regletas de enchufes y alargadores para comprobar que el
equipo se enciende. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9.
AJ U S T E L A S P R O P I E D A D E S D E L A A L I M E N T A C I Ó N — Busque la palabra clave en esperaen el Centro de
ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9.
CA M B I E L A I M A G E N D E V Í D E O — Si su equipo está conectado a un monitor externo, oprima
para cambiar la imagen de vídeo a la pantalla.
NOTE: Si está reproduciendo un DVD o viendo un vídeo, está desactivado.
AJ U S T E E L B R I L L O — Consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron) para obtener
instrucciones sobre el ajuste del brillo. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9.
AL E J E D E L M O N I T O R O D E L E Q U I P O E L A L T A V O Z D E B A J A S F R E C U E N C I A S — Si el sistema de
altavoces externos incluye un altavoz para bajas frecuencias, asegúrese de que dicho altavoz se
encuentra como mínimo a 60 cm del monitor.54 Solución de problemas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Si sólo se puede leer parte de la pantalla
Problemas con el escáner
EL I M I N E L A S P O S I B L E S I N T E R F E R E N C I A S — Apague los ventiladores, luces fluorescentes, lámparas
halógenas u otros aparatos cercanos.
OR I E N T E E L E Q U I P O H A C I A O T R A D I R E C C I Ó N — Evite los reflejos de la luz solar, que pueden causar
una calidad baja de la imagen.
AJ U S T E L A C O N F I G U R A C I Ó N D E P A N T A L L A D E WI N D O W S —
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y, a continuación, en Panel de control.
2 Haga clic en Apariencia y temas.
3 Haga clic sobre la zona que desea cambiar o en el icono Pantalla.
4 Pruebe valores diferentes en Calidad del color y Resolución de pantalla.
CO N S U L T E “ME N S A J E S D E E R R O R” — Si aparece un mensaje de error, consulte la página 51.
CO N E C T E U N M O N I T O R E X T E R N O —
1 Apague el equipo y conéctele un monitor externo.
2 Encienda el equipo y el monitor, y ajuste los controles de brillo y contraste del monitor.
Si el monitor externo funciona, es posible que el controlador de vídeo o la pantalla del equipo estén
defectuosos. Póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90).
CO M P R U E B E L A C O N E X I Ó N D E L C A B L E D E A L I M E N T A C I Ó N — Asegúrese de que el cable de
alimentación del escáner está debidamente conectado a una fuente de alimentación eléctrica en
funcionamiento y que el escáner está encendido.
CO M P R U E B E L A C O N E X I Ó N D E L C A B L E D E L E S C Á N E R — Asegúrese de que el cable del escáner está
debidamente conectado al equipo y al escáner.
DE S B L O Q U E E E L E S C Á N E R — Asegúrese de que el escáner no está bloqueado si éste dispone de una
lengüeta o un botón de bloqueo.
VU E L V A A I N S T A L A R E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E L E S C Á N E R — Consulte la documentación incluida con el
escáner para obtener instrucciones.Solución de problemas 55
Problemas con las unidades
NOTA: Para obtener información sobre cómo guardar archivos en un disquete, consulte el archivo Dell
Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron). Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9.
Si no puede guardar un archivo en una unidad de disco flexible
AS E G Ú R E S E D E Q U E WI N D O W S
®
R E C O N O C E L A U N I D A D — Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Mi PC.
Si no aparece la unidad, haga una búsqueda completa con el software antivirus para comprobar si hay
virus y eliminarlos. A veces los virus pueden impedir que Windows reconozca la unidad. Inserte un
disco de inicio y reinicie el equipo. Compruebe si el indicador de la unidad parpadea, lo cual indica
que el funcionamiento es correcto.
AS E G Ú R E S E D E Q U E E L D I S C O N O E S T Á P R O T E G I D O C O N T R A E S C R I T U R A — No se pueden guardar
datos en un disco protegido contra escritura. Consulte la siguiente figura.
UT I L I C E O T R O D I S Q U E T E — Inserte otro disco para descartar la posibilidad de que el disco original sea
defectuoso.
VU E L V A A C O N E C T A R L A U N I D A D —
1 Guarde y cierre los archivos que estén abiertos, salga de todas las aplicaciones y apague el equipo.
2 Desconecte y vuelva a conectar la unidad.
3 Encienda el equipo.
LI M P I E L A U N I D A D — Consulte la sección relativa a la limpieza del equipo en el archivo Dell Inspiron
Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron) para obtener instrucciones. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la
página 9.
Protegido contra
escritura
No protegido
contra escritura
Dorso del disquete56 Solución de problemas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Si tiene problemas con una unidad de disco duro
Problemas con la tarjeta PC
Problemas generales del programa
NOTA: Normalmente el software incluye instrucciones de instalación en su documentación o en un
disquete o CD.
Un programa se bloquea
DE J E Q U E E L E Q U I P O S E E N F R Í E A N T E S D E E N C E N D E R L O — Una unidad de disco duro recalentada
puede impedir que se inicie el sistema operativo. Deje que el equipo vuelva a adoptar la temperatura
ambiente antes de encenderlo.
CO M P R U E B E L A U N I D A D P A R A V E R S I T I E N E E R R O R E S —
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Mi PC.
2 Haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en la letra de la unidad (disco local) que desea examinar para
comprobar que no tiene errores y, a continuación, haga clic en Propiedades.
3 Haga clic en la ficha Herramientas.
4 En el grupo de opciones de Comprobación de errores, haga clic en Comprobar ahora.
5 Haga clic en Inicio.
CO M P R U E B E L A T A R J E T A PC — Asegúrese de que la tarjeta PC está insertada correctamente en el
conector.
AS E G Ú R E S E D E Q U E WI N D O W S
®
R E C O N O C E L A T A R J E T A — Haga doble clic en el icono Safely
Remove Hardware (Quitar hardware con seguridad) de la barra de tareas de Windows. Asegúrese de que
aparece la tarjeta.
SI T I E N E P R O B L E M A S C O N U N A T A R J E T A PC P R O P O R C I O N A D A P O R DE L L — Póngase en contacto
con Dell (consulte la página 90).
SI T I E N E P R O B L E M A S C O N U N A T A R J E T A PC N O P R O P O R C I O N A D A P O R DE L L — Póngase en
contacto con el fabricante de la tarjeta PC.
CO N S U L T E L A D O C U M E N T A C I Ó N D E L S O F T W A R E — Muchos fabricantes de software ofrecen sitios
Web con información que puede ayudarle a solucionar el problema. Asegúrese de que ha instalado y
configurado correctamente el programa. Vuelva a instalar el programa si fuera necesario.Solución de problemas 57
Un programa no responde
Aparecen mensajes de error
Solución de otros problemas técnicos
Si el equipo se moja
PRECAUCIÓN: Sólo debe realizar este procedimiento si tiene la certeza de que es seguro hacerlo. Si
el equipo está conectado a una toma de corriente, se recomienda apagar la alimentación de CA del
interruptor automático antes de desconectar los cables de la toma de corriente. Proceda con la
máxima precaución cuando retire cables mojados de una toma de corriente.
1 Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28), desconecte el adaptador de corriente alterna del
equipo y, a continuación, desconecte el adaptador de corriente alterna de la toma de
corriente.
FI N A L I C E E L P R O G R A M A —
1 Pulse simultáneamente .
2 Haga clic en la ficha Aplicaciones y seleccione el programa que no responde.
3 Haga clic en Finalizar tarea.
RE V I S E “ME N S A J E S D E E R R O R” E N L A P Á G I N A 51 — Localice el mensaje y lleve a cabo la acción
adecuada. Consulte la documentación del software.
VA Y A A L S I T I O W E B DE L L SU P P O R T — Vaya a support.dell.com para obtener ayuda sobre cuestiones
generales de uso, instalación y solución de problemas. Consulte el apartado “Política de soporte técnico
de Dell (sólo EE.UU.)” en la página 89 para obtener una descripción de la asistencia para el hardware y
el software proporcionada por Dell.
EN V Í E U N M E N S A J E D E C O R R E O E L E C T R Ó N I C O A DE L L — Vaya a support.dell.com y haga clic en Dell
E-Mail en la lista Comunicar. Envíe un mensaje de correo electrónico a Dell sobre el problema; en unas
horas recibirá una respuesta de Dell a través del correo electrónico. Consulte el apartado “Política de
soporte técnico de Dell (sólo EE.UU.)” en la página 89 para obtener una descripción de la asistencia
para el hardware y el software proporcionada por Dell.
PÓ N G A S E E N C O N T A C T O C O N DE L L — Si no puede solucionar el problema con la ayuda del sitio web
Dell™ Support ni con el servicio por correo electrónico, llame a Dell para solicitar asistencia técnica
(consulte la página 90). Consulte el apartado “Política de soporte técnico de Dell (sólo EE.UU.)” en la
página 89 para obtener una descripción de la asistencia para el hardware y el software proporcionada por
Dell.58 Solución de problemas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
2 Apague los dispositivos externos que estén conectados y desconéctelos de sus fuentes de
alimentación y del equipo.
3 Descargue la electricidad estática de su cuerpo. Para ello, toque uno de los conectores
metálicos de la parte posterior del equipo.
4 Extraiga las tarjetas PC que estén instaladas y colóquelas en un lugar seguro para que se sequen.
5 Extraiga la batería.
6 Pase un paño por la batería y colóquela en un lugar seguro para que se seque.
7 Pase un paño por el monitor.
8 Extraiga la unidad de disco duro (consulte la página 66).
9 Extraiga el módulo o módulos de memoria (consulte la página 68).
10 Abra la pantalla y coloque el equipo con su lado derecho hacia arriba sobre dos libros u objetos
similares para permitir que el aire circule a su alrededor. Déjelo secar como mínimo durante
24 horas en un lugar seco a temperatura ambiente.
AVISO: No utilice medios artificiales, como un secador de pelo o un ventilador, para acelerar el secado.
PRECAUCIÓN: Para evitar recibir una descarga eléctrica, compruebe si el equipo está totalmente
seco antes de continuar con el procedimiento.
11 Descargue la electricidad estática de su cuerpo. Para ello, toque uno de los conectores
metálicos de la parte posterior del equipo.
12 Vuelva a colocar los módulos de memoria, la cubierta y los tornillos.
13 Vuelva a colocar la unidad de disco duro.
14 Reemplace las tarjetas PC que ha extraído.
15 Vuelva a colocar la batería.
16 Encienda el equipo y compruebe que funciona correctamente.
NOTA: Para obtener información sobre la cobertura de la garantía, consulte la Guía de información del
producto o el documento de la garantia por separado que se envío con su equipo.
Si el equipo no se enciende o no identifica los componentes dañados, póngase en contacto con
Dell (consulte la página 90).
Si el equipo se cae o se daña
1 Guarde y cierre los archivos que estén abiertos, salga de todas las aplicaciones y apague el
equipo (consulte la página 28).
2 Desconecte el adaptador de CA de la toma de corriente y del equipo.
3 Apague los dispositivos externos que estén conectados y desconéctelos de sus fuentes de
alimentación y del equipo.
4 Extraiga la batería y vuelva a colocarla.
5 Encienda el equipo.Solución de problemas 59
NOTA: Consulte la Guía de información del producto o el documento de la garantía que incluía su equipo
para obtener información sobre la garantía.
Si el equipo no se enciende o no puede identificar los componentes dañados, póngase en
contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90).
Controladores
¿Qué es un controlador?
Un controlador es un programa que controla un dispositivo, como por ejemplo una impresora, un
mouse o un teclado. Todos los dispositivos necesitan un controlador.
Un controlador funciona como traductor entre el dispositivo y los programas que lo utilizan. Cada
dispositivo posee un conjunto propio de comandos especializados que sólo su controlador puede
reconocer.
Muchos controladores como, por ejemplo, el controlador de la impresora, se suministran con el
sistema operativo Microsoft®
Windows®
. Deberá instalar los controladores si:
• Actualiza el sistema operativo.
• Reinstala el sistema operativo.
• Conecta o instala un nuevo dispositivo.
Si experimenta problemas con algún dispositivo, realice los pasos descritos en las secciones
siguientes para determinar si el origen del problema es el controlador y, en caso necesario,
actualizarlo.
Identificación de controladores
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y seleccione Panel de control.
2 En la ventana Panel de control, pulse Rendimiento y mantenimiento en Elija una categoría.
3 En la ventana Rendimiento y mantenimiento, pulse Sistema.
4 En la pantalla Propiedades del sistema, haga clic en la ficha Hardware.
5 Haga clic en Administrador de dispositivos.
6 En la ventana Administrador de dispositivos, desplácese hacia el final de la lista para ver si
algún dispositivo tiene un signo de exclamación (un círculo amarillo con un [!]) en el icono
del dispositivo.
Si aparece un signo de exclamación junto al nombre del dispositivo, deberá volver a instalar el
controlador o instalar uno nuevo.
Volver a instalar los controladores
AVISO: El sitio web Dell Support proporciona los controladores adecuados para los equipos Dell™. Si
instala controladores obtenidos de otras fuentes, puede que el equipo no funcione correctamente.60 Solución de problemas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Cómo usar la desinstalación del controlador de dispositivo de Windows XP
Si se produce un problema en el equipo después de instalar o actualizar un controlador, utilice la
función Desintalación del controlador de dispositivo de Windows XP para restaurar la versión
previamente instalada del controlador.
Para usar la función Volver al controlador anterior de dispositivos:
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y seleccione Panel de control.
2 En la ventana Panel de control, pulse Rendimiento y mantenimiento en Elija una categoría.
3 En la ventana Rendimiento y mantenimiento, pulse Sistema.
4 En la pantalla Propiedades del sistema, haga clic en la ficha Hardware.
5 Haga clic en Administrador de dispositivos.
6 En la ventana Administrador de dispositivos, haga clic con el botón derecho en el dispositivo
para el que se instaló el nuevo controlador y, a continuación, haga clic en Propiedades.
7 Haga clic en la ficha Controladores.
8 Haga clic en Desinstalar controlador.
Si con esto no se soluciona el problema, utilice la función Restaurar sistema (consulte la página 61)
para que el sistema operativo vuelva al estado anterior a la instalación del nuevo controlador.
Reinstalación manual de controladores para Windows XP
El sitio web Dell Support proporciona los controladores adecuados para los equipos Dell™. Si instala
controladores obtenidos de otras fuentes, puede que el equipo no funcione correctamente.
1 Después de copiar los archivos de controlador en su unidad de disco duro, haga clic en el
botón Inicio y haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en Mi PC.
2 Haga clic en Propiedades.
3 Haga clic en la ficha Hardware y en Administrador de dispositivos.
4 Haga doble clic en el tipo de dispositivo para el que va a instalar el controlador (por ejemplo,
Módems o Dispositivos de infrarrojos).
5 Haga doble clic en el nombre del dispositivo para el que está instalando el controlador.
6 Haga clic en la ficha Controlador y, a continuación, haga clic en Actualizar controlador.
7 Haga clic en Instalar desde una lista o ubicación específica (avanzado) y, a continuación,
haga clic en Siguiente.
8 Haga clic en Examinar y examine la ubicación en la que extrajo anteriormente los archivos del
controlador.
9 Cuando aparezca el nombre del controlador adecuado, haga clic en Siguiente.
10 Haga clic en Finalizar y reinicie el equipo.Solución de problemas 61
Cómo resolver incompatibilidades de software y hardware
Cómo usar el Solucionador de problemas de hardware de Windows XP:
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y, a continuación, haga clic en Ayuda y soporte técnico.
2 Escriba solucionador de problemas de hardware en el campo Buscar y haga clic en la
flecha para iniciar la búsqueda.
3 Haga clic en Solucionador de problemas de hardware en la lista Resultados de la búsqueda.
4 En la lista Solucionador de problemas de hardware, haga clic en Necesito resolver un
conflicto de hardware de mi equipo y haga clic en Siguiente.
Restauración de su sistema operativo
Puede restaurar su sistema operativo de la siguiente manera:
• La función Restaurar sistema de Microsoft Windows XP devuelve su equipo a un estado
operativo anterior sin que esto afecte a archivos de datos.
• La función Dell PC Restore by Symantec (Restaurar PC de Dell por Symantec) restaura su
unidad de disco duro al estado operativo que estaba cuando compró el equipo. La función PC
Restore (Restaurar PC) de Dell borra permanentemente todos los datos de la unidad de disco
duro y quita cualquier aplicación que se instaló después de haber recibido el equipo.
Cómo utilizar la función Restaurar sistema de MicrosoftWindows XP
El sistema operativo Microsoft WindowsXP dispone de la función Restaurar sistema que permite
regresar a un estado operativo anterior del equipo (sin que esto afecte a los archivos de datos) si los
cambios efectuados en el hardware, software u otros parámetros del sistema han dejado el equipo
en un estado operativo no deseado. Consulte el Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows
para obtener información sobre el uso de la función Restaurar sistema. Para acceder a la ayuda,
consulte la página 9.
AVISO: Realice copias de seguridad periódicas de los archivos de datos. La función Restaurar sistema
no supervisa ni recupera los archivos de datos.
NOTA: Los procedimientos de este documento se han escrito para la vista predeterminada de Windows,
por lo que podrían no funcionar si cambia el equipo Dell™ a la vista clásica de Windows.
Creación de un punto de restauración
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y seleccione Ayuda y soporte técnico.
2 Haga clic en Restaurar sistema.
3 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla.
Restauración del equipo a un estado operativo anterior
Si se producen problemas después de instalar el controlador de un dispositivo, utilice la
Desinstalación del controlador de dispositivo (consulte la página 60) para resolver el problema. Si
esto no funciona, utilice Restaurar sistema.62 Solución de problemas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
AVISO: Antes de restaurar el equipo a un estado operativo anterior, guarde y cierre los archivos
abiertos y salga de los programas activos. No cambie, abra ni elimine ningún archivo o programa hasta
que haya restaurado totalmente el sistema.
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas→ Accesorios→ Herramientas
del sistema y, a continuación, haga clic en Restaurar sistema.
2 Asegúrese de que ha seleccionado Restaurar mi equipo a un estado anterior y haga clic en
Siguiente.
3 En el calendario, haga clic en la fecha a la que desea restaurar el equipo.
La pantalla Selección de un punto de restauración proporciona un calendario que permite
ver y seleccionar puntos de restauración. Todas las fechas con puntos de restauración
disponibles aparecen en negrita.
4 Seleccione un punto de restauración y, a continuación, haga clic en Siguiente.
Si una fecha del calendario sólo tiene un punto de restauración, se seleccionará
automáticamente dicho punto. Si hay dos o más puntos de restauración disponibles, haga clic
en el punto de restauración que prefiera.
5 Haga clic en Siguiente.
La pantalla de Restauración finalizada aparece cuando la función Restaurar sistema ha
finalizado de recoger los datos y a continuación se reinicia el equipo.
6 Cuando el equipo se reinicie, haga clic en Aceptar.
Para cambiar el punto de restauración, puede repetir estos pasos usando un punto de restauración
distinto o bien puede deshacer la restauración.
Cómo deshacer la última operación de Restaurar sistema
AVISO: Antes de deshacer la última restauración del sistema, guarde y cierre todos los archivos
abiertos y cierre todos los programas. No cambie, abra ni elimine ningún archivo o programa hasta que
haya restaurado totalmente el sistema.
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas→ Accesorios→ Herramientas
del sistema y, a continuación, haga clic en Restaurar sistema.
2 Seleccione Deshacer la última restauración y haga clic en Siguiente.
Cómo utilizar la función Restaurar PC de Dell por Symantec
Utilice la función Dell PC Restore by Symantec (Restaurar PC de Dell por Symantec) solamente
como último recurso para restaurar su sistema operativo. La función PC Restore (Restaurar PC)
restaura su unidad de disco duro al estado operativo que estaba cuando compró el equipo.
Cualquier programa o archivo que se haya agregado desde que recibió su equipo— incluidos los
archivos de datos—se borrarán permanentemente de la unidad de disco duro. Los archivos de datos Solución de problemas 63
incluyen: documentos, hojas de cálculo, mensajes de correo electrónico, fotos digitales, archivos de
música, etc. Si es posible, cree una copia de seguridad de todos los datos antes de utilizar la función
Restaurar PC.
AVISO: Al utilizar la función Restaurar PC se borrarán permanentemente todos los datos de la unidad de
disco duro y se quitarán las aplicaciones que se instalaron después de haber recibido el equipo. Si es
posible, cree una copia de seguridad de los datos antes de utilizar la función Restaurar PC.
Para utilizar la función Restaurar PC:
1 Encienda el equipo.
Durante el proceso de inicio, aparecerá una barra azul con www.dell.com en la parte superior
de la pantalla.
2 Pulse en el momento exacto que vea la barra azul.
Si no pulsa a tiempo, deje que el equipo termine el reinicio y vuelva a
reiniciarlo de nuevo.
AVISO: Si no desea continuar con la función Restaurar PC, haga clic en Reiniciar en el siguiente paso.
3 En la pantalla siguiente que aparezca, haga clic en Restaurar.
4 En la pantalla siguiente, haga clic en Confirmar.
El proceso de restauración tardará de 6 a 10 minutos aproximadamente para finalizar.
5 Cuando se le indique, haga clic en Terminar para reiniciar el equipo.
NOTA: No apague el equipo manualmente. Haga clic en Terminar y deje que el equipo se reinicie
completamente.
6 Cuando se le indique, haga clic en Sí.
El equipo se reinicia. Puesto que el equipo se restaura a su estado operativo original, las
pantallas que aparecen, como, por ejemplo, la pantalla Contrato de licencia del usuario final,
son las mismas que aparecen cuando se enciede el equipo por primera vez.
7 Haga clic en Siguiente.
Aparece la pantalla Restaurar sistema y, a continuación, el equipo se reinicia.
8 Cuando el equipo se reinicie, haga clic en Aceptar.
Activación de la función Restaurar sistema
Si vuelve a instalar Windows XP con menos de 200 MB de espacio libre disponible en el disco duro,
se desactivará automáticamente la función Restaurar sistema. Para ver si la función Restaurar
sistema está activada:
1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Panel de control .
2 Haga clic en Rendimiento y administración.
3 Haga clic en Sistema.64 Solución de problemas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
4 Haga clic en la ficha Restaurar sistema.
5 Compruebe que no está activada la opción Desactivar Restaurar sistema.
Eliminación de la función PC Restore
AVISO: La función PC Restore (Restaurar PC) le permite restaurar el sistema operativo de su equipo al
estado que estaba cuando compró el equipo. Se recomienda que no elimine la función PC Restore de su
equipo, incluso si es para obtener espacio adicional en el disco duro. Si elimina la función PC Restore de
la unidad de disco duro, nunca podrá volver a recuperarla ni tampoco utilizarla para volver el sistema
operativo de su equipo al estado original.
1 Inicie el equipo como administrador local.
2 En el Explorador de Windows, vaya a c:\dell\utilities\DSR.
3 Haga doble clic en el nombre de archivo DSRIRRemv2.exe.
NOTA: Si no inicia el equipo como administrador local, aparecerá un mensaje indicándole que
debe hacerlo. Haga clic en Salir e inicie el equipo como administrador local.
Si no existe la partición para la función PC Restore, aparecerá un mensaje indicando que no
se ha encontrado la partición. Haga clic en Salir; no hay partición que borrar.
4 Haga clic en Aceptar para eliminar la partición.
5 Haga clic en Sí cuando aparezca un mensaje de confirmación.
Se borra la partición y la partición c:\ se expande para incluir el nuevo espacio de disco
disponible. Para comprobar el espacio disponible, haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en
la unidad c:\ en el Explorador de Windows y seleccione Propiedades.
6 Haga clic en Terminar para cerrar la ventana PC Restore Removal (Eliminación de la función
PC Restore).
7 Reinicie el equipo.Adición y sustitución de piezas 65
Adición y sustitución de piezas
Antes de empezar
Este apartado proporciona procedimientos para quitar e instalar los componentes de su equipo. A
menos que se señale lo contrario, cada procedimiento asume que existen las siguientes condiciones:
• Ha realizado los pasos de la sección “Apagar el equipo.”
• Ha leído la información de seguridad de la Guía de información del producto.
Herramientas recomendadas
Los procedimientos de este documento podrían requerir el uso de las siguientes herramientas:
• Un destornillador pequeño de paletas planas
• Un destornillador Phillips
• Una punta trazadora de plástico pequeña
• CD o disquete de actualización del programa BIOS flash
Apagar el equipo
Utilice las siguientes directrices de seguridad para proteger su equipo de posibles daños y para
garantizar su propia seguridad personal.
PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las
instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de información del producto.
AVISO: Sólo un técnico certificado debe realizar reparaciones en el equipo. La garantía no cubre los
daños por reparaciones no autorizadas por Dell.
PRECAUCIÓN: Manipule los componentes y las tarjetas con precaución. No toque los componentes o
contactos ubicados en una tarjeta. Sostenga las tarjetas por sus bordes o por su soporte metálico de
montaje. Sujete un componente, como un procesador, por sus bordes y no por sus patas.
AVISO: Cuando desconecte un cable, tire de su conector o de su lazo liberador de tensión, y no del
cable mismo. Algunos cables cuentan con un conector que tiene lengüetas de sujeción; si está
desconectando un cable de este tipo, pulse las lengüetas de sujeción antes de desconectar el cable.
Cuando separe conectores, manténgalos alineados para evitar doblar las patas del conector. Además,
antes de conectar un cable, asegúrese de que los dos conectores estén orientados y alineados
correctamente. 66 Adición y sustitución de piezas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
AVISO: Para evitar daños en el equipo, realice los pasos siguientes antes de empezar a trabajar dentro
del mismo.
1 Asegúrese de que la superficie de trabajo sea llana y esté limpia para evitar que la cubierta del
equipo se raye.
2 Apague el equipo.
3 Asegúrese de que el equipo y los dispositivos conectados estén apagados. Si el equipo o los
dispositivos conectados no se apagaron automáticamente cuando desactivó el equipo, pulse y
mantenga pulsado el botón de alimentación durante 4 segundos.
4 Si el equipo está conectado (acoplado) a un dispositivo de acoplamiento, desacóplelo. Si
desea instrucciones, consulte la documentación incluida con el dispositivo de acoplamiento.
AVISO: Para desconectar un cable de red, desconecte primero el cable del equipo y, a continuación, del
enchufe de red de la pared.
5 Desconecte del equipo todas las líneas telefónicas o de telecomunicaciones.
6 Desconecte el equipo y todos los dispositivos conectados de sus salidas eléctricas y, a
continuación, pulse el botón de alimentación para conectar a tierra la placa base.
AVISO: Para conectar un cable de red, primero conecte el cable a la toma de red de la pared y,
después, al equipo.
7 Retire las PC Card instaladas de la ranura para PC Card.
8 Cierre la pantalla y coloque el equipo hacia abajo en una superficie plana.
AVISO: Para evitar que se dañe la placa base, debe retirar la batería principal cuando abra el equipo.
9 Deslice y sostenga el pasador de liberación del compartimento de la batería y, a continuación,
extraiga la batería del compartimento.
10 Extraiga los módulos instalados.
11 Extraiga la unidad de disco duro.
Unidad de disco duro
PRECAUCIÓN: Si extrae la unidad de disco duro del equipo cuando la unidad está caliente, no toque
la caja metálica de dicha unidad.
AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos, apague el equipo (consulte la página 28) antes de extraer la
unidad de disco duro. No extraiga la unidad de disco duro mientras el equipo se encuentre encendido,
en modo de suspensión o en modo de hibernación.
AVISO: Las unidades de disco duro son muy frágiles; basta un ligero golpe para dañarlas.
NOTA: Dell no garantiza la compatibilidad para las unidades de disco duro de otros fabricantes ni
proporciona asistencia técnica si sufren algún problema.Adición y sustitución de piezas 67
Para sustituir la unidad de disco duro en el compartimento correspondiente:
1 Siga las instrucciones que encontrará en el apartado “Antes de empezar” en la página 65.
2 Dé la vuelta al equipo y retire los tornillos de la unidad de disco duro.
AVISO: Cuando la unidad de disco duro no esté en el equipo, guárdela en un embalaje protector
antiestático. Consulte las instrucciones para desechar las baterías en la Guía de información del
producto.
3 Tire de la unidad de disco duro para extraerla del equipo.
4 Extraiga la nueva unidad de su embalaje.
Conserve el embalaje original para almacenar o transportar la unidad de disco duro.
AVISO: Ejerza una presión firme y constante para deslizar la unidad hasta que encaje en su sitio. Si
ejerce una fuerza excesiva, puede dañar el conector.
5 Inserte la unidad en el compartimento y empújela hasta que encaje totalmente en el
compartimento.
6 Vuelva a colocar los tornillos y apriételos.
7 Instale el sistema operativo para su equipo.
8 Instale los controladores y utilidades para su equipo.
Tornillos (2)
Unidad de
disco duro68 Adición y sustitución de piezas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Devolución de una unidad de disco duro a Dell
Cuando devuelva la unidad de disco duro a Dell, utilice el embalaje de espuma original o un
embalaje similar. De lo contrario, la unidad de disco duro puede resultar dañada durante el
transporte.
Memoria
Puede aumentar la memoria del sistema mediante la instalación de módulos de memoria en la
placa base. Consulte la página 80 para obtener información sobre la memoria admitida por el
equipo. Instale únicamente módulos de memoria adecuados para su equipo.
1 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en la sección “Antes de comenzar” de la página 65.
2 Dé la vuelta al equipo, afloje el tornillo cautivo de la cubierta del módulo de memoria y
levante la cubierta.
Unidad de
disco duro
Embalaje
de espumaAdición y sustitución de piezas 69
NOTA: Los módulos de memoria adquiridos a Dell están incluidos en la garantía del equipo.
3 Si va a cambiar un módulo de memoria, debe retirar el módulo existente.
a Separe cuidadosamente con las puntas de los dedos los ganchos de fijación que se
encuentran en los extremos del conector del módulo de memoria hasta que el módulo
salga de su sitio.
b Extraiga el módulo del conector.
Tornillo
cautivo
Cubierta del
módulo de
memoria
Ganchos de
fijación
Módulo de
memoria70 Adición y sustitución de piezas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
4 Descargue la electricidad estática de su cuerpo e instale el nuevo módulo de memoria:
NOTA: Si el módulo de memoria no está instalado correctamente, es posible que el equipo no arranque.
Este fallo no se indicará mediante un mensaje de error.
a Alinee la muesca del conector del extremo del módulo con la lengüeta de la ranura del
conector.
b Deslice el módulo firmemente en la ranura formando un ángulo de 45 grados y gírelo
hasta que encaje en su sitio con un chasquido. Si no lo nota, retire el módulo y vuelva a
instalarlo.
5 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta.
AVISO: Si resulta difícil cerrar la cubierta del módulo de memoria, extraiga el módulo y vuelva a
instalarlo. Si fuerza la cubierta para cerrarla, puede dañar el equipo.
6 Inserte la batería en el compartimento correspondiente o conecte el adaptador de CA al
equipo y a una toma de corriente.
7 Encienda el equipo.
Al reiniciarse el equipo, éste detecta la memoria adicional y actualiza automáticamente la
información de configuración del sistema.
Para confirmar la cantidad de memoria que hay instalada en el equipo, haga clic en el botón Inicio,
seleccione Ayuda y soporte técnico y, a continuación, haga clic en Información del equipo.Adición y sustitución de piezas 71
Módem y minitarjeta PCI
1 Siga las instrucciones que encontrará en el apartado “Antes de empezar” en la página 65.
2 Dé la vuelta al equipo, afloje el tornillo cautivo de la cubierta del módem/minitarjeta PCI y
levante la cubierta.
3 Continúe con las instrucciones que correspondan de las secciones:
• Para agregar un módem, consulte la siguiente sección: “Cómo agregar un módem”.
• Para agregar una minitarjeta PCI, consulte la página 72.
Cómo cambiar el módem
1 Retire el módem actual:
a Extraiga los tornillos que fijan el módem en la placa base y guárdelos aparte.
b Tire de la lengüeta para sacar el módem de su conector de la placa base y desconecte el
cable del módem.
Tornillo cautivo
Cubierta del
módem/minitarjeta
PCI72 Adición y sustitución de piezas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
2 Conecte el cable del módem al módem.
AVISO: Los conectores de cable tienen la forma adecuada para una correcta inserción; no fuerce las
conexiones.
3 Alinee el módem con los orificios para los tornillos e insértelo en el conector de la placa
base.
4 Coloque los tornillos para fijar el módem a la placa base.
5 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta.
Cómo agregar una minitarjeta PCI
PRECAUCIÓN: La normativa FCC prohibe terminantemente a los usuarios instalar minitarjetas PCI
LAN inalámbricas de 5 GHz (802.11a, 802.11a/b, 802.11a/b/g). Bajo ninguna circunstancia debe el
usuario instalar ningún dispositivo de dicho tipo. Sólo el personal de servicio técnico formado por Dell
tiene autorización para instalar una minitarjeta PCI LAN inalámbrica de 5 GHz.
Si extrae o instala una minitarjeta PCI de 2,4 GHz (802.11b, 802.11b/g), siga las instrucciones que se
indican a continuación. Sólo se pueden instalar los productos aprobados para su utilización en el
equipo portátil. Las minitarjetas PCI aprobadas sólo se pueden comprar a Dell.
NOTA: El usuario puede extraer e instalar las tarjetas PC LAN inalámbricas de 2,4 GHz.
Conector del cable del
módem
Cable del
módem
Lengüeta
de tiro
Tornillos (2)Adición y sustitución de piezas 73
Si pidió una minitarjeta PCI con el equipo, ya estará instalada.
1 Si no hay ninguna minitarjeta PCI instalada, vaya al paso 2. Si está sustituyendo una
minitarjeta PCI, retire la tarjeta existente.
a Desconecte la minitarjeta PCI de los cables conectados.
b Libere la minitarjeta PCI; para ello, separe las lengüetas metálicas de fijación hasta que
la tarjeta se levante ligeramente.
c Extraiga la minitarjeta PCI de su conector.
AVISO: Para evitar dañar la minitarjeta PCI, no coloque nunca cables encima o debajo de la tarjeta.
AVISO: Los conectores tienen la forma adecuada para garantizar que la inserción es correcta. Si
nota resistencia, compruebe los conectores y vuelva a alinear la tarjeta.
Minitarjeta PCI
Conector de minitarjeta
PCI
Cables de antena (2)
Lengüetas metálicas de
fijación (2)74 Adición y sustitución de piezas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
2 Alinee la minitarjeta PCI con el conector hasta formar un ángulo de 45 grados y, a
continuación, presiónela para insertarla en el conector.
3 Conecte los cables de antena a la minitarjeta PCI.
4 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta.
Unidad de CD o DVD
1 Siga las instrucciones que encontrará en el apartado “Antes de empezar” en la página 65.
2 Dé la vuelta al equipo, afloje el tornillo cautivo de la cubierta del módulo de memoria y
levante la cubierta.
Minitarjeta PCI
Conector de
minitarjeta PCI
Cables de antena
(2)Adición y sustitución de piezas 75
3 Extraiga el tornillo “O” que se encuentra junto a la cubierta del módulo de memoria.
4 Apriete la palanca que se encuentra junto a los conectores del módulo de memoria en la
dirección a la flecha indicada en la palanca (es decir, hacia la unidad) para liberar la unidad.
5 Extraiga la unidad del compartimento.
Tornillo
cautivo
Cubierta del
módulo de
memoria
Tornillo
Palanca
Unidad CD o DVD76 Adición y sustitución de piezas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
6 Inserte la nueva unidad en el compartimento hasta que quede totalmente encajada.
7 Vuelva a colocar el tornillo extraído en el paso 3.
8 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta del módulo de memoria y el tornillo.
Teclado
1 Siga las instrucciones que encontrará en el apartado “Antes de empezar” en la página 65.
2 Use un destornillador plano pequeño o una punta de plástico para levantar el extremo
derecho con muesca de la cubierta embellecedora y haga palanca en ella para extraerla.
3 Levante la cubierta y extráigala de las bisagras y del estuche inferior.
4 Extraiga los cuatro tornillos del teclado.
AVISO: Las teclas del teclado son frágiles, se desencajan fácilmente y resulta muy entretenido volver a
colocarlas. Tenga cuidado cuando extraiga y manipule el teclado.
5 Levante el teclado y apóyelo en las bisagras de la pantalla de modo que el conector del teclado
quede visible.
6 Tire del conector del teclado para desconectarlo del conector de interfaz de la placa base.
Cubierta con bisagrasAdición y sustitución de piezas 77
7 Extraiga el teclado.
AVISO: para evitar dañar las patas de los conectores, inserte firmemente el conector del teclado en el
conector de interfaz de la placa base y no invierta el conector del teclado.
8 Conecte el conector de teclado del otro teclado en el conector de interfaz de la placa base.
Conector de interfaz
Conector para teclado
Tornillos para
teclado (4)
Teclado78 Adición y sustitución de piezas
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
9 Inserte las cuatro pestañas de fijación del teclado en las ranuras correspondientes del
apoyamanos y vuelva a colocar el teclado.
Antes de intentar encajar completamente el teclado, asegúrese de que las cuatro pestañas de
fijación están encajadas.
10 Vuelva a colocar los cuatro tornillos del teclado.
11 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta.
Conector de interfaz
Conector para teclado
Tornillos para
teclado (4)
Teclado
Pestañas de
fijación (4)Apéndice 79
Apéndice
Especificaciones
NOTA: Las funciones de administración de energía limitan la velocidad del procesador cuando el equipo
funciona con batería, para mantener los requisitos de ventilación del sistema o para mantener los
requisitos de alimentación del sistema.
Microprocesador
Microprocesador Procesador Mobile Intel®
Pentium®
4 o
Intel Celeron®
Caché L1 8 KB (interna)
Caché L2 512 KB (Intel Pentium 4); 128 KB (Intel
Celeron)
Frecuencia de bus externa 400/533 MHz
Información del sistema
Conjunto de chips del sistema Intel 852GMV
Amplitud del bus de datos 64 bits
Amplitud del bus de DRAM 64 bits
Amplitud del bus de direcciones del
microprocesador
32 bits
Tarjeta PC
Controlador CardBus TI PCI1510
Conector de tarjetas PC admite una tarjeta del Tipo I o Tipo II
Tarjetas admitidas de 3,3 V y 5 V
Tamaño del conector de tarjetas PC de 68 patas
Amplitud de datos (máxima) PCMCIA de 16 bits
CardBus de 32 bits80 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Memoria
Conector del módulo de memoria 2 zócalos SODIMM a los que puede acceder
el usuario
Capacidades del módulo de memoria 64, 128, 256 y 512 MB
Tipo de memoria SODIMM de 2,5 V
Memoria estándar 128 MB
Memoria máxima 1 GB
Tiempo de acceso a memoria:
velocidad del reloj
266 MHz
Puertos y conectores
Vídeo conector de 15 orificios
Audio Conector de micrófono, conector de
auriculares o altavoces estéreo
USB (2) Conector de 4 patas compatible con USB 2.0
Módem Conector RJ-11
LAN Ethernet Conector RJ-45 (opcional en algunos países)
Comunicaciones
Módem:
Tipo v.92 56K MDC
Controlador softmodem
Interfaz Bus interno AC ’97
Adaptador de red tarjeta de sistema LAN Ethernet 10/100Apéndice 81
Vídeo
Tipo de vídeo Gráficos directos integrados AGP
Interfaz host AGP directo integrado
Controlador de vídeo Intel UMA integrada
Memoria de vídeo 1 MB con Intel DVMT hasta 32 MB (con
128 MB de memoria del sistema) o 64 MB
(con 256 MB o más de memoria del sistema)
Interfaz LCD SPWG-B
Audio
Tipo de audio AC’97 (soft audio)
Controlador de audio Sigmatel 9750
Conversión estereofónica 18 bits (de analógica a digital) y 20 bits (de
digital a analógica)
Interfaces:
Interna Bus PCI /AC’97
Externa Conector de entrada de micrófono, conector
de auriculares o altavoces estéreo
Altavoz Dos altavocesde 8 ohmios
Amplificador de altavoz interno Canal de 1,0 W en 8 ohmios
Controles de volumen Métodos abreviados de teclado, menús de
programa82 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Pantalla
Tipo (TFT matriz activa) XGA
Dimensiones: 14,1 ó 15 pulgadas
Altura:
14.1 pulgada
15 pulgada
214,3 mm (8,4 pulgadas)
228,1 mm (8,99 pulgadas)
Anchura:
14.1 pulgada
15 pulgada
285,7 mm (11,2 pulgadas)
304,1 mm (11,97 pulgadas)
Diagonal:
14.1 pulgada
15 pulgada
359.16 mm (14.1 pulgadas)
382.4 mm (15.1 pulgadas)
Resoluciones máximas 1024 x 768 a 16,8 millones de colores
Tiempo de respuesta (típico) 20 ms de subida (máximo)
30 ms de bajada (máximo)
Frecuencia de actualización 60 Hz
Ángulo de funcionamiento 0° (cerrado) a 180°
Ángulos de vista:
Horizontal ±40°
Vertical +10°/–30°
Separación entre píxeles 0,28 x 0,28 mm
Consumo eléctrico:
Panel con luz de fondo (normal) 5.2 W
Controles el brillo puede controlarse mediante
métodos abreviados del tecladoApéndice 83
Teclado
Número de teclas 85 (EE.UU. y Canadá); 86 (Europa);
90 (Japón)
Recorrido de tecla 2,7 mm ± 0,3 mm (0,11 pulgadas ± 0,016
pulgadas)
Espacio entre teclas 19,05 mm ± 0,3 mm (0,75 pulgadas ± 0,012
pulgadas)
Diseño QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji
Superficie táctil
Resolución de posición X/Y (modo de
tabla de gráficos) 240 cpp
Tamaño:
Anchura 64,88 mm (2,55 pulgadas) área activa
mediante sensor
Altura Rectángulo de 48,88 mm (1,92 pulgadas)
Batería (8 celdas)
Tipo Ión de litio "inteligente" de 8 celdas (65
WHr)
Dimensiones:
Profundidad 122,5 mm (4,8 pulgadas)
Altura 19,2 mm (0,76 pulgadas)
Anchura 147,5 mm (5,8 pulgadas)
Peso 0,470 kg (1,03 lb)
Voltaje 14,8 VDC
Capacidad 4300 mAH
Vida útil Puede reducirse significativamente bajo
condiciones de mucho consumo.
Consulte la página 29 para obtener más
información acerca de la duración de la
batería.
Duración (aproximada) 300 ciclos de carga/descarga
0
Intervalo de temperatura:
Carga/Descarga 0° a 35°C (32° a 95°F)
En almacenamiento –40° a 65°C (–40° a 149°F)84 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Batería (12 celdas)
Tipo Ión de litio "inteligente" de 12 celdas (96
Whr)
Dimensiones:
Profundidad 122,5 mm (4,8 pulgadas)
Altura 19,2 mm (0,76 pulgadas)
Anchura 147,5 mm (5,8 pulgadas)
Peso 0,615 kg (1,35 lb)
Voltaje 14,8 VDC
Capacidad 6450 mAH
Vida útil Puede reducirse significativamente bajo
condiciones de mucho consumo.
Consulte la página 29 para obtener más
información acerca de la duración de la
batería.
Duración (aproximada) 300 ciclos de carga/descarga
0
Intervalo de temperatura:
Carga/Descarga 0° a 35°C (32° a 95°F)
En almacenamiento –40° a 65°C (–40° a 149°F)
Adaptador de CA
Voltaje de entrada De 100 a 240 V CA
Intensidad de entrada (máxima) 1,5 A
Frecuencia de entrada De 50 a 60 Hz
Intensidad de salida 5,62 A (máximo en pulso de 4 segundos);
4,62 A (continuo)
Potencia de salida 90 W estándar
Voltaje nominal de salida 19.5 V de CC
Dimensiones:
Altura 34,2 mm (1,35 pulgadas)
Anchura 60,9 mm (2,4 pulgadas)
Profundidad 153,4 mm (6,04 pulgadas)
Peso (con cables) 0,46 kg (1,0 lb)Apéndice 85
Intervalo de temperatura:
En funcionamiento 0° a 35°C (32° a 95°F)
En almacenamiento –40° a 65°C (–40° a 149°F)
Aspectos físicos
Altura
Pantalla de 14,1 pulgadas 44,5–47,95 mm (1,75 pulgadas–1,89
pulgadas)
Pantalla de 15 pulgadas 46,5–48,3 mm (1,83 pulgadas–1,90
pulgadas)
Anchura
Pantalla de 14,1 pulgadas 329 mm (12,9 pulgadas)
Pantalla de 15 pulgadas 335 mm (13,1 pulgadas)
Profundidad
Pantalla de 14,1 pulgadas 275 mm (10,8 pulgadas)
Pantalla de 15 pulgadas 275 mm (10,8 pulgadas)
Peso:
Con unidad de CD, batería de 8
celdas y pantalla de 14,1 pulgadas
3,3 kg (7,17 lb)
Con unidad de CD, batería de 12
celdas y pantalla de 14,1 pulgadas
3,4 kg (7,57 lb)
Con unidad de CD, batería de 8
celdas y pantalla de 15 pulgadas
3,5 kg (7,66 lb)
Con unidad de CD, batería de 12
celdas y pantalla de 15 pulgadas
3,7 kg (8,07 lb)
Aspectos ambientales
Intervalo de temperatura:
En funcionamiento 0° a 35°C (32° a 95°F)
En almacenamiento –40° a 65°C (–40° a 149°F)
Humedad relativa (máxima):
En funcionamiento del 10% al 90% (sin condensación)
En almacenamiento del 5% al 95% (sin condensación)
Adaptador de CA (continuación)86 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Utilización del programa Configuración del sistema
Visión general
NOTA: El sistema operativo puede configurar automáticamente la mayoría de las opciones disponibles en el
programa de configuración del sistema, anulando así las opciones establecidas por el usuario a través del
programa de configuración del sistema. Para obtener más información acerca de la configuración de funciones
del sistema operativo, consulte el centro de ayuda y soporte técnico. Para acceder a la ayuda, consulte la
página 9.
Las pantallas de configuración del sistema muestran la información y las selecciones de la
configuración actual del equipo, como:
• Configuración del sistema
• Secuencia de arranque
• Configuración de arranque (inicialización) y ajustes de configuración del dispositivo de
acoplamiento
• Selecciones de configuración básica de dispositivos
• Ajustes de seguridad del sistema y de la contraseña de la unidad de disco duro
AVISO: A menos que sea un usuario experto en informática o que el servicio de asistencia técnica de
Dell le pida que lo haga, no cambie la configuración de este programa. Determinados cambios pueden
hacer que el equipo no funcione correctamente.
Vibración máxima:
En funcionamiento 0,6 GRMS
En almacenamiento 1.3 GRMS
Impacto máximo (medido con la
unidad de disco duro en posición de
reposo y pulso de media onda de 2
ms):
En funcionamiento 122 G
En almacenamiento 163 G
Altitud (máxima):
En funcionamiento De –15.2 a 3048 m (de –50 a 10,000 pies)
En almacenamiento De –15.2 a 10,668 m (de –50 a 35,000 pies)
Aspectos ambientales (continuación)Apéndice 87
Visualización de las pantallas de configuración del sistema
1 Encienda (o reinicie) el equipo.
2 Cuando aparezca el logotipo de DELL™, pulse inmediatamente. Si tarda demasiado y
aparece el logotipo de Windows, espere hasta que se muestre el escritorio de Windows. A
continuación, apague el equipo (consulte la página 28) y vuelva a intentarlo.
Pantallas de configuración del sistema
NOTA: Para obtener información sobre un elemento específico de la pantalla de configuración del
sistema, resalte el elemento y consulte el área de Ayuda de la pantalla.
Se lista, en cada pantalla, a la izquierda las opciones de configuración del sistema. A la derecha de
cada opción se encuentra la selección o el valor de dicha opción. Puede cambiar las selecciones que
aparecen en blanco en la pantalla. Las opciones o valores que no se pueden cambiar (porque los
determina o calcula el equipo) aparecen con menos brillo.
En el cuadro que aparece en la esquina superior derecha de la pantalla se muestra información de
ayuda sobre la opción resaltada actualmente; en el que aparece en la esquina inferior derecha se
muestra información acerca del equipo. Las funciones clave del programa de configuración del
sistema aparecen en la parte inferior de la pantalla.
Opciones más utilizadas
Ciertas opciones requieren que reinicie el equipo para que la nueva configuración sea efectiva.
Cambio de la secuencia de arranque
La secuencia de arranque indica al equipo dónde debe buscar para localizar el software necesario
para iniciar el sistema operativo. Puede controlar la secuencia de inicio y activar o desactivar los
dispositivos mediante la página Boot Order (Orden de inicio) del programa de configuración del
sistema.
NOTA: Para cambiar la secuencia de arranque para una sola vez, consulte página 88.
La página Boot Order (Orden de inicio) muestra una lista general de los dispositivos de inicio que
se pueden instalar en el equipo, que incluyen, entre otros, los siguientes:
• Unidad de discos flexibles
• Unidad de disco duro de compartimento para módulos
• Unidad de disco duro interna
• Unidad de CD/DVD/CD-RW
Durante la rutina de inicio, el equipo comienza por la parte superior de la lista y examina los
archivos de inicio del sistema operativo. Cuando el equipo encuentra los archivos, deja de buscar e
inicia el sistema operativo.
Para controlar los dispositivos de inicio, seleccione (resalte) un dispositivo presionando la tecla de
flecha hacia arriba o hacia abajo y, a continuación, active o desactive el dispositivo o cambie su
orden en la lista.88 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
• Para activar o desactivar un dispositivo, resalte el elemento Los elementos activados aparecen
de color blanco y con un signo de exclamación a la izquierda; los elementos desactivados
aparecen de color azul o atenuados y sin triángulo.
• Pulse la tecla de flecha hacia la izquierda o hacia la derecha para cambiar la opción.
• Para cambiar la posición de un dispositivo en la lista, resáltelo y, a continuación, pulse o
(no se distingue entre mayúsculas y minúsculas) para desplazar hacia arriba o hacia
abajo el dispositivo resaltado.
Los cambios de la secuencia de inicio tendrán efecto tan pronto como los guarde y salga del
programa de configuración del sistema.
Arranque para una sola vez
Puede configurar una secuencia de inicio para una sola vez sin tener que entrar en el programa de
configuración del sistema. (También puede utilizar este procedimiento para iniciar desde los
Diagnósticos de Dell en la partición de la utilidad de diagnóstico de la unidad de disco duro).
1 Apague el equipo.
2 Si el equipo está conectado (acoplado) a un dispositivo de acoplamiento, desacóplelo. Si
desea instrucciones, consulte la documentación incluida con el dispositivo de acoplamiento.
3 Conecte el equipo a un enchufe eléctrico.
4 Encienda el equipo. Cuando aparezca el logotipo DELL, oprima inmediatamente . Si
tarda demasiado y aparece el logotipo de Windows, espere hasta que se muestre el escritorio
de Windows. A continuación, apague el equipo y vuelva a intentarlo.
5 Cuando aparezca el dispositivo de arranque, resalte el dispositivo desde el que desea arrancar
y pulse .
El equipo se iniciará desde el dispositivo seleccionado.
La próxima vez que reinicie el equipo, se restaurará el orden de inicio normal.
Optimización del rendimiento de la batería y el sistema
Información general sobre el rendimiento del sistema
El rendimiento del sistema puede verse reducido en determinadas condiciones para evitar que se
realice un apagado automático y se pierdan datos. Entre las condiciones en las que se reduce el
rendimiento se encuentran las siguientes:
CA L EN T AMI EN T O D E L P R O C E S A D O R — El rendimiento se reduce cuando la temperatura del sistema
sobrepasa los parámetros establecidos. Esta reducción del rendimiento ayuda a regular las temperaturas del
sistema y de la superficie, lo cual evita que el equipo se apague debido a la temperatura excesiva del
procesador.
REN DIMI EN T O D E L A D A P T A D O R D E CA — El rendimiento se reduce cuando el equipo funciona con
alimentación de CA y el consumo de energía sobrepasa los parámetros establecidos del adaptador de CA.
Esta reducción del rendimiento garantiza que el sistema no intenta consumir más de lo que el adaptador Apéndice 89
de CA puede suministrar.
CA P A CI D A D D E LA B A T E RÍ A — El rendimiento se reduce cuando el equipo funciona con batería y el
consumo de energía sobrepasa la capacidad nominal de la batería, sobrepasa los niveles de descarga segura
permitidos o cuando la temperatura de la superficie de la batería sobrepasa los 60 °C.
Optimización del consumo de energía y del tiempo de carga de la batería
El adaptador de CA tarda 3 horas aproximadamente en cargar una batería totalmente descargada
con el equipo apagado. El tiempo de carga es significativamente superior si el equipo está
encendido y funciona a una alta velocidad de procesador y niveles elevados de actividad del
sistema. Si el equipo funciona a elevados niveles de actividad del sistema durante periodos
prolongados de tiempo y la batería no se carga, intente operar con el equipo en modo de
administración de energía mínima. Este modo puede mejorar el tiempo de carga y la duración de la
batería. Según los niveles de actividad del sistema, el rendimiento del sistema puede verse
reducido. Para establecer el modo de administración de energía mínima:
NOTA: También puede pulsar el icono de medidor de energía de la barra de tareas.
1 Pulse el botón Inicio→ Panel de control→ Rendimiento y mantenimiento→ Opciones de
energía.
2 Seleccione la ficha Combinaciones de energía.
3 En el menú desplegable Combinaciones de energía, pulse Modo de bajo consumo.
Para obtener más información sobre la administración de energía, consulte el archivo de Ayuda de
Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la .página 9
Velocidad variable del ventilador
El equipo utiliza una velocidad variable del ventilador a fin de evitar que el equipo se sobrecaliente.
El ventilador funciona continuamente y la velocidad de éste puede variar según el uso. El ruido de
los ventiladores es normal y no indica ningún problema del equipo o de los ventiladores.
Política de soporte técnico de Dell (sólo EE.UU.)
El soporte técnico asistido por personal técnico requiere la cooperación y la participación del
cliente en el proceso de solución de problemas y permite restaurar el sistema operativo, los
programas de software y los controladores de hardware a la configuración predeterminada original
de Dell, así como verificar el funcionamiento correcto del equipo y del hardware instalado por Dell.
Además de este soporte con intervención de un técnico, puede encontrar el mismo en línea en
support.dell.com. Puede que haya opciones de soporte técnico adicionales con cargo.
Dell proporciona asistencia técnica limitada para el equipo y el software y los periféricos instalados
por Dell
1
. La asistencia para software y periféricos de terceros corresponde al fabricante original e
incluye aquellos artículos comprados o instalados a través de Dell Software and Peripherals,
Readyware y Custom Factory Integration
2
.
1
Se ofrecen servicios de reparación conforme a los términos y condiciones de la garantía limitada y el servicio 90 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
de asistencia opcional contratado al comprar el equipo.
2
Todos los componentes estándar de Dell incluidos en un proyecto Custom Factory Integration (CFI) están
cubiertos por la garantía limitada estándar de Dell de su equipo. No obstante, Dell también amplía el programa de sustitución de piezas para incluir todos los componentes de hardware no estándar de terceros integrados a través de CFI durante todo el período de vigencia del contrato de asistencia para el equipo.
Definición de software y dispositivos periféricos “instalados por Dell”
El software instalado por Dell incluye el sistema operativo y parte de los programas de software
instalados en el equipo durante el proceso de fabricación (Microsoft®
Office, Norton Antivirus,
etc.)
Los dispositivos periféricos instalados por Dell incluyen las tarjetas internas de expansión, los
compartimentos para módulos Dell y los accesorios de la tarjeta PC. Además, se incluyen todos los
monitores, teclados, ratones, altavoces, micrófonos para módems telefónicos, estaciones de
acoplamiento/replicadores de puerto, productos de red y todos los cables correspondientes de la
marca Dell.
Definición de software y dispositivos periféricos “de terceros”
El software y los periféricos de terceros incluyen los periféricos, accesorios y programas de software
vendidos por Dell pero que no son de la marca Dell (impresoras, escáneres, cámaras, juegos, etc.).
El soporte para el software y los dispositivos periféricos de terceros lo proporciona el fabricante
original del producto.
Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell
Para ponerse en contacto con Dell de forma electrónica, puede acceder a los siguientes sitios web:
• www.dell.com
• support.dell.com (soporte técnico)
• premiersupport.dell.com (soporte técnico para clientes de instituciones educativas,
gubernamentales, sanitarias y de grandes y medianas empresas, incluidos los clientes Premier,
Platinum y Gold)
Para obtener las direcciones web de su país, busque la sección correspondiente en la siguiente tabla.
NOTA: Los números de teléfono gratuitos son para uso dentro del país para el que aparecen.
Cuando necesite ponerse en contacto con Dell, utilice las direcciones electrónicas, los números de
teléfono y los códigos que se incluyen en la siguiente tabla. Si necesita ayuda para averiguar los
códigos que debe utilizar, póngase en contacto con un operador de telefonía local o internacional.Apéndice 91
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitos
Alemania (Langen)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 49
Código de ciudad: 6103
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico:
tech_support_central_europe@dell.com
Asistencia técnica 06103 766-7200
Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas
empresas
0180-5-224400
Atención al cliente para cuentas globales 06103 766-9570
Atención al cliente para cuentas preferentes 06103 766-9420
Atención al cliente para grandes cuentas 06103 766-9560
Atención al cliente para cuentas públicas 06103 766-9555
Centralita 06103 766-7000
Anguilla Asistencia general gratuito: 800-335-0031
Antigua y Barbuda Asistencia general 1-800-805-5924
Antillas Neerlandesas Asistencia general 001-800-882-1519
Argentina (Buenos Aires)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 54
Código de ciudad: 11
Sitio web: www.dell.com.ar
Correo electrónico: us_latin_services@dell.com
Correo electrónico para equipos portátiles y de
sobremesa:
la-techsupport@dell.com
Correco electrónico para servidores y productos de
almacenamiento EMC®
:
la_enterprise@dell.com
Atención al cliente gratuito: 0-800-444-0730
Asistencia técnica gratuito: 0-800-444-0733
Servicios de asistencia técnica gratuito: 0-800-444-0724
Ventas 0-810-444-3355
Aruba Asistencia general gratuito: 800-157892 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Australia (Sydney)
Código de acceso internacional:
0011
Código de país: 61
Código de ciudad: 2
Correo electrónico (Australia):
au_tech_support@dell.com
Correo electrónico (Nueva Zelanda):
nz_tech_support@dell.com
Particulares y pequeñas empresas 1-300-655-533
Gobierno y empresas gratuito: 1-800-633-559
División de cuentas preferentes (PAD) gratuito: 1-800-060-889
Atención al cliente gratuito: 1-800-819-339
Asistencia técnica (para equipos portátiles y de
escritorio)
gratuito: 1-300-655-533
Asistencia técnica (servidores y estaciones de
trabajo)
gratuito: 1-800-733-314
Ventas corporativas gratuito: 1-800-808-385
Ventas de transacciones gratuito: 1-800-808-312
Fax gratuito: 1-800-818-341
Austria (Viena)
Código de acceso internacional:
900
Código de país: 43
Código de ciudad: 1
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico:
tech_support_central_europe@dell.com
Ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas 0820 240 530 00
Fax para particulares y pequeñas empresas 0820 240 530 49
Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas
empresas
0820 240 530 14
Atención al cliente para cuentas preferentes y
corporaciones
0820 240 530 16
Asistencia técnica a particulares y pequeñas
empresas
0820 240 530 14
Asistencia técnica a cuentas preferentes y
corporaciones
0660 8779
Centralita 0820 240 530 00
Bahamas Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-278-6818
Barbados Asistencia general 1-800-534-3066
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 93
Bélgica (Bruselas)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 32
Código de ciudad: 2
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico para clientes francófonos:
support.euro.dell.com/be/fr/emaildell/
Asistencia técnica 02 481 92 88
Fax de asistencia técnica 02 481 92 95
Atención al cliente 02 713 15 .65
Ventas corporativas 02 481 91 00
Fax 02 481 92 99
Centralita 02 481 91 00
Bermuda Asistencia general 1-800-342-0671
Bolivia Asistencia general gratuito: 800-10-0238
Brasil
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 55
Código de ciudad: 51
Sitio web: www.dell.com/br
Atención al cliente, asistencia técnica 0800 90 3355
Fax de asistencia técnica 51 481 5470
Fax de atención al cliente 51 481 5480
Ventas 0800 90 3390
Brunei
Código de país: 673
Asistencia técnica al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4966
Atención al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4949
Ventas de transacciones (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4955
Canadá (North York, Ontario)
Código de acceso internacional:
011
Estado de pedidos en línea: www.dell.ca/ostatus
AutoTech (asistencia técnica automatizada) gratuito: 1-800-247-9362
Atención al cliente (ventas a particulares y pequeñas
empresas)
gratuito: 1-800-847-4096
Atención al cliente para empresas medianas y
grandes, y del gobierno
gratuito: 1-800-326-9463
Asistencia técnica (ventas a particulares y pequeñas
empresas)
gratuito: 1-800-847-4096
Asistencia técnica para empresas medianas y
grandes, y del gobierno
gratuito: 1-800-387-5757
Ventas (particulares y pequeñas empresas) gratuito: 1-800-387-5752
Ventas (pequeñas y medianas empresas,
instituciones gubernamentales)
gratuito: 1-800-387-5755
Ventas de repuestos y por extensión de servicio 1866 440 3355
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitos94 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Chile (Santiago)
Código de país: 56
Código de ciudad: 2
Atención al cliente, asistencia técnica y ventas gratuito: 1230-020-4823
China (Xiamén)
Código de país: 86
Código de ciudad: 592
Sitio web de asistencia técnica: support.dell.com.cn
Correo electrónico de asistencia técnica:
cn_support@dell.com
Correo electrónico de atención al cliente:
customer_cn@dell.com
Fax de asistencia técnica 592 818 1350
Asistencia técnica (Dell™ Dimension™ e
Inspiron™)
gratuito: 800 858 2969
Asistencia técnica (OptiPlex™, Latitude™ y Dell
Precision™)
gratuito: 800858 0950
Asistencia técnica (servidores y almacenamiento) gratuito: 800858 0960
Asistencia técnica (proyectores, PDA,
conmutadores, enrutadores y otros)
gratuito: 800 858 2920
Soporte técnico (impresoras) gratuito: 800 858 2311
Atención al cliente gratuito: 800 858 2060
Fax de atención al cliente 592 818 1308
Particulares y pequeñas empresas gratuito: 800 858 2222
División de cuentas preferentes gratuito: 800 858 2557
Grandes cuentas corporativas GPC gratuito: 800 858 2055
Grandes cuentas corporativas y cuentas principales gratuito: 800 858 2628
Grandes cuentas corporativas del norte gratuito: 800 858 2999
Grandes cuentas corporativas del norte y del ámbito
educativo
gratuito: 800 858 2955
Grandes cuentas corporativas del este gratuito: 800 858 2020
Grandes cuentas corporativas del este y del ámbito
educativo
gratuito: 800 858 2669
Grandes cuentas corporativas del grupo de cola gratuito: 800 858 2572
Grandes cuentas corporativas del sur gratuito: 800 858 2355
Grandes cuentas corporativas del oeste gratuito: 800 858 2811
Grandes cuentas corporativas de diferentes partes gratuito: 800 858 2621
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 95
Colombia Asistencia general 980-9-15-3978
Corea (Seúl)
Código de acceso internacional:
001
Código de país: 82
Código de ciudad: 2
Asistencia técnica gratuito: 080-200-3800
Ventas gratuito: 080-200-3600
Atención al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4949
Fax 2194-6202
Centralita 2194-6000
Asistencia técnica (electrónica y accesorios) gratuito: 080-200-3801
Costa Rica Asistencia general 0800-012-0435
Dinamarca (Copenhague)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 45
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico:
support.euro.dell.com/dk/da/emaildell/
Asistencia técnica 7023 0182
Atención al cliente (relacional) 7023 0184
Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas
empresas
3287 5505
Centralita (relacional) 3287 1200
Fax de la centralita (relacional) 3287 1201
Centralita (particulares y pequeñas empresas) 3287 5000
Fax de la centralita (particulares y pequeñas
empresas)
3287 5001
Dominica Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-278-6821
Ecuador Asistencia general gratuito: 999-119
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitos96 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
EE.UU. (Austin, Texas)
Código de acceso internacional:
011
Código de país: 1
Servicio automatizado para averiguar el estado de
un pedido
gratuito: 1-800-433-9014
AutoTech (para equipos portátiles y de escritorio) gratuito: 1-800-247-9362
Consumidor (Particular y oficina doméstica)
Asistencia técnica gratuito: 1-800-624-9896
Atención al cliente gratuito: 1-800-624-9897
Servicio y asistencia DellNet™ gratuito: 1-877-Dellnet
(1-877-335-5638)
Clientes del programa de compra para empleados
(EPP [Employee Purchase Program])
gratuito: 1-800-695-8133
Sitio web de servicios financieros: www.dellfinancialservices.com
Servicios financieros (alquiler y préstamos) gratuito: 1-877-577-3355
Servicios financieros (cuentas preferentes de Dell
[DPA, Dell Preferred Accounts])
gratuito: 1-800-283-2210
Empresa
Atención al cliente y asistencia técnica gratuito: 1-800-822-8965
Clientes del programa de compra para empleados
(EPP [Employee Purchase Program])
gratuito: 1-800-695-8133
Asistencia técnica para impresoras y proyectores gratuito: 1-877-459-7298
Público (gobierno, educación y sanidad)
Atención al cliente y asistencia técnica gratuito: 1-800-456-3355
Clientes del programa de compra para empleados
(EPP [Employee Purchase Program])
gratuito: 1-800-234-1490
Ventas de Dell gratuito: 1-800-289-3355
o gratuito: 1-800-879-3355
Dell Outlet Store (equipos Dell restaurados) gratuito: 1-888-798-7561
Venta de software y periféricos gratuito: 1-800-671-3355
Venta de piezas de repuesto gratuito: 1-800-357-3355
Venta de servicios y garantías ampliados gratuito: 1-800-247-4618
Fax gratuito: 1-800-727-8320
Servicios de Dell para personas sordas, con
discapacidades auditivas o del habla
gratuito: 1-877-DELLTTY
(1-877-335-5889)
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 97
El Salvador Asistencia general 01-899-753-0777
Eslovaquia (Praga)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 421
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico: czech_dell@dell.com
Asistencia técnica 02 5441 5727
Atención al cliente 420 22537 2707
Fax 02 5441 8328
Fax de asistencia técnica 02 5441 8328
Centralita (ventas) 02 5441 7585
España (Madrid)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 34
Código de ciudad: 91
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico:
support.euro.dell.com/es/es/emaildell/
Residencias y empresas pequeñas
Asistencia técnica 902 100 130
Atención al cliente 902 118 540
Ventas 902 118 541
Centralita 902 118 541
Fax 902 118 539
Corporativa
Asistencia técnica 902 100 130
Atención al cliente 902 115 236
Centralita 91 722 92 00
Fax 91 722 95 83
Finlandia (Helsinki)
Código de acceso internacional:
990
Código de país: 358
Código de ciudad: 9
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico:
support.euro.dell.com/fi/fi/emaildell/
Asistencia técnica 09 253 313 60
Atención al cliente 09 253 313 38
Fax 09 253 313 99
Centralita 09 253 313 00
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitos98 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Francia (París) (Montpellier)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 33
Códigos de ciudad: (1) (4)
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico:
support.euro.dell.com/fr/fr/emaildell/
Residencias y empresas pequeñas
Asistencia técnica 0825 387 270
Atención al cliente 0825 823 833
Centralita 0825 004 700
Centralita (llamadas desde fuera de Francia) 04 99 75 40 00
Ventas 0825 004 700
Fax 0825 004 701
Fax (llamadas desde fuera de Francia) 0499754001
Corporativa
Asistencia técnica 0825 004 719
Atención al cliente 0825 338 339
Centralita 01 55 94 71 00
Ventas 01 55 94 71 00
Fax 01 55 94 71 01
Grecia
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 30
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico:
support.euro.dell.com/gr/en/emaildell/
Asistencia técnica 00800-44 14 95 18
Asistencia técnica Gold Service 00800-44 14 00 83
Centralita 2108129810
Centralita para Gold Service 2108129811
Ventas 2108129800
Fax 2108129812
Granada Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-540-3355
Guatemala Asistencia general 1-800-999-0136
Guayana Asistencia general gratuito: 1-877-270-4609
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 99
Hong Kong
Código de acceso internacional:
001
Código de país: 852
Sitio web: support.ap.dell.com
Correo electrónico de asistencia técnica:
apsupport@dell.com
Asistencia técnica (Dimension e Inspiron) 2969 3188
Asistencia técnica (OptiPlex, Latitude y Dell
Precision)
2969 3191
Asistencia técnica (PowerApp™, PowerEdge™,
PowerConnect™ y PowerVault™)
2969 3196
Atención al cliente 3416 0910
Cuentas corporativas grandes 3416 0907
Programas globales para clientes 3416 0908
División de la mediana empresa 3416 0912
División de la pequeña empresa y la particular 2969 3105
India Asistencia técnica 1600 33 8045
Ventas (grandes cuentas corporativas) 1600 33 8044
Ventas (particulares y pequeñas empresas) 1600 33 8046
Irlanda (Cherrywood)
Código de acceso internacional:
16
Código de país: 353
Código de ciudad: 1
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico: dell_direct_support@dell.com
Asistencia técnica 1850 543 543
Asistencia técnica en el Reino Unido (sólo para
llamadas dentro del Reino Unido)
0870 908 0800
Atención al cliente (particulares) 01 204 4014
Atención al cliente para pequeñas empresas 01 204 4014
Atención al cliente en el Reino Unido (sólo para
llamadas dentro del Reino Unido)
0870 906 0010
Atención al cliente para corporaciones 1850 200 982
Atención al cliente en el Reino Unido (sólo para
llamadas dentro del Reino Unido)
0870 907 4499
Ventas para Irlanda 01 204 4444
Ventas en el Reino Unido (sólo para llamadas dentro
del Reino Unido)
0870 907 4000
Fax/Fax de ventas 01 204 0103
Centralita 01 204 4444
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitos100 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Islas Caimán Asistencia general 1-800-805-7541
Islas Turks y Caicos Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-540-3355
Islas Vírgenes Americanas Asistencia general 1-877-673-3355
Islas Vírgenes Británicas Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-278-6820
Italia (Milán)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 39
Código de ciudad: 02
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico:
support.euro.dell.com/it/it/emaildell/
Residencias y empresas pequeñas
Asistencia técnica 02 577 826 90
Atención al cliente 02 696 821 14
Fax 02 696 821 13
Centralita 02 696 821 12
Corporativa
Asistencia técnica 02 577 826 90
Atención al cliente 02 577 825 55
Fax 02 575 035 30
Centralita 02 577 821
Jamaica Asistencia general (sólo para dentro de Jamaica) 1-800-682-3639
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 101
Japón (Kawasaki)
Código de acceso internacional:
001
Código de país: 81
Código de ciudad: 44
Sitio web: support.jp.dell.com
Asistencia técnica (servidores) gratuito: 0120-198-498
Asistencia técnica fuera de Japón (servidores) 81-44-556-4162
Asistencia técnica (Dimension e Inspiron) gratuito: 0120-198-226
Asistencia técnica fuera de Japón (Dimension e
Inspiron)
81-44-520-1435
Asistencia técnica (Dell Precision, OptiPlex y
Latitude)
gratuito: 0120-198-433
Asistencia técnica fuera de Japón (Dell Precision,
OptiPlex y Latitude)
81-44-556-3894
Asistencia técnica (PDA, proyectores, impresoras,
enrutadores)
gratuito: 0120-981-690
Asistencia técnica fuera de Japón (PDA,
proyectores, impresoras, enrutadores)
81-44-556-3468
Servicio Faxbox 044-556-3490
Servicio de pedidos automatizado las 24 horas del
día
044-556-3801
Atención al cliente 044-556-4240
División de ventas corporativas (hasta 400
empleados)
044-556-1465
Ventas de la división de cuentas preferentes (más de
400 empleados)
044-556-3433
Ventas de grandes cuentas corporativas (más de
3.500 empleados)
044-556-3430
Ventas al sector público (agencias del Estado,
instituciones educativas y médicas)
044-556-1469
Cuentas globales de Japón 044-556-3469
Usuario individual 044-556-1760
Centralita 044-556-4300
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitos102 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Latinoamérica Asistencia técnica al cliente (Austin, Texas,
EE.UU.)
512 728-4093
Atención al cliente (Austin, Texas, EE.UU.) 512 728-3619
Fax (Asistencia técnica y Servicio al cliente)
(Austin, Texas, EE.UU.)
512 728-3883
Ventas (Austin, Texas, EE.UU.) 512 728-4397
Fax de ventas (Austin, Texas, EE.UU.) 512 728-4600
ó 512 728-3772
Luxemburgo
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 352
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico: tech_be@dell.com
Asistencia técnica (Bruselas, Bélgica) 3420808075
Ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas (Bruselas,
Bélgica)
gratuito: 080016884
Ventas a corporaciones (Bruselas, Bélgica) 02 481 91 00
Atención al cliente (Bruselas, Bélgica) 02 481 91 19
Fax (Bruselas, Bélgica) 02 481 92 99
Centralita (Bruselas, Bélgica) 02 481 91 00
Macao
Código de país: 853
Asistencia técnica gratuito: 0800 105
Servicio al cliente (Xiamen, China) 34 160 910
Ventas de transacción (Xiamen, China) 29115693
Malasia (Penang)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 60
Código de ciudad: 4
Sitio web: support.ap.dell.com
Asistencia técnica (Dell Precision, OptiPlex y
Latitude)
gratuito: 1 800 88 0193
Asistencia técnica (Dimension, Inspiron, y
electrónica y accesorios)
gratuito: 1 800 88 1306
Asistencia técnica (PowerApp, PowerEdge,
PowerConnect y PowerVault)
gratuito: 1 800 88 1386
Atención al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 04 633 4949
Ventas de transacciones gratuito: 1 800 888 202
Ventas corporativas gratuito: 1 800 888 213
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 103
México
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 52
Asistencia técnica al cliente 001-877-384-8979
ó 001-877-269-3383
Ventas 50-81-8800
ó 01-800-888-3355
Atención al cliente 001-877-384-8979
ó 001-877-269-3383
Principal 50-81-8800
ó 01-800-888-3355
Montserrat Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-278-6822
Nicaragua Asistencia general 001-800-220-1006
Noruega (Lysaker)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 47
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico:
support.euro.dell.com/no/no/emaildell/
Asistencia técnica 671 16882
Atención relacional al cliente 671 17575
Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas
empresas
23162298
Centralita 671 16800
Centralita de fax 671 16865
Nueva Zelanda
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 64
Correo electrónico (Nueva Zelanda):
nz_tech_support@dell.com
Correo electrónico (Australia):
au_tech_support@dell.com
Asistencia técnica (para equipos portátiles y de
sobremesa)
gratuito: 0800 446 255
Asistencia técnica (para servidores y estaciones de
trabajo)
gratuito:0800 443 563
Particulares y pequeñas empresas 0800 446 255
Gobierno y empresas 0800 444 617
Ventas 0800 441 567
Fax 0800 441 566
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitos104 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Países bajos (Amsterdam)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 31
Código de ciudad: 20
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Asistencia técnica 020 674 45 00
Fax de asistencia técnica 020 674 47 66
Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas
empresas
020 674 42 00
Atención relacional al cliente 020 674 4325
Ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas 020 674 55 00
Ventas relacionales 020 674 50 00
Ventas por fax a particulares y pequeñas empresas 020 674 47 75
Fax para ventas relacionales 020 674 47 50
Centralita 020 674 50 00
Fax de la centralita 020 674 47 50
Países del sureste asiático y del
Pacífico
Asistencia técnica, atención al cliente y ventas
(Penang, Malasia)
604 633 4810
Panamá Asistencia general 001-800-507-0962
Perú Asistencia general 0800-50-669
Polonia (Varsovia)
Código de acceso internacional:
011
Código de país: 48
Código de ciudad: 22
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico: pl_support_tech@dell.com
Teléfono de atención al cliente 57 95 700
Atención al cliente 57 95 999
Ventas 57 95 999
Fax de atención al cliente 57 95 806
Fax de la recepción 57 95 998
Centralita 57 95 999
Portugal
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 351
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico:
support.euro.dell.com/pt/en/emaildell/
Asistencia técnica 707200149
Atención al cliente 800 300413
Ventas 800 300 410, 800 300 411,
800 300 412 o 21 422 07 10
Fax 21 424 01 12
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 105
Puerto Rico Asistencia general 1-800-805-7545
Reino Unido (Bracknell)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 44
Código de ciudad: 1344
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Sitio web de atención al cliente: support.euro.dell.com/uk/en/ECare/Form/Home.asp
Correo electrónico: dell_direct_support@dell.com
Asistencia técnica (cuentas preferentes, corporativas
o PAD, para más de 1000 empleados)
0870 908 0500
Asistencia técnica (directa y general) 0870 908 0800
Atención al cliente para cuentas globales 01344 373 186
Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas
empresas
0870 906 0010
Atención al cliente para corporaciones 01344 373 185
Atención a clientes con cuentas preferentes
(500–5.000 empleados)
0870 906 0010
Atención al cliente para el gobierno central 01344 373 193
Atención al cliente para el gobierno local y la
educación
01344 373 199
Atención al cliente para temas de salud 01344 373 194
Ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas 0870 907 4000
Ventas corporativas y al sector público 01344 860 456
Fax para particulares y pequeñas empresas 0870 907 4006
República checa (Praga)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 420
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico: czech_dell@dell.com
Asistencia técnica 22537 2727
Atención al cliente 22537 2707
Fax 22537 2714
Fax de asistencia técnica 22537 2728
Centralita 22537 2711
República Dominicana Asistencia general 1-800-148-0530
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitos106 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m
Singapur (Singapur)
Código de acceso internacional:
005
Código de país: 65
Sitio web: support.ap.dell.com
Asistencia técnica (Dimension, Inspiron, y
electrónica y accesorios)
gratuito: 1800 394 7430
Asistencia técnica (OptiPlex, Latitude y Dell
Precision)
gratuito: 1800 394 7488
Asistencia técnica (PowerApp, PowerEdge,
PowerConnect y PowerVault)
gratuito: 1800 394 7478
Atención al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4949
Ventas de transacciones gratuito: 1 800 394 7412
Ventas corporativas gratuito: 1 800 394 7419
St. Kitts y Nevis Asistencia general gratuito: 1-877-441-4731
St. Lucia Asistencia general 1-800-882-1521
St. Vicente y las Granadinas Asistencia general gratuito: 1-877-270-4609
Sudáfrica (Johannesburgo)
Código de acceso internacional:
09/091
Código de país: 27
Código de ciudad: 11
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico: dell_za_support@dell.com
Gold Queue 011 709 7713
Asistencia técnica 011 709 7710
Atención al cliente 011 709 7707
Ventas 011 709 7700
Fax 011 706 0495
Centralita 011 709 7700
Suecia (Upplands Vasby)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 46
Código de ciudad: 8
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico:
support.euro.dell.com/se/sv/emaildell/
Asistencia técnica 08 590 05 199
Atención relacional al cliente 08 590 05 642
Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas
empresas
08 587 70 527
Soporte para el programa de compra para
empleados (EPP [Employee Purchase Program])
20 140 14 44
Fax de asistencia técnica 08 590 05 594
Ventas 08 590 05 185
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 107
Suiza (Ginebra)
Código de acceso internacional:
00
Código de país: 41
Código de ciudad: 22
Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com
Correo electrónico:
Tech_support_central_Europe@dell.com
Correo electrónico para clientes HSB y corporativos
francófonos: support.euro.dell.com/ch/fr/emaildell/
Asistencia técnica (particulares y pequeñas
empresas)
0844 811 411
Asistencia técnica (corporaciones) 0844 822 844
Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas
empresas
0848 802 202
Atención al cliente para corporaciones 0848 821 721
Fax 022 799 01 90
Centralita 022 799 01 01
Tailandia
Código de acceso internacional:
001
Código de país: 66
Sitio web: support.ap.dell.com
Asistencia técnica (OptiPlex, Latitude y Dell
Precision)
gratuito: 1800 0060 07
Asistencia técnica (PowerApp, PowerEdge,
PowerConnect y PowerVault)
gratuito: 1800 0600 09
Atención al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4949
Ventas corporativas gratuito: 1800 006 009
Ventas de transacciones gratuito: 1800 006 006
Taiwán
Código de acceso internacional:
002
Código de país: 886
Sitio web: support.ap.dell.com
Correo electrónico: ap_support@dell.com
Asistencia técnica (OptiPlex, Latitude, Inspiron,
Dimension, y electrónica y accesorios)
gratuito: 00801 86 1011
Asistencia técnica (PowerApp, PowerEdge,
PowerConnect y PowerVault)
gratuito: 00801 60 1256
Ventas de transacciones gratuito: 00801 65 1228
Ventas corporativas gratuito: 00801 651 227
Trinidad y Tobago Asistencia general 1-800-805-8035
Uruguay Asistencia general gratuito: 000-413-598-2521
Venezuela Asistencia general 8001-3605
País (Ciudad)
Código del país
Código de acceso internacional
Código de la ciudad
Nombre del departamento o área de servicio,
sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico
Códigos de área,
números locales y
números de teléfono gratuitos108 Apéndice
w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mÍndice 109
Índice
A
acondicionadores de línea, 28
alimentación
apagar el equipo, 28
dispositivos de protección, 27
solucionar problemas, 31
altavoces
descripción, 14
vista del sistema, 14
apagar el equipo, 28
archivo de ayuda, 10
asistencia
cómo ponerse en contacto con
Dell, 90
B
batería
advertencia de bajo nivel de
carga de la batería, 30
almacenar, 31
cargar, 30
comprobar la carga, 30
descripción, 17, 21
extraer, 31
instalar, 31
medidor de energía, 30
rendimiento, 29
vista del sistema, 17, 21
bloqueos, 56
botón AccessDirect
descripción, 16
vista del sistema, 16
botón de alimentación
descripción, 16
vista del sistema, 16
botones de la superficie táctil
descripción, 15
vista del sistema, 15
C
caracteres
inesperados, 38
CD
copiar, 41
Centro de ayuda y soporte
técnico, 11
cerrar el equipo, 28
conector de red
descripción, 20
vista del sistema, 20
conector de vídeo
descripción, 20
vista del sistema, 20
conector del módem
descripción, 18
vista del sistema, 18
conector USB
descripción, 20
vista del sistema, 20
conectores de audio
descripción, 17
vista del sistema, 17
conexión a Internet
acerca de, 23
configurar, 23
opciones, 23
conflictos
resolver incompatibilidades de
software y hardware, 61
controladores
volver a instalar, 59
copiar CD y DVD
cómo, 41
consejos prácticos, 42
información general, 41
correo electrónico
solucionar problemas, 25
cubierta de la minitarjeta
PCI/módem
descripción, 21
vista del sistema, 21
cubierta del módulo de
memoria
descripción, 21
vista del sistema, 21110 Índice
110 Índice
D
Dell
ponerse en contacto, 90
sitio de asistencia, 11
Dell Diagnostics, 49
diagnósticos
Dell, 49
Diagrama de instalación, 9
documentación
archivo de ayuda, 10
Diagrama de instalación, 9
en línea, 11
Guía de información del
sistema, 9
DVD
copiar, 41
E
equipo
bloqueos, 56
especificaciones, 79
restaurar a estado anterior, 61
equipo dañado
probar, 58
equipo mojado, 57
escáner
solución de problemas, 54
especificaciones, 79
etiqueta de Microsoft
Windows, 10
etiqueta de servicio, 10
etiquetas
etiqueta de servicio, 10
Microsoft Windows, 10
G
garantía, 9
H
hardware
Dell Diagnostics, 49
I
impresora
cable, 26
conexión, 25
instalación, 25
USB, 26
indicadores de estado del
dispositivo
descripción, 15
indicadores de estado del
teclado
descripción, 14
vista del sistema, 14
instalar piezas
antes de empezar, 65
apagar el equipo, 65
herramientas
recomendadas, 65
instrucciones de seguridad, 9
M
memoria
extraer, 69
módem
agregar, 71
P
pantalla
descripción, 13
vista del sistema, 13
problemas
Dell Diagnostics, 49
restaurar a estado anterior, 61
programa Configuración del
sistema
opciones más utilizadas, 87
pantallas, 87
propósito, 86
visualizar, 87
programa de configuración
del sistema
pantallas, 87
programas
bloqueos, 56
no responde, 57
R
ranura para cable de seguridad
descripción, 18
vista del sistema, 18
ranura para tarjeta PC
descripción, 16
vista del sistema, 16Índice 111
red
solucionar problemas, 44
red inalámbrica
tipo, 44
rejillas de ventilación
descripción, 18-19, 21
vista del sistema, 18-19, 21
Restaurar sistema, 61
S
SAI, 28
seguro de la pantalla
descripción, 13
vista del sistema, 13
seguro de liberación de la
batería
descripción, 21
vista del sistema, 21
sistema operativo
volver a instalar, 61
volver a instalar Windows
XP, 61
sistemas de alimentación
ininterrumpida
Consulte SAI
sitio web Dell Premier
Support, 9, 11
software
solucionar problemas, 56
volver a instalar software, 59
solución de problemas
bloqueo de programas, 56
caracteres inesperados, 38
Centro de ayuda y soporte
técnico, 11
conflictos, 61
Dell Diagnostics, 49
equipo mojado, 57
equipo que se ha caído o
dañado, 58
escáner, 54
no puede guardar en un disco
flexible, 55
no se puede guardar en el
disquete, 55
problemas con el correo
electrónico, 25
problemas con la red, 44
problemas con la tarjeta
PC, 56
problemas de alimentación
eléctrica, 31
restaurar a estado anterior, 61
Solucionador de problemas de
hardware, 61
un programa no responde, 57
Solucionador de problemas de
hardware, 61
superficie táctil
descripción, 15
personalizar, 36
vista del sistema, 15
supresores de sobrevoltaje, 27
T
Tarjeta PC
solucionar problemas, 56
teclado
caracteres inesperados, 38
descripción, 14
métodos abreviados, 34
numérico, 33
solucionar problemas, 38
sustituir, 76
vista del sistema, 14
U
unidad de CD o DVD
descripción, 17
sustituir, 74
vista del sistema, 17
unidad de disco duro
descripción, 21
devolución a Dell, 68
sustituir, 66
vista del sistema, 21
unidad de disco flexible
solución de problemas, 55
solucionar problemas, 55
unidad de DVD
Consulte unidad de CD o DVD
unidades
Consulte unidad de disco duro
solucionar problemas, 55
V
vistas del sistema
anterior, 13
inferior, 19, 21
lateral derecha, 17
lateral izquierda, 16
posterior, 19
volver a inst, 61112 Índice
112 Índice
volver a instalar
controladores, 59
Windows XP, 61
W
Windows XP
Centro de ayuda y soporte
técnico, 11
Desinstalación del controlador
de dispositivo, 60
impresora, 27
Restaurar sistema, 61
Solucionador de problemas de
hardware, 61
volver a instalar, 61
Dell PowerEdge C8220
Hardware Owner’s
Manual
Regulatory Model: B05B
Regulatory Type: B05B001Notes, Cautions, and Warnings
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of
your computer.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data if
instructions are not followed.
WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal
injury, or death.
____________________
Information in this publication is subject to change without notice.
© 2012 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc.
is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell™, the DELL logo, and PowerEdge™ are trademarks of Dell Inc.
Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this publication to refer to either the entities claiming
the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and
trade names other than its own.
Regulatory Model B05B
Regulatory Type: B05B001
2012 - 08 P/N XXXXX Rev. A00Contents 3
Contents
1 About Your System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Accessing System Features During Startup. . . . . . . 11
Front-Panel Features and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . 12
NIC Indicator Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Power and System Board Indicator Codes . . . . . . . 16
BMC Heartbeat Indicator Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Service Tag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
POST Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Collecting System Event Log for
Investigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
System Event Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Processor Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Memory Ecc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
PCIe Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
IOH Core Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
SB Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
POST Start Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
POST End Event. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
POST Error Code Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
BIOS Recovery Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
ME Fail Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
SEL Generator ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Contents
BMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Other Information You May Need . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2 Using the System Setup Program . . . . . 45
System Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
System Setup Options at Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Using the System Setup Program Navigation
Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
General Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Console Redirection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Enabling and Configuring Console
Redirection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Serial Port Connection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
CPU Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Memory Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
SATA Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
PCI Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
USB Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Security Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Server Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
View System Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Contents 5
Boot Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Exit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Command Line Interfaces for System Setup
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
IPMI Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Power Management Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
3 Installing System Components . . . . . . . 125
Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Recommended Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Inside the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Sled Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Sled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Removing a Sled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Installing a Sled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Sled Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Removing a Sled Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Installing a Sled Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
SD Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Removing a SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Installing a SD Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Sled Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Removing the Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Installing the Front Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Removing the Back Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Installing the Back Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356 Contents
Cooling Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Removing the Cooling Shroud . . . . . . . . . . 135
Installing the Cooling Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Heat Sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Removing a Heat Sink. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Installing a Heat Sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Removing a Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Installing a Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
System Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Memory Module Installation
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Supported DIMM Configuration . . . . . . . . . 144
Removing Memory Modules . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Installing Memory Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Expansion Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Removing the Expansion Card . . . . . . . . . . 148
Installing the Expansion Card. . . . . . . . . . . 149
Expansion Card Riser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Removing the Expansion Card Riser . . . . . . . 150
Installing the Expansion Card Riser. . . . . . . . 151
Mezzanine Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Removing the Infiniband Mezzanine
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Removing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card . . . . . . 155
Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card . . . . . . 157Contents 7
SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Removing the SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Installing the SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Removing the SD Card Reader Support
Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Installing the SD Card Reader Support
Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Internal Hard-Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier. . . . . . . . . . . 162
Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Removing a Hard-Drive From
the Hard-Drive Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Installing a Hard-Drive Into
a Hard-Drive Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Removing the Hard-Drive Tray . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Installing the Hard-Drive Tray . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Interposer Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Removing the Interposer Extender . . . . . . . . . 167
Installing the Interposer Extender . . . . . . . . . 168
Node Power Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Removing the Node Power Distribution
Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Installing the Node Power Distribution
Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
System Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Removing the System Battery . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Installing the System Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . 172
System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Removing the System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Installing the System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . 1758 Contents
4 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Safety First—For You and Your System . . . . . . . . 177
Installation Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Troubleshooting System Startup Failure. . . . . . . . 178
Troubleshooting External Connections . . . . . . . . 178
Troubleshooting the Video Subsystem. . . . . . . . . 178
Troubleshooting a USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Troubleshooting a Serial I/O Device. . . . . . . . . . 179
Troubleshooting a NIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Troubleshooting a Wet Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Troubleshooting a Damaged Enclosure . . . . . . . . 182
Troubleshooting the Enclosure Fan Modules . . . . . 183
Troubleshooting the Power Sled . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Troubleshooting System Memory . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Troubleshooting a Hard-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Troubleshooting a Storage Controller . . . . . . . . . 188
Troubleshooting Expansion Cards . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Troubleshooting Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Troubleshooting the System Board . . . . . . . . . . 191
Troubleshooting the System Battery . . . . . . . . . . 192
IRQ Assignment Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Contents 9
5 Jumpers and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . 195
System Board Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
System Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Interposer Extender Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
SD Card Reader Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Node Power Distribution Board Connectors . . . . . . 201
6 Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Contacting Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20510 ContentsAbout Your System 11
1
About Your System
Accessing System Features During Startup
The following keystrokes provide access to system features during startup.
The SAS/SATA card or PXE hotkey support are available only in the BIOS
boot mode. Hotkey function is not available in the Unified Extensible
Firmware Interface (UEFI) boot mode.
Keystroke Description
Enters the System Setup program. See "System Setup Menu" on
page 45.
Enters the BIOS Boot Manager or the Unified Extensible
Firmware Interface (UEFI) Boot Manager, depending on the
system's boot configuration. See "System Setup Options at Boot"
on page 46.
Starts Preboot eXecution Environment (PXE) boot.
Enters the LSI 2008 SAS Mezzanine Card Configuration Utility.
For more information, see the SAS adapter documentation.
Enters the LSI 2008 SAS Mezzanine Card Configuration Utility.
For more information, see the documentation for your SAS RAID
card.
Enters the utility to configure onboard NIC settings for PXE boot.
For more information, see the documentation for your integrated
NIC.
Enters the onboard SAS and SATA controller’s configuration
utility. 12 About Your System
Front-Panel Features and Indicators
Figure 1-1. Front-Panel Features and Indicators
Item Indicator, Button, or
Connector
Icon Description
1 USB connectors Connects USB devices to the system. The
ports are USB 2.0 compliant.
2 Mezzanine card
expansion slot
Installs an I/O module mezzanine card.
3 Low profile PCIe
expansion slot
Installs a low profile PCI Express x16 card.
4 Release latch Press to release the sled from the
enclosure.
1
2
3
5 4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12About Your System 13
5 Power-on indicator/
power button
The power-on indicator lights when the
sled power is on.
The power-on indicator lights amber
when the system critical event occurs.
The power button turns the compute
sled on.
NOTE: When powering on the sled, the
video monitor can take from several
seconds to over 2 minutes to display an
image, depending on the amount of memory
installed in the system.
NOTE: On ACPI-compliant operating
systems, turning off the sled using the
power button causes the sled to perform a
graceful shutdown before power to the sled
is turned off.
NOTE: To force an ungraceful shutdown,
press and hold the power button for five
seconds.
6 VGA connector Connects a VGA display to the system.
7 Serial connector Connects a serial device to the system.
8 BMC management
port
Dedicated management port.
9 Ethernet connector 2 Embedded 10/100/1000 Mbit NIC
connector.
10 Ethernet connector 1 Embedded 10/100/1000 Mbit NIC
connector.
11 Sled identification
indicator
Lights blue to identify a particular system
and system board.
12 Handle Hold to pull the sled from the enclosure.
Item Indicator, Button, or
Connector
Icon Description
2
114 About Your System
NIC Indicator Codes
Figure 1-2. NIC Indicators
1 link indicator 2 activity indicator
Indicator Status Indicator Code
Link indicator Solid amber Linking at 100 Mbps port speed
Solid green Linking at 1 Gbps port speed (maximum)
Blinking green Linking at 1 Gbps port speed
Network activity is present
• Pre OS POST
• OS without driver
• OS with driver
Blinks at speed relative to packet density
Off Linking at 10 Mbps port speed
Activity
indicator
Solid green No activity
Blinking green Transmit or receive activity
Off IdleAbout Your System 15
Figure 1-3. NIC Indicators (BMC management port)
1 link indicator 2 activity indicator
Indicator Status Indicator Code
Link indicator Blinking amber Linking at 10 Mbps port speed
Blinking green Linking at 100 Mbps port speed (maximum)
Activity
indicator
Solid green No activity
Blinking green Transmit or receive activity
Off Idle16 About Your System
Power and System Board Indicator Codes
The indicators on the front of the sled display status codes during system
startup. For location of the indicators on the front panel, see Figure 1-1.
Table 1-1. Power and System Board Indicator Codes
Indicator Color Status Indicator Code
Power-on
indicator
Green Solid
Sled power is on (S0)
Amber Off
Green Solid BMC critical condition event in power off
mode (S4/S5)
Amber Blinking
Green Blinking BMC critical condition event in power on
mode (S0)
Amber Blinking
System
identification
indicator
Blue Solid The IPMI via Chassis Identify Command On
or ID Button Press ID On is generated.
Blue Blinking Only the IPMI via Chassis Identify Command
Blink On is generated.
Off The IPMI via Chassis Identify Command Off
or ID Button Press ID Off is generated.About Your System 17
BMC Heartbeat Indicator Codes
The system board includes a BMC heartbeat indicator (LED17) for
debugging the Baseboard Management Controller (BMC). The BMC
heartbeat indicator lights green when power is supplied to the sled and blinks
green when the BMC firmware is ready.
Figure 1-4. BMC Heartbeat Indicator
1 system board 2 BMC heartbeat indicator18 About Your System
Service Tag
The following illustration provides location of the Service Tag number on the
C8220 single-wide compute sled.
Figure 1-5. Service Tag Location for C8220 Single-Wide Compute SledAbout Your System 19
POST Error Code
Collecting System Event Log for Investigation
Whenever possible, the system BIOS will output the current boot progress
codes on the video screen. Progress codes are 32-bit quantities plus optional
data. The 32-bit numbers include class, subclass, and operation information.
The class and subclass fields point to the type of hardware that is being
initialized. The operation field represents the specific initialization activity.
Based on the data bit availability to display progress codes, a progress code
can be customized to fit the data width. The higher the data bit, the higher
the granularity of information that can be sent on the progress port. The
progress codes may be reported by the system BIOS or option ROMs.
The Response section in the following table may be divided into 3 types:
• Warning or Not an error – The message is displayed on the screen. An error
record is logged to the SEL. The system will continue booting with a
degraded state. The user may want to replace the erroneous unit.
• Pause – The message is displayed on the screen, an error is logged to the
SEL, and user input is required to continue. The user can take immediate
corrective action or choose to continue booting.
• Halt – The message is displayed on the screen, an error is logged to the
SEL, and the system cannot boot unless the error is resolved. The user
needs to replace the faulty part and restart the system.
Error
Code
Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective Actions
0010h Local Console
Resource
Conflict
Pause Video device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting the
Video Subsystem" on
page 178.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0011h Local Console
Controller Error
Pause Video device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting the
Video Subsystem" on
page 178.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.20 About Your System
0012h Local Console
Output Error
Pause Video device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting the
Video Subsystem" on
page 178.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0013h ISA IO
Controller Error
Pause ISA device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting
Expansion Cards" on
page 189.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0014h ISA IO Resource
Conflict
Pause ISA device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting
Expansion Cards" on
page 189.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0015h ISA IO
Controller Error
Pause ISA device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting
Expansion Cards" on
page 189.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0016h ISA Floppy
Controller Error
Pause Floppy device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting a USB
Device" on page 178.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0017h ISA Floppy
Input Error
Pause Floppy device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting a USB
Device" on page 178.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0018h ISA Floppy
Output Error
Pause Floppy device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting a USB
Device" on page 178.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
Error
Code
Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective ActionsAbout Your System 21
0019h USB Read Error Pause USB port
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting a USB
Device" on page 178.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
001Ah USB Write Error Pause USB port
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting a USB
Device" on page 178.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
001Bh USB Interface
Error
Pause USB port
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting a USB
Device" on page 178.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
001Ch Mouse Interface
Error
Pause Mouse device
initialization
failed
To enable USB device, see
"USB Configuration" on
page 77.
See "Troubleshooting a USB
Device" on page 178.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
001Eh Keyboard Not
Detected
Pause No keyboard
detected
To enable USB device, see
"USB Configuration" on
page 77.
See "Troubleshooting a USB
Device" on page 178.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
001Fh Keyboard
Controller Error
Pause Keyboard
controller
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting a USB
Device" on page 178.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
Error
Code
Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective Actions22 About Your System
0020h Keyboard Stuck
Key Error
Pause Keyboard key
stuck
Disconnect and reconnect the
the keyboard to the compute
sled.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0021h Keyboard
Locked Error
Pause Keyboard
locked
Disconnect and reconnect the
the keyboard to the compute
sled.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0023h Memory
Correctable
Error
Pause Memory
correctable
error detected
Remove AC power to the
system for 10 seconds and
restart the system.
See "Troubleshooting System
Memory" on page 185.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0024h Memory
Uncorrectable
Error
Pause Memory
uncorrectable
error detected
See "Troubleshooting System
Memory" on page 185.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0025h Memory NonSpecific Error
Pause Memory nonspecific error
detected
See "Troubleshooting System
Memory" on page 185.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0026h MP Service Self
Test Error
Pause MP service self
test error
detected
See "Troubleshooting
Processors" on page 190.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
Error
Code
Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective ActionsAbout Your System 23
0027h PCI IO
Controller Error
Pause PCI device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting
Expansion Cards" on
page 189.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0028h PCI IO Read
Error
Pause PCI device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting
Expansion Cards" on
page 189.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
0029h PCI IO Write
Error
Pause PCI device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting
Expansion Cards" on
page 189.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
002Ah Serial Port Not
Detected
Pause Serial device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting a Serial
I/O Device" on page 179.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
002Bh Serial Port
Controller Error
Pause Serial device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting a Serial
I/O Device" on page 179.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
002Ch Serial Port Input
Error
Pause Serial device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting a Serial
I/O Device" on page 179.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
002Dh Serial Port
Output Error
Pause Serial device
initialization
failed
See "Troubleshooting a Serial
I/O Device" on page 179.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
Error
Code
Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective Actions24 About Your System
002Eh Microcode
Update Error
Pause Processor
microcode
update error
Check microcode. A BIOS
update is required.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
002Fh No Microcode
Be Updated
Pause Processor
microcode load
failed
Ensure that your processors
match and conform to the
type described in the
processor technical
specifications outlined in
your system’s Getting Started
Guide.
8012h SATA 0 Device
Not Found
Pause SATA 0 device
not found
Check if the SATA port 0 is
enabled. See "SATA
Configuration" on page 67.
Install a SATA device to SATA
port 0.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
8013h SATA 1 Device
Not Found
Pause SATA 1 device
not found
Check if the SATA port1 is
enabled. See "SATA
Configuration" on page 67.
Install a SATA device to SATA
port 1.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
8014h SATA 2 Device
Not Found
Pause SATA 2 device
not found
Check if the SATA port 2 is
enabled. See "SATA
Configuration" on page 67.
Install a SATA device to SATA
port 2.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
Error
Code
Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective ActionsAbout Your System 25
8015h SATA 3 Device
Not Found
Pause SATA 3 device
not found
Check if the SATA port 3 is
enabled. See "SATA
Configuration" on page 67.
Install a SATA device to SATA
port 3.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
8016h SATA 4 Device
Not Found
Pause SATA 4 device
not found
Check if the SATA port 4 is
enabled. See "SATA
Configuration" on page 67.
Install a SATA device to SATA
port 4.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
8017h SATA 5 Device
Not Found
Pause SATA 5 device
not found
Check if the SATA port 5 is
enabled. See "SATA
Configuration" on page 67.
Install a SATA device to SATA
port 5.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
8018h Sparing Mode is
not be
Configured!!,
Please check
Memory
Configuration!!
Pause Memory
Sparing Mode
Failed
Check if the memory
configuration is set to Sparing
mode. See "Memory
Configuration" on page 65.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
8019h Mirror Mode is
not be
Configured!!,
Please check
Memory
Configuration!!
Pause Memory Mirror
Mode Failed
Check if the memory
configuration is set to Sparing
mode. See "Memory
Configuration" on page 65.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
Error
Code
Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective Actions26 About Your System
8020h Supervisor and
User Passwords
have been
cleared
Pause Supervisor and
User Passwords
have been
cleared
Reset password. See "System
Board Jumper Settings" on
page 195.
If the problem persists, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
8020h CMOS Battery
Error
Pause No CMOS
battery
See "Troubleshooting the
System Battery" on page 192.
Error
Code
Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective ActionsAbout Your System 27
System Event Log
Processor Error
Message: “Processor Sensor, IERR error, Processor 1”
Table 1-2. Processor Error
Byte Field Value Description
1 NetFunLun 10h
2 Platform Event Command 02h
3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS
4 Event Message Format
Version
04h Event Message Format Revision.
04h for this specification
5 Sensor Type 07h Processor
6 Sensor Number 04h Processor Sensor Number
(depends on platform)
7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 =
Event Type Code
8 Event Data1 AXh 00h: IERR 01h: Thermal Trip
02h: FRB1/BIST Failure
03h: FRB2/Hang in POST Failure
04h: FBR3/Processer
Startup/Initialization Failure
0Ah: Processor Automatically
Throttled
9 Event Data2 XXh 00h: Processor1
01h: Processor2
02h: Processor3
04h: Processor4
10 Event Data3 FFh FFh: Not Present28 About Your System
Memory Ecc
Message: “Memory Sensor, Correctable ECC error, SBE warning threshold,
CPU1 DIMM_A1”
Table 1-3. Memory ECC
Byte Field Value Description
1 NetFunLun 10h
2 Platform Event Command 02h
3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS
4 Event Message Format
Version
04h Event Message Format Revision.
04h for this specification
5 Sensor Type 0Ch Memory
6 Sensor Number 60h Memory Sensor Number (depend
on platform)
7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event
Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code
8 Event Data1 AXh 00h: Correctable ECC Error
01h: Uncorrectable ECC Error
03h: Memory Scrub Failed
04h: Memory Device Disabled
08h: SpareAbout Your System 29
9 Event Data2 XXh Bit 7:4
0x00: SBE warning threshold
0x01: SBE critical threshold
0x0F: Unspecified
Bit 3:0
0x00: CPU1 DIMM A1-8 slots
(1~8)
0x01: CPU2 DIMM B1-8 slots
(9~16)
0x02: CPU3 DIMM C1-8 slots
(17~24)
0x03: CPU4 DIMM D1-8 slots
(25~32) And so on…
10 Event Data3 XXh DIMM bit-map locatation of bits
Bit 0=1: DIMM1 error event
Bit 1=1: DIMM2 error event …
Bit7=1: DIMM8 error event
Table 1-3. Memory ECC
Byte Field Value Description30 About Your System
PCIe Error
Message: “Critical Interrupt Sensor, PCI PERR, Device#, Function#,
Bus# ”
Table 1-4. PCIe Error
Byte Field Value Description
1 NetFunLun 10h
2 Platform Event Command 02h
3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS
4 Event Message Format
Version
04h Event Message Format Revision.
04h for this specification
5 Sensor Type 13h Critical Interrupt
6 Sensor Number 73h PCI Sensor ID (depend on
platform)
7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event
Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code
8 Event Data1 AXh 04h: PCI PERR
05h: PCI SERR
07h: Bus Correctable Error
08h: Bus Uncorrectable Error
0Ah: Bus Fatal Error
9 Event Data2 XXh Bit 7:3Device Number
Bit 2:0Function Number
10 Event Data3 XXh Bit 7:0 Bus NumberAbout Your System 31
IOH Core Error
Message: “Critical Interrupt Sensor, Fatal Error, xxxx bit, QPI[0] Error ”
Table 1-5. IOH Core Error
Byte Field Value Description
1 NetFunLun 10h
2 Platform Event Command 02h
3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS
4 Event Message Format
Version
04h Event Message Format Revision.
04h for this specification
5 Sensor Type C0h OEM Defined Interrupt
6 Sensor Number XXh 71h: QPI Sensor ID (depend on
platform)
72h: INT Sensor ID (depend on
platform)
7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 =
Event Type Code
8 Event Data1 AXh 07h: Core
08h: Non-Fatal
0Ah: Fatal
9 Event Data2 XXh Local Error Bit
10 Event Data3 XXh 00h: QPI[0] Error
01h: QPI[1] Error
02h: QPI[2] Error
03h: QPI[3] Error
04h: QPI[0] Protocol Error
05h: QPI[1] Protocol Error
06h: QPI[2] Protocol Error
07h: QPI[3] Protocol Error
23h: Miscellaneous Error
24h: IOH Core Error32 About Your System
SB Error
Message: “Critical Interrupt Sensor, Correctable, MCU Parity Error ”
Table 1-6. SB Error
Byte Field Value Description
1 NetFunLun 10h
2 Platform Event Command 02h
3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS
4 Event Message Format
Version
04h Event Message Format Revision.
04h for this specification
5 Sensor Type 13h Critical Interrupt
6 Sensor Number 77h SB Sensor ID (depend on
platform)
7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event
Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code
8 Event Data1 AXh 07h: Correctable
08h: Uncorrectable
9 Event Data2 XXh Bit 7:5Reserved Local error bit
number (4 ~ 0)
00000b: HT Periodic CRC Error
00001b: HT Protocol Error
00010b: HT Flow-Control Buffer
Overflow
00011b: HT Response Error
00100b: HT Per-Packet CRC Error
00101b: HT Retry Counter Error
00111b: MCU Parity Error
10 Event Data3 FFh FFh: Not PresentAbout Your System 33
POST Start Event
Message: “System Event, POST starts with BIOS xx.xx.xx”
Table 1-7. POST Start Event
Byte Field Value Description
1 NetFunLun 10h
2 Platform Event Command 02h
3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS
4 Event Message Format
Version
04h Event Message Format Revision.
04h for this specification
5 Sensor Type 12h System Event
6 Sensor Number 81h POST Start (depend on platform)
7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event
Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code
8 Event Data1 AXh 01h: OEM System Boot Event
9 Event Data2 XXh 7~4: BIOS 1st Field Version
(0~15)
3~0: BIOS 2nd Field Version
higher 4bits (0~63)
10 Event Data3 XXh 7~6: BIOS 2nd Field Version lower
2bits (0~63)
5~0: BIOS 3rd Field Version
(0~63)34 About Your System
POST End Event
Table 1-8. POST End Event
Byte Field Value Description
1 NetFunLun 10h
2 Platform Event Command 02h
3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS
4 Event Message Format
Version
04h Event Message Format Revision.
04h for this specification
5 Sensor Type 12h System Event
6 Sensor Number 85h POST End (depend on platform)
7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event
Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code
8 Event Data1 AXh 01h: OEM System Boot Event
9 Event Data2 XXh Bit 7 = Boot Type
0b: PC Compatible Boot
(Legacy) 1b: uEFI Boot
Bit 3:0 = Boot Device
0001b: Force PXE Boot
0010b: NIC PXE Boot
0011b: Hard Disk Boot
0100b: RAID HDD Boot
0101b: USB Storage Boot
0111b: CD/DVD ROM Boot
1000b: iSCSI Boot
1001b: uEFI Shell
1010b: ePSA Diagnostic Boot
10 Event Data3 FFh FFh: Not PresentAbout Your System 35
POST Error Code Event
Message: “System Firmware Progress, POST error code: UBLBh.”
Table 1-9. POST Error Code Event
Byte Field Value Description
1 NetFunLun 10h
2 Platform Event Command 02h
3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS
4 Event Message Format
Version
04h Event Message Format Revision.
04h for this specification
5 Sensor Type 0Fh System Firmware Progress
6 Sensor Number 86h POST Error (depend on platform)
7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event
Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code
8 Event Data1 AXh 00: System Firmware Error (POST
Error)
9 Event Data2 XXh Upper Byte
10 Event Data3 XXh Lower Byte36 About Your System
BIOS Recovery Event
Table 1-10. BIOS Recovery Event
Byte Field Value Description
1 NetFunLun 10h
2 Platform Event Command 02h
3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS
4 Event Message Format
Version
04h Event Message Format Revision.
04h for this specification
5 Sensor Type 12h System Event
6 Sensor Number 89h BIOS Recovery fail (depend on
platform)
7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 =
Event Type Code
8 Event Data1 AXh 01h: OEM BIOS recovery Event
9 Event Data2 XXh 01h:Start Recovery
02h:Recovery Success
03h:Load Image Fail
04h:Signed Fail
10 Event Data3 FFh FFh: Not PresentAbout Your System 37
ME Fail Event
SEL Generator ID
Table 1-11. BIOS Recovery Event
Byte Field Value Description
1 NetFunLun 10h
2 Platform Event Command 02h
3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS
4 Event Message Format
Version
04h Event Message Format Revision.
04h for this specification
5 Sensor Type 12h System Event
6 Sensor Number 8Ah ME fail (depend on platform)
7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event
Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code
8 Event Data1 AXh 01h: OEM ME fail Event
9 Event Data2 XXh 01h:ME fail
10 Event Data3 FFh FFh: Not Present
Table 1-12. SEL Generator ID
Generator ID
BIOS 0x0001
BMC 0x0020
ME 0x002C
Windows 2008 0x013738 About Your System
BMC
The following table includes an overview of the system sensors.
In the Offset column:
• SI = Sensor Initialization
• SC = Sensor Capabilities
• AM = Assertion Mask
• DM = Deassertion Mask
• RM = Reading Mask
• TM = Settable/Readable Threshold Mask
Table 1-13. Sensor Summary
Sensor
Number
Sensor Name Sensor Type Event/Reading Type Offset
01h SEL Fullness Event Logging
Disabled (10h)
Sensor-specific
(6Fh)
SI: 67h
SC: 40h
AM: 0035h
DM: 0000h
RM: 0035h
02h P1 Thermal Trip Processor (07h) Sensor-specific
(6Fh)
SI: 01h
SC: 40h
AM: 0002h
DM: 0000h
RM: 0002h
03h P2 Thermal Trip Processor (07h) Sensor-specific
(6Fh)
SI: 01h
SC: 40h
AM: 0002h
DM: 0000h
RM: 0002hAbout Your System 39
Table 1-14. Sensor Summary (continued)
Sensor
Number
Sensor Name Sensor Type Event/Reading Type Offset
04h CPU ERR2 Processor (07h) Sensor-specific
(6Fh)
SI: 01h
SC: 40h
AM: 0001h
DM: 0000h
RM: 0001h
05h 12V Standby Voltage (02h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh
SC: 59h
AM: 7A95h
DM: 7A95h
TM: 3F3Fh
06h 5V Voltage (02h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh
SC: 59h
AM: 7A95h
DM: 7A95h
TM: 3F3Fh
07h 5V Standby Voltage (02h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh
SC: 59h
AM: 7A95h
DM: 7A95h
TM: 3F3Fh
08h 3.3V Voltage (02h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh
SC: 59h
AM: 7A95h
DM: 7A95h
TM: 3F3Fh40 About Your System
Table 1-15. Sensor Summary (continued)
Sensor
Number
Sensor Name Sensor Type Event/Reading Type Offset
09h 3.3V Standby Voltage (02h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh
SC: 59h
AM: 7A95h
DM: 7A95h
TM: 3F3Fh
0Ah Battery low Battery (29h) Sensor-specific
(6Fh)
SI: 67h
SC: 40h
AM: 0001h
DM: 0000h
RM: 0001h
41h MEZZ1 TEMP Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh
SC: 68h
AM: 0A80h
DM: 0A80h
TM: 3838h
41h CPU1 Temp Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh
SC: 68h
AM: 0A80h
DM: 0A80h
TM: 3838h
42h CPU2 Temp Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh
SC: 68h
AM: 0A80h
DM: 0A80h
TM: 3838hAbout Your System 41
Table 1-16. Sensor Summary (continued)
Sensor
Number
Sensor Name Sensor Type Event/Reading Type Offset
43h DIMM ZONE 1
Temp
Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh
SC: 68h
AM: 0A80h
DM: 0A80h
TM: 3838h
44h DIMM ZONE 1
Temp
Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh
SC: 68h
AM: 0A80h
DM: 0A80h
TM: 3838h
45h PCH Temp Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh
SC: 68h
AM: 0A80h
DM: 0A80h
TM: 3838h
60h Memory Memory (0Ch) Sensor-specific
(6Fh)
SI: 01h
SC: 40h
AM: 0023h
DM: 0000h
RM: 0023h
A0h Watchdog Watchdog 2 (23h) Sensor-specific
(6Fh)
SI: 67h
SC: 40h
AM: 000Fh
DM: 0000h
RM: 000Fh42 About Your System
Table 1-17. Sensor Summary (continued)
Sensor
Number
Sensor Name Sensor Type Event/Reading Type Offset
A1h Soft Reset System Boot/
Restart Initiated
(1Dh)
Sensor-specific
(6Fh)
SI: 01h
SC: 40h
AM: 0004h
DM: 0000h
RM: 0004h
A2h AC lost Power Unit (09h) Sensor-specific
(6Fh)
SI: 01h
SC: 40h
AM: 0010h
DM: 0000h
RM: 0010h
A3h Power off Power Unit (09h) Sensor-specific
(6Fh)
SI: 01h
SC: 40h
AM: 0002h
DM: 0000h
RM: 0002hAbout Your System 43
Other Information You May Need
WARNING: See the safety and regulatory information that shipped with your
system. Warranty information may be included within this document or as a
separate document.
• The Getting Started Guide provides an overview of rack installation,
system features, setting up your system, and technical specifications.
• The PowerEdge C8000 Hardware Owner’s Manual for information about
the server enclosure features, troubleshooting, and component
replacement.. This document is available at support.dell.com/manuals.
• The Baseboard Management Controller Guide provides information about
installing and using the systems management utility. See Using the
Baseboard Management Controller Guide at support.dell.com/manuals.
NOTE: Always check for updates on support.dell.com/manuals and read the
updates first because they often supersede information in other documents. 44 About Your SystemUsing the System Setup Program 45
2
Using the System Setup Program
The System Setup program is the BIOS program that enables you to manage
your system hardware and specify BIOS-level options. From the System Setup
program, you can:
• Change the NVRAM settings after you add or remove hardware
• View the system hardware configuration
• Enable or disable integrated devices
• Set performance and power management thresholds
• Manage system security
System Setup Menu
The system employs the latest Insyde® BIOS, which is stored in Flash
memory. The Flash memory supports the Plug and Play specification, and
contains a System Setup program, the Power On Self Test (POST) routine,
and the PCI auto-configuration utility.
This system supports system BIOS shadowing which enables the BIOS to
execute from 64-bit onboard write-protected DRAM.
You can configure items such as:
• Hard-drives, diskette drives, and peripherals
• Password protection
• Power management features
The Setup utility should be executed under the following conditions:
• When changing the system configuration
• When a configuration error is detected by the system and you are
prompted to make changes to the Setup utility
• When redefining the communication ports to prevent any conflicts46 Using the System Setup Program
• When changing the password or making other changes to the security
setup
NOTE: Only items in brackets [ ] can be modified, Items that are not in brackets are
display only.
System Setup Options at Boot
You can initiate Setup by pressing the respective key during the POST:
Using the System Setup Program Navigation Keys
The following table lists the keys found in the legend bar with their
corresponding alternates and functions:
Keystroke Description
Enter the System Setup
Load customized defaults
Load optimal defaults in Setup menu
Save and exit Setup
Keys Function
F1 General Help
or Select Screen
or Select Item
Change Option/Field
Tab Select Field
Esc Exit
Enter Go to Sub Screen
Home Go to Top of Screen
End Go to Bottom of ScreenUsing the System Setup Program 47
General Help
In addition to the Item Specific Help window, the Setup Utility also provides
a General Help screen. This screen can be called up from any menu by
pressing . The General Help screen lists the legend keys with their
corresponding alternates and functions. To exit the help window, press
or .
Console Redirection
The console redirection allows a remote user to diagnose and fix problems on
a server, which has not successfully booted the operating system (OS). The
centerpiece of the console redirection is the BIOS Console. The BIOS
Console is a Flash ROM-resident utility that redirects input and output over
a serial or modem connection.
The BIOS supports console redirection to a serial port. If serial port based
headless server support is provided by the system, the system must provide
support for redirection of all BIOS driven console I/O to the serial port. The
driver for the serial console must be capable of supporting the functionality
documented in the ANSI Terminal Definition.
The console redirection behavior shows a change of string displays that
reduce the data transfer rate in the serial port and cause the absence or an
incomplete POST screen. If you see an abnormal POST screen after you
connect to the console, it is recommended to press to reflash
the screen.
Enabling and Configuring Console Redirection
Console redirection is configured through the System Setup program. There
are three options available to establish console redirection on the system.
• External serial port
• Internal serial connector as Serial Over LAN (SOL)
• BMC SOL48 Using the System Setup Program
Enabling and Configuring Console Redirection Via COM1
To activate console redirection via COM1, you must configure the following
settings:
1 Connect the serial cable to the serial port and host system. See Figure 1-1
for the location of the serial port on the sled.
2 Press immediately after a power-on or reboot to enter System
Setup.
3 In the System Setup screen, select the Server menu and press .
4 In the Server screen, select Remote Access Configuration and press
.
5 In the Remote Access Configuration screen, verify the following settings:
• Remote Access: Enabled
• Serial port number: COM1
• Serial Port Mode: 115200 8,n,1
• Flow Control: None
• Redirection After BIOS POST: Always
• Terminal Type: ANSI
See "Remote Access Configuration" on page 83 for details. Make sure the
last four options syncs with the host and client.
6 Press to return to the System Setup screen. Press again,
and a message prompts you to save the changes.
Enabling and Configuring Console Redirection Via COM2 SOL
To activate console redirection via COM2 SOL, you must configure the
following settings:
1 Connect the serial cable to the serial port and host system. See Figure 1-1
for the location of the serial port on the sled.
2 Press immediately after a power-on or reboot to enter System
Setup.
3 In the System Setup screen, select the Server menu and press .
4 In the Server screen, select Remote Access Configuration and press
.Using the System Setup Program 49
5 In the Remote Access Configuration screen, verify the following settings:
• Remote Access: Enabled
• Serial port number: COM2 as SOL
• Serial Port Mode: 115200 8,n,1
• Flow Control: None
• Redirection After BIOS POST: Always
• Terminal Type: ANSI
See "Remote Access Configuration" on page 83 for details. Make sure the
host and client are on the same network.
6 Press to return to the System Setup screen. Press again,
and a message prompts you to save the changes.
Enabling and Configuring Console Redirection Via BMC SOL
When using the BMC management port, you have two options for
connecting and managing servers: Dedicated-NIC mode and Shared-NIC
mode. The following procedures show the setup option of the BMC
management port through a Dedicated-NIC or Shared-NIC.
To activate console redirection via a dedicated BMC management port, you
must configure the following settings:
1 Connect the network cable to the BMC management port. See Figure 1-1
for the location of the BMC management port on the sled.
2 Press immediately after a power-on or reboot to enter System
Setup.
3 In the System Setup screen, select the Server menu and press .
4 In the Server screen, select Remote Access Configuration and press
.
5 In the Remote Access Configuration screen, verify the following settings:
• Remote Access: Enabled
• Serial port number: COM2 as SOL
• Serial Port Mode: 115200 8,n,1
• Flow Control: None
• Redirection After BIOS POST: Always50 Using the System Setup Program
• Terminal Type: ANSI
See "Remote Access Configuration" on page 83 for details. Make sure the
last four options syncs with the host and client.
6 In the Server screen, select BMC LAN Configuration and press .
7 In the BMC LAN Configuration screen, verify the following settings:
• BMC LAN Port Configuration: Dedicated-NIC
• BMC NIC IP Source: DHCP or Static (Use DHCP if your network
servers are using automatic assignment of IP addresses)
• IP Address: 192.168.001.003
• Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.000
• Gateway Address: 000.000.000.000
See "Set BMC LAN Configuration" on page 82 for details. Make sure the
host and client are on the same network
8 Press to return to the System Setup screen. Press again,
and a message prompts you to save the changes.
To activate console redirection via a shared BMC management port, you must
configure the following settings:
1 Connect the network cable to the Ethernet connector 1. See Figure 1-1 for
the location of the Ethernet connector 1 on the sled.
2 Press immediately after a power-on or reboot to enter System
Setup.
3 In the System Setup screen, select the Server menu and press .
4 In the Server screen, select Remote Access Configuration and press
.
5 In the Remote Access Configuration screen, verify the following settings:
• Remote Access: Enabled
• Serial port number: COM2
• Serial Port Mode: 115200 8,n,1
• Flow Control: None
• Redirection After BIOS POST: Always
• Terminal Type: ANSIUsing the System Setup Program 51
See "Remote Access Configuration" on page 83 for details. Make sure the
last four options syncs with the host and client.
6 In the Server screen, select BMC LAN Configuration and press .
7 In the BMC LAN Configuration screen, verify the following settings:
• BMC LAN Port Configuration: Shared-NIC
• BMC NIC IP Source: DHCP or Static (Use DHCP if your network
servers are using automatic assignment of IP addresses)
• IP Address: 192.168.001.003
• Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.000
• Gateway Address: 000.000.000.000
See "Set BMC LAN Configuration" on page 82 for details. Make sure the
host and client are on the same network
8 Press to return to the System Setup screen. Press again,
and a message prompts you to save the changes.
Serial Port Connection List
Signal Type Setup Option OS
Setting
Output
Remote
Access
Serial Port
Number
Serial Port
Address
Serial Console
Redirection
Enabled COM1 3F8h/2F8h ttyS0 Serial Port
Enabled COM1 2F8h/3F8h ttyS1
BMC Serial
Over LAN
Enabled COM2 as SOL 3F8h/2F8h ttyS1 Management
Port
Enabled COM2 as SOL 2F8h/3F8h ttyS052 Using the System Setup Program
Main Menu
The main menu displays information about your system boards and BIOS.
Main Screen
NOTE: Press to enter the BIOS debug mode and reset the BIOS to default
settings.
NOTE: The options for the System Setup program change based on the system
configuration.
NOTE: The System Setup program defaults are listed under their respective
options in the following sections, where applicable. Using the System Setup Program 53
System Settings
Option Description
System Date Scroll to this item to adjust the date. Use ,
or to select a field. Use [+] or
[-] to configure system date.
System Time Scroll to this item to adjust the time. Use ,
or to select a field. Use [+] or
[-] to configure system time.
Product Name Displays the system product name.
BIOS Version Displays the BIOS version.
NOTE: Check this version number when updating BIOS from
the manufacturer.
BIOS Build Date Displays the date the BIOS was created.
Service Tag Displays the system service tag number. The service tag
field should match what is physically on the service tag of
the system.
Asset Tag Displays the system asset tag number.
MRC Version Displays the Memory Reference Code (MRC) firmware
version.
ME Version Displays the Manageability Engine (ME) firmware version.
BMC Version Displays the Baseboard Management Controller (BMC)
firmware version.
ePPID Displays the information from Electronic Piece Part
Identification (ePPID) label.
NIC1 MAC Address Displays the Media Access Control (MAC) address for the
NIC1 connector.
NIC2 MAC Address Displays the MAC address for the NIC2 connector.
BMC NIC MAC
Address
Displays the MAC address of the BMC management port.
Processor Type Displays the processor type.
Processor Speed Displays the maximum speed of the processor.
Processor Core Displays the processor core.
System Memory Size Displays total memory size installed on the system board.54 Using the System Setup Program
System Memory Speed Displays the maximum speed of your system memory.
System Memory Voltage Displays the maximum voltage of your system memory.
Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 55
Advanced Menu
The advanced menu displays a table of items that defines advanced
information about your system. Scroll to this item and press to view
the following screen.
CAUTION: Making incorrect settings to items on these pages may cause the
system to malfunction. Unless you have experience adjusting these items, it is
recommended that you leave these settings at the default values. If making
settings to items on these pages causes your system to malfunction or prevents the
system from booting, open BIOS and choose "Load Optimal Defaults" in the Exit
menu to boot up normally.56 Using the System Setup Program
Power Management
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
Power Management
Option Description
Power Management
(OS Control default)
Select a system power management mode.
• Maximum Performance: Sets the system power
management to maximum performance.
• OS Control: Allows the operating system to control the
power management.
• Node Manager: Enables Node Manager to moderate
power consumption and performance of the processors in
the compute sled. Node manager delivers power reporting
and power capping functionality for individual compute
sleds. Using the System Setup Program 57
CPU Power Capping
(P-State 0 default)
Select a processor performance state (P-state). Options are
[P-State 0], [P-State 1], [P-State 2], [P-State 3] and
[P-state 4].
NOTE: This option is enabled when Power Management is
set to OS Control mode.
Chassis Power
Management
Press to set the different power management
options that must be provided to support throttling and
capping.
Energy Efficient Policy
(Max Performance
default)
Select a power policy option.
• Max Performance: Sets the processors at the highest
performance state at all times.
• Balanced: Offers full performance and saves power by
reducing system power consumption during periods of
inactivity.
• Low Power: Use different processor power saving modes
(C-states) to reduce system power consumption.
NOTE: This option works when the OS does not support
power management control of processor.
Option Description58 Using the System Setup Program
Chassis Power Management
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
Chassis Power Management
Option Description
Chassis PSU
Configuration
Press to configure the chassis power supply.
This option provides management and monitoring of the
PSUs and allows you to set the minimum PSU
requirements for the server.
Power Capping Press to set PSU power and server loading
limited in selected watts.
Emergency Throttling Press to set sled level policy when emergency
throttling event is triggered. Using the System Setup Program 59
Chassis PSU Configuration
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
Chassis PSU Configuration
Option Description
Required Power Supplies
(1 default)
Select the number of power supplies to provide load-shared
power to run the sleds in the enclosure. Options are [1],
[2], [3], and [4].
Redundant Power
Supplies (1 default)
Select the number of power supplies to provide power
redundancy to the enclosure. Options are [0], [1], and [2].60 Using the System Setup Program
Power Capping
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
Power Capping
Option Description
Chassis Level Capping
(Disabled default)
Enables or disables chassis level capping.
Sled Power Capping
(0 default)
Specify the maximum amount of power to be consumed by
the sled. Settings range from 0 or 100 to 1000 W. Using the System Setup Program 61
Emergency Throttling
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
Emergency Throttling
Option Description
Sled Level Policy
(Chassis Level default)
Select a sled level policy when an emergency throttle event
is triggered.
• Chassis Level: Overrides the chassis level policy for a
specific server.
• Throttling: Allows compute sled throttling when an
emergency throttle event is triggered.
• Power Off: Turns off the compute sled when an
emergency throttle event is triggered.
• Do Nothing: The compute sled will do nothing when an
emergency throttle event is triggered. 62 Using the System Setup Program
CPU Configuration
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
CPU Configuration
Chassis Level Policy
(Throttling default)
Select a chassis level policy when an emergency throttle
event is triggered. This option can be configured when the
Sled Level Policy is set as Chassis Level.
• Throttling: Allows chassis sled throttling when an
emergency throttle event is triggered.
• Power Off: The server power turns off when an emergency
throttle event is triggered.
Option Description
Active Processor Cores
(All Cores default)
Allows you to control the number of enabled core in each
processor. Options are [1], [2], [4], and [All Cores].
Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 63
Frequency Ratio
(Auto default)
Sets the frequency multipliers as maximum level.
Max CPUID Value
Limit
(Disabled default)
Some OS, which is (NT4), fails if the value returned in
EAX is >3 when CPUID instruction is executed with
EAX=0.
When enabled, this setting limits CPUID function to 3.
When disabled, this setting disables the 3 or less.
Virtualization
Technology
(Disabled default)
Allows you to set the Virtualization Technology in
applicable CPUs.
Enabled (applicable CPUs)/Disabled (unusable in any
OS).
QPI Frequency
(Auto default)
Select the link speed. Options are [6.4GTs], [7.2GTs], and
[8.0GTs].
Turbo Mode
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables processor Turbo mode (Requires
enabling the EMTTM.).
C-States
(Enabled default)
When enabled, the processor(s) can operate in all available
power C states.
When disabled, the user power C states are not available
for the processor.
C1E State
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the Enhanced Halt (C1E) state.
NOTE: Disable this option at your own risk. When you disable
this option, pop up message appears on the screen and
warning appears in the System Setup Help.
C6 State
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the processor C6 state.
NOTE: Disable this option at your own risk. When you disable
this option, pop up message appears on the screen and
warning appears in the System Setup Help.
C7 State
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the processor C7 state.
NOTE: Disable this option at your own risk. When you disable
this option, pop up message appears on the screen and
warning appears in the System Setup Help.
XD Bit Capability
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the processor’s Execute Disable (XD)
Memory Protection Technology feature.
Option Description64 Using the System Setup Program
Prefetch Configuration
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
Prefetch Configuration
Direct Cache Access
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the direct cache access.
Hyper-Threading
Technology
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the Hyper-Threading technology.
Prefetch Configuration Press to configure the prefetch settings.
Option Description
Adjacent Cache Line
Prefetch
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables system optimization for sequential
memory access.
Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 65
Memory Configuration
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
Memory Configuration
Hardware Prefetcher
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the speculative unit within the
processor(s).
DCU Streamer
Prefetcher
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables Data Cache Unit (DCU) streamer
prefetcher.
DCU IP Prefetcher
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables DCU IP Prefetcher.
Option Description
Memory Frequency
(Auto default)
Select an operating memory frequency. Options are
[Auto], [800], [1066], [1333], and [1600].
Option Description66 Using the System Setup Program
Memory Turbo Mode
(Disabled default)
Enables or disables the memory turbo mode.
Memory Throttling Mode
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the memory to run in closed-loop
thermal throttling mode.
Memory Operating Mode
(Optimizer Mode default)
Select the type of memory operation if a valid memory
configuration is installed.
• Optimizer Mode: The two memory controllers run in
parallel 64-bit mode for improved memory
performance.
• Spare Mode: Enables memory sparing
• Mirror Mode: Enables memory mirroring
• Advanced ECC Mode: Controllers are joined in
128-bit mode running multi-bit advanced ECC.
Demand Scrubbing
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables DRAM scrubbing.
DRAM scrubbing is the ability to write corrected data
back to the memory once a correctable error is detected
on read transaction.
Patrol Scrubbing
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables patrol scrubbing.
Patrol scrubbing proactively searches the system
memory, repairing correctable errors.
Memory Operating Voltage
(Auto default)
If set to Auto, the system sets the voltage to an optimal
value based on the capacity of the installed memory
modules. You can also set the voltage of the memory
module to a higher value (1.5 V) provided that the
modules support multiple voltages. Options are [Auto],
[1.5 volts], and [1.35 volts].
NOTE: BIOS will auto restrict selection if DIMM is not
supporting low voltage.
NUMA Support
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables Non-Uniform Memory Access
(NUMA) support to improve processor performance.
NOTE: This option is available for NUMA systems that
allow memory interleaving across all processor nodes.
Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 67
SATA Configuration
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.68 Using the System Setup Program
SATA Configuration
Option Description
Embedded SATA
Controller
(AHCI default)
Select an operation mode for the onboard SATA controller.
• Off: Disables the SATA controller. This token applies to
the first onboard SATA controller.
• IDE: Enables the SATA controller to run in IDE mode.
Sets the device class code as IDE and uses PCI IRQ
(referred as Native mode). This token applies to the first
onboard SATA controller.
• AHCI: Enables the SATA controller to run in AHCI
mode. Sets the device class code as SATA and sets up the
AHCI BARs and registers. This token applies to the first
onboard SATA controller.
• RAID: Enables the SATA controller to run in RAID mode.
Sets the device class code as RAID and executes the RAID
Option ROM. This token applies to the first onboard
SATA controller. This provides access to the RAID setup
utility during system bootup.
Embedded SATA Link
Rate (Auto default)
Select a SATA link speed.
• Auto: Sets the SATA link speed at maximum 6.0 Gbps.
• 1.5 Gbps: Sets the SATA link speed to 1.5 Gbps. For
power consumption.
• 3.0 Gbps: Sets the SATA link speed to 3.0 Gbps.
SATA Port 0
(Auto default)
When set to off, turns off the 1st Serial ATA drive
controller.
When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 1st Serial
ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not
present).
SATA Port 1
(Auto default)
When set to off, turns off the 2nd Serial ATA drive
controller.
When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 2nd Serial
ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not
present).Using the System Setup Program 69
SATA Port 2
(Auto default)
When set to off, turns off the 3rd Serial ATA drive
controller.
When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 3rd Serial
ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not
present).
SATA Port 3
(Auto default)
When set to off, turns off the 4th Serial ATA drive
controller.
When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 4th Serial
ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not
present).
SATA Port 4
(Auto default)
When set to off, turns off the 5th Serial ATA drive
controller.
When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 5th Serial
ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not
present).
SATA Port 5
(Auto default)
When set to off, turns off the 6th Serial ATA drive
controller.
When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 5th Serial
ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not
present).
Power Saving Features
(Auto default)
Enables or disables the feature that allows SATA harddrives to initiate link power management transitions.
HDD Security Erase
(Disabled default)
Enables or disables the hard-drive security freeze lock
feature.
Option Description70 Using the System Setup Program
PCI Configuration
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
PCI Configuration
Option Description
Embedded Network Devices Press to configure available network drives.
NIC Enumeration
(Onboard default)
Select a LAN boot ROM option.
• Onboard: Uses the PXE boot on NICs to boot the
system.
• Add-in: Use the PXE boot on add-in network adapters
to boot the system.
Active State Power
Management Configuration
Press to configure power management for
PCI Express devices. Using the System Setup Program 71
PCI Slot Configuration Press to configure PCI Express devices.
NOTE: When you install a MIC GPGPU card in the C8220X
sled, BIOS automatically enables the PCI memory 64-bit
decode option.
PCIe Generation
(Gen3 default)
Select a PCI signaling rate.
• Gen1: 2.5 GT/s
• Gen2: 5 GT/s
• Gen3: 8 GT/s
VT for Direct I/O
(Disabled default)
Enables or disables Intel hardware virtualization
support.
SR-IOV Global Enable
(Disabled default)
Enables or disables BIOS configuration of Single Root
I/O Virtualization (SR-IOV) devices.
I/OAT DMA Engine
(Disabled default)
If set to Enabled, the I/O Acceleration Technology
(I/OAT) feature is enabled for network controllers that
support this technology.
Maximum Payload Size
(Auto default)
Sets the maximum payload size of the PCI Express
controller. Options are Auto, 128 bytes, and 256 bytes.
Embedded Video Controller
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the onboard video controller.
NOTE: This option should always be set to Enabled. The
remote KVM function cannot function if set to disabled.
Video Enumeration
(Onboard default)
Select video controller enumeration type.
• Onboard - The onboard video controller is used for
boot-time messages.
• Add-in - The first add-in video controller is used for
boot-time messages. Depending on the BIOS search
order and system slot layout.
WHEA Support
(Disabled default)
Enables or disables the Windows Hardware Error
Architecture (WHEA) feature.
Reboot on WOL (ROW)
(Disabled default)
Enables or disables reboot on wake-on-LAN feature.
Reboot On WOL targets network controllers when the
network controller receives a magic packet. This option
displays when the network chip supports Reboot on
WOL feature.
Option Description72 Using the System Setup Program
Embedded Network Devices
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.Using the System Setup Program 73
Embedded Network Devices
iSCSI Remote Boot
Option Description
Embedded NIC1
(Enabled with PXE
default)
Enables or disables the onboard NIC1 controller.
• Enabled with PXE: Allows you to enable the system’s
primary embedded NIC (full function), including its PXE
boot-ROM.
• Enabled without PXE: Allows you to enable the system’s
primary embedded NIC only. The NIC associated PXE or
RPL boot-ROM are disabled in this option.
• iSCSI Remote Boot: Allows you to configure the iSCSI
target and initiator variables to support iSCSI Remote
Boot. Changes take effect after the system reboots.
• Disabled: Allows you to disable the system’s primary
embedded NIC.
Embedded NIC2
(Enabled without PXE
default)
Enables or disables the onboard NIC2 controller.
• Enabled with PXE: Allows you to enable the system’s
secondary embedded NIC (full function), including its
PXE boot-ROM.
• Enabled without PXE: Allows you to enable the system’s
secondary embedded NIC only. The NIC associated PXE
or RPL boot-ROM are disabled in this option.
• iSCSI Remote Boot: Allows you to configure the iSCSI
target and initiator variables to support iSCSI Remote
Boot. Changes take effect after the system reboots.
• Disabled: Allows you to disable the system’s primary
embedded NIC.
Option Description
iSCSI Initiator Name Displays the worldwide unique name of the initiator. Only
iqn format is accepted.
Enable DHCP
(Disabled default)
Enables or disables the DHCP network settings.
Initiator IP Address Sets the initiator’s static IP address.
Initiator Subnet Mask Sets the subnet mask for the static IP address.74 Using the System Setup Program
Gateway Sets the IP gateway for the static IP address.
Target IP Sets the name for the target IP.
Target IP Address Sets the target’s IP address.
Target Port Sets the target port.
Boot LUN Sets the hexadecimal representation of LU number.
CHAP Type
(None default)
Select CHAP type. Options are [None], [One Way
CHAP], and [Mutual CHAP].
Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 75
Active State Power Management Configuration
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
Active State Power Management Configuration
Option Description
PCIe Slot ASPM
(Disabled default)
Select an active state power management (ASPM)
protocol for the PCI Express slot. Options are
[Disabled], [L0], [L1], [L0 & L1], [L0s Downstream],
and [L0s Downstream + L1].
Onboard LAN ASPM
(Disabled default)
Select an ASPM protocol for the onboard network
controller. Options are [Disabled], [L0], [L1], [L0 &
L1], [L0s Downstream], and [L0s Downstream + L1].
Mezzanine Slot ASPM
(Disabled default)
Select an ASPM protocol for the mezzanine slot.
NB-SB Link ASPM
(Disabled default)
Select an ASPM protocol for the northbridge and
southbridge chipsets. 76 Using the System Setup Program
PCI Slot Configuration
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
PCI Slot Configuration
Option Description
PCIe Slot1
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the PCIe slot1. Options are
[Disabled], [Enabled], [Enabled without OPROM].
NOTE: When you install a MIC GPGPU card in the C8220X
sled, BIOS automatically enables the PCI memory 64-bit
decode option. You can set the GPGPU information using
IPMI commands. See Table 2-18 for more information.Using the System Setup Program 77
USB Configuration
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
USB Configuration
Option Description
Embedded USB
Controller
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the onboard USB controller at system
startup.
USB Port with BMC
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables internal USB port with BMC support.
External USB Port1
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the external USB port1.
External USB Port2
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables the external USB port2.
Internal USB Connector
(Disabled default)
Enables or disables the internal USB port. 78 Using the System Setup Program
Security Menu
The security menu enables you to set the security parameters. Scroll to this
item and press to view the following screen.
Security Settings
Option Description
Supervisor Password Indicates whether a supervisor password has been set. If
the password has been installed, Installed displays. If not,
Not Installed displays.
User Password Indicates whether a supervisor password has been set. If
the password has been installed, Installed displays. If not,
Not Installed displays.Using the System Setup Program 79
Change Supervisor You can install a Supervisor password, and if you install a
supervisor password, you can then install a user password.
A user password does not provide access to many of the
features in the Setup utility. Note, the Change User
Password option only appears after a Supervisor password
has been set.
Select this option and press to access the sub
menu, a dialog box appears which lets you enter a
password. You can enter no more than six letters or
numbers. Press after you have typed in the
password. A second dialog box asks you to retype the
password for confirmation. Press after you have
retyped it correctly. If the password confirmation is
incorrect, an error message appears. The password is stored
in NVRAM after ezPORT completes. The password is
required at boot time, or when the user enters the Setup
utility.
Change User Password Installs or changes the User password.
Option Description80 Using the System Setup Program
Server Menu
The server menu enables you to configure compute sled parameters. Scroll to
this item and press to view the following screen.
Server Settings
Option Description
Status of BMC Displays BMC status.
IPMI Specification Version Displays the Intelligent Platform Management
Interface (IPMI) firmware version number.
BMC Firmware Version Displays the BMC firmware version number.
NIC1 MAC Address Displays the MAC address for the NIC1 connector.
NIC2 MAC Address Displays the MAC address for the NIC2 connector.Using the System Setup Program 81
ACPI SPMI Table
(Enabled default)
When enabled, BIOS enables Advanced Configuration
and Power Interface (ACPI) Service Processor
Management Interface (SPMI) table for IPMI driver
installation.
When disabled, BIOS disables the ACPI SPMI table
for BMC ROM update.
Set BMC LAN
Configuration
Press to set the BMC network.
Remote Access
Configuration
Press to configure serial port settings related
to console redirection.
Restore on AC Power Loss
(Power On default)
Select the power state when the AC power is back.
• Power Off: System remains off until the power button
is pressed.
• Last State: System reverts to the last power state
before power loss.
• Power On: System switches back on after the AC
power loss.
Power Staggering AC
Recovery
(Immediate default)
Set the time period for the system to turn back on from
an AC power loss once power is resumed.
• Immediate: Power On (No Delay)
• Random: Auto
• User Defined: User defined delay time.
Power Button
(Enabled default)
When enabled, the power button can turn the system's
power off.
When disabled, the power button can only turn on
system power.
View System Event Log Press to view the BMC system event log.
Event Logging
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables BIOS to log system events.
NMI on Error
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables BIOS to generate an Non-masked
Interrupt (NMI) when an uncorrectable PCI Express
error occurs.
Option Description82 Using the System Setup Program
Set BMC LAN Configuration
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
Set BMC LAN Configuration
Option Description
Channel Number Displays the channel number used for BMC LAN.
Channel Number Status Displays the BMC channel number status.
BMC LAN Port
Configuration
(Shared-NIC default)
Set the BMC management port to dedicated or shared
NIC port. Options are [Dedicated NIC] and [Shared NIC].
BMC NIC IP Source
(DHCP default)
Set BMC to obtain its IP address using DHCP or establish
a static IP address.
IP Address Sets the static IP address.
Subnet Mask Sets the subnet mask for the static IP address. Using the System Setup Program 83
Remote Access Configuration
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
Remote Access Configuration
Gateway Address Sets the IP gateway for the static IP address.
IPv6 Mode
(Disabled default)
Enables or disables the IPv6 internet protocol support.
If set to enabled, configure the IPv6 prefix, IP and gateway
addresses.
Option Description
Remote Access
(Enabled default)
Enables or disables serial console redirection.
Option Description84 Using the System Setup Program
Serial port number
(COM1 default)
Select a serial port for console redirection.
• COM1: Enables console redirection via COM1. See
token D7h.
• COM2 as SOL: Enables console redirection via
COM2.
Serial Port Address
(3F8h/2F8h default)
Specifies the base I/O port address of the serial port.
• 3F8h/2F8h: Sets the front serial port address as 0x3F8
and internal serial port address as 0x2F8.
• COM2 as SOL: Sets the front serial port address as
0x2F8 and internal serial port address as 0x3F8.
Serial Port Mode
(115200 8,n,1 as default)
Select a baud rate for the serial port. Options are
[115200 8,n,1], [57600 8,n,1], [38400 8,n,1],
[192008,n,1], and [9600 8,n,1].
Flow Control
(None default)
Select a flow control for console redirection. Options
are [None] and [Software].
Redirection After BIOS
POST (Always default)
If set to Always, the console redirection is always active.
When Disabled, console redirection is turned off after
POST.
Terminal Type
(ANSI default)
Select a target terminal type for console redirection.
Options are [ANSI], [VT100], and [VT-UTF8].
VT-UTF8 Combo Key
Support (Enabled default)
Enables or disables the VT-UTF8 Combination Key
support for ANSI/VT100 terminals.
Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 85
View System Log
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
View System Log
Option Description
View BMC SEL Event
Log
View all events in the BMC system event log.
Clear BMC SEL Event
Log
Deletes all records in the BMC system event log. 86 Using the System Setup Program
Boot Menu
The boot menu enables you to set POST boot parameters. Scroll to this item
and press to view the following screen.
Boot Settings
Option Description
Quiet Boot
(Enabled default)
Enable this item to display the splash or summary
screen, rather than the detail of the POST flow. When
disabled, normal POST messages appear.
Pause on Errors
(Disabled default)
Enables or disables BIOS to prompt you to press
or keys on errors during POST.
Force PXE Boot only
(Disabled default)
Enables or disables PXE to be the only boot device.Using the System Setup Program 87
Boot Mode (BIOS default) Select a system boot mode.
• BIOS: The standard BIOS-level boot interface
• UEFI: An enhanced 64-bit boot interface based on
Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI)
specifications that overlays the system BIOS.
Boot Type Order Press to set the preferred boot sequence from
the available devices.
Legacy Boot Device Press to set the preferred boot sequence from
the available legacy USB devices.
Option Description88 Using the System Setup Program
Exit Menu
Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.
Exit Options
Option Description
Save Changes and Exit Highlight this item and press to save any
changes that you have made in the Setup utility and
exit the Setup utility. When the Save Changes and Exit
dialog box appears, press to save the changes and
exit, or press to return to the setup main menu.
Discard Changes and Exit Highlight this item and press to discard any
changes that you have made in the Setup utility and
exit the Setup utility. When the Discard Changes and
Exit dialog box appears, press to discard changes
and exit, or press to return to the setup main
menu.Using the System Setup Program 89
Save Changes Select this item and press to save changes
you have made without leaving the setup utility.
Discard Changes Select this item and press to discard any
changes you have made without leaving the setup
utility.
Load Optimal Defaults If you highlight this item and press , a dialog
box asks if you want to install optimal settings for all
the items in the Setup utility. Press the key to
indicate Yes, and then press to install the
optimal settings.
The optimal settings default values are quite
demanding and your system might not function
properly if you are using slower memory chips or other
kinds of low-performance components.
Load Customized Defaults Load 2nd default values from NVRAM for all the setup
parameters.
Save Customized Defaults Save all the setup parameters to NVRAM as 2nd
default values.
Option Description90 Using the System Setup Program
Command Line Interfaces for System Setup
Options
The options in the System Setup menu allows you to control the System
Configuration Utility (syscfg). This utility is included in the Dell
OpenManage Deployment Toolkit (DTK).
See the Deployment Toolkit Version 1.3 User's Guide for additional
information about installing and using the DTK utilities, and the
Deployment Toolkit Version 1.3 Command Line Interface Reference Guide
for a complete list of all valid options, suboptions, and arguments for using
the BMCCFG.EXE to configure and manage your BMC.
You can use the system configuration utility for the following conditions:
• To change the System Setup option by D4 token:
./syscfg –t=D4_token_id
(Example: ./syscfg -t=0x002D to enable NIC1 Option ROM)
• To check token activity status:
./syscfg --istokenactive=D4_token_id
(Example: ./syscfg --istokenactive=0x002D to check the token active
status of NIC1 Option ROM)
• To directly change the System Setup option through BMC memory:
./ipmitool raw
(Example: ./ipmitool raw 0xc 1 1 3 10 106 42 120 to set IP address of BMC
management port as 10.106.42.120)
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table
Token Setup Option Description
002D Embedded NIC1 Enables the onboard NIC1 controller (full-function),
including its PXE boot-ROM.
002E Embedded NIC1 Disables the onboard NIC1 controller.
0051 N/A For the next system boot, set the IPL priority to: USB
storage, hard disk, CD/DVD-ROM, RAID, Network (if
the devices are available).Using the System Setup Program 91
0052 N/A For the next system boot, set the IPL priority to: hard
disk then option ROMs (if the devices are available).
0053 N/A For the next system boot, set the IPL priority to:
Network, hard disk, RAID,USB storage, CD/DVDROM (if the devices are available).
0054 N/A For the next system boot, set the IPL priority to:
CD/DVD-ROM, USB Storage, hard disk, RAID,
Network (if the devices are available).
005C N/A Enables BIOS remote update on the next reboot, to
search for an operating-system initiated BIOS update
image.
005D N/A Disables BIOS remote update on the next reboot, to
search for an operating-system initiated BIOS update
image.
006E Embedded NIC1 Enables the onboard NIC1 controller, but disables the
NIC associated PXE or RPL boot-ROM.
0087 Video
Enumeration
Allows BIOS to use the onboard video controller for
boot-time messages.
0088 Video
Enumeration
Allows BIOS to use the first add-in video controller for
boot-time messages. Depending on the BIOS search
order and system slot layout.
008C Embedded USB
Controller
Allows BIOS to enable the built-in USB controller at
system startup.
008D Embedded USB
Controller
Allows BIOS to enable the built-in USB controller at
system startup.
00A1 Restore on AC
Power Loss
System remains off until the power button is pressed.
00A2 Restore on AC
Power Loss
System reverts to the last power state before power
loss.
00A3 Restore on AC
Power Loss
System switches back on after the AC power loss.
00BA Embedded NIC2 Disables the onboard NIC2 controller.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option Description92 Using the System Setup Program
00BB Embedded NIC2 Enables the onboard NIC2 controller, but disables the
NIC associated PXE or RPL boot-ROM.
00BC Embedded NIC2 Enables the onboard NIC2 controller (full-function),
including its PXE boot-ROM.
00BF Remote Access Disables serial console redirection.
00C0 Serial port
number
Enables console redirection via COM1. See token
D7h.
00C1 Power Button Enables the power button to turn off the system
power. (default)
00C2 Power Button Disables the power button to turn off the system
power.
00D1 Hyper-Threading
Technology
Enables Hyper-Threading Technology.
00D2 Hyper-Threading
Technology
Disables Hyper-Threading Technology.
00D7 Serial port
number
Enables console redirection via COM2.
00D8 Load Optimal
Defaults
Install optimal default settings for all the items in the
Setup utility on the next boot.
00FE Legacy USB
Support
Disables the system to provide legacy USB support for
the operating system.
00FF Legacy USB
Support
Enables the system to provide legacy USB support for
the operating system.
0117 SATA Port0 Turns off the 1st Serial ATA drive controller.
0118 SATA Port0 Enables BIOS support for the 1st Serial ATA drive
controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if
not present).
0119 SATA Port1 Turns off the 2nd Serial ATA drive controller.
011A SATA Port1 Enables BIOS support for the 2nd Serial ATA drive
controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if
not present).
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 93
011B SATA Port2 Turns off the 3rd Serial ATA drive controller.
011C SATA Port2 Enables BIOS support for the 3rd Serial ATA drive
controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if
not present).
011D SATA Port3 Turns off the 4th Serial ATA drive controller.
011E SATA Port3 Enables BIOS support for the 4th Serial ATA drive
controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if
not present).
011F SATA Port4 Turns off the 5th Serial ATA drive controller.
0120 SATA Port4 Enables BIOS support for the 5th Serial ATA drive
controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if
not present).
0121 SATA Port5 Turns off the 6th Serial ATA drive controller.
0122 SATA Port5 Enables BIOS support for the 6th Serial ATA drive
controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if
not present).
0135 Embedded SATA
Controller
Disables the SATA controller. This token applies to
the first onboard SATA controller.
0137 Embedded SATA
Controller
Enables the SATA controller to run in IDE mode. Sets
the device class code as IDE and uses PCI IRQ
(referred as Native mode). This token applies to the
first onboard SATA controller.
0138 Embedded SATA
Controller
Enables the SATA controller. Sets the device class
code as SATA and sets up the AHCI BARs and
registers. This token applies to the first onboard SATA
controller.
0139 Embedded SATA
Controller
Enables the SATA controller. Sets the device class
code as RAID and executes the RAID Option ROM.
This token applies to the first onboard SATA
controller.
013E Memory
Remapping
(3GB~4GB)
When disabled, memory remapping relocates memory
space behind PCI hole to the space above 4 GB.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option Description94 Using the System Setup Program
013F Memory
Remapping
(3GB~4GB)
When enabled, memory remapping relocates memory
space (3GB - 4 GB) to the space above 4 GB.
0140 Execute-Disable
(XD) Bit
Capability
When disabled, the Intel processors supporting the
XD feature reports the support to the operating
system.
0141 Execute-Disable
(XD) Bit
Capability
When enabled, the Intel processors supporting the
XD feature reports the support to the operating
system. If the operating system supports this extended
paging mechanism, it will provide some protection
against software viruses that exploit buffer overflows.
014A Virtualization
Technology
Allows you to disable the VT technology in applicable
processors. If disabled, the VT feature is unusable in
any OS.
014B Virtualization
Technology
Allows you to enable the VT technology in applicable
processors.
014E External USB
PORT1
Allows you to electrically disable the external USB
connector 1.
014F External USB
PORT1
Allow you to electrically enable the external USB
connector 1.
0168 Max CPUID
Value Limit
Some OS, which is (NT4), fails if the value returned
in EAX is >3 when CPUID instruction is executed
with EAX=0. This setting disables the 3 or less.
0169 Max CPUID
Value Limit
Some OS, which is (NT4), fails if the value returned
in EAX is >3 when CPUID instruction is executed
with EAX=0. This setting limits CPUID function
to 3.
0171 Adjacent Cache
Line Prefetch
Disables system optimization for sequential memory
access. The processor fetches the cache line that
contains the data it currently requires.
0172 Adjacent Cache
Line Prefetch
Enables system optimization for sequential memory
access. The processor fetches the adjacent cache line
in the other half of the sector.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 95
0173 Hardware
Prefetcher
Disables the processor’s HW prefetcher..
0174 Hardware
Prefetcher
Enables the processor’s HW prefetcher..
0178 Remote Access Enables serial console redirection.
0189 External USB
PORT2
Allows you to electrically disable the external USB
connector 2.
018A External USB
PORT2
Allow you to electrically enable the external USB
connector 2.
0199 Power Saving
Features
Disables the feature that allows SATA hard-drives to
initiate link power management transitions.
019A Power Saving
Features
Enables the feature that allows SATA hard-drives to
initiate link power management transitions.
01C4 NUMA Support Disables the NUMA support to improve processor
performance. This option is available for NUMA
systems that allow memory interleaving across all
processor nodes.
01C5 NUMA Support Enables the NUMA support to improve processor
performance. This option is available for NUMA
systems that allow memory interleaving across all
processor nodes.
01C4 Node Interleave Disables the node interleave option. This option is
available for NUMA systems that allow memory
interleaving across all processor nodes.
01C5 Node Interleave Enable the node interleave option. This option is
available for NUMA systems that allow memory
interleaving across all processor nodes.
01CF I/OAT DMA
Engine
Enables the I/O Acceleration Technology (I/OAT)
DMA Engine feature. Set to enabled only if the
hardware and software support I/OAT.
01D0 I/OAT DMA
Engine
Disables the I/OAT DMA Engine feature. This option
should be disabled only if the hardware and software
support I/OAT.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option Description96 Using the System Setup Program
01DA Embedded NIC1 Enables NIC1 with iSCSI Remote Boot.
01DB Embedded NIC2 Enables NIC2 with iSCSI Remote Boot.
01EA Turbo Mode Disables memory turbo mode. It disables the
processor core to increase its frequency.
01EB Turbo Mode Enables memory turbo mode. It allows the processor
core to increase its frequency.
01F0 Embedded NIC3 Enables the onboard NIC3 controller.
01F1 Embedded NIC3 Enables the onboard NIC3 controller, but disables the
NIC associated PXE or RPL boot-ROM.
01F2 Embedded NIC3 Enables the onboard NIC3 controller (full-function),
including its PXE boot-ROM.
01F3 Embedded NIC3 Enables NIC3 with iSCSI Remote Boot.
0204 VT for Direct I/O Disables Intel Virtualization Technology for Direct
I/O (VT-d) that enhances I/O support (DMA) when
running a Virtual Machine Monitor.
0205 VT for Direct I/O Enables Intel Virtualization Technology for Direct I/O
(VT-d) that enhances I/O support (DMA) when
running a Virtual Machine Monitor.
0211 Internal USB
PORT
Disables the internal USB connector.
0212 Internal USB
PORT
Enables the internal USB connector.
021F Maximum
Performance
Sets the system power management to maximum
performance.
0221 OS Control Allows the OS to change the P-state.
0224 Embedded Video
Controller
Enables the onboard video controller as the primary
video device.
0225 Embedded Video
Controller
Disables the onboard video controller.
022D Boot Mode Enables booting to Unified Extensible Firmware
Interface (UEFI) capable operating systems.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 97
022E Boot Mode Enables booting to legacy mode, ensures compatibility
with operating systems that do not support UEFI.
0231 Active Processor
Cores
Four cores of the processor are enabled This applies to
Quad-core processors only.
0232 Active Processor
Cores
Two cores of the processor are enabled. This applies to
Quad-core and Dual-core processors.
0233 Active Processor
Cores
Single core of the processor is enabled. This applies to
Quad-core and Dual-Core processors.
024B C States When enabled, the processor can operate in all
available Power C States. (default)
024C C States When disabled, there are no C states available for the
processor.
024D Pause on Errors Enables the BIOS from prompting for F1/F2 on error.
BIOS pauses at F1/F2 prompt.
024E Pause on Errors Disables the BIOS from prompting for F1/F2 on error.
BIOS pauses at F1/F2 prompt.
024F Quiet Boot Enables the display of the splash or summary screen,
rather than the detail of the POST flow.
0250 Quiet Boot Disables the display of the splash or summary screen.
The user is able to see the detail of the POST
messages.
0251 N/A The NIC1 is used for PXE boot, followed by NIC2.
0252 N/A The NIC2 is used for PXE boot, followed by NIC1.
0254 3F8h/2F8h Sets the back serial port address to 0x3F8 and internal
serial port address to 0x2F8
0257 2F8h/3F8h Set back serial port address to 0x2F8 and internal
serial port address to 0x3F8.
025D Optimizer Mode Selects optimizer mode as the memory operating
mode.
025E Spare Mode Selects spare mode as the memory operating mode.
025F Mirror Mode Selects mirror mode as the memory operating mode.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option Description98 Using the System Setup Program
0260 Advanced ECC
Mode
Selects Advanced ECC (i.e. Lockstep, Chipkill) as the
memory operating mode.
026A Coherent HT
Link Speed
Sets to support HyperTransport 1 specification.
026B Coherent HT
Link Speed
Sets to support HyperTransport 3 specification.
026E Active Processor
Cores
This field controls the number of enabled all of cores
in each processor. By default, the maximum number
of cores per processor will be enabled.
026F Active Processor
Cores
This field controls the number of enabled 6 cores in
each processor. By default, the maximum number of
cores per processor will be enabled.
0270 Active Processor
Cores
This field controls the number of enabled 8 cores in
each processor. By default, the maximum number of
cores per processor will be enabled.
0271 Active Processor
Cores
This field controls the number of enabled 10 cores in
each processor. By default, the maximum number of
cores per processor will be enabled.
0272 Active Processor
Cores
This field controls the number of enabled 12 cores in
each processor. By default, the maximum number of
cores per processor will be enabled.
027B HT Assist Disables the Probe Filter chipset option in the System
setup. There are some applications that may lower
chipset performance when this is enabled.
027C HT Assist Enables the Probe Filter chipset option in the System
setup. There are some applications that may lower
chipset performance when this is disabled.
02A1 C1E State Enables the processor Enhanced Halt (C1E) state.
(default)
02A2 C1E State Disables the processor C1-E state. Do at your own
risk. When you disable this option, a warning appears
in the BIOS Setup help text and a pop up message
appears when this option is changing.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 99
02A9 DRAM Prefetcher Disables DRAM references from triggering DRAM
prefetch requests.
02AA DRAM Prefetcher Turns on the DRAM prefetch unit in the Northbridge.
02AB HW Prefetch
Training on SW
Disables hardware prefetcher from considering
software prefetches when detecting strides for
prefetch requests.
02AC HW Prefetch
Training on SW
Enables Hardware prefetcher considers software
prefetches when detecting strides for prefetch
requests. (default)
02AD SR-IOV Global
Enable
Enables BIOS support for SRIOV devices.
02AE SR-IOV Global
Enable
Disables BIOS support for SRIOV devices.
02B6 Memory
Operating Voltage
Indicates all DIMMs in the system are operating at 1.5
volts.
02B7 Memory
Operating Voltage
Indicates all DIMMs in the system are operating at
1.35 volts.
02B8 Memory
Operating Voltage
This setting indicates the memory operating voltage
will be set automatically by the Memory initialization
code and depending upon the installed DIMM's
capability and the memory configuration of the
system. This is the default setting and will set the
Memory Operating voltage to the POR voltage.
02C5 DCU Streamer
Prefetcher
Enables the DCU Streamer Prefetcher. (default)
02C6 DCU Streamer
Prefetcher
Disables the DCU Streamer Prefetcher.
02C7 Data Reuse
Optimization
Sets to enable for HPC applications. (default)
02C8 Data Reuse
Optimization
Sets to disable for energy efficiency.
02C9 QPI Bandwidth
Priority
Sets to compute for computation-intensive
applications. (default)
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option Description100 Using the System Setup Program
02CA QPI Bandwidth
Priority
Sets to I/O for I/O-intensive applications.
02CE DCU IP
Prefetcher
Enables the DCU IP Prefetcher. (default)
02CF DCU IP
Prefetcher
Disables the DCU IP Prefetcher.
401A Terminal Type The BIOS console redirection, if enabled, operates in
VT100 emulation model. See tokens BFh, C0h, and
D7h.
401B Terminal Type The BIOS console redirection, if enabled, operates in
ANSI emulation model. See also tokens BFh, C0h,
and D7h.
401C Redirection After
BIOS POST
The BIOS console redirection, if enabled, continues to
operate after the OS boot hand-off.
401D Redirection After
BIOS POST
The BIOS console redirection, if enabled, operates
during the BIOS boot only and is disabled prior to OS
boot hand-off. See also tokens BFh, C0h, D7h, 401Ah
and 401Bh.
4022 1st Boot Device Whenever the BIOS boots the system, the first PXEcapable device is inserted as the first device in the
boot sequence. Enabling this feature causes the BIOS
operation to occur on the next and all subsequent
boots and causes a change in the system's defined
boot sequence. The BIOS chooses the first PXEcapable device as the system's onboard network
controller, if present and enabled, or the first bootable
network device found in the system's standard PCI
search order.
4026 Manufacturing
Mode
Enables the manufacturing mode to bypass POST
tasks/memory tests and F1/F2 prompts on specific
error messages. Used by manufacturers only and is not
for general use.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 101
4027 Manufacturing
Mode
Disables the manufacturing mode to bypass POST
tasks/memory tests and F1/F2 prompts on specific
error messages. Used by manufacturers only and is not
for general use.
4033 Serial Port Mode Console Redirection baud rate is set to 115,200 bits
per second.
4034 Serial Port Mode Console Redirection baud rate is set to 57,600 bits per
second
4035 Serial Port Mode Console Redirection baud rate is set to 19,200 bits per
second.
4036 Serial Port Mode Console Redirection baud rate is set to 9,600 bits per
second.
403F Clear SMBIOS
System Event Log
Deletes all records in the BMC system event log on
the next boot.
4800 Node Manager Enables the Node Manager mode for Intel processors.
4801 APML Enable the Advanced Platform Management Link
mode for AMD processors.
4802 CPU Power
Capping
To decide the highest processor performance state in
the OS. (P0-state).
4803 CPU Power
Capping
To decide the highest processor performance state in
the OS. (P1-state).
4804 CPU Power
Capping
To decide the highest processor performance state in
the OS. (P2-state).
4805 CPU Power
Capping
To decide the highest processor performance state in
the OS. (P3-state).
4806 CPU Power
Capping
To decide the highest processor performance state in
the OS. (P4-state).
480A C6 State Disables the processor C6 state. Do at your own risk.
When you disable this option, a warning appears in
the BIOS Setup help text and a pop up message
appears when this option is changing.
480B C6 State Enables the processor C6 state. (default)
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option Description102 Using the System Setup Program
480C L3 Cache Power
Control
Disable the clock stop for an idle subcache.
480D L3 Cache Power
Control
Enable the clock stop for an idle subcache.
480E C7 State Disables the processor C7 state. Do at your own risk.
When you disable this option, a warning appears in
the BIOS Setup help text and a pop up message
appears when this option is changing.
480F C7 State Enables the processor C7 state. (default)
4810 Non Coherent
HT Link Width
Sets the HT link to 8 bit width.
4811 Non Coherent
HT Link Width
Sets the HT link to 16 bit width.
4812 Non Coherent
HT Link Speed
Sets the HT link speed to 800MHz.
4813 Non Coherent
HT Link Speed
Sets the HT link speed to 1000MHz.
4814 Non Coherent
HT Link Speed
Sets the HT link speed to 1200MHz.
4815 Non Coherent
HT Link Speed
Sets the HT link speed to 1600MHz.
4816 Non Coherent
HT Link Speed
Sets the HT link speed to 2000MHz.
4817 Non Coherent
HT Link Speed
Sets the HT link speed to 2600MHz.
4820 Memory Turbo
Mode
Disables memory turbo mode.
4821 Memory Turbo
Mode
Enables memory turbo mode.
4822 NUMA Support Enables the node interleave option for SLES11. This
applies to NUMA systems that allow memory
interleaving across all processor nodes.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 103
4823 Memory
Frequency
Detects the memory running speed from H/W
designed (SPD, memory population).
4824 Memory
Frequency
Sets memory running speed up to 800MHz.
4825 Memory
Frequency
Sets memory running speed up to 1066MHz.
4826 Memory
Frequency
Sets memory running speed up to 1333MHz.
4827 Memory
Frequency
Sets memory running speed up to 1600MHz.
4828 Memory
Throttling Mode
Sets memory running as Open Loop Throughput
Throttling (OLTT). (default)
4829 Memory
Throttling Mode
Sets memory running as Closed Loop Thermal
Throttling (CLTT).
482A DRAM Scrubbing Disables DRAM scrubbing to write corrected data
back to the memory once a correctable error is
detected on a read transaction.
482B DRAM Scrubbing Enables Dram scrubbing to write corrected data back
to the memory once a correctable error is detected on
a read transaction.
482C Demand
Scrubbing
Disables Demand scrubbing to write corrected data
back to the memory once a correctable error is
detected on a read transaction.
482D Demand
Scrubbing
Enables Demand scrubbing to write corrected data
back to the memory once a correctable error is
detected on a read transaction.
482E Patrol Scrubbing Disables Patrol scrubbing to proactively search the
system memory, repairing correctable errors.
482F Patrol Scrubbing Enables Patrol scrubbing to proactively search the
system memory, repairing correctable errors.
4830 HDD Security
Erase
Sets security freeze lock to all hard-drives.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option Description104 Using the System Setup Program
4831 HDD Security
Erase
Unlocks the security freeze lock on all hard-drives.
4832 AHCI-AMD Supports AMD inbox AHCI driver.
4833 AHCI-MS Supports Microsoft inbox AHCI driver.
4834 Embedded SATA
Link Rate
Sets the SATA link rate at maximum rate speed of
6.0 Gbps.
4835 Embedded SATA
Link Rate
Sets the SATA link rate at minimum rate speed of
1.5 Gbps. For power consumption.
4836 Embedded SATA
Link Rate
Sets the SATA link rate at minimum rate speed of
3.0 Gbps.
4840 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the PCI
Express Link of port. All entry disabled.
4841 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the given
PCI Express Link of port. L0s entry enabled.
4842 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the given
PCI Express Link of port. L1 entry enabled.
4843 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the given
PCI Express Link of port. L0s and L1 entry enabled.
4844 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the given
PCI Express Link of port. L0s entry downstream
enabled.
4845 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the given
PCI Express Link of port. L0s entry downstream and
L1 enabled
4846 Onboard LAN
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard
LAN. All entry disabled.
4847 Onboard LAN
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard
LAN. L0s entry enabled.
4848 Onboard LAN
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard
LAN. L1 entry enabled.
4849 Onboard LAN
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard
LAN. L0s and L1 entry enabled.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 105
484A Onboard LAN
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard
LAN. L0s entry downstream enabled.
484B Onboard LAN
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard
LAN. L0s entry downstream and L1 enabled.
484C Mezzanine Slot
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine
Slot. All entry disabled.
484D Mezzanine Slot
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine
Slot. L0s entry enabled.
484E Mezzanine Slot
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine
Slot. L1 entry enabled.
484F Mezzanine Slot
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine
Slot. L0s and L1 entry enabled.
4850 Mezzanine Slot
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine
Slot. L0s entry downstream enabled.
4851 Mezzanine Slot
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine
Slot. L0s entry downstream and L1 enabled.
4852 NB-SB Link
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported on the NB-SB.
All entry disabled.
4853 NB-SB Link
ASPM
Controls the level of ASPM supported on the NB-SB.
L1 entry enabled.
4854 Maximum
Payload Size
Auto detects the PCIe maximum payload size.
4855 Maximum
Payload Size
Sets the PCIe maximum payload size to 128 Bytes.
4856 Maximum
Payload Size
Sets the PCIe maximum payload size to 256 Bytes.
4857 WHEA Support Disables Windows Hardware Error Architecture.
4858 WHEA Support Enables Windows Hardware Error Architecture.
4859 NIC
Enumeration
Sets PXE boot from onboard NIC to Add-on NIC
adapter. (default)
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option Description106 Using the System Setup Program
485A NIC
Enumeration
Sets PXE boot from Add-on NIC adapter to onboard
NIC.
485B PCIe Generation Sets the PCI signaling rate at Gen3 8.0 Gigabits
bandwidth.
485C PCIe Generation Sets the PCI signaling rate at Gen2 5.0 Gigabits
bandwidth.
485D PCIe Generation Sets the PCI signaling rate at Gen1 2.5 Gigabits
bandwidth.
485E Reboot on WOL
(ROW)
Disables ROW. (default)
The ROW repurposes the Wake on LAN (WOL)
signal to reboot the system board when the system is
in S0/S3 state.
485F Reboot on WOL
(ROW)
Enables ROW.
ROW repurposes the WOL signal to reboot the
system board when the system is in S0/S3 state. When
a WOL packet is received by the NIC, the wake up
signal generated by the NIC shall cause a hardware
reboot of the system board.
4860 USB PORT with
BMC
Allows you to electrically disable the internal USB port
which contacts to BMC.
4861 USB PORT with
BMC
Allow the users to electrically enable the internal USB
port which contacts to BMC.
4870 Force PXE Boot
only
Disables PXE to be the boot device only.
4871 Force PXE Boot
only
Enables PXE to be the boot device only. The system
retrying to boot from PXE device.
4873 Active Processor
Cores
This field controls the number of enabled 16 cores in
each processor. By default, the maximum number of
cores per processor will be enabled.
4877 PCIe Slot1 Allows you to electrically disable PCIe Slot1.
4878 PCIe Slot1 Allows you to electrically enable PCIe Slot1.
4879 PCIe Slot2 Allows you to electrically disable PCIe Slot2.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 107
487A PCIe Slot2 Allows you to electrically enable PCIe Slot2.
487B PCIe Slot3 Allows you to electrically disable PCIe Slot3.
487C PCIe Slot3 Allows you to electrically enable PCIe Slot3.
487D PCIe Slot4 Allows you to electrically disable PCIe Slot4.
487E PCIe Slot4 Allows you to electrically enable PCIe Slot4.
487F Mezzanine Slot Allows you to electrically disable Mezzanine Slot.
4880 Mezzanine Slot Allows you to electrically enable Mezzanine Slot.
4881 1st Boot Device Sets the hard-drive as the first boot device.
4882 1st Boot Device Sets RAID as the first boot device.
4883 1st Boot Device Sets a USB storage device as the first boot device.
4884 1st Boot Device Sets a CD/DVD ROM as the first boot device.
4885 2nd Boot Device Sets a network device as the 2nd boot device.
4886 2nd Boot Device Sets the hard-drive as the 2nd boot device.
4887 2nd Boot Device Sets RAID as the 2nd boot device.
4888 2nd Boot Device Sets a USB storage device as the 2nd boot device.
4889 2nd Boot Device Sets the CD/DVD ROM as the 2nd boot device.
488A 3rd Boot Device Sets the network device as the 3rd boot device.
488B 3rd Boot Device Sets the hard-drive as the 3rd boot device.
488C 3rd Boot Device Sets RAID as the 3rd boot device.
488D 3rd Boot Device Sets a USB storage device as the 3rd boot device.
488E 3rd Boot Device Sets the CD/DVD ROM as the 3rd boot device.
488F 4th Boot Device Sets the network device as the 4th boot device.
4890 4th Boot Device Sets the hard-drive as the 4th boot device.
4891 4th Boot Device Sets RAID as the 4th boot device.
4892 4th Boot Device Sets a USB storage device as the 4th boot device.
4893 4th Boot Device Sets the CD/DVD ROM as the 4th boot device.
4894 5th Boot Device Sets the network device as the 5th boot device.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option Description108 Using the System Setup Program
4895 5th Boot Device Sets the hard-drive as the 5th boot device.
4896 5th Boot Device Sets RAID as the 5th boot device.
4897 5th Boot Device Sets a USB storage device as the 5th boot device.
4898 5th Boot Device Sets the CD/DVD ROM as thes 5th boot device.
48A0 ACPI SPMI Table Disables the ACPI SPMI Table for BMC ROM
update.
48A1 ACPI SPMI Table Enables the ACPI SPMI Table for IPMI driver
installation.
48A2 BMC LAN Port
Configuration
Sets BMC LAN Port to Dedicated-NIC.
48A3 BMC LAN Port
Configuration
Sets BMC LAN Port to Shared-NIC.
48A4 BMC NIC IP
Source
Sets BMC LAN to get LAN IP from Static mode.
48A5 BMC NIC IP
Source
Sets BMC LAN to get LAN IP from DHCP mode.
48A6 IPv6 Mode Disables IPv6 internet protocol support.
48A7 IPv6 Mode Enables IPv6 internet protocol support.
48A8 IPv6 AutoConfig Disables IPv6 auto configuration.
48A9 IPv6 AutoConfig Enables IPv6 auto configuration.
48AA Serial Port Mode Sets the console redirection baud rate to 3,8400 bits
per second.
48AB Flow Control Selects none as the flow control for console
redirection.
48AC Flow Control Selects hardware as the flow control for console
redirection.
48AD Flow Control Selects software as the flow control for console
redirection.
48AE Terminal Type The BIOS console redirection, if enabled, operates in
VTUTF8 emulation model. See also tokens BFh, C0h,
and D7h.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 109
48AF VT-UTF8 Combo
Key Support
Disables VT-UTF8 Combination Key Support for
ANSI/VT100 terminals.
48B0 VT-UTF8 Combo
Key Support
Enables VT-UTF8 Combination Key Support for
ANSI/VT100 terminals.
48B1 Event logging Disables BIOS to log system events to BMC, errors
include ECC/PCI/PCIe/HT…etc.
48B2 Event logging Enables BIOS to log system events to BMC, errors
include ECC/PCI/PCIe/HT…etc.
48B3 NMI on Error Disables BIOS to generate NMI when PCIe
uncorrectable errors occur.
48B4 NMI on Error Enables BIOS to generate NMI when PCIe
uncorrectable errors occur.
48B5 Memory
Operating Voltage
Indicates all DIMMs in the system are operating at
1.25 volts.
48C0 Frequency Ratio Sets frequency multiplier as maximum level.
48C1 Frequency Ratio Downgrades frequency multiplier one level.
48C2 Frequency Ratio Downgrades frequency multiplier two levels.
48C3 Frequency Ratio Downgrades frequency multiplier three levels.
48C8 QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at maximum speed.
48C9 QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at 4.800GT.
48CA QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at 5.866GT.
48CB QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at 6.400GT.
48CC QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at 7.200GT.
48CD QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at 8.000GT.
48D0 Energy Efficient
Policy
Controls the energy efficient policy as performance
profile to configure all necessary settings.
48D1 Energy Efficient
Policy
Controls the energy efficient policy as balance profile
to configure all necessary settings. (default)
48D2 Energy Efficient
Policy
Controls the energy efficient policy as low power
profile to configure all necessary settings.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option Description110 Using the System Setup Program
48D3 Direct Cache
Access
Disables the Direct Cache Access.
48D4 Direct Cache
Access
Enables the Direct Cache Access.
48D8 Load Customized
Defaults
Requests a customized default of SETUP values on
the next boot.
48DA Save Customized
Defaults
Saves current settings to customized defaults of
SETUP on next boot.
48DB N/A Requests maximum performance settings of SETUP
values on the next boot.
48DC N/A Requests a energy efficiency settings of SETUP values
on the next boot.
48DD N/A Requests HPCC efficiency settings of SETUP values
on the next boot. Dell will provide the settings before
A-can BIOS.
48DE Shell Requests the uEFI Shell as first boot device on the
next boot.
48E0 N/A Use NIC3 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot
followed by NIC1.
48E1 N/A Use NIC4 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot
followed by NIC1.
48E2 N/A Use NIC5 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot
followed by NIC1.
48E3 N/A Use NIC6 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot
followed by NIC1.
48E4 N/A Use NIC7 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot
followed by NIC1.
48E5 N/A Use NIC8 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot
followed by NIC1.
48E6 N/A Use HDD1 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next
boot.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 111
48E7 N/A Use HDD2 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next
boot.
48E8 N/A Use HDD3 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next
boot.
48E9 N/A Use HDD4 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next
boot.
48EA N/A Use HDD5 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next
boot.
48EB N/A Use HDD6 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next
boot.
48EC N/A Use RAID HDD1as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48ED N/A Use RAID HDD2 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48EE N/A Use RAID HDD3 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48EF N/A Use RAID HDD4 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48F0 N/A Use RAID HDD5 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48F1 N/A Use RAID HDD6 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48F2 N/A Use RAID HDD7 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48F3 N/A Use RAID HDD8 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48F4 N/A Use RAID HDD9 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48F5 N/A Use RAID HDD10 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48F6 N/A Use RAID HDD11 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option Description112 Using the System Setup Program
48F7 N/A Use RAID HDD12 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48F8 N/A Use RAID HDD13 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48F9 N/A Use RAID HDD14 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48FA N/A Use RAID HDD15 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
48FB N/A Use RAID HDD16 as the 1st PXE boot device on the
next boot.
Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued)
Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 113
IPMI Command List
The following tables include all commands defined in the IPMI v2.0
specifications. All mandatory commands and some optional functions are
supported. Special functions beyond the scope of IPMI v2.0 are implemented
as original equipment manufacturer (OEM) commands.
In the O/M column:
• M = Mandatory in the IPMI spec and is implemented.
• O = Optional command supported in this implementation.
• N = Not supported in this implementation.
See the Deployment Toolkit Version 1.3 User's Guide for additional
information about installing and using the DTK utilities, and the
Deployment Toolkit Version 1.3 Command Line Interface Reference Guide
for a complete list of all valid options, suboptions, and arguments for using
the BMCCFG.EXE to configure and manage your BMC.
NOTE: For more information about the standard IPMI tool commands, see
ipmitool.sourceforge.net/manpage.html.
Table 2-2. IPMI Device Global Commands (NetFn: 0x06H)
Command NetFn Code IPMI 2.0 BMC
Get Device ID App 0x01h M Yes
Broadcast Get Device ID App 0x02h M Yes
Cold Reset App 0x03h O Yes
Warm Reset App 0x04h O No
Get Self Test Results App 0x05h M Yes
Manufacture Test On App 0x06h O Yes
Get ACPI Power State App 0x07h O Yes
Get Device GUID App 0x08h O Yes
Get NetFn Support App 0x09h O Yes
Get Command Support App 0x0Ah O Yes
Get Command Sub-function Support App 0x0Bh O Yes114 Using the System Setup Program
Table 2-2. IPMI Device Global Commands (NetFn: 0x06H) (continued)
Command NetFn Code IPMI 2.0 BMC
Get Configurable Commands App 0x0C O Yes
Get Configurable Command Sub-functions App 0x0Dh O Yes
Set Command Enables App 0x60h O Yes
Get Command Enables App 0x61h O Yes
Set Command Sub-function Enables App 0x62h O Yes
Get Command Sub-function Enables App 0x63h O Yes
Get OEM NetFn IANA Support App 0x64h O Yes
Table 2-3. BMC Watchdog Timer Commands (NetFn: 0x06H)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Reset Watchdog Timer App 0x22h M Yes
Set Watchdog Timer App 0x24h M Yes
Get Watchdog Timer App 0x25h M Yes
Table 2-4. BMC Device and Messaging Commands (NetFn: 0x06H)
Command NetFn Code IPMI 2.0 BMC
Set BMC Global Enables App 0x2Eh M Yes
Get BMC Global Enables App 0x2Fh M Yes
Clear Message Buffer Flags App 0x30h M Yes
Get Message Buffer Flags App 0x31h M Yes
Enable Message Channel Receive App 0x32h O Yes
Get Message App 0x33h M Yes
Send Message App 0x34h M Yes
Read Event Message Buffer App 0x35h O YesUsing the System Setup Program 115
Table 2-5. BMC Device and Messaging Commands (NetFn: 0x 06H) (continued)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Get BT Interface Capabilities App 0x36h M No
Get System GUID App 0x37h M Yes
Set System Info Parameters App 0x58h O Yes
Get System Info Parameters App 0x59h O Yes
Get Channel Authentication Capabilities App 0x38h O Yes
Get Session Challenge App 0x39h O Yes
Activate Session Command App 0x3Ah O Yes
Set Session Privilege Level Command App 0x3Bh O Yes
Close Session App 0x3Ch O Yes
Get Session Information App 0x3Dh O Yes
Get Authentication Code Command App 0x3Fh O Yes
Set Channel Access Commands App 0x40h O Yes
Get Channel Access Commands App 0x41h O Yes
Get Channel Info Command App 0x42h O Yes
Set User Access Commands App 0x43h O Yes
Get User Access Commands App 0x44h O Yes
Set User Name Commands App 0x45h O Yes
Get User Name Commands App 0x46h O Yes
Set User Password Commands App 0x47h O Yes
Active Payload Command App 0x48h O Yes
Deactivate Payload Command App 0x49h O Yes
Get Payload Activation Status App 0x4Ah O Yes
Get Payload Instance Info Command App 0x4Bh O Yes
Set User Payload Access App 0x4Ch O Yes
Get User Payload Access App 0x4Dh O Yes
Get Channel Payload Support App 0x4Eh O Yes116 Using the System Setup Program
Table 2-5. BMC Device and Messaging Commands (NetFn: 0x 06H) (continued)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Get Channel Payload Version App 0x4Fh O Yes
Get Channel OEM Payload Info App 0x50h O Yes
Master Write-Read I2C App 0x52h M Yes
Get Channel Cipher Suites App 0x54h O Yes
Suspend/Resume Payload Encryption App 0x55h O Yes
Set Channel Security Keys App 0x56h O Yes
Get System Interface Capabilities App 0x57h O No
Table 2-6. Chassis Device Commands (NetFn: 0x00H)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Get Chassis Capabilities Chassis 0x00h M Yes
Get Chassis Status Chassis 0x01h M Yes
Chassis Control Chassis 0x02h M Yes
Chassis Reset Chassis 0x03h O No
Chassis Identify Chassis 0x04h O Yes
Set Chassis Capabilities Chassis 0x05h O Yes
Set Power Restore Policy Chassis 0x06h O Yes
Get System Restart Cause Chassis 0x07h O Yes
Set System Boot Options Chassis 0x08h O Yes
Get System Boot Options Chassis 0x09h O Yes
Set Front Panel Button Enable Chassis 0x0Ah O No
Set Power Cycle Interval Chassis 0x0Bh O Yes
Get POH Counter Chassis 0x0Fh O NoUsing the System Setup Program 117
Table 2-7. Event Commands (NetFn: 0x04H)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Set Event Receiver S/E 0x00h M Yes
Get Event Receiver S/E 0x01h M Yes
Platform Event S/E 0x02h M Yes
Table 2-8. PEF/PET Alerting Commands (NetFn: 0x04H)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Get PEF Capabilities S/E 0x10h M Yes
Arm PEF Postpone Timer S/E 0x11h M Yes
Set PEF Configuration Parameters S/E 0x12h M Yes
Get PEF Configuration Parameters S/E 0x13h M Yes
Set Last Processed Event ID S/E 0x14h M Yes
Get Last Processed Event ID S/E 0x15h M Yes
Alert Immediate S/E 0x16h O Yes
PET Acknowledge S/E 0x17h O Yes
Table 2-9. Sensory Device Commands (NetFn: 0x04H)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Get Device SDR Info S/E 0x20h O No
Get Device SDR S/E 0x21h O No
Reserve Device SDR Repository S/E 0x22h O No
Get Sensor Reading Factors S/E 0x23h O Yes
Set Sensor Hysteresis S/E 0x24h O Yes
Get Sensor Hysteresis S/E 0x25h O Yes
Set Sensor Threshold S/E 0x26h O Yes
Get Sensor Threshold S/E 0x27h O Yes
Set Sensor Event Enable S/E 0x28h O Yes118 Using the System Setup Program
Table 2-10. Sensory Device Commands (NetFn: 0x04H) (continued)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Get Sensor Event Enable S/E 0x29h O Yes
Set Sensor Reading and Event Status S/E 0x30h O Yes
Re-arm Sensor Events S/E 0x2Ah O Yes
Get Sensor Event Status S/E 0x2Bh O Yes
Get Sensor Reading S/E 0x2Dh M Yes
Set Sensor Type S/E 0x2Eh O No
Get Sensor Type S/E 0x2Fh O No
Table 2-11. FRU Inventory Device Commands (NetFn: 0x0AH)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Get FRU Inventory Area Info Storage 0x10h M Yes
Read FRU Inventory Data Storage 0x11h M Yes
Write FRU Inventory Data Storage 0x12h M Yes
Table 2-12. SDR Repository Commands (NetFn: 0x0AH)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Get SDR Repository Info Storage 0x20h M Yes
Get SDR Repository Allocation Info Storage 0x21h O No
Reserve SDR Repository Storage 0x22h M Yes
Get SDR Storage 0x23h M Yes
Add SDR Storage 0x24h M No
Partial ADD SDR Storage 0x25h O Yes
Delete SDR Storage 0x26h O No
Clear SDR Repository Storage 0x27h M Yes
Get SDR Repository Time Storage 0x28h O YesUsing the System Setup Program 119
* Support for Partial Add SEL is not required when Add SEL is supported.
Table 2-12. SDR Repository Commands (NetFn: 0x0AH) (continued)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Set SDR Repository Time Storage 0x29h O Yes
Enter SDR Repository Update Mode Storage 0x2Ah O No
Exit SDR Repository Update Mode Storage 0x2Bh O No
Run Initialization Agent Storage 0x2Ch O Yes
Table 2-13. SEL Commands (NetFn: 0x40H)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Get SEL Info Storage 0x40h M Yes
Get SEL Allocation Info Storage 0x41h O No
Reserve SEL Storage 0x42h O Yes
Get SEL Entry Storage 0x43h M Yes
Add SEL Entry Storage 0x44h M Yes
Partial Add SEL Entry Storage 0x45h M No
*
Delete SEL Entry Storage 0x46h O No
Clear SEL Storage 0x47h M Yes
Get SEL Time Storage 0x48h M Yes
Set SEL Time Storage 0x49h M Yes
Get Auxiliary Log Status Storage 0x5Ah O No
Set Auxiliary Log Status Storage 0x5Bh O No
Get SEL Time UTC Offset Storage 0x5Ch O No
Set SEL Time UTC Offset Storage 0x5D O No120 Using the System Setup Program
Table 2-14. LAN Device Commands (NetFn: 0x0CH)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Set LAN Configuration Parameters
(Note: Parameter 9 and 25 are not
supported.)
Transport 0x01h M Yes
Get LAN Configuration Parameters
(Note: Parameter 9 and 25 are not
supported.)
Transport 0x02h M Yes
Suspend BMC ARP Transport 0x03h O No
Get IP/UDP/RMCP Statistics Transport 0x04h O No
Table 2-15. Serial/Modem Device Commands (NetFn: 0x 0CH)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Set Serial/Modem Configuration Transport 0x10h M Yes
Get Serial/Modem Configuration Transport 0x11h M Yes
Set Serial/Modem Mux Transport 0x12h O Yes
Get TAP Response Codes Transport 0x13h O No
Set PPP UDP Proxy Transmit Data Transport 0x14h O No
Get PPP UDP Proxy Transmit Data Transport 0x15h O No
Send PPP UDP Proxy Packet Transport 0x16h O No
Get PPP UDP Proxy Receive Data Transport 0x17h O No
Serial/Modem Connection Active Transport 0x18h M Yes
Callback Transport 0x20h O No
SOL Activating Transport 0x19h O No
Set SOL Configuration Transport 0x20h O No
Get SOL Configuration Transport 0x21h O No
Set User Callback Options Transport 0x1Ah O No
Get User Callback Options Transport 0x1Bh O No
Set Serial Routing Mux Transport 0x1Ch O YesUsing the System Setup Program 121
Table 2-16. Command Forwarding Commands (NetFn: 0x0CH)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Forwarded Command Transport 0x30h O Yes
Set Forwarded Commands Transport 0x31h O Yes
Get Forwarded Commands Transport 0x32h O Yes
Enable Forwarded Commands Transport 0x33h O Yes
Table 2-17. Firmware Update Commands (NetFn: 0x08H)
Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC
Firmware Update Phase 1 Firmware 0x10h O Yes
Firmware Update Phase 2 Firmware 0x11h O Yes
Get Firmware Update Status Firmware 0x12h O Yes
Get Firmware Version Firmware 0x13h O Yes
Set Firmware Update Status Firmware 0x16h O Yes
Firmware Update Phase 3 Firmware 0x21h O Yes
Table 2-18. GPGPU Setting Commands (NetFn: 0x30H)
Command NetFn LUN CMD Privelege
Set GPGPU ID 0x30h 0h 32h Admin
Get GPGPU ID 0x30h 0h 33h Admin122 Using the System Setup Program
Power Management Settings
The system BIOS provides various options for power settings to help you save energy,
maximize system performance. The following table provides a guide for power
management settings.
Table 2-19. Power Management Settings
System Setup Maximum
Performance (48DB)
Energy Efficiency
(48DC)
Setup Page Setting Option D4
Token
Option D4
Token
Power
Management
Power Management Max.
Performance
021F Node
Manager
4800
Energy Efficiency Policy Performance 48D0 Low
Power
48D2
CPU
Configuration
Active Processor Cores All 026E 1/2 0233/
0232
Frequency Ratio Auto 48C0 3 48C3
QPI Frequency Auto 48C8 4.80GT/s 48C9
Turbo Mode Enabled 01E8 Disabled 01EA
C State Disabled 024C Enabled 024B
C1E State Disabled 02A2 Enabled 02A1
C6 State Disabled 480A Enabled 480B
C7 State Disabled 480E Enabled 480F
Direct Cache Access Enabled 48D4 Disabled 48D3
Hyper-Threading
Technology
Enabled 00D1 Disabled 00D2
Adjacent Cache Line
Prefetch
Enabled 0172 Disabled 0171
Hardware Prefetcher Enabled 0174 Disabled 0173
DCU Streamer
Prefetcher
Enabled 02C5 Disabled 02C6
DCU IP Prefetcher Enabled 02CE Disabled 02CFUsing the System Setup Program 123
Memory
Configuration
Memory Frequency Auto 4823 800 MHz 4824
Memory Turbo Mode Enabled 4821 Disabled 4820
Memory Throttling
Mode
Disabled 4828 Enabled 4829
Memory Operating
Voltage
1.5 V 02B6 1.35V/
1.25V
02B7/
48B5
SATA Configuration Embedded
SATA Link
State
Auto 4834 1.5
Gbps
Power Saving Features Disabled 0199 Enabled 019A
PCI
Configuration
PCIe Slot ASPM Disabled 4840 L0s & L1 4843
Onboard LAN ASPM Disabled 4846 L0s & L1 4849
Mezzing Slot ASPM Disabled 484C L0s & L1 484F
Table 2-19. Power Management Settings (continued)
System Setup Maximum
Performance (48DB)
Energy Efficiency
(48DC)
Setup Page Setting Option D4
Token
Option D4
Token124 Using the System Setup ProgramInstalling System Components 125
3
Installing System Components
Safety Instructions
WARNING: Working on systems that are still connected to a power supply can be
extremely dangerous.
CAUTION: System components and electronic circuit boards can be damaged by
discharge of static electricity.
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered
by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the
product.
To avoid injury to yourself or damage to your system, follow these guidelines:
• Always disconnect the system from the power outlet whenever you are
working inside the system.
• If possible, wear a grounded wrist strap when you are working inside the
system. Alternatively, discharge any static electricity by touching the bare
metal chassis of the system case, or the bare metal body of any other
grounded appliance.
• Hold electronic circuit boards by the edges only. Do not touch the
components on the board unless it is necessary to do so. Do not flex or
stress the circuit board.
• Leave all components inside the static-proof packaging until you are ready
to use the component for the installation.126 Installing System Components
• Some cables have a connector with locking tabs; if you are disconnecting
this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before you disconnect the
cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly aligned to avoid
bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that
both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned.
Recommended Tools
• #1 Phillips screwdriver
• #2 Phillips screwdriver
• Torx drivers
• Set of jeweler screwdriversInstalling System Components 127
Inside the System
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
CAUTION: This system must be operated with the sled or a sled blank installed to
make sure of proper cooling.
Figure 3-1. Inside the Sled
1 system board 2 heat sinks/processors (2)
3 memory (16) 4 cooling shroud
5 interposer extender 6 internal 2.5-inch hard-drives (2)128 Installing System Components
Sled Configuration
The following illustrations show a 10-Sled and 8-Sled configuration. A
mixture of differing sled types is also supported in the PowerEdge C8000
server enclosure. For more information, refer to the PowerEdge C8000
Hardware Owner’s Manual.
Figure 3-2. PowerEdge C8220 10-Sled SKU
Figure 3-3. PowerEdge C8220 8-Sled SKU with 2 Power SledsInstalling System Components 129
Sled
Removing a Sled
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
CAUTION: To ensure proper airflow in the system, if a module is removed it
should be immediately replaced with another sled or sled blank.
CAUTION: Operating the system for extended periods of time without a sled blank
installed can cause the PowerEdge C8000 server enclosure to overheat. See
"Installing a Sled Blank" on page 131.
1 Power down the sled using OS commands or the Baseboard Management
Controller, and ensure that the sled's power is off.
When a sled is powered off, its front-panel power indicator is off.
2 Press the release latch and using the handle, slide the sled out of the
enclosure. See Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4. Removing and Installing a Sled
1 handle 2 release latch130 Installing System Components
Installing a Sled
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Orient the sled so that the release latch is in the bottom of the sled. See
Figure 3-4.
2 Slide the new sled into the enclosure until the sled is fully seated and the
release latch snaps into place. See Figure 3-4.
Sled Blank
CAUTION: To ensure proper airflow in the system, if a module is removed it
should be immediately replaced with another sled or sled blank.
Removing a Sled Blank
Press the release latches and slide the blank out of the enclosure. See
Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-5. Removing and Installing a Sled Blank
1 release latches (2) 2 sled blankInstalling System Components 131
Installing a Sled Blank
Hold the blank with the guide rail facing forward. Slide the blank into the
enclosure until it is fully seated and the release latches snap into place. See
Figure 3-5.
SD Card
Removing a SD Card
1 Power down the sled using OS commands or the Baseboard Management
Controller, and ensure that the sled's power is off.
When a sled is powered off, its front-panel power-on indicator is off. See
Figure 1-1.
2 Press the release latch and using the handle, slide the sled out slightly until
you have access to the SD card slot.
3 Press the SD card in to release it from the slot and remove the card. See
Figure 3-6.
Figure 3-6. Removing and Installing a SD Card
1 SD card 2 SD card slot132 Installing System Components
Installing a SD Card
Media memory cards are generally marked with a symbol (such as a triangle or
an arrow) or a label to indicate which end to insert into the slot. The cards are
keyed to prevent incorrect insertion. If card orientation is not clear, see the
documentation that came with the card.
NOTE: To use an SD card with your sled, ensure that the SD card slot is enabled in
the System Setup program. See "Using the System Setup Program" on page 45.
1 Hold the SD card with the label side facing to the right. See Figure 3-6.
2 Press the card into the slot to lock into place. See Figure 3-6.
If you encounter too much resistance, do not force the card. Check the
card orientation and try again.
3 Slide the sled into the chassis until the sled is fully seated and the release
lever snaps into place.
Sled Covers
Removing the Front Cover
CAUTION: The sled must be operated with the sled covers installed to ensure
proper cooling.
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
NOTE: It is recommended that you always use a static mat and static strap while
working on components in the interior of the system.
1 Remove the four screws securing the front cover. See Figure 3-7.
2 Lift the front cover from the sled tray. See Figure 3-7.
3 If installed, disconnect all cables from the expansion card. Installing System Components 133
Figure 3-7. Removing and Installing the Front Cover
Installing the Front Cover
NOTE: It is recommended that you always use a static mat and static strap while
working on components in the interior of the system.
1 Check that all cable connections are secure.
2 Place the front cover on top of the sled tray, aligning the notches in the
front cover with the corresponding tabs in the sled tray. See Figure 3-7.
3 If an expansion card is installed, make sure the expansion card riser is
firmly seated.
4 Replace the four screws securing the front cover to the sled tray. See
Figure 3-7.
1 screws (4) 2 front cover
1
2134 Installing System Components
Removing the Back Cover
CAUTION: The sled must be operated with the sled covers installed to ensure
proper cooling.
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
NOTE: It is recommended that you always use a static mat and static strap while
working on components in the interior of the system.
1 Remove the two screws securing the back cover. See Figure 3-8.
2 Slide the cover forward to free it from the metal guides on the sled tray.
3 Lift the cover from the sled tray. See Figure 3-8.
Figure 3-8. Removing and Installing the Back Cover
1 back cover 2 screws (2)Installing System Components 135
Installing the Back Cover
NOTE: It is recommended that you always use a static mat and static strap while
working on components in the interior of the system.
1 Place the cover on the sled tray and slide it towards the front of the sled
tray so that the screw holes on the back cover align with the sled tray. See
Figure 3-8.
2 Replace the two screws securing the back cover to the sled tray. See
Figure 3-8.
Cooling Shroud
Removing the Cooling Shroud
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
CAUTION: Never operate your system with the cooling shroud removed. The
system may get overheated quickly, resulting in shutdown of the system and loss of
data.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the two screws securing the cooling shroud to the sled tray. See
Figure 3-9.
3 Press the shroud release lever toward the right of the sled.
4 Lift the shroud up to disengage the anchor tab from the heat sink. See
Figure 3-9.136 Installing System Components
Figure 3-9. Removing and Installing the Cooling Shroud
Installing the Cooling Shroud
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
CAUTION: Never operate your system with the cooling shroud removed. The
system may get overheated quickly, resulting in shutdown of the system and loss of
data.
1 Align and gently press the cooling shroud down on the system board until
the anchor tabs snap securely into place. See Figure 3-9.
2 Replace the two screws securing the cooling shroud to the sled tray. See
Figure 3-9.
3 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
1 screws (2) 2 cooling shroudInstalling System Components 137
Heat Sink
Removing a Heat Sink
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 135.
WARNING: The heat sink may be hot to touch for some time after the system has
been powered down. Allow the heat sink to cool before removing it.
CAUTION: Never remove the heat sink from a processor unless you intend to
remove the processor. The heat sink is necessary to maintain proper thermal
conditions.
3 Using a Phillips screwdriver, loosen one pair of diagonal retention screws
that secure the heat sink to the system board. See screw sequence
indicated on Figure 3-10.
4 Loosen the other pair of retention screws. See Figure 3-10.138 Installing System Components
Figure 3-10. Heat Sink Screw Loosening Sequence
5 Gently lift the heat sink off the processor and set the heat sink aside with
thermal grease side facing up. See Figure 3-11.
Figure 3-11. Removing and Installing the Heat SinkInstalling System Components 139
Installing a Heat Sink
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
NOTE: When installing the heat sink, be sure to orient the heat sink so that the KEY
icon on the heat sink label is facing the neighboring heat sink.
1 Using a clean lint-free cloth, remove the thermal grease from the heat sink.
2 Apply new thermal grease evenly to the center of the top of the new
processor.
3 Orient the heat sink so that the KEY icon on the heat sink is facing the
neighboring heat sink’s KEY icon. See Figure 3-11.
4 Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the four heat sink retention screws in a
diagonal sequence. See Figure 3-10.
5 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 136.
6 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
1 screws (4) 2 heat sink
3 heat sink KEY icon 4 heat sink
5 heat sink KEY icon140 Installing System Components
Processors
Your sled supports the following processors:
Use the following procedure when:
• Installing an additional processor
• Replacing a processor
Removing a Processor
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 135.
Table 3-1. Processors
Model Number Cores/Threads Frequency TDP
E5-2690 8/16 2.9 GHz 135 W
E5-2680 8/16 2.7 GHz 130 W
E5-2670 8/16 2.6 GHz 115 W
E5-2660 8/16 2.2 GHz 95 W
E5-2665 8/16 2.4 GHz 115 W
E5-2650 8/16 2.0 GHz 95 W
E5-2640 6/12 2.5 GHz 95 W
E5-2630 6/12 2.3 GHz 95 W
E5-2620 6/12 2.0 GHz 95 W
E5-2650L 8/16 1.8 GHz 70 W
E5-2630L 6/12 2.0 GHz 60 WInstalling System Components 141
3 Remove the heat sink. See "Removing a Heat Sink" on page 137.
CAUTION: The processor is held in its socket under strong pressure. Be aware
that the release lever can spring up suddenly if not firmly grasped.
4 Position your thumb firmly over the processor hook-shaped socket-release
lever and release the lever from the locked position. Do not force the lever
up to the fully open position. See Figure 3-12.
5 Position your thumb firmly over the bent load lever and release the lever
from the locked position. Rotate the lever 90 degrees upward to lift the
processor shield. See Figure 3-12.
6 Rotate the processor shield upward and out of the way. See Figure 3-12.
7 Lift the processor out of the socket and leave the socket-release lever and
load lever up so that the socket is ready for the new processor. See
Figure 3-12.
CAUTION: The processor is held in its socket under strong pressure. Be aware
that the release and load levers can spring up suddenly if not firmly grasped.
Figure 3-12. Removing and Installing a Processor142 Installing System Components
Installing a Processor
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
NOTE: When installing only one processor, the processor must be installed in the
processor 1 socket. See "System Board Connectors" on page 197 for the location of
the processor 1 socket.
NOTE: If you are upgrading your processors, prior to upgrading your system,
download and install the latest system BIOS version from support.dell.com. Follow
the instructions included in the file download to install the update on your system.
1 Unpack the processor if it has not been used previously.
2 If the processor has already been used, remove any thermal grease from the
top of the processor using a lint-free cloth.
3 Align the processor with the socket keys on the processor socket. See
Figure 3-12.
CAUTION: Positioning the processor incorrectly can permanently damage the
system board or the processor. Be careful not to bend the pins in the processor
socket.
4 With the hook-shaped release and bent load levers on the processor socket
in the open position, match the processor with the alignment mark
indicator and the socket keys and set the processor lightly in the socket.
See Figure 3-12.
CAUTION: Do not use force to seat the processor. When the processor is
positioned correctly, it engages easily into the socket.
5 Close the processor shield.
1 processor alignment mark (triangle) 2 processor
3 processor shield 4 hook-shaped socket-release lever
5 processor socket 6 socket key (4)
7 bent load lever 8 alignment notchInstalling System Components 143
6 Rotate the bent load lever down until it snaps into place.
7 Rotate the hook-shaped socket-release lever down until it snaps into place.
See Figure 3-12.
8 Replace the heat sink. See "Installing a Heat Sink" on page 139.
9 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 136.
10 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
11 Press to enter the System Setup and check that the processor
information matches the new system configuration.
System Memory
Each system board has 16 memory module sockets for the installation of
DDR3 unbuffered ECC DIMMs (ECC UDIMMs), registered DIMMs
(RDIMMs), and load reduced DIMMs (LRDIMMs) to support processor 1
and processor 2. See "System Board Connectors" on page 197 for the location
of the memory modules.
Memory Module Installation Guidelines
Follow these guidelines when installing memory modules on the sled system
board.
• Use only Dell approved R/LR/UDIMM DDR3 memory modules in 2 GB,
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, and 32 GB capacities. DIMM types (R/LR/UDIMM)
cannot be mixed.
• DIMM slots are numbered 1 to 8 and designated by two channels. The
number of channels used and the allowable configuration depend on the
memory mode selected in the System Setup program.
• DIMMs must be installed in each channel starting with the DIMM socket
farthest from the processor, per Table 3-2.
• Memory optimized mode is supported on the sled system board.144 Installing System Components
• Memory sparing and memory mirroring are supported on the sled system
board. Memory sparing requires that all the DIMMs are identically
populated in all 4 channels. One channel will be the spare and not
accessible as system memory until brought online to replace a failing
channel. For memory mirroring, two channels operate as mirrors for each
other, identical DIMMs must be installed in the same slots across both
channels.
Supported DIMM Configuration
For the sequence of the 16 DIMM sockets, see Figure 3-13. When you insert
the DIMM(s), always start with DIMM_A1. For single processor
configurations, the optimized memory module installation sequence is
A1/A2/A3/A4/A5/A6/A7/A8. See Table 3-2 for dual processor configurations.
Figure 3-13. Memory Slot Locations
1 DIMM_A3 2 DIMM_A7
3 DIMM_A4 4 DIMM_A8
5 DIMM_B1 6 DIMM_B5
7 DIMM_B2 8 DIMM_B6
9 DIMM_B8 10 DIMM_B4
11 DIMM_B7 12 DIMM_B3
13 DIMM_A6 14 DIMM_ A2
15 DIMM_A5 16 DIMM_A1Installing System Components 145
NOTE: An empty DIMM socket is marked as " ". For best performance, all the
memory modules installed must be of the same speed, capacity, and from the same
manufacturer.
Table 3-2. Memory Module Configuration—Single Processor
DIMM
QTY
Processor 1
Channel A Channel B Channel C Channel D
DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM
A1 A5 A2 A6 A3 A7 A4 A8
1
2
3
4
6
8
Table 3-3. Memory Module Configuration—Dual Processors
DIMM
QTY
Processor 1 Processor 2
Channel A Channel B Channel C Channel D Channel A Channel B Channel C Channel D
DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM DIMM
A1 A5 A2 A6 A3 A7 A4 A8 B1 B5 B2 B6 B3 B7 B4 B8
2
6
8
12
16 146 Installing System Components
Removing Memory Modules
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
WARNING: The memory modules are hot to the touch for some time after the
system has been powered down. Allow time for the memory modules to cool
before handling them. Handle the memory modules by the card edges and avoid
touching the components on the memory module.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 135.
3 Locate the memory module sockets. See Figure 3-14.
CAUTION: Handle each memory module only on either card edge, making sure
not to touch the middle of the memory module. To avoid damaging components on
the memory module, remove only one memory module at a time.
4 Simultaneously press down and out on the ejectors at both ends of the
memory module socket until the module is released from the socket.
See Figure 3-14.
5 Lift the module out of the socket. See Figure 3-14.
Figure 3-14. Removing a Memory Module
1 memory module 2 memory module socket ejectors (2)Installing System Components 147
Installing Memory Modules
1 Press down and out on the ejectors on each end of the memory module
socket. See Figure 3-15.
2 Align the memory module correctly with the alignment key of the memory
module socket. See Figure 3-15.
3 Press down firmly on the memory module with your thumbs until the
module snaps into place. See Figure 3-15.
CAUTION: Even pressure during insertion must be applied at both ends of the
module simultaneously to prevent damage to the socket. No pressure should be
applied to the center of the module.
Complete the latching of the module into the socket by applying inward
pressure to the socket ejectors to assure that the ejectors are in a locked
position. When the memory module is properly seated in the socket, the
ejectors on the memory module socket align with the ejectors on other
identical sockets that have memory modules installed.
Figure 3-15. Installing a Memory Module
1 memory module 2 memory module socket ejectors (2)
3 alignment key148 Installing System Components
4 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 136.
5 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
Expansion Card
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
The sled supports a low-profile PCIe x16 expansion card installed in the
expansion card riser. To locate the expansion card riser, see Figure 3-17.
Removing the Expansion Card
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132.
3 Once the front cover is detached, turn it over to expose the expansion card
side. See Figure 3-16.
4 Remove the screw securing the expansion card. See Figure 3-16.
5 Grasp the expansion card by its edges and carefully remove it from the
expansion card riser. See Figure 3-16.
6 If you are removing the card permanently, install a metal filler bracket over
the empty expansion slot opening, and secure with the screw.
NOTE: You must install a filler bracket over an empty expansion slot to maintain
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) certification of the system. The
brackets also keep dust and dirt out of the system and aid in proper cooling and
airflow inside the sled.Installing System Components 149
Figure 3-16. Removing and Installing the Expansion Card
Installing the Expansion Card
CAUTION: Expansion cards can only be installed in the slots on the expansion
card riser. Do not attempt to install expansion cards directly into the riser
connector on the system board.
1 Unpack the expansion card and prepare it for installation. For instructions,
see the documentation accompanying the card.
2 Hold the card by its edges, position the card so that the card edge
connector aligns with the expansion card riser connector on the front
cover. See Figure 3-16.
3 Insert the card edge connector firmly into the riser connector until the
card is fully seated.
4 Replace the screw securing the expansion card. See Figure 3-16.
5 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133.
6 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
1 expansion card 2 screw150 Installing System Components
Expansion Card Riser
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
Removing the Expansion Card Riser
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132.
3 Remove the expansion card. See "Removing the Expansion Card" on
page 148.
4 Remove the two screws securing the expansion card riser to the front cover.
See Figure 3-17.
5 Pull the expansion card riser away from the front cover. See Figure 3-17.
Figure 3-17. Removing and Installing the Expansion Card Riser
1 screws (2) 2 expansion card riserInstalling System Components 151
Installing the Expansion Card Riser
1 Place the expansion card riser into the front cover. See Figure 3-17.
2 Replace the two screws securing the expansion card riser. See Figure 3-17.
3 Replace the expansion card. See "Installing the Expansion Card" on
page 149.
4 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133.
5 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
Mezzanine Cards
The sled supports a variety of optional mezzanine cards.
• Mellanox QDR ConnectX-2 Infiniband mezzanine card
• Mellanox FDR ConnectX-3 Infiniband mezzanine card
• Intel 82599 dual-port 10 GbE mezzanine card
Removing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
The installation and removal procedures of the dual-port and single port
Infiniband mezzanine cards are similar. Following is an example showing the
replacement procedure of a dual-port Infiniband mezzanine card.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132.
3 Remove the two screws securing the Infiniband mezzanine card assembly
to the sled tray. See Figure 3-18.
4 Lift the Infiniband mezzanine card assembly out of the sled tray. See
Figure 3-18.152 Installing System Components
Figure 3-18. Removing and Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card Assembly
5 Remove the screw securing the mezzanine card bridge board to the
bracket. See Figure 3-19.
6 Pull the mezzanine card bridge board away from the mezzanine slot. See
Figure 3-19.
1 screws (2) 2 Infiniband mezzanine card assemblyInstalling System Components 153
Figure 3-19. Removing and Installing the Mezzanine Card Bridge Board
7 Remove the three screws securing the Infiniband mezzanine card to the
bracket. See Figure 3-20.
8 Remove the Infiniband mezzanine card from the bracket. See Figure 3-20.
1 screw 2 mezzanine card bridge board
3 bracket
1
2
3154 Installing System Components
Figure 3-20. Removing and Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card
Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Align the Infiniband mezzanine card with the screw holes on the bracket.
See Figure 3-20.
2 Replace the three screws securing the Infiniband mezzanine card to the
bracket. See Figure 3-20.
3 Install the mezzanine card bridge board into the mezzanine slot on the
Infiniband mezzanine card. See Figure 3-19.
4 Replace the screw securing the mezzanine card bridge board to the
bracket. See Figure 3-19.
5 Lower the Infiniband mezzanine card assembly to the sled tray.
1 Infiniband mezzanine card 2 screws (3)
2
1Installing System Components 155
6 Replace the two screws securing the Infiniband mezzanine card assembly
to the sled tray. See Figure 3-18.
7 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133.
8 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
Removing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132.
3 Remove the two screws securing the 10 GbE mezzanine card assembly to
the sled tray. See Figure 3-21.
4 Lift the 10 GbE mezzanine card assembly out of the sled tray. See
Figure 3-21.
Figure 3-21. Removing and Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card Assembly 156 Installing System Components
5 Remove the screw securing the mezzanine card bridge board to the
bracket. See Figure 3-22.
6 Pull the mezzanine card bridge board away from the mezzanine slot. See
Figure 3-22.
Figure 3-22. Removing and Installing the Mezzanine Card Bridge Board
7 Remove the three screws securing the 10 GbE mezzanine card to the
bracket. See Figure 3-23.
8 Remove the 10 GbE mezzanine card from the bracket. See Figure 3-23.
1 screws (2) 2 10 GbE mezzanine card assembly
1 screw 2 mezzanine card bridge board
3 10 GbE mezzanine card
1
2
3Installing System Components 157
Figure 3-23. Removing and Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card
Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Align the 10 GbE mezzanine card with the screw holes on the bracket. See
Figure 3-23.
2 Replace the three screws securing the 10 GbE mezzanine card to the
bracket. See Figure 3-23.
3 Install the mezzanine card bridge board into the mezzanine slot on the
10 GbE mezzanine card. See Figure 3-22.
1 10 GbE mezzanine card 2 screw (3)
3 mezzanine card bridge board
connector
4 SFP + port 1
5 SFP + port 0
2
1
4 3
5158 Installing System Components
4 Replace the screw securing the mezzanine card bridge board to the
bracket. See Figure 3-22.
5 Lower the 10 GbE mezzanine card assembly to the sled tray. See
Figure 3-21.
6 Replace the two screws securing the 10 GbE mezzanine card assembly to
the sled tray. See Figure 3-21.
7 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133.
8 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
SD Card Reader
Removing the SD Card Reader
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132.
3 Remove the mezzanine card. See "Removing the Infiniband Mezzanine
Card" on page 151 or "Removing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card" on
page 155.
4 If installed, remove the SD card. Locate the SD card slot in the SD card
reader and press inward on the card to release it from the slot and remove
the card. See Figure 3-24.Installing System Components 159
Figure 3-24. Removing and Installing the SD Card
5 Disconnect the SD card reader cable from the SD card reader. See
Figure 3-25.
6 Remove the two screws securing the SD card reader. See Figure 3-25.
7 Lift the SD card reader from the SD card reader support bracket. See
Figure 3-25.
1 SD card 2 SD card slot
1 2160 Installing System Components
Figure 3-25. Removing and Installing the SD Card Reader
Installing the SD Card Reader
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Place the SD card reader on the SD card reader support bracket. See
Figure 3-25.
2 Replace the two screws securing the SD card reader. See Figure 3-25.
3 Connect the SD card reader cable to the SD card reader. See Figure 3-25.
4 If applicable, install the SD card. Hold the SD card with the label side
facing to the right and press the card into the slot to lock into place. See
Figure 3-24.
1 SD card reader cable 2 screws (2)
3 SD card slot 4 SD card reader
5 SD card reader connectorInstalling System Components 161
5 Replace the mezzanine card. See "Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine
Card" on page 154 or "Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card" on
page 157.
6 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133.
7 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
Removing the SD Card Reader Support Bracket
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132.
3 Remove the mezzanine card. See "Removing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card"
on page 155 or "Removing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card" on page 151.
4 Remove the SD card reader. See "Removing the SD Card Reader" on
page 158.
5 Remove the two screws securing the SD card reader support bracket. See
Figure 3-26.
6 Lift the support bracket out of the sled tray. See Figure 3-26.
Figure 3-26. Removing and Installing the SD Card Reader Support Bracket
1 screws (2) 2 SD card reader support bracket162 Installing System Components
Installing the SD Card Reader Support Bracket
1 Align the SD card reader support bracket with the screw holes on the sled
tray. See Figure 3-26.
2 Replace the two screws securing the SD card reader support bracket. See
Figure 3-26.
3 Replace the SD card reader. See "Installing the SD Card Reader" on
page 160.
4 Replace the mezzanine card. See "Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine
Card" on page 154 or "Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card" on
page 157.
5 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133.
6 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
Internal Hard-Drives
The sled supports up to two 2.5-inch hard-drives attached internally to the
sled tray.
Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
CAUTION: Combining SATA and SAS hard-drives in the same sled configuration
is not supported.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the back cover. See "Removing the Back Cover" on page 134.
3 Loosen the thumbscrew securing the hard-drive carrier to the hard-drive
bracket. See Figure 3-27.
4 Slide and lift the hard-drive carrier out of the sled tray. See Figure 3-27.Installing System Components 163
Figure 3-27. Removing and Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier
Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
CAUTION: Combining SATA and SAS hard-drives in the same sled configuration
is not supported.
1 Place the hard-drive carrier into the sled tray and slide into place. See
Figure 3-27.
2 Tighten the thumbscrew to secure the hard-drive carrier in place. See
Figure 3-27.
3 Replace the back cover. See "Installing the Back Cover" on page 135.
4 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
1 thumbscrew 2 hard-drive carrier164 Installing System Components
Removing a Hard-Drive From the Hard-Drive Carrier
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Remove the four screws securing the hard-drive. See Figure 3-28.
2 Lift the hard-drive out of the hard-drive carrier. See Figure 3-28.
Figure 3-28. Removing and Installing a Hard-Drive from the Hard-Drive Carrier
1 hard-drive 2 hard-drive carrier
3 screws (4)Installing System Components 165
Installing a Hard-Drive Into a Hard-Drive Carrier
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Align the hard-drive carrier with the new hard-drive screw holes. See
Figure 3-28.
2 Replace the four screws securing the hard-drive. See Figure 3-28.
Removing the Hard-Drive Tray
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the back cover. See "Removing the Back Cover" on page 134.
3 Remove the internal hard-drives. See "Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on
page 162.
4 Remove the three screws securing the hard-drive tray. See Figure 3-29.
5 Lift the hard-drive tray at an angle and slide the standoff holes on the
hard-drive tray out of the sled tray standoffs. See Figure 3-29.166 Installing System Components
Figure 3-29. Removing and Installing the Hard-Drive Tray
Installing the Hard-Drive Tray
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Insert the sled tray’s standoff holes into the sled tray standoffs. See
Figure 3-29.
2 Replace the two screws securing the hard-drive tray. See Figure 3-29.
3 Replace the internal hard-drives. See "Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on
page 163.
4 Replace the back cover. See "Installing the Back Cover" on page 135.
5 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
1 screws (3) 2 hard-drive tray
3 hard-drive tray standoff holes (2)Installing System Components 167
Interposer Extender
Removing the Interposer Extender
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the back cover. See "Removing the Back Cover" on page 134.
3 Remove the internal hard-drives. See "Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on
page 162.
4 Remove the hard-drive tray. See "Removing the Hard-Drive Tray" on
page 165.
5 Press down the cable-locking tab and disconnect the power cable from the
interposer extender. See Figure 3-30.
6 Remove the two screws securing the interposer extender to the sled tray.
See Figure 3-30.
7 Grasp the interposer extender by its edges and carefully remove it from the
system board connector.
8 Lift the interposer extender out of the sled tray. See Figure 3-30.168 Installing System Components
Figure 3-30. Removing and Installing the Interposer Extender
Installing the Interposer Extender
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Hold the card by its edges, position the interposer extender so that the
edge connector aligns with the system board connector. See Figure 3-30.
2 Insert the card edge connector firmly into the system board connector
until the card is fully seated.
3 Replace the two screws securing the interposer extender to the sled tray.
See Figure 3-30.
4 Connect the power cable to the interposer extender. Press down on the
locking tab to secure the power cable. See Figure 3-30.
1 screws (2) 2 interposer extender
3 power cableInstalling System Components 169
5 Replace the hard-drive tray. See "Installing the Hard-Drive Tray" on
page 166.
6 Replace the internal hard-drives. See "Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on
page 163.
7 Replace the back cover. See "Installing the Back Cover" on page 135.
8 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
Node Power Distribution Board
Removing the Node Power Distribution Board
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the back cover. See "Removing the Back Cover" on page 134.
3 Remove the internal hard-drives. See "Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on
page 162.
4 Remove the hard-drive tray. See "Removing the Hard-Drive Tray" on
page 165.
5 Remove the interposer extender. See "Removing the Interposer Extender"
on page 167.
6 Disconnect all cables from the node power distribution board (NPDB).
See Figure 3-31. When you disconnect the power cable, press down the
cable-locking tab and disconnect the power cable from the NPDB.
Note the routing of the cable on the sled as you remove them from the sled
tray. You must route these cables properly when you replace them to
prevent the cables from being pinched or crimped.
7 Remove the four screws securing the NPDB to the sled tray. See
Figure 3-31.
8 Lift the NPDB out of the sled tray. See Figure 3-31.170 Installing System Components
Figure 3-31. Removing and Installing the Node Power Distribution Board
Installing the Node Power Distribution Board
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Insert the new power distribution board into the right retaining clip at a
45-degree angle, and then press the other end of the board down into the
left retaining clip to secure the board in place. Make sure to align the new
power distribution board with the screw holes on the bracket. See
Figure 3-31.
2 Replace the four screws securing the NPDB. See Figure 3-31.
3 Connect all cables to the NPDB. See Figure 3-31.
1 power cable 2 front panel cable
3 screws (4) 4 management cable
5 node power distribution boardInstalling System Components 171
4 You must route the cables properly on the sled tray to prevent them from
being pinched or crimped.
5 Replace the interposer extender. See "Installing the Interposer Extender"
on page 168.
6 Replace the hard-drive tray. See "Installing the Hard-Drive Tray" on
page 166.
7 Replace the internal hard-drives. See "Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on
page 163.
8 Replace the back cover. See "Installing the Back Cover" on page 135.
9 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
System Battery
Removing the System Battery
WARNING: There is a danger of a new battery exploding if it is incorrectly
installed. Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended
by the manufacturer. See your safety information for additional information.
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132.
3 Locate the battery socket on the system board. See "System Board
Connectors" on page 197.
CAUTION: To avoid damage to the battery connector, you must firmly support the
connector while installing or removing a battery.
4 Press the "-" side of the battery outward to allow the battery to pop out
from the socket.
5 Lift the battery out of the connector. See Figure 3-32.172 Installing System Components
Figure 3-32. Removing and Installing the System Battery
Installing the System Battery
WARNING: There is a danger of a new battery exploding if it is incorrectly
installed. Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended
by the manufacturer. See your safety information for additional information.
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Hold the new battery with the "+" facing the retention clip on the battery
connector. See Figure 3-32.
2 Insert the "-" side of the battery then push the positive side
3 Gently pull the retention clip towards the positive side of the connector
and slide the battery into the connector until the retention clip snaps into
place. See Figure 3-32.
4 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133.
5 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
6 Reconnect the system to the electrical outlet and turn the system on,
including any attached peripherals.
1 system battery 2 connectorInstalling System Components 173
7 Enter the System Setup program to confirm that the battery is operating
properly. See "Using the System Setup Program" on page 45.
8 Enter the correct time and date in the System Setup program's Time and
Date fields.
9 Exit the System Setup program.
System Board
Removing the System Board
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Remove the front cover. See "Removing the Front Cover" on page 132.
3 Remove the back cover. See "Removing the Back Cover" on page 134.
4 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 135.
5 Remove the heat sink. See "Removing a Heat Sink" on page 137.
6 Remove the processor. See "Removing a Processor" on page 140.
7 Remove the memory modules. See "Removing Memory Modules" on
page 146.
8 If installed, remove the SAS mezzanine card, Infiniband mezzanine card,
or 10 GbE mezzanine card. See "Removing the Infiniband Mezzanine
Card" on page 151 or "Removing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card" on
page 155.
9 Remove the SD card reader. See "Removing the SD Card Reader" on
page 158.
10 Remove the SD card reader support bracket. See "Removing the SD Card
Reader Support Bracket" on page 161.
11 Remove the internal hard-drives. See "Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on
page 162.174 Installing System Components
12 Remove the hard-drive tray. See "Removing the Hard-Drive Tray" on
page 165.
13 Remove the interposer extender. See "Removing the Interposer Extender"
on page 167.
14 Remove the node power distribution board. See "Removing the Node
Power Distribution Board" on page 169.
15 Disconnect all cables from the system board. See Figure 3-33.
When you disconnect the power cable, press down the cable-locking tab
and disconnect the power cable from the NPDB. See Figure 3-33.
Note the routing of the cables as you remove it from the sled tray. You
must route these cables properly when you replace them to prevent the
cables from being pinched or crimped.
Figure 3-33. Removing and Installing the Cables
16 Remove the six screws securing the system board. See Figure 3-34.
1 management cable 2 power cable
3 front panel cableInstalling System Components 175
17 Grasp the system board by the edges and lift the system board out of the
sled tray. See Figure 3-34.
Figure 3-34. Removing the System Board
Installing the System Board
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by
warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product.
1 Unpack the new system board.
2 Holding the system board by the edges, slide the system board into the
sled tray. See Figure 3-34.
3 Replace the six screws securing the system board to the sled tray. See
Figure 3-34.
4 Connect all cables to the system board. See Figure 3-33.
1 screws (6) 2 system board
1
2176 Installing System Components
5 You must route the cables properly on the sled tray to prevent them from
being pinched or crimped.
6 Install the node power distribution board. See "Installing the Node Power
Distribution Board" on page 170.
7 Install the interposer extender to the new board. See "Installing the
Interposer Extender" on page 168.
8 Install the hard-drive tray. See "Installing the Hard-Drive Tray" on
page 166.
9 Install the hard-drives. See "Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier" on page 163.
10 Install the SD card reader support bracket. See "Installing the SD Card
Reader Support Bracket" on page 162.
11 Install the SD card reader. See "Installing the SD Card Reader" on
page 160.
12 Transfer the processors to the new system board. See "Removing a
Processor" on page 140 and "Installing a Processor" on page 142.
13 Remove the memory modules and transfer them to the same locations on
the new board. See "Removing Memory Modules" on page 146 and
"Installing Memory Modules" on page 147.
14 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 136.
15 If applicable, install the mezzanine card. See "Installing the Infiniband
Mezzanine Card" on page 154 or "Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card"
on page 157.
16 Install the expansion card. See "Installing the Expansion Card" on
page 149.
17 Replace the front cover. See "Installing the Front Cover" on page 133.
18 Replace the back cover. See "Installing the Back Cover" on page 135.
19 Replace the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.Troubleshooting 177
4
Troubleshooting
Safety First—For You and Your System
WARNING: Whenever you need to lift the system, get others to assist you. To
avoid injury, do not attempt to lift the system by yourself.
WARNING: Before removing the system cover, disconnect all power, then unplug
the AC power cord, and then disconnect all peripherals, and all LAN lines.
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered
by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the
product.
Installation Problems
Perform the following checks if you are troubleshooting an installation
problem:
• Check all cable and power connections (including all rack cable
connections).
• Unplug the power cord and wait for one minute. Then reconnect the
power cord and try again.
• If the network is reporting an error, verify that the system has enough
memory and disk space.
• Remove all added peripherals, one at a time, and try to turn on the system.
If after removing a peripheral the system works, it may be a problem with
the peripheral or a configuration problem between the peripheral and the
system. Contact the peripheral vendor for assistance.178 Troubleshooting
• If the system does not power on, check the LED display. If the power LED
is not on, you may not be receiving AC power. Check the AC power cord to
make sure that it is securely connected.
Troubleshooting System Startup Failure
If your system halts during startup, especially after installing an operating
system or reconfiguring your system’s hardware, check for invalid memory
configurations. These could cause the system to halt at startup without any
video output.
For all other startup issues, note any system messages that appear onscreen.
See "Using the System Setup Program" on page 45 for more information.
Troubleshooting External Connections
Ensure that all external cables are securely attached to the external
connectors on your sled before troubleshooting any external devices.
See Figure 1-1 for the front-panel connectors on the sled.
Troubleshooting the Video Subsystem
1 Check the sled and power connections to the monitor.
2 Check the video interface cabling from the sled to the monitor.
Troubleshooting a USB Device
Use the following steps to troubleshoot a USB keyboard and/or mouse. For
other USB devices, go to step 5.
1 Ensure that the sled is turned on.
2 Disconnect the keyboard and mouse cables from the sled briefly and
reconnect them.
3 If the problem is resolved, restart the sled, enter the System Setup
program, and check if the nonfunctioning USB ports are enabled.
4 Swap the keyboard/mouse with a known-working keyboard/mouse.
5 If another sled is installed, connect the USB device to the sled. If the USB
device works with a different sled, the first sled may be faulty. Troubleshooting 179
If the problem is resolved, replace the faulty keyboard/mouse.
If the problem is not resolved, proceed to the next step to begin
troubleshooting the other USB devices attached to the system.
a Power down all attached USB devices and disconnect them from the
sled.
b Restart the sled and, if your keyboard is functioning, enter the System
Setup program. Verify that all USB ports are enabled. See "USB
Configuration" on page 77.
c If your keyboard is not functioning, you can also use remote access. If
the system is not accessible, see "System Board Jumper Settings" on
page 195 for instructions on setting the NVRAM Clear jumper inside
your system and restoring the BIOS to the default settings.
d Reconnect and turn on each USB device one at a time.
6 If a device causes the same problem, power down the device, replace the
USB cable, and power up the device.
If the problem persists, replace the device.
If all troubleshooting fails, see "Getting Help" on page 203.
Troubleshooting a Serial I/O Device
1 Turn off the sled and any peripheral devices connected to the serial port.
2 Swap the serial interface cable with another working cable, and turn on the
sled and the serial device.
If the problem is resolved, replace the interface cable.
3 Turn off the sled and the serial device, and swap the device with a
comparable device.
4 Turn on the sled and the serial device.
If the problem is resolved, replace the serial device.
If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203.180 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a NIC
1 Restart the sled and check for any system messages pertaining to the NIC
controller.
2 Check the appropriate indicator on the NIC connector. See "NIC Indicator
Codes" on page 14.
• If the link indicator does not light, check all cable connections.
• If the activity indicator does not light, the network driver files might
be damaged or missing.
• Remove and reinstall the drivers if applicable. See the NIC's
documentation.
• Change the auto-negotiation setting, if possible.
• Use another connector on the switch or hub.
If you are using a NIC card instead of an integrated NIC, see the
documentation for the NIC card.
3 Ensure that the appropriate drivers are installed and the protocols are
bound. See the NIC's documentation.
4 Enter the System Setup program and confirm that the NIC ports are
enabled. See "Using the System Setup Program" on page 45.
5 Ensure that the NICs, hubs, and switches on the network are all set to the
same data transmission speed. See the documentation for each network
device.
6 Ensure that all network cables are of the proper type and do not exceed the
maximum length.
If all troubleshooting fails, see "Getting Help" on page 203.Troubleshooting 181
Troubleshooting a Wet Enclosure
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered
by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the
product.
1 Turn off the sleds and attached peripherals
2 Disconnect the enclosure from the electrical outlet or the PDU.
CAUTION: Wait until all of the indicators on the power supplies turn off before
proceeding.
3 Remove all sleds from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
4 Open the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132.
5 Disassemble components from the sled. See "Installing System
Components" on page 125.
• Hard-drives
• Cooling shroud
• Processors and heat sinks
• Memory modules
• Expansion card
• Mezzanine card
• Interposer extender
• Node power distribution board
• SD card reader
6 Remove all server enclosure components. See the PowerEdge C8000
Systems Hardware Owner’s Manual for more information.
7 Let the sled dry thoroughly for at least 24 hours.
8 Reinstall all server enclosure components. See the PowerEdge C8000
Systems Hardware Owner’s Manual for more information.
9 Reinstall all sled components you removed in step 5.
10 Close the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132.182 Troubleshooting
11 Reinstall the sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
12 Reconnect the server enclosure to the electrical outlet or the PDU.
13 Turn on the sleds and attached peripherals.
14 If the system fails to start, see "Getting Help" on page 203.
Troubleshooting a Damaged Enclosure
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered
by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the
product.
1 Turn off the sleds and attached peripherals.
2 Disconnect the enclosure from the electrical outlet or the PDU.
3 Ensure that the following components are properly installed in the
enclosure:
• Power sleds
• Fan modules
• Sleds
4 Ensure that the following components are properly installed in the sled:
• SD card reader
• Node power distribution board
• Interposer extender
• Mezzanine card
• Expansion card
• Memory modules
• Processors and heat sinks
• Cooling shroud
• Hard-drives
5 Ensure that all cables are properly connected.
6 Ensure that all components are properly installed and free of damage. Troubleshooting 183
7 If the system fails to start, see "Getting Help" on page 203.
Troubleshooting the Enclosure Fan Modules
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered
by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the
product.
NOTE: The fan modules are hot-swappable. Remove and replace only one fan
module at a time in the server enclosure that is turned on. Operating the system
without all three fan modules for extended periods of time can cause the system to
overheat. Review the following table before you begin to replace the fan modules.
Table 4-1. Fan Module Thermal Behavior Per Sled
Fan Module
Status
BMC (Processor/Memory)/Server Enclosure Temperature Status
OK/OK OK/Fail Fail/OK Fail/Fail
Fan module
normal/OK
PID,
Chassis ambient
curve A,
Exhaust
temperature
control curve A
PID,
80% PWM
Chassis ambient
curve B,
Exhaust
temperature
control curve A
100% PWM
One fan
module fails
PID,
Chassis ambient
curve C,
Exhaust
temperature
control curve B
100% PWM 100% PWM
Exhaust
temperature
control curve B
100% PWM
System
throttling184 Troubleshooting
1 Locate the faulty fan in the back of the enclosure.
Each fan module has indicators that identify a faulty fan.
2 Remove the enclosure fan module. See the PowerEdge C8000 Systems
Hardware Owner’s Manual for more information.
3 Examine the blades for debris. If debris is present, carefully remove it.
4 Reseat the faulty fan. See the PowerEdge C8000 Hardware’s Owner
Manual for more information.
5 If none of the fan indicators show a fault LED and the blades do not power
on, log into the BMC web interface and check for status messages.
6 If the problem is not resolved, install a new fan.
7 If the new fan does not operate, see "Getting Help" on page 203.
Two fan
modules fail
After 10
minutes of
system
throttling
system will be
forced to shut
down
After 10
minutes of
system
throttling
system will be
forced to shut
down
After 10
minutes of
system
throttling
system will be
forced to shut
down
After 10
minutes of
system
throttling
system will be
forced to shut
down
Three fan
modules fail
System force
shutdown
System force
shutdown
System force
shutdown
System force
shutdown
Table 4-1. Fan Module Thermal Behavior Per Sled
Fan Module
Status
BMC (Processor/Memory)/Server Enclosure Temperature Status
OK/OK OK/Fail Fail/OK Fail/FailTroubleshooting 185
Troubleshooting the Power Sled
CAUTION: Remove and replace one PSU module at a time. Leave a failed PSU
module installed in the power sled until you are ready to replace it. Operating the
system with a power sled removed for extended periods of time can cause the
system to overheat.
NOTE: The 1400 W power supply module in the power sled require a 200-240 V
power source to operate.
1 Locate the power sled to be removed or the power sled that contains the
failed PSU module. The PSU module’s status indicator will either light up
green or amber. If the PSU module is faulty the status indicator lights up
amber.
2 Replace the faulty PSU module in the power sled. See the PowerEdge
C8000 Systems Hardware Owner’s Manual for more information.
NOTE: After installing a power sled with a new PSU module, allow several seconds
for the system to recognize the power supply and to determine if it is working
properly. The status indicator turns green to signify that the module is functioning
properly.
If none of the PSU modules show a fault LED and the sleds do not power
on, log into the BMC web interface and check for status messages. See
Using the Baseboard Management Controller Guide for more information.
If all troubleshooting fails, see "Getting Help" on page 203.
Troubleshooting System Memory
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered
by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the
product.
NOTE: Invalid memory configurations can cause your system to halt at startup
without video output. See "System Memory" on page 143 and verify that your
memory configuration complies with all applicable guidelines.
1 If the system is not operational, turn off the sled and attached peripherals. 186 Troubleshooting
2 After 10 seconds, turn on the sled and attached peripherals and note the
messages on the screen.
Go to step 13 if an error message appears indicating a fault with a specific
memory module.
3 Enter the System Setup program and check the system memory settings.
See "Main Menu" on page 52. Make any changes to the memory settings, if
needed.
If the memory settings match the installed memory but a problem is still
indicated, go to step 13.
4 Turn off the sled and attached peripherals.
5 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
6 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 135.
7 Check the memory channels and ensure that they are populated correctly.
See "Supported DIMM Configuration" on page 144.
8 Reseat the memory modules in their sockets. See "Removing Memory
Modules" on page 146 and "Installing Memory Modules" on page 147.
9 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 136.
10 Reinstall the sled into the enclosure. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
11 Turn on the sled and attached peripherals.
12 Enter the System Setup program and check the system memory settings.
See "Main Menu" on page 52.
If the problem is not resolved, proceed with the next step.
13 Turn off the sled and attached peripherals.
14 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
15 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 135.
16 If a diagnostic test or error message indicates a specific memory module as
faulty, swap or replace the module.Troubleshooting 187
17 To troubleshoot an unspecified faulty memory module, replace the
memory module in the first DIMM socket with a module of the same type
and capacity. See "Installing Memory Modules" on page 147.
18 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 136.
19 Reinstall the sled into the enclosure. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
20 Turn on the sled and attached peripherals.
21 As the system boots, observe any error message that appears and the
diagnostic indicators on the front of the system.
22 If the memory problem is still indicated, repeat step 13 through step 21 for
each memory module installed.
23 If the problem persists after all memory modules have been checked, see
"Getting Help" on page 203.
Troubleshooting a Hard-Drive
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered
by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the
product.
CAUTION: This troubleshooting procedure can destroy data stored on the
hard-drive. Before you proceed, back up all files on the hard-drive.
1 If your sled has a RAID controller and your hard-drives are configured in a
RAID array, perform the following steps:
a Restart the sled and enter the host adapter configuration utility
program by pressing for a RAID controller or
for a SAS mezzanine card.
See the documentation supplied with the host adapter for information
about the configuration utility.
b Ensure that the hard-drive(s) have been configured correctly for the
RAID array.
c Take the hard-drive offline and reseat the drive. See "Removing a
Hard-Drive Carrier" on page 162.188 Troubleshooting
d Exit the configuration utility and allow the system to boot to the
operating system.
2 Ensure that the required device drivers for your controller card are installed
and are configured correctly. See the operating system documentation for
more information.
3 Restart the sled, enter the System Setup program, and verify that the
controller is enabled and the drives appear in the System Setup program.
See "Using the System Setup Program" on page 45.
If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203.
Troubleshooting a Storage Controller
NOTE: When troubleshooting a SAS RAID controller, also see the documentation
for your operating system and the controller.
1 Enter the System Setup program and ensure that the SAS controller is
enabled. See "Using the System Setup Program" on page 45.
2 Restart the sled and press the applicable key sequence to enter the
configuration utility program.
• for a LSI SAS 2008 mezzanine card
• for a LSI 9265-8i SAS RAID Card
See the controller’s documentation for information about configuration
settings.
3 Check the configuration settings, make any necessary corrections, and
restart the system.
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered
by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the
product.
4 Turn off the sled and attached peripherals.
5 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
6 Open the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132.Troubleshooting 189
7 Ensure that the controller card is firmly seated into the system board
connector. See "Installing the Expansion Card" on page 149.
8 If you have a battery-cached SAS RAID controller, ensure that the RAID
battery is properly connected and, if applicable, the memory module on
the RAID card is properly seated.
9 Ensure that the cables are firmly connected to the storage controller.
10 Close the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132.
11 Reinstall the sled into the enclosure. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
12 Turn on the sled and attached peripherals.
13 If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203.
Troubleshooting Expansion Cards
NOTE: When troubleshooting an expansion card, see the documentation for your
operating system and the expansion card.
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered
by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the
product.
1 Turn off the sled and attached peripherals.
2 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
3 Open the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132.
4 Ensure that each expansion card is firmly seated in its connector. See
"Installing the Expansion Card" on page 149.
5 Close the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132.
6 Reinstall the sled into the enclosure. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
7 Turn on the sled and attached peripherals.
8 If the problem is not resolved, see "Getting Help" on page 203.190 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Processors
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered
by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the
product.
1 Turn off the sled and attached peripherals.
2 Remove the sled from the server enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on
page 129.
3 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 135.
4 Ensure that each heat sink is properly installed. See "Installing a Heat
Sink" on page 139.
5 Ensure that each processor is properly installed. See "Installing a Processor"
on page 142.
6 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 136.
7 Reinstall the sled into the enclosure. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
8 Turn on the sled and attached peripherals.
9 If the problem persists, turn off the sled and attached peripherals.
10 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
11 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 135.
12 Remove processor 2. See "Removing a Processor" on page 140.
13 Replace the cooling shroud. See "Installing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 136.
14 Reinstall the sled into the enclosure. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
15 Turn on the sled and attached peripherals.
If the problem persists, the processor is faulty. See "Getting Help" on
page 203.
16 Turn off the sled and attached peripherals.Troubleshooting 191
17 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
18 Remove the cooling shroud. See "Removing the Cooling Shroud" on
page 135.
19 Replace processor 1 with processor 2. See "Installing a Processor" on
page 142.
20 Repeat step 13 through step 16.
If you have tested both the processors and the problem persists, the system
board is faulty. See "Getting Help" on page 203.
Troubleshooting the System Board
CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You
should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your
product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and
support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered
by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the
product.
1 Remove the sled from the enclosure. See "Removing a Sled" on page 129.
2 Open the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132.
3 Locate the NVRAM clear jumper on the system board.
4 Clear the NVRAM.
5 Close the sled. See "Sled Covers" on page 132.
6 If there is still a problem with the compute sled, remove and reinstall the
sled. See "Installing a Sled" on page 130.
If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203.192 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting the System Battery
NOTE: If the system is turned off for long periods of time (for weeks or months), the
NVRAM may lose its system configuration information. This situation is caused by a
defective battery.
1 Re-enter the time and date through the System Setup program. See
"System Setup Options at Boot" on page 46.
2 Turn off the sled and remove it from the enclosure for at least one hour.
3 Reconnect the sled to the server enclosure and turn on the sled.
4 Enter the System Setup program.
If the date and time are not correct in the System Setup program, replace
the battery. See "Removing the System Battery" on page 171.
CAUTION: You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as
authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or
telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not
authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety
instructions that came with the product.
If the problem is not resolved by replacing the battery, see "Getting Help"
on page 203.
NOTE: Some software may cause the system time to speed up or slow down. If the
system seems to operate normally except for the time kept in the System Setup
program, the problem may be caused by software rather than by a defective
battery.Troubleshooting 193
IRQ Assignment Conflicts
Most PCI devices can share an IRQ with another device, but they cannot use
an IRQ simultaneously. To avoid this type of conflict, see the documentation
for each PCI device for specific IRQ requirements.
PCI IRQ pool definition is the BIOS code assigned at run time.
IRQ Line Assignment IRQ Line Assignment
IRQ0 8254 timer IRQ8 Real-time clock
IRQ1 Keyboard controller IRQ9 PCI IRQ pool definition
IRQ2 Cascade for IRQ9 IRQ10 PCI IRQ pool definition
IRQ3 Default for COM2 IRQ11 PCI IRQ pool definition
IRQ4 Default for COM1 IRQ12 Mouse controller
IRQ5 PCI IRQ pool definition IRQ13 Processor
IRQ6 PCI IRQ pool definition IRQ14 Primary IDE controller
IRQ7 PCI IRQ pool definition IRQ15 Secondary IDE controller194 TroubleshootingJumpers and Connectors 195
5
Jumpers and Connectors
This section provides specific information about the system jumpers. It also
provides some basic information on jumpers and switches and describes the
connectors on the various boards in the system.
System Board Jumper Settings
Figure 5-1. System Board Jumper Settings
Table 5-1. System Board Jumper Settings
Item Jumper Setting Description
1 Service mode (default) The flash security setting is enabled.
The flash security and NVRAM clear
signal is disabled.196 Jumpers and Connectors
2 NVRAM clear (default) The configuration settings are retained at
system boot.
The configuration settings are cleared at
the next system boot.
3 ME firmware
recovery
(default) The ME firmware recovery jumper is
disabled.
The ME firmware recovery jumper
enables ME firmware recovery mode.
4 BIOS recovery (default) The BIOS recovery jumper is disabled.
The BIOS recovery jumper enables the
BIOS flash memory special recovery
mode.
5 Password enable (default) The password feature is enabled.
The password feature is disabled.
6 Power button
pass
(default) The BMC triggers a power button signal.
The power button passthrough signal is
triggered.
Table 5-1. System Board Jumper Settings
Item Jumper Setting DescriptionJumpers and Connectors 197
System Board Connectors
Figure 5-2. System Board Connectors
1 USB connectors (2) 2 PCIe x8 mezzanine slot
3 SD card reader (internal USB)
connector
4 internal SAS mezzanine slot
5 mini-SAS connector 0 6 onboard SATA connector 4
7 onboard SATA connector 5 8 system battery
9 DIMM sockets for processor 1
DIMMA3 socket
DIMMA4 socket
DIMMA7 socket
DIMMA8 socket
10 processor 1
11 DIMM sockets for processor 2
DIMMB1 socket
DIMMB2 socket
DIMMB5 socket
DIMMB6 socket
12 main power connector
13 internal hard-drive interposer 14 SGPIO connector 2
15 internal serial connector 16 front panel connector 1
17 PCIe x16 back GPGPU 18 processor 2198 Jumpers and Connectors
19 DIMM sockets for processor 2
DIMMB3 socket
DIMMB4 socket
DIMMB7 socket
DIMMB3 socket
20 DIMM sockets for processor 1
DIMMA1 socket
DIMMA2 socket
DIMMA5 socket
DIMMA6 socket
21 LAN LED connector 22 PCIe x16 slot 1
23 PCIe x16 slot 2 24 SGPIO connector 1
25 power button/power-on indicator 26 VGA connector
27 serial connector 28 internal BMC serial console
connector
29 BMC management port 30 consolidated BMC cable
connector
31 NIC2 connector (RJ45) 32 NIC1 connector (RJ45)
33 system identification indicatorJumpers and Connectors 199
Interposer Extender Connectors
Figure 5-3. Interposer Extender Connectors
1 SATA connector 4 2 2-pin power connector
3 SATA connector 5 4 IPMB connector
5 SGPIO connector 6 SATA connector 0
7 SATA connector 1 8 SATA connector 2
9 SATA connector 3200 Jumpers and Connectors
SD Card Reader Connectors
Figure 5-4. SD Card Reader Connectors
1 SD card reader cable connector 2 SD card connectorJumpers and Connectors 201
Node Power Distribution Board Connectors
Figure 5-5. Node Power Distribution Board Connectors
1 power/throttle connector 2 I2C connector
3 12V S2 power connector 4 HDD1 power connector
5 power connector 6 HDD3 power connector
7 HDD2 power connector 8 system board power connector
9 12 V S1 power connector 10 remote sensor connector
11 hard-drive LED indicator
connector
12 system board control connector
13 LAN pass-through connector 202 Jumpers and ConnectorsGetting Help 203
6
Getting Help
Contacting Dell
For customers in the United States, call 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355).
NOTE: If you do not have an active Internet connection, you can find contact
information on your purchase invoice, packing slip, bill, or Dell product catalog.
Dell provides several online and telephone-based support and service options.
Availability varies by country and product, and some services may not be
available in your area. To contact Dell for sales, technical support, or
customer service issues:
1 Visit support.dell.com.
2 Click your country/region at the bottom of the page. For a full listing of
country/region, click All.
3 Click All Support from Support menu.
4 Select the appropriate service or support link based on your need.
5 Choose the method of contacting Dell that is convenient for you.204 Getting HelpFILE LOCATION: D:\Projects\User Guide\Server\Dell\Zeus\HOM\SWC Sled\for
Dell\C8220\C8220_HOM_bk0IX.fm
Index 205
Index
A
about your system, 11
B
back cover
installing, 135
removing, 134
C
command line interfaces, 90
connectors
system board, 197
console redirection
configuring, 47
cooling shroud
installing, 136
removing, 135
D
Dell
contacting, 203
E
Ethernet mezzanine card
installing, 157
removing, 155-157
expansion card
installing, 149
removing, 148
expansion card riser
installing, 151
removing, 150
F
features
front panel, 12
front cover
installing, 133
removing, 132
H
hard-drive
installing, 165
removing, 164
hard-drive carrier
installing, 163
removing, 162FILE LOCATION: D:\Projects\User Guide\Server\Dell\Zeus\HOM\SWC Sled\for
Dell\C8220\C8220_HOM_bk0IX.fm
206 Index
hard-drive tray
installing, 166
removing, 165
heat sink
installing, 139
removing, 137
I
indicator
front panel, 12
NIC, 14
power, 13
system identity, 13
indicator codes
power and system board, 16
Infiniband mezzanine card
installing, 154
removing, 151-154
installing
back cover, 135
cooling shroud, 136
Ethernet mezzanine card, 157
expansion card, 149
expansion card riser, 151
front cover, 133
hard-drive, 165
hard-drive carrier, 163
hard-drive tray, 166
heat sink, 139
Infiniband mezzanine card, 154
interposer extender, 168
memory modules, 147
NPDB, 170
processor, 142-143
SD card, 132
SD card reader, 160-161
SD card reader bracket, 162
sled, 130
sled blank, 131
system battery, 172
system board, 175
interposer extender
installing, 168
removing, 167
IPMI command list, 113
M
memory modules (DIMMs)
configuration, 144-145
installation guidelines, 143
installing, 147
removing, 146
N
NPDB
installing, 170
removing, 169FILE LOCATION: D:\Projects\User Guide\Server\Dell\Zeus\HOM\SWC Sled\for
Dell\C8220\C8220_HOM_bk0IX.fm
Index 207
P
POST error codes, 19
power management settings, 122
processor
installing, 142-143
removing, 140-141
R
removing
back cover, 134
cooling shroud, 135
Ethernet mezzanine
card, 155-157
expansion card, 148
expansion card riser, 150
front cover, 132
hard- drive carrier, 162
hard-drive, 164
hard-drive tray, 165
heat sink, 137
Infiniband mezzanine
card, 151-154
interposer extender, 167
memory modules, 146
NPDB, 169
processor, 140-141
SD card, 131
SD card reader, 158-160
SD card reader bracket, 161
sled, 129
sled blank, 130
system battery, 171
system board, 173
S
safety, 177
SD card
installing, 132
removing, 131
SD card reader
installing, 160-161
removing, 158, 160
SD card reader bracket
installing, 162
removing, 161
service tag, 18
sled
front features, 12
installing, 130
removing, 129
sled blank
installing, 131
removing, 130
sled front features, 12
system battery
installing, 172
removing, 171
system board
connectors, 197
installing, 175
jumper settings, 195
removing, 173
system features
accessing, 11
System log
See system setup screenFILE LOCATION: D:\Projects\User Guide\Server\Dell\Zeus\HOM\SWC Sled\for
Dell\C8220\C8220_HOM_bk0IX.fm
Index 208
system sensor overview, 38
system setup
active state power management
configuration, 75
BMC LAN configuration, 82
chassis power management, 58
chassis PSU configuration, 59
CPU configuration, 62
embedded network devices, 72
emergency throttling, 61
memory configuration, 65
PCI configuration, 70
PCI slot configuration, 76
power capping, 60
power management, 56
prefetch configuration, 64
remote access configuration, 83
SATA configuration, 67
security settings, 78
USB configuration, 77
system setup program
entering, 46
general help, 47
system setup menu, 45
system setup screen
advanced, 55
boot, 86
exit, 88
main, 52
security, 78
server, 80
T
troubleshooting
damaged enclosure, 182
enclosure fan modules, 183
expansion cards, 189
external connections, 178
hard-drive, 187
power sled, 185
processors, 190
RTC battery, 192
serial device, 179
storage controller, 188
system board, 191
system memory, 185
USB device, 178
video, 178
wet enclosure, 181
Dell 2145cn
Multifunktionsprinter
Brugerhåndbog
www.dell.com | support.dell.com2 | Funktioner i dit nye laserprodukt
funktioner i dit nye laserprodukt
Din nye maskine er udstyret med et antal specielle funktioner, der forbedrer kvaliteten af de dokumenter, du udskriver.
Med denne maskine kan du:
Udskrive i enestående kvalitet og med høj hastighed
• Du kan udskrive i et fuldt farveområde med cyan, magenta,
gul og sort.
• Du kan skrive ud med en opløsning på op til 2.400 x 600 dpi.
Se Softwareafsnit.
• Maskinen kan udskrive på papir i A4-format med en
hastighed på op til 20 sider pr. minut og på papir i Letterformat med en hastighed på op til 21 sider pr. minut.
Håndtere mange forskellige typer printbart materiale
• Universalbakken understøtter brevhoved, konvolutter, etiketter,
medier i brugerdefinerede størrelser, postkort og kraftigt papir.
Universalbakken kan rumme op til 100 ark almindeligt papir.
• Bakke 1 til 250 ark og den ekstra bakke til 500 ark
understøtter almindeligt papir i forskellige størrelser.
Udarbejde professionelle dokumenter
• Udskriv vandmærker. Du kan tilpasse dine dokumenter
med ord, som f.eks. ”Fortroligt”. Se Softwareafsnit.
• Udskrive plakater. Teksten og billederne på hver side
i dokumentet forstørres og udskrives på tværs af arkene,
som derefter kan limes sammen til en plakat. Se Softwareafsnit.
• Du kan udskrive fortrykte formularer og brevpapir på almindeligt
papir. Se Softwareafsnit.
Spare tid og penge
• Du kan udskrive flere sider på et enkelt ark og derved spare
papir.
• Maskinen sparer strøm, fordi strømforbruget nedsættes
automatisk, når den ikke er i brug.
• Du kan spare papir ved at udskrive på begge sider af
papiret (dobbeltsidet udskrivning). Se Softwareafsnit.
Udvide maskinens kapacitet
• Maskinen har et ekstra hukommelsesstik til udvidelse af
hukommelsen (se ”Ekstraudstyr” på side 85).
• Zoran IPS Emulation* kompatibel med PostScript 3 (PS)
aktiverer PS-udskrivning.
.
Udskrive i forskellige miljøer
• Du kan udskrive fra Windows 2000 og Windows XP/2003/
2008/Vista samt fra Linux- og Macintosh-systemer.
• Maskinen er udstyret med et USB-interface og et netværks
interface.
Kopiere originaler i flere formater
• Maskinen kan udskrive flere kopier af et billede fra en original
på en enkelt side.
• Der er specielle funktioner til at slette katalog- og avisbaggrund.
• Udskriftskvaliteten og billedstørrelsen kan justeres
og forbedres samtidigt.
Scanne originalerne og sende dem med det samme
• Scanne i farver og bruge den præcise komprimering i form
af JPEG-, TIFF- og PDF-formaterne.
• Scanne og hurtigt sende filer til flere destinationer ved brug
af netværksscanning.
Angive et bestemt tidspunkt for overførsel af en fax
(ekstraudstyr)
• Du kan angive et bestemt tidspunkt at sende en fax og du kan
også sende faxen til flere gemte destinationer.
• Efter overførslen kan maskinen udskrive faxrapporter i henhold
til indstillingen.
* Zoran IPS Emulation kompatibel med PostScript 3
© Copyright 1995-2005, Zoran Corporation. Alle rettigheder
forbeholdes. Zoran, Zoran-logoet, IPS/PS3 og OneImage er
varemærker, der tilhører Zoran Corporation.
* 136 PS3-skrifttyper
Omfatter UFST og MicroType fra Monotype Imaging Inc.
SPECIALFUNKTIONERFunktioner i dit nye laserprodukt | 3
FUNKTIONER PR. MODEL
Maskinen er udviklet til at understøtte alle dine dokumentbehov – fra udskrivning og kopiering til mere avancerede netværksløsninger til din virksomhed.
Basisfunktionerne i denne maskine omfatter følgende:
( : inkluderet, O: ekstraudstyr)
OM DENNE BRUGERVEJLEDNING
Denne brugervejledning indeholder oplysninger om maskinens grundlæggende funktionalitet samt en detaljeret forklaring på hvert trin under anvendelsen.
Både nye og øvede brugere kan bruge denne vejledning til installation og brug af maskinen.
Nogle udtryk i denne vejledning bruges som synonymer, som beskrevet herunder:
• Dokument betyder det samme som original.
• Papir er synonymt med medie eller udskriftsmedie.
Følgende tabel beskriver de konventioner, der anvendes i denne vejledning:
FUNKTIONER Dell 2145cn
USB 2.0
USB-hukommelsesgrænseflade
DADF (Duplex Automatic Document Feeder)
Harddisk (ekstraudstyr) O
Kabelbaseret 10/100 Base TX lokalnetværk
Duplex (2 sidet) udskrivning
FAX
KONVENTION BESKRIVELSE EKSEMPEL
Fed Bruges til tekst på skærmen eller udtryk, der er trykt på maskinen. Start
Bemærk Bruges til at angive yderligere oplysninger eller detaljerede specifikationer om
maskinens funktionalitet og egenskaber.
Datoformatet kan variere fra land til
land.
Forsigtig Bruges til at give brugerne oplysninger for at beskytte maskinen mod mulige
mekaniske beskadigelser eller fejlfunktion.
Berør ikke tonerpatronens grønne
underside.
Fodnote Bruges til at angive yderligere detaljerede oplysninger om bestemte ord eller udtryk. a. sider pr. minut
(Se side 1 for at få
yderligere oplysninger)
Bruges til at føre brugere til referencesiden for yderligere oplysninger. (Se side 1 for at få yderligere oplysninger)4 | Funktioner i dit nye laserprodukt
FLERE OPLYSNINGER
Du kan finde oplysninger om klargøring og brug af maskinen i de vejledninger og på det websted, der er angivet nedenfor. Du kan vælge at udskrive vejledningerne
eller få dem vist på skærmen.
Vejledning til hurtig
installation
Giver oplysninger om opsætning af maskinen, og dette kræver, at du følger instruktionerne i vejledningen for at forberede maskinen.
Onlinebrugervejledning
Indeholder trinvise beskrivelser af, hvordan du bruger alle maskinens funktioner. Desuden kan du se, hvordan maskinen skal
vedligeholdes, og hvordan du løser problemer og installerer tilbehør.
Denne brugervejledning indeholder også Softwareafsnit for at give dig oplysninger om, hvordan du udskriver dokumenter med
maskinen på forskellige operativsystemer, samt hvordan du bruger den medfølgende software.
Du kan få adgang til brugervejledningen på andre sprog i mappen Manual på cd’en med printersoftware.
Hjælp til
printerdriveren
Indeholder hjælp til printerdriverens egenskaber og vejledning om indstilling af udskrivningsegenskaber. Du åbner skærmbilledet
med hjælp til printerdriveren ved at klikke på Hjælp i dialogboksen med Printeregenskaber.
Dells websted Hvis du har adgang til internettet, kan du få hjælp og support, finde printerdrivere og vejledninger og få andre oplysninger på Dells
websted: www.dell.com eller support.dell.com.Sikkerhedsoplysninger | 5
sikkerhedsoplysninger
VIGTIGE FORSKRIFTER OG SIKKERHEDSOPLYSNINGER
Betydningen af ikoner og skilte i denne brugerhåndbog:
Disse advarselsskilte er anbragt for at forhindre, at du og andre kommer til skade. Følg dem udtrykkeligt. Når du har læst dette
afsnit, skal du opbevare det et sikkert sted til fremtidig reference.
ADVARSEL
Farer eller usikre rutiner kan medføre risiko for alvorlig personskade eller dødsfald.
FORSIGTIG
Farer eller usikre rutiner kan medføre risiko for mindre personskade eller beskadigelse af genstande.
FORSIGTIG
Følg disse grundlæggende sikkerhedsforanstaltninger for at reducere risikoen for ild, eksplosion, elektrisk stød
eller personskade.
Forsøg IKKE at.
Adskil IKKE.
Berør IKKE.
Følg udtrykkeligt retningslinjerne.
Træk stikket ud af stikkontakten.
Kontroller, at maskinen er jordet for at forhindre elektrisk stød.
Ring til servicecentret for at få hjælp.
1. Sørg for at gennemlæse og forstå alle instruktioner.
2. Brug sund fornuft ved betjening af elektrisk udstyr.
3. Følg alle advarsler og instruktioner på maskinen og i den medfølgende dokumentation.
4. Hvis en betjeningsinstruktion ser ud til at være i strid med sikkerhedsoplysningerne, skal du rette dig efter sikkerhedsoplysningerne.
Du kan have misforstået instruktionen. Hvis du ikke kan finde en løsning på problemet, kan du rådføre dig med en salgs- eller
servicerepræsentant.
5. Træk stikket ud af stikkontakten og/eller telefonstikket, inden maskinen rengøres. Undgå brug af flydende rengøringsmidler eller
midler på sprayflaske. Brug kun en fugtig klud til rengøring.
6. Maskinen må ikke placeres på en ustabil vogn, et ustabilt stativ eller bord. Den kan falde ned og forårsage alvorlig beskadigelse.
7. Maskinen må aldrig placeres på, i nærheden af eller over en radiator, et varmeapparat, airconditionanlæg eller en
ventilationsåbning.
8. Placer ikke noget på strømledningen. Placer ikke maskinen, så ledningerne udsættes for unødigt slid ved, at andre træder på dem.
9. Stikkontakter og forlængerledninger må ikke overbelastes. Dette kan medføre reduceret ydelse og kan føre til fare for brand eller
elektrisk stød.
10. Pas på, at kæledyr ikke tygger på strømledningen eller ledningerne til telefon eller pc.
11. Skub aldrig genstande ind i maskinen gennem kabinettet eller åbninger i kabinettet. De kan komme i kontakt med farlige,
strømførende steder, og der kan opstå fare for brand eller elektrisk stød. Pas på ikke at spilde væske på eller ind i maskinen.
12. Reducer risikoen for elektrisk stød ved aldrig at skille maskinen ad. Bring maskinen til en kvalificeret servicetekniker, hvis reparation
er påkrævet. Hvis dæksler åbnes eller fjernes, kan dette medføre fare for elektrisk stød eller andre farlige situationer. Ukorrekt
samling af maskinen kan medføre elektrisk stød, når maskinen efterfølgende anvendes. 6 | Sikkerhedsoplysninger
13. Tag stikket fra maskinen ud af telefonstikket, pc’en og vægstikket, og overlad serviceopgaver til kvalificerede teknikere i følgende
situationer:
• Hvis nogen del af strømledningen, stikket eller tilslutningskablet beskadiges eller bliver slidt.
• Hvis der er spildt væske i maskinen.
• Hvis maskinen har været udsat for regn eller anden form for vand.
• Hvis maskinen ikke fungerer korrekt, når instruktionerne er blevet fulgt.
• Hvis maskinen er blevet tabt, eller kabinettet ser ud til at være beskadiget.
• Hvis maskinens ydelse pludselig ændres mærkbart.
14. Juster kun indstillinger, som beskrives i brugervejledningen. Ukorrekt justering af andre indstillinger kan føre til beskadigelser, og det
kan kræve omfattende reparation af kvalificerede serviceteknikere at få maskinen til at fungere normalt igen.
15. Undgå at anvende maskinen under tordenvejr. Der er en lille risiko for at få elektrisk stød fra lynnedslag. Træk om muligt stikkene til
både lysnet og telefon ud, indtil tordenvejret er overstået.
16. Den strømledning, der følger med maskinen, bør anvendes, for at maskinen kan bruges på sikker vis. Hvis du bruger en ledning, der
er længere end 2 m med en 110 V maskine, skal den være på 16 AWG
a
eller større.
17. Brug kun en telefonledning af typen 26 AWG eller større.
18. GEM DISSE INSTRUKTIONER.
19. Denne maskine kan kun benyttes i det land, hvor du har købt den (pga. forskellig spænding, frekvens,
telekommunikationskonfiguration, etc.).
a.AWG: American Wire GuageIndhold | 7
2 Funktioner i dit nye laserprodukt
5 Sikkerhedsoplysninger
INTRODUKTION
12
12 Oversigt over printeren
12 Set forfra
12 Set bagfra
13 Oversigt over kontrolpanelet
14 Status Indikatorernes betydning
14 Godkender status for tonerpatronen
15 Menuoversigt
16 Medfølgende software
16 Printerdriverfunktioner
16 Printerdriver
16 PostScript-driver
SÅDAN KOMMER DU I GANG
17
17 Opsætning af hardwaren
17 Udskrivning af testside
17 Konfiguration af netværket
17 Supported network environments
18 Konfiguration af netværksprotokol via maskinen
18 Brug af programmet SetIP
18 Systemkrav
18 Microsoft® Windows®
18 Macintosh
19 Linux
19 Installation af softwaren
20 Maskinens grundlæggende indstillinger
20 Højdejustering
20 Ændring af sprog i displayet
21 Indstilling af dato og klokkeslæt
21 Ændring af tidsformatet
21 Ændring af standardfunktionen
21 Indstilling af lyde
21 Indtastning af tegn ved hjælp af taltastaturet
22 Sådan bruger du sparetilstandene
22 Indstilling af timeout for udskriftsjob
22 Auto fortsæt
23 Ændring af skrifttypeindstillinger
ILÆGNING AF ORIGINALER OG UDSKRIFTSMEDIER
24
24 Ilægning af originaler
24 På scannerglaspladen
24 I DADF’en
25 Valg af udskriftsmedier
26 Specifikationer for udskriftsmedie
27 Mediestørrelser, der understøttes i de forskellige tilstande
27 Retningslinjer for specielle udskriftsmedier
28 Ændring af papirstørrelsen i papirbakken
29 Placering af papir
29 Placering af papir i bakke 1 eller den valgfri bakke
29 Ilægning af papir i universalbakken
30 Justering af outputsupporten
30 Ved papir i Letter-størrelse
30 Ved papir i A4- eller Legal-størrelse
31 Indstilling af papirstørrelse og type
indhold8 | Indhold
indhold
KOPIERING
32
32 Valg af papirbakke
32 Kopiering
32 Ændring af indstillingerne for hver kopi
32 Mørkhed
32 Originaltype
32 Formindsket eller forstørret kopi
33 Ændring af scanningsstørrelsesindstillingerne
33 Ændring af standardindstillingerne for kopiering
33 Kopiering af ID-kort
33 Brug af de specielle kopifunktioner
33 Sortering
34 2- eller 4-op-kopiering
34 Plakatkopiering
34 Klonkopiering
34 Sletning af baggrundsbilleder
34 Bogkopiering
35 Margenskift
35 Slet kant
35 Justering af gråtone ved kopiering
35 Udskrivning på begge sider af papiret
36 Indstilling af timeout for kopiering
SCANNING
37
37 Grundlæggende om scanning
37 Scanning fra kontrolpanelet
37 Angivelse af scanningsoplysninger i Dell Scan Manager.
37 Scanning til programmer
38 Scanning ved hjælp af en netværksforbindelse
38 Klargøring til netværksscanning
39 Scanning til e-mail
40 Scanning til en FTP-server
40 Scanning til en SMB-server
40 Ændring af indstillingerne for hvert scanningsjob
40 Ændring af standardscanningsindstillinger
40 Automatisk udskrivning af scanningsbekræftelse
41 Konfiguration af adressekartoteket
41 Registrering af hurtignumre til e-mail-adresser
41 Konfiguration af gruppenumre til e-mail-adresser
41 Hentning af globale e-mail-adresser fra LDAP-serveren
41 Brug af poster fra adressekartoteket
41 Søgning efter en adresse i adressekartoteket
42 Udskrivning af adressekartoteket
42 Scanning af begge sider af papiret
GRUNDLÆGGENDE UDSKRIVNING
43
43 Sådan udskriver du et dokument
43 Annullering af et udskriftsjob
FAX
44
44 Afsendelse af en fax
44 Indstilling af faxhovedet
44 Justering af dokumentindstillinger
45 Automatisk afsendelse af en fax
45 Manuel afsendelse af en fax
45 Bekræftelse af en transmission
45 Automatisk genkaldIndhold | 9
indhold
45 Genopkald til det senest kaldte nummer
45 Sender faxer på begge sider af papiret
45 Modtagelse af en fax
45 Valg af papirbakke
45 Ændring af modtagetilstand
46 Automatisk modtagelse i tilstanden Fax
46 Manuel modtagelse i tilstanden Tel
46 Manuel modtagelse med en ekstern telefon
46 Automatisk modtagelse i tilstanden Ans/Fax
46 Modtagelse af faxer i tilstanden DRPD
47 Modtagelse i sikker modtagetilstand
47 Aktivering af sikker modtagetilstand
47 Modtagelse af faxer i hukommelsen
47 Andre måder at faxe på
47 Afsendelse af en fax til flere destinationer
47 Afsendelse af en udskudt fax
48 Afsendelse af en prioriteret fax
48 Videresendelse af faxer
49 Faxopsætning
49 Ændring af faxindstillingerne
50 Ændring af standarddokumentindstillingerne
50 Automatisk udskrivning af en rapport over afsendte faxer
50 Oprettelse af et adressekartotek
BRUG AF USB-FLASH-HUKOMMELSE
53
53 Om USB-hukommelse
53 Tilslutning af en USB-hukommelsesenhed
53 Scanning til en USB-hukommelsesenhed
53 Scanning
54 Tilpasning af scanning til USB
54 Udskrivning fra en USB-hukommelsesenhed
54 Sådan udskrives et dokument fra en USB-hukommelsesenhed
54 Sikkerhedskopiering af data
54 Sikkerhedskopiering af data
54 Gendannelse af data
55 Håndtering af USB-hukommelse
55 Sletning af en billedfil
55 Formatering af en USB-hukommelsesenhed
55 Visning af USB-hukommelsesstatus
VEDLIGEHOLDELSE
56
56 Udskrivning af rapporter
56 Udskrivning af en rapport
56 Justering af farvekontrasten
57 Brug af Advarsel om lav toner
57 Sådan slettes hukommelsen
57 Rengøring af maskinen
57 Rengøring af maskinen udvendigt
57 Indvendig rengøring af maskinen
59 Rengøring af scannerenheden
59 Vedligeholdelse af patronen
59 Opbevaring af tonerpatroner
59 Forventet patronlevetid
59 Fordeling af toner
60 Udskiftning af tonerpatronen
61 Sletter meddelelsen om Ikke mere toner
61 Udskiftning af papiroverførselsbæltet
62 Vedligeholdelsesdele10 | Indhold
indhold
62 Kontrol af udskiftelige dele
63 Udskiftning af DADF gummipuden
63 Styring af maskinen fra webstedet
63 Sådan får du adgang til Embedded Web Service
63 Kontrol af maskinens serienummer
FEJLFINDING
64
64 Tip til at undgå papirstop
64 Afhjælpning af dokumentstop
64 Indføringsfejl ved dokumentindlæsning
65 Fejl ved papirudføring
65 Indføringsfejl ved valsen
65 Udbedring af papirstop
65 I papirindføringsområdet
66 I universalbakken
68 I fikseringsenheden
69 I papirudføringsområdet
70 I den valgfri bakke
71 Displaymeddelelsernes betydning
75 Løsning af andre problemer
75 Papirindføring
75 Udskrivningsproblemer
76 Problemer med udskriftskvaliteten
79 Kopieringsproblemer
80 Scanningsproblemer
80 Faxproblemer
81 Almindelige PostScript-problemer
81 Almindelige Windows-problemer
82 Almindelige Linux-problemer
84 Almindelige Macintosh-problemer
BESTILLING AF FORBRUGSSTOFFER OG EKSTRAUDSTYR
85
85 Forbrugsstoffer
85 Ekstraudstyr
85 Sådan køber du
INSTALLATION AF TILBEHØR
86
86 Der skal tages visse forholdsregler, når der installeres tilbehør
86 Aktivering af det tilføjede tilbehør i printeregenskaber
86 Opgradering af et hukommelsesmodul
86 Installation af et hukommelsesmodul
87 Brug af harddisken
87 Installation af harddisken
88 Udskrivning med harddisken (ekstraudstyr)
89 Filpolitik
90 Sletter resterende billeddata
SPECIFIKATIONER
91
91 Generelle specifikationer
91 Printerspecifikationer
92 Specifikationer for scanner
92 Specifikationer for kopimaskine
93 Specifikationer for faxIndhold | 11
indhold
PENDIKS
94
94 Dells politik for teknisk support
94 Kontakt til Dell
94 Garanti- og returpolitik
ORDLISTE
95
INDEKS12 | Introduktion
introduktion
Maskinens hovedkomponenter er:
Kapitlet omfatter:
• Oversigt over printeren
• Oversigt over kontrolpanelet
• Status Indikatorernes betydning
• Godkender status for tonerpatronen
• Menuoversigt
• Medfølgende software
• Printerdriverfunktioner
OVERSIGT OVER PRINTEREN
Set forfra Set bagfra
1
Styr til indstilling
af dokumentbredde
12 USB-hukommelsesport
2 DADF 13 Indikator for papirniveau
3 Kontrolpanel 14 Ekstra bakke 2
4 Outputsupport 15
Styr til indstilling
af papirbredde
på universalbakke
5 Frontdæksel 16 Tonerpatron
6 Håndtag til frontdæksel 17 Papiroverførselsbælte
7 Håndtag til universalbakke 18 Scannerlåg
8 Universalbakke 19 Scannerlåsekontakten
9 Bakke 1
20
Scannerglasplade
10 Dokumentindføringsbakke
21
Scannerenhed
11 Dokumentudbakke
1 USB-port 7 Tænd/sluk-kontakt
2 Netværksport 8 Strømindgang
3
15-bens valgfri
bakkeforbindelse
9 Dæksel til kontrolkort
4 Telefonstik 10 Bagdæksel
5
Telefonstik til ekstern
telefon (EXT)
11 Kabelstyring
6 HåndtagIntroduktion | 13
OVERSIGT OVER KONTROLPANELET
1 Genvejstaster
Giver dig mulighed for at gemme hyppigt kaldte
faxnumre og ringe til dem blot ved at trykke på nogle få
knapper.
2 Shift
Giver dig mulighed for at vælge hurtigopkaldstast 16 -
30.
3
Adressekartotek
( )
Du kan gemme faxnumre, du ofte bruger,
i hukommelsen eller søge efter gemte faxnumre og email-adresser.
4 Opløsning ( ) Justerer opløsningen for det dokument, der skal faxes.
5
Genopkald/Pause
( )
Hvis maskinen er i klar-tilstand, ringes der op til det
senest kaldte nummer. Hvis den er i redigeringstilstand,
indsættes der en pause i et faxnummer.
6 Fax ( ) Aktiverer faxtilstand.
7 Kopiering ( ) Aktiverer kopitilstand.
8 Scan/Email ( ) Aktiverer scanningstilstand.
9 Display
Der vises aktuel status og meddelelser i displayet, når
maskinen er i brug.
10 Toner colors
De tonerfarver, der vises under LCD-displayet fungerer
sammen med meddelelserne på displayet. Se Statusindikatorer med tonerpatronmeddelelser på side 14.
11 Menu ( )
Aktiverer menutilstanden og skifter mellem de
tilgængelige menuer.
12
Venstre og højre
pil
Bruges til at skifte mellem de tilgængelige indstillinger i
den valgte menu og til at øge eller formindske værdier.
13 OK ( ) Bekræfter det, der er valgt på skærmen.
14 Tilbage ( ) Vender tilbage til menuens øverste niveau.
15 Status ( )
Viser maskinstatus. Se ”Status Indikatorernes
betydning” på side 14.
16 Mørkhed ( )
Justerer lysstyrken for det dokument, der skal
kopieres. Se ”Mørkhed” på side 32.
17 Originaltype ( )
Bruges til at vælge dokumenttype for det aktuelle
kopieringsjob. Se ”Originaltype” på side 32.
18 Id-kopi ( )
Du kan kopiere begge sider af ID-kortet, f.eks.
et kørekort på et enkelt ark papir. Se ”Kopiering af
ID-kort” på side 33.
19
Formindsk/Forstør
( )
Gør en kopi mindre eller større end originalen.
20 Duplex ( )
Gør det muligt at udskrive på begge sider
af papiret.
21
USB-udskrivning
( )
Filer, der er gemt på en USB-enhed, kan udskrives
direkte, hvis du sætter USB-enheden i USB-porten
foran på maskinen. Se ”Om USB-hukommelse” på
side 53.
22 Taltastatur
Bruges til at ringe til et nummer eller indtaste
alfanumeriske tegn. Se ”Bogstaver og tal på
taltastaturet” på side 22.
23 Håndfrit kald ( ) Opretter forbindelse med telefonlinjen.
24 Stop/Slet ( )
Stopper en igangværende handling med det
samme. Sletter/annullerer kopieringsindstillingerne,
f.eks. mørkhed, dokumenttype, kopistørrelse og
kopiantal i klar-tilstand.
25 Color Start ( ) Starter et job i farvetilstand.
26 Black Start ( ) Starter et job i sort/hvid-tilstand.
• Alle illustrationer i denne brugervejledning kan være anderledes
end på din maskine, afhængigt af maskinens tilbehør eller model.
• Udbakkens overflade kan blive meget varm, hvis du udskriver et stort
antal sider på én gang. Pas på, at du ikke berører overfladen,
og sørg for, at børn ikke kommer i nærheden af den.
h
X
Y14 | Introduktion
STATUS INDIKATORERNES BETYDNING
Farven på Status ( )-lampen angiver maskinens aktuelle status.
GODKENDER STATUS FOR TONERPATRONEN
Statussen på tonerpatroner vises med Status ( )-indikatoren og LCDdisplayet. Hvis tonerpatronen er næsten tom, eller den skal udskiftes, lyser
Status ( )-indikatoren rødt, og displayet viser meddelelsen. Pilemærket
viser, hvilken farve toner der skaber problemer eller kan installeres med en
ny patron.
Eksempel:
Ovenstående eksempel viser tonerpatronens status for den farve, som pilen
peger på. Kontroller meddelelsen for at finde ud af, hvad problemet er,
samt hvordan det afhjælpes. Se side 71 for at få yderligere oplysninger
om fejlmeddelelser.
STATUS BESKRIVELSE
Fra • Maskinen er offlinetilstand.
• Maskinen er i strømbesparelsestilstand. Der
skiftes automatisk til online, når der modtages
data, eller når der trykkes på en vilkårlig tast.
Grøn Blinker • Når den grønne indikator blinker langsomt,
modtager printeren data fra computeren.
• Når den grønne indikator blinker hurtigt,
udskriver printeren data.
Lyser • Maskinen er tændt og kan benyttes.
Rød Blinker • Der er opstået en mindre fejl, og maskinen
venter på, at fejlen bliver rettet. Se meddelelsen
i displayet, og løs problemet ved at se under
”Displaymeddelelsernes betydning” på side 71.
• Tonerpatronen er ved at være tom. Bestil en
ny tonerpatron se ”Bestilling af forbrugsstoffer
og ekstraudstyr” på side 85. Du kan midlertidigt
forbedre udskriftskvaliteten ved at fordele
den resterende toner. Se ”Udskiftning af
tonerpatronen” på side 60.
Lyser • Der er opstået et problem, f.eks. papirstop,
et åbnet dæksel, eller der er intet papir
i bakken, så maskinen kan ikke fortsætte
jobbet. Kontroller meddelelsen på displayet,
og se ”Displaymeddelelsernes betydning” på
side 71 for at løse problemet.
• Tonerpatronen er tom, eller den skal
udskiftes. Se ”Displaymeddelelsernes
betydning” på side 71.
Kontroller altid meddelelsen på displayet for at afhjælpe problemet.
Instruktionen i afsnittet Fejlfinding hjælper dig med at betjene maskinen
korrekt. Se ”Displaymeddelelsernes betydning” på side 71 for flere
oplysninger.Introduktion | 15
MENUOVERSIGT
Fra kontrolpanelet kan du få adgang til menuer, så du kan klargøre maskinen eller bruge funktionerne i den. Du kan få adgang til menuerne ved at trykke på Menu ( ). Se følgende
diagram.
Nogle menuer vises muligvis ikke på kontrolpanelet afhængigt af instillinger eller modeller. Hvis det er tilfældet, kan de ikke anvendes på denne maskine.
.
Fax Feature
Darkness
Multi Send
Delay Send
Priority Send
Forward
Secure Receive
Add Page
Cancel Job
Fax Setup
Sending
Redial Times
Redial Term
Prefix Dial
ECM Mode
Send Report
Image TCR
Dial Mode
Receiving
Receive Mode
Ring To Answer
Fax Setup
(fortsat)
Stamp RCV Name
RCV Start Code
Auto Reduction
Discard Size
Junk Fax Setup
DRPD Mode
Duplex Print
Change Default
Resolution
Darkness
Auto Report
Copy Feature
Copy Collation
2-Up
4-Up
Poster Copy
Clone Copy
Adjust Bkgd.
Book Copy.
Margin Shift
Edge Erase
Gray Enhance
Copy Setup
Scan Size
Change Default
Copies
Reduce/Enlarge
Darkness
Original Type
Scan Feature
USB Memory
Scan Size
Original Type
Resolution
Scan Color
Scan Format
E-mail
Scan Size
Original Type
Resolution
Scan Color
Scan Feature
(fortsat)
FTP
Scan Size
Original Type
Resolution
Scan Color
SMB
Scan Size
Original Type
Resolution
Scan Color
System Setup
Machine Setup
Machine ID
Machine Fax No
Date & Time
Clock Mode
Form Menu
Select Form
Language
Default Mode
Power Save
Scan PWR Save
Timeout
Job Timeout
Altitude Adj.
Auto Continue
Import Setting
Export Setting
Paper Setup
Paper Size
Paper Type
Paper Source
Wide A4
Sound/Volume
Key Sound
Alarm Sound
Speaker
Ringer
System Setup
(fortsat)
Report
All Report
Configuration
Supplies Info
Address Book
Send Report
Sent Report
Fax RCV Report
Schedule Jobs
JunkFax Report
Network Info.
NetScan Report
User Auth List
PCL Font List
PS3 Font List
Stored Job
Udført job
Net Auth Log
Maintenance
Supplies Life
Color
Serial Number
Toner Low Alert
System Setup
(fortsat)
Clear Setting
All Settings
Fax Setup
Copy Setup
Scan Setup
System Setup
Network
Address Book
Sent Report
Fax RCV Report
NetScan Report
Job Manage
Active Job
Store Job
File Policy
ImageOverwrite
Immediate
On Demand
Network
TCP/IP
Ethernet Speed
Clear Setting
Network Info
Scan Setup
Change Default
USB Memory
E-mail
FTP
SMB
Send Report16 | Introduktion
MEDFØLGENDE SOFTWARE
Når du har konfigureret printeren og sluttet den til computeren, skal du
bruge den medfølgende cd og installere programmerne til printeren og
scanneren. Cd’en giver dig adgang til følgende software:
PRINTERDRIVERFUNKTIONER
Printerdriverne understøtter følgende standardfunktioner:
• Valg af papirretning, papirstørrelse, papirkilde og medietype
• Antal kopier
Du kan desuden bruge forskellige specielle udskrivningsfunktioner.
Tabellen nedenfor indeholder en generel oversigt over funktioner,
der understøttes af dine printerdrivere:
Printerdriver
PostScript-driver
Cd INDHOLD
Cd med
printerso
ftware
Windows • Printerdriver: Benyt denne driver til at få optimalt
udbytte af printeren.
• PPD-fil (PostScript Printer Description): Brug
PostScript-driveren, når du skal udskrive
dokumenter med komplekse skrifttyper og grafik
i PS-sproget.
• Scannerdriver: TWAIN og WIA-driverne
(Windows Image Acquisition) kan bruges til
scanning af dokumenter på maskinen.
• Scan Manager: Du kan finde programoplysninger
om Scan Manager og om status på den
installerede scannerdriver.
• Dell Toner Management SystemTM
: Viser
printerstatus og navnet på jobbet, når du sender
et job til udskrivning. Vinduet Dell Toner
Management SystemTM
viser også
tonerniveauet og giver dig mulighed for at bestille
nye tonerpatroner.
• Status Moniter: Med dette program
kan du overvåge maskinens status, og du bliver
advaret, hvis der sker fejl under udskrivningen.
• SmarThru Office
a
: Dette er det Windowsbaserede program, som følger med
multifunktionsmaskinen.
• Printer Setting Utility: Med dette program kan
du konfigurere printerens andre indstillinger fra
computerens skrivebord.
• Firmware Update Utility: Dette program kan
hjælpe dig med at opdatere maskinens firmware.
• SetIP: Brug dette program til at definere maskinens
TCP/IP-adresser.
a. Giver dig mulighed for at redigere et scannet billede på mange måder ved
at bruge et effektivt billedredigeringsprogram og sende billedet pr. e-mail.
Du kan også åbne et andet billedredigeringsprogram, f.eks. Adobe
Photoshop, fra SmarThru. Yderligere oplysninger finder du i den
skærmhjælp, der findes i SmarThru-programmet.
Linux • PPD-fil (PostScript Printer Description): Brug
denne fil til at køre maskinen fra en Linuxcomputer og udskrive dokumenter.
• SANE: Brug denne driver, når du skal scanne
dokumenter.
• Printer Setting Utility: Med dette program kan
du konfigurere printerens andre indstillinger fra
computerens skrivebord.
Macintosh • Printerdriver: Benyt denne driver til at få optimalt
udbytte af printeren.
• PPD-fil (PostScript Printer Description): Brug
denne fil til at køre maskinen fra en Macintoshcomputer og udskrive dokumenter.
• Scannerdriver: Du kan bruge TWAIN-driveren til
at scanne dokumenter på maskinen.
• Printer Setting Utility: Med dette program kan
du konfigurere printerens andre indstillinger fra
computerens skrivebord.
FUNKTION WINDOWS LINUX MACINTOSH
Farvetilstand O O O
Indstilling af
udskriftskvalitet
O O O
Posterudskrivning O X X
Flere sider pr. ark
(N-op)
O O (2, 4) O
Tilpas til side O X O
a
a.Denne funktion understøttes kun af MAC OS X 10.4~10.5.
Skaleret udskrift O X O
Anden papirkilde til
første side
O X O
Vandmærke O X X
Overlay O X X
Duplex O X O
FUNKTION WINDOWS LINUX MACINTOSH
Farvetilstand O O O
Indstilling af
udskriftskvalitet
O O O
Posterudskrivning X X X
Flere sider pr. ark
(N-op)
O O (2, 4) O
Tilpas til side O X O
a
a.Denne funktion understøttes kun af MAC OS X 10.4~10.5.
Skaleret udskrift O X O
Anden papirkilde til
første side
X X O
Vandmærke X X X
Overlay X X X
Duplex O X OSådan kommer du i gang_ 17
sådan kommer du i gang
Dette kapitel indeholder trinvise instruktioner til, hvordan du opsætter maskinen.
Kapitlet omfatter:
• Opsætning af hardwaren
• Udskrivning af testside
• Konfiguration af netværket
• Systemkrav
• Installation af softwaren
• Maskinens grundlæggende indstillinger
OPSÆTNING AF HARDWAREN
Dette afsnit viser de trin, der skal udføres for at opsætte hardwaren
og er forklaret i Lyninstallationsvejledning. Sørg for at læse
Lyninstallationsvejledning og udføre følgende trin.
1. Vælg en stabil placering.
Vælg et plant, stabilt sted med tilstrækkelig plads til luftcirkulation.
Sørg for, at der er tilstrækkelig plads til at åbne dæksler og bakker.
Stedet skal være godt udluftet og ikke udsat for direkte sollys, andre
varmekilder, kulde eller fugt. Anbring ikke maskinen tæt på kanten
af et bord eller et skrivebord.
Der kan udskrives i højder under 1.000 m. Brug højdeindstillingen til
at optimere udskrivningen. Se ”Højdejustering” på side 20 for at få
yderligere oplysninger.
Placer maskinen på et fladt og stabilt underlag, så den ikke hælder mere
end 2 mm. Ellers kan det påvirke udskriftskvaliteten.
2. Pak maskinen ud, og kontroller alle medfølgende komponenter.
3. Fjern tapen, idet du holder fast i maskinen.
4. Installer tonerpatronen.
5. Ilæg papir (se ”Placering af papir” på side 29).
6. Sørg for, at alle kabler er tilsluttet maskinen.
7. Tænd for maskinen.
UDSKRIVNING AF TESTSIDE
Udskriv en demoside for at kontrollere, at maskinen fungerer korrekt.
Sådan udskriver du en demoside:
Tryk på, og hold knappen OK nede i cirka 2 sekunder, i tilstanden Klar.
KONFIGURATION AF NETVÆRKET
Du skal konfigurere maskinens netværksprotokoller, før den kan bruges som
netværksprinter. Du kan konfigurere de grundlæggende netværksindstillinger
ved hjælp af maskinens kontrolpanel.
Supported network environments
Følgende tabel viser de netværksmiljøer, som maskinen understøtter:
Når du flytter maskinen, må du ikke vippe den eller vende den
på hovedet. Ellers kan toneren forurene maskinens indre, hvilket
kan føre til ødelæggelse af maskinen eller dårlig udskriftskvalitet.
PUNKT KRAV
Netværksinterface • Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX
Netværksoperativsystem • Windows 2000/XP/2003/2008/Vista
• Forskellige Linux-operativsystemer
• Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.5
Netværksprotokoller • TCP/IP i Windows
• IPP
• SNMP
• DHCP
• BOOTP
Du kan konfigurere en DHCP-netværksprotokol ved at gå til webstedet
http://developer.apple.com/networking/bonjour/download/, vælge det
Bonjour-program til Windows, der er relevant for det operativsystem,
du kører, og derefter installere programmet. Med dette program får du
adgang til at foretage en automatisk rettelse af netværksparameteren.
Følg de anvisninger, der vises i installationsvinduet. Dette program
understøtter ikke Linux.18 | Sådan kommer du i gang
Konfiguration af netværksprotokol via maskinen
Du kan konfigurere TCP/IP-netværksparametre ved at følge nedenstående
fremgangsmåde.
1. Sørg for, at maskinen er tilsluttet netværket med et RJ-45 Ethernet-kabel.
2. Sørg for, at maskinen er tændt.
3. Tryk på Menu ( ) på kontrolpanelet, indtil Network vises i nederste
linje i displayet.
4. Tryk på OK for at få adgang til menuen.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil TCP/IP vises.
6. Tryk på OK.
7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Static vises.
8. Tryk på OK.
9. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil IP Address vises.
10. Tryk på OK.
Angiv en byte-værdi på mellem 0 og 255 ved hjælp af taltastaturet. Du
kan flytte mellem byte-værdierne ved at trykke på left/right arrow.
Gentag dette for at udfylde adressen fra 1. til 4. byte.
11. Tryk på OK, når du er færdig.
Gentag trin 9 og 10 for at konfigurere de andre TCP/IP-parametre:
undernetmaske og gateway-adresse.
Brug af programmet SetIP
Dette program er beregnet til konfiguration af netværkets IP-adresse på
baggrund af den MAC-adresse, der er angivet som hardwareserienummer
på netværkets printerkort eller interface. Programmet giver
netværksadministratoren adgang til at indstille flere netværks-IP-adresser
på samme tid.
Indstilling af netværksværdier
1. Udskriv en rapport over printerens netværkskonfiguration for at finde
printerens MAC-adresse. Se ”Printing reports” på side 55
2. Vælg Alle programmer → Dell → Dell Printers → Dell 2145cn Color
Laser MFP → Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP → Set IP i Windows
Start-menuen.
3. Klik for at åbne TCP/IP-konfigurationsvinduet.
4. Indtast MAC-adresse, IP-adresse, undernetmaske og standardgateway
for netværkskortet, og klik derefter på Apply.
5. Klik på OK. Printeren udskriver netværksoplysningerne. Kontroller, at
indstillingerne er korrekte.
6. Klik på Exit.
SYSTEMKRAV
Før du begynder, skal du sikre dig, at dit system opfylder følgende
minimumkrav:
Microsoft
®
Windows
®
Maskinen understøtter følgende Windows-operativsystemer.
Macintosh
Kontakt netværksadministratoren, hvis du ikke er sikker på, hvordan
du konfigurerer.
Du kan også konfigurere netværksindstillingerne via
netværksadministrationsprogrammerne.
• Embedded Web Service: Webserver, der er integreret
i netværksprinterserveren, og som giver dig mulighed for at:
- Konfigurere de netværksparametre, som maskinen skal bruge
til at oprette forbindelse til forskellige netværksmiljøer.
- Tilpasse maskinindstillinger.
• SetIP: Hjælpeprogram, der giver dig mulighed for at vælge
et netværksinterface og manuelt konfigurere adresser, der skal
bruges sammen med TCP/IP-protokollen.
• Du kan kun bruge programmet SetIP, når printeren er sluttet til et
netværk.
• Den følgende procedure er baseret på Windows XP.
Når du indtaster MAC-adressen. IP-adresse, undernetmaske,
standardgateway, og klik derefter på Apply.
OPERATIVS
YSTEM
KRAV (ANBEFALES)
PROCESSOR RAM
LEDIG
PLADS PÅ
HARDDISK
Windows
2000
Intel
®
Pentinum®
II 400
MHz (Pentium III 933
MHz)
64 MB
(128 MB)
600 MB
Windows XP Pentium III 933 MHz
(Pentium IV 1 GHz)
128 MB
(256 MB)
1,5 GB
Windows
Server 2003
Pentium III 933 MHz
(Pentium IV 1 GHz)
128 MB
(512 MB)
1,25 GB til
2 GB
Windows
Server 2008
Pentium IV 1 GHz
(Pentium IV 2 GHz)
512 MB
(2.048 MB)
10 GB
Windows
Vista
Pentium IV 3 GHz 512 MB
(1.024 MB)
15 GB
• Til alle Windows-operativsystemer kræves som minimum Internet
Explorer 5.0 eller nyere.
• Sådanne reparationer er ikke dækket af Dells garanti eller
serviceaftaler.
• Windows Terminal Services er kompatibelt med denne maskine.
OPERATIVS
YSTEM
KRAV (ANBEFALES)
PROCESSOR RAM
LEDIG
PLADS PÅ
HARDDISK
Mac OS X 10.4
eller lavere
• PowerPC G4/G5
• Intel-processor
• 128 MB til en
PowerPCbaseret Mac
(512 MB)
• 512 MB til en
Intel-baseret
Mac (1 GB)
1 GB
Mac OS X 10.5 • G4/G5 PowerPC
med en
processor på
867 MHz eller
hurtigere
• Intel-processor
• 512 MB (1
GB)
1 GBSådan kommer du i gang | 19
Linux
INSTALLATION AF SOFTWAREN
Du skal installere maskinsoftwaren til udskrivning. Softwaren omfatter
drivere, programmer og andre brugervenlige programmer.
1. Connect the network cable to your machine.
2. Sørg for, at netværkskonfigurationen for maskinen er fuldført.
(Se ”Konfiguration af netværket” på side 17). Alle programmer
på din pc bør være afsluttet, før du begynder installationen.
3. Indsæt cd-rom’en med printersoftware i cd-rom-drevet.
Cd-rom’en skulle starte automatisk, og der vises et installationsvindue.
Hvis installationsvinduet ikke vises, skal du klikke på Start → Kør. Skriv
X:\Setup.exe, idet du erstatter ”X” med det bogstav, der repræsenterer
dit drev, og klik på OK.
Hvis du bruger Windows Vista, skal du klikke på Start → Alle
programmer → Tilbehør → Kør og skrive X:\Setup.exe.
4. Klik på Next.
• Vinduet ovenfor kan være lidt anderledes, hvis du geninstallerer
driveren.
5. Vælg Typical installation for a network printer, og klik derefter
på Next.
6. Listen over maskiner, der er tilgængelige på netværket, vises. Vælg den
printer, du ønsker at installere, på listen, og klik derefter på Next.
• Hvis maskinen ikke vises på listen, skal du klikke på Update for at opdatere
listen eller vælge Add TCP/IP Port for at tilføje maskinen på netværket.
Hvis du vil tilføje maskinen på netværket, skal du indtaste maskinens
portnavn og IP-adresse.
PUNKT KRAV
Operativ-system RedHat 8.0, 9.0 (32 bit)
RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64 bit)
Fedora Core 1~7 (32/64 bit)
Mandrake 9.2 (32 bit), 10.0, 10.1 (32/64 bit)
Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007 (32/64 bit)
SuSE Linux 8.2, 9.0, 9.1 (32 bit)
SuSE Linux 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2 (32/64 bit)
SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9, 10 (32/64 bit)
Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04 (32/64 bit)
Debian 3.1, 4.0 (32/64 bit)
Processor Pentium IV 2.4 GHz (IntelCore2)
RAM 512 MB (1024 MB)
Ledig plads på
harddisk
1 GB (1 GB)
Softwaren Linux Kernel 2.4 eller nyere
Glibc 2.2 eller nyere
CUPS
• Til arbejdet med store scannede billeder er det nødvendigt
at anvende en swap-partition på 300 MB eller mere.
• Linux-scannerdriveren understøtter den optiske opløsning
på maksimum.
• Følgende procedure er til brug af maskinen som en netværksmaskine.
Hvis du vil tilslutte en maskine via et USB-kabel, skal du se
i Softwareafsnit.
• Følgende procedure er baseret på Windows XP-operativsystemet.
Proceduren og det popup-vindue, der vises under installationen,
kan variere afhængigt af operativsystemet, printerfunktionen eller
det anvendte interface.20 | Sådan kommer du i gang
Du kontrollerer maskinens IP-adresse eller MAC-adresse ved at udskrive
en netværkskonfigurationsside (se ”Udskrivning af rapporter” på
side 56).
• Hvis du vil finde en fælles netværksprinter (UNC-stien), skal du vælge
Shared Printer [UNC] og angive delingsnavnet manuelt eller finde en
delt printer ved at klikke på knappen Browse.
7. Klik på Finish.
MASKINENS GRUNDLÆGGENDE INDSTILLINGER
Når installationen er fuldført, ønsker du måske at angive maskinens
standardindstillinger. Se næste afsnit, hvis du vil angive eller ændre
værdier.
Højdejustering
Udskriftskvaliteten påvirkes af det atmosfæriske tryk, hvor det atmosfæriske
tryk bestemmes af maskinens højde over havoverfladen. Følgende oplysninger
beskriver, hvordan du indstiller maskinen, så du får den bedste udskriftskvalitet.
Før du angiver højdeindstillingen, skal du finde den højde, du bruger
maskinen i.
1. Kontroller, at du har installeret printerdriveren med den medfølgende
cd med printersoftware.
2. Klik på Start → Alle programmer → DELL → DELL Printers → Dell
2145cn Color Laser MFP → Printer Setting Utility.
Du kan også klikke på Printer Setting Utility på statuslinjen i Mac OS X
(eller meddelelsesområdet i Linux).
3. Klik på Settings → Atitude adjustment. Vælg den korrekte værdi på
rullelisten, og klik derefter på Apply.
Ændring af sprog i displayet
Hvis du vil ændre det sprog, der vises i kontrolpanelet, skal du gøre følgende:
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Language vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på pileknapperne, indtil det ønskede sprog vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Hvis du ikke ved, hvad IP-adressen er, skal du kontakte
netværksadministratoren eller udskrive netværksoplysningerne
(se ”Udskrivning af rapporter” på side 56).
• Hvis maskinen ikke fungerer korrekt efter installationen,
skal du geninstallerer printerdriveren. Se Softwareafsnit.
• I forbindelse med installationen af printerdriveren registrerer
installationsprogrammet automatisk landestandarden for
operativsystemet, og standardpapirstørrelsen for maskinen
indstilles, så den passer til denne standard. Hvis du bruger en
anden landestandard på Windows-operativsystemet, skal du
ændre papirstørrelsen på maskinen, så den svarer til den
papirstørrelse, du oftest bruger. Når installationen er fuldført,
kan du ændre papirstørrelsen under printeregenskaberne.
1 Normal
2 High 1
3 High 2
4 High 3
Hvis din maskine er sluttet til et netværk, vises skærmbilledet
Embedded Web Service automatisk. Klik på Machine Settings
→ Setup (eller Machine Setup) → Altitude adj.. Vælg den
ønskede højdeværdi, og klik på Apply.
0Sådan kommer du i gang | 21
Indstilling af dato og klokkeslæt
Dato og klokkeslæt vises i displayet, når maskinen er tændt og klar til at blive
betjent.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Date & Time vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Indtast dato og klokkeslæt ved hjælp af taltastaturet.
Måned = 01 til 12
Dag = 01 til 31
År = kræver fire cifre
Time = 01 til 12 (12-timers tilstand)
00 til 23 (24-timers tilstand)
Minut = 00 til 59
Du kan også bruge venstre/højre pil til at flytte markøren til det tal, du vil ændre,
og indtaste et nyt tal.
5. Hvis du vil vælge AM eller PM til 12-timers format, skal du trykke
på knappen * eller # en hvilken som helst taltast.
Hvis markøren ikke er placeret under indikatoren for AM eller PM, flyttes
den med det samme derhen, når du trykker på knappen * eller #.
Du kan ændre tidsformatet til 24 timer (dvs. at 01:00 PM angives som 13:00).
Du kan finde yderligere oplysninger i næste afsnit.
6. Tryk på OK for at gemme klokkeslættet og datoen.
Hvis du indtaster et forkert tal, vises der Out of Range, og maskinen
forsætter ikke til næste trin. Hvis det sker, skal du blot indtaste det rigtige tal.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Ændring af tidsformatet
Du kan indstille maskinen til at vise tiden i enten 12-timers eller 24-timers format.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Clock Mode vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge det andet format, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Ændring af standardfunktionen
Maskinen er på forhånd indstillet til faxtilstand. Du kan ændre denne
standardindstilling, så den enten er tilstanden Fax eller Kopi.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Default Mode vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede standardtilstand vises,
og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Indstilling af lyde
Du kan indstille følgende lyde:
• Key Sound: Slår tastelyden til eller fra. Når denne indstilling er angivet
til On, høres der en lyd, hver gang der trykkes på en tast.
• Alarm Sound: Slår alarmen til eller fra. Når denne indstilling er indstillet
til On, høres der en alarmlyd, når der opstår en fejl, eller når en
faxkommunikation afsluttes.
• Speaker: Slår lydene fra telefonlinjen via højttaleren til eller fra, f.eks.
en klartone eller en faxtone. Når denne indstilling er Comm., hvilket vil
sige ”fælles”, er højttaleren slået til, indtil den eksterne maskine svarer.
• Ringer: Justerer lydstyrken af ringesignalet. Til lydstyrken af
ringesignalet kan du vælge mellem Off, Low, Mid og High.
Højtaler, ringesignal, tastelyd, og alarmlyd
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste
linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Sound/Volume vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede lydindstilling vises,
og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede status eller lydstyrke for
den valgte lyd vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Gentag trin 3 til og med 5, hvis det er nødvendigt, for at definere
andre lyde.
6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Højttalerstyrke
1. Tryk på Håndfrit kald ( ). Der lyder en klartone fra højttaleren.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil du hører den ønskede lydstyrke.
3. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at gemme ændringen og vende tilbage til
klar-tilstand.
Indtastning af tegn ved hjælp af taltastaturet
Når du udfører forskellige opgaver, skal du muligvis skrive navne og numre.
Når du f.eks. sætter maskinen op, skal du angive dit eget eller firmaets navn
og faxnummeret. Når du gemmer faxnumre eller e-mail-adresser i hukommelsen,
kan du evt. også angive de tilsvarende navne.
Indtastning af alfanumeriske tegn
1. Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste et tegn, skal du først finde knappen
med det tegn, du vil indtaste. Tryk på knappen, indtil det rigtige bogstav
vises på displayet.
Hvis du f.eks. vil skrive bogstavet O, skal du trykke på 6, der er mærket
med MNO.
Hver gang du trykker på 6, viser displayet et nyt bogstav M, N, O, m,
n, o og til sidst 6.
Du kan også indtaste specialtegn, f.eks. mellemrum, plustegn osv.
Du kan finde flere oplysninger i næste afsnit.
2. Gentag trin 1, hvis du vil indtaste flere bogstaver.
Hvis det næste bogstav findes på samme knap, flytter du markøren ved
hjælp af højre venstre/højre-pileknap og trykker derefter på knappen
med det ønskede bogstav. Markøren flyttes til højre, og det næste tal
vises på displayet.
Du kan indsætte et mellemrum ved at trykke på 1 to gange.
3. Tryk på OK, når du har indtastet de bogstaver, du ønsker.
Datoformatet kan variere fra land til land.
Du kan justere indstillingen af lydstyrken ved hjælp af Håndfrit
kald ( ).
Du kan kun justere lydstyrken i højttaleren, når der er forbindelse
med telefonlinjen.22 | Sådan kommer du i gang
Bogstaver og tal på taltastaturet
Rettelse af tal eller navne
Hvis du taster forkert, når du indtaster et nummer eller navn, skal du trykke
på venstre venstre/højre pileknap for at slette det sidst indtastede tal
eller tegn. Indtast derefter det korrekte tal eller bogstav.
Indsættelse af en pause
I nogle telefonsystemer skal du først ringe et forvalgsnummer (fx 9) og vente
på endnu en klartone. Hvis du benytter et af disse systemer, skal du indsætte
en pause i telefonnummeret. Du kan indsætte en pause, når du definerer
genvejstaster eller hurtigopkaldsnumre.
Når du vil indsætte en pause, skal du trykke på Genopkald/Pause ( ),
når du kommer til det relevante sted i telefonnummeret. På displayet
vises der en ”-” på det pågældende sted i nummeret.
Sådan bruger du sparetilstandene
Strømsparetilstand
Tilstanden Strømbesparelse gør det muligt for maskinen at reducere
strømforbruget, når den ikke er i brug. Du kan aktivere denne tilstand
og vælge et bestemt tidsrum, som maskinen venter efter et afsluttet job,
før den skifter til en mindre strømkrævende tilstand.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste
linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Power Save vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede tidsindstilling vises,
og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Strømsparetilstand ved scanning
Når du bruger strømsparetilstand ved scanning, kan du spare strøm ved
at slukke for scannerlampen. Scannerlampen under scannerglaspladen
slukkes automatisk, når den ikke er i brug, for at reducere strømforbruget
og forlænge lampens levetid. Lampen tændes automatisk efter en kort
opvarmningstid, når du starter scanningen.
Du kan indstille det tidsrum, som lampen venter efter en afsluttet
scanning, før den skifter til strømsparetilstand.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste
linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Scan PWR Save vises, og tryk på
OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede tidsindstilling vises, og
tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Indstilling af timeout for udskriftsjob
Du kan definere, hvor lang tid et enkelt udskriftsjob er aktivt, før det skal
udskrives. Maskinen håndterer indgående data som et enkelt job, hvis det
ligger inden for den angivne tid. Når der opstår fejl under behandling af data
fra computeren, og datastrømmen standser, venter maskinen den angivne
tid og annullerer derefter udskrivningen, hvis datastrømmen ikke
genoptages.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Job Timeout vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede tidsindstilling vises, og tryk
på OK.
5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Auto fortsæt
Dette er den indstilling, der bruges til at indstille maskinen til enten at fortsætte
udskrivning eller stoppe udskrivning i tilfælde af at den papirstørrelse, du har
angivet, og papiret i bakken ikke stemmer overens.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Auto Continue vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises.
• On: udskriver automatisk, når den angivne tid er gået, når papirstørrelsen,
du har angivet, og papiret i bakken ikke stemmer overens.
• Off: venter, indtil du trykker på Black Start ( ) eller Color Start
( ) på kontrolpanelet, når papirstørrelsen, du har angivet, og papiret
i bakken ikke stemmer overens.
5. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg.
6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
TAST TILDELTE TAL, BOGSTAVER OG TEGN
1 1 Mellemrum
2 A B C a b c 2
3 D E F d e f 3
4 G H I g h i 4
5 J K L j k l 5
6 M N O m n o 6
7 P Q R S p q r s 7
8 T U V t u v 8
9 W X Y Z w x y z 9
0 + - , . ‘ / * # & @ 0Sådan kommer du i gang | 23
Ændring af skrifttypeindstillinger
Din maskine har forudindstillet skrifttypen for dit område eller land.
Hvis du vil ændre den foretrukne skrifttype eller angive, hvilken skrifttype
der skal anvendes under bestemte betingelser, f.eks. i DOS-miljøet, kan
du ændre skrifttypen på følgende måde:
1. Kontroller, at du har installeret printerdriveren med den medfølgende
cd med software.
2. Klik på Start → Alle programmer → DELL → DELL Printers → Dell
2145cn Color Laser MFP → Printer Setting Utility.
Du kan også klikke på Printer Setting Utility på statuslinjen i Mac OS X
(eller meddelelsesområdet i Linux).
3. Klik på Emulation.
4. Bekræft, hvis PCL er valgt i Emulation Setting.
5. Klik på Setting.
6. Vælg Symbol set som din foretrukne skrifttype.
7. Klik på Apply.
Det følgende er en oversigt over sprog og deres korrekte skrifttyper.
• Russisk: CP866, ISO 8859/5 Latin Cyrillic
• Hebraisk: Hebrew 15Q, Hebrew-8, Hebrew-7 (gælder kun Israel)
• Græsk: ISO 8859/7 Latin Greek, PC-8 Latin/Greek
• Arabisk og Farsi: HP Arabic-8, Windows Arabic, Code Page 864,
Farsi, ISO 8859/6 Latin Arabic
• OCR: OCR-A, OCR-B24 | Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier
ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier
I dette kapitel beskrives det, hvordan du lægger originaler og udskriftsmedier i maskinen.
Kapitlet omfatter:
• Ilægning af originaler
• Valg af udskriftsmedier
• Ændring af papirstørrelsen i papirbakken
• Placering af papir
• Justering af outputsupporten
• Indstilling af papirstørrelse og type
ILÆGNING AF ORIGINALER
Du kan lægge en original på scannerglaspladen eller i DADF’en, så du kan
kopiere eller scanne den eller sende den som fax.
På scannerglaspladen
Sørg for, at der ikke er originaler i DADF’en. Hvis maskinen registrerer en
original i DADF’en, får den højere prioritet end originalen på
scannerglaspladen. Det giver den bedste scanningskvalitet, specielt for
farvebilleder eller gråtoner, hvis du lægger originalen
på scannerglaspladen.
1. Løft, og åbn scannerlåget.
2. Læg originalen med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen, og ret den ind
efter registreringsstyret i glaspladens øverste, venstre hjørne.
3. Luk scannerlåget.
I DADF’en
Ved brug af DADF’en kan du ilægge op til 50 ark 75 g/m2
papir til et job.
Når du bruger DADF’en, må du ikke:
• Ilæg ikke papir, der er mindre end 148 x 148 mm eller større end 216 x
356 mm.
• Undgå følgende papirtyper:
- karbonpapir eller karbonbelagt papir
- bestrøget papir
- gennemsigtigt eller tyndt papir
- krøllet eller foldet papir
- krøllet eller rullet papir
- iturevet papir.
• Fjern alle hæfteklammer og papirclips, før du lægger papiret i.
• Sørg for, at lim, blæk eller retteblæk på papiret er tørt, før du lægger det i.
• Læg ikke papir i forskellige størrelser eller med forskellig vægt i.
• Læg ikke hæfter, pamfletter, transparenter eller dokumenter med andre
usædvanlige egenskaber i DADF’en.
Dell 2145cn har DADF-funktionen, så du kan scanne begge sider af
originalen på samme tid.
Se ”Scanning af begge sider af papiret” på side 42.
• Det kan påvirke kopikvaliteten og tonerforbruget, hvis scannerlåget
står åbent, mens du kopierer.
• Støv på scannerglaspladen kan give sorte pletter på udskriften.
Hold den altid ren.
• Hvis du kopierer en side fra en bog eller et blad, skal du løfte
op i scannerlåget, indtil hængslerne fanges af stopanordningen,
og derefter lukke låget. Hvis bogen eller bladet er tykkere end
30 mm, skal du begynde at kopiere med låget åbent.25 | Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier
1. Bøj papirstakken frem og tilbage for at adskille siderne, før de lægges
i bakken.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med tryksiden opad. Sørg for, at bunden af
originalstakken passer til den papirstørrelse, der er markeret i
dokumentindføringsbakken.
3. Juster styrene til indstilling af dokumentbredden, så de passer til
papirets størrelse.
VALG AF UDSKRIFTSMEDIER
Du kan udskrive på en række forskellige materialer, f.eks. almindeligt papir,
konvolutter, etiketter og transparenter. Men du skal altid vælge udskriftsmedier,
der overholder de retningslinjer, der er for maskinen. Udskriftsmedier, der
ikke overholder de retningslinjer, der er beskrevet i denne brugerhåndbog,
kan forårsage følgende problemer:
• Dårlig udskriftskvalitet
• Flere papirstop
• Tidlig nedslidning af maskinen
Egenskaber som vægt, sammensætning, fiber- og fugtighedsindhold er vigtige
faktorer, der påvirker maskinens ydelse og udskriftskvalitet. Vær opmærksom
på følgende, når du vælger udskriftsmateriale:
• Typen, størrelsen og vægten på udskriftsmediet til din maskine
beskrives senere i dette afsnit.
• Ønsket resultat: Vælg udskriftsmedier, der passer til projektet.
• Hvidhed: Nogle udskriftsmedier er mere hvide end andre og giver et mere
skarpt og levende billede.
• Overfladeglathed: Jo mere glat et udskriftsmedie er, jo mere skarpt
forekommer det udskrevne billede på papiret.
Støv på DADF-glasset kan forårsage sorte streger på udskriften. Hold den
altid ren.
• Der kan forekomme tilfælde, hvor udskriftsmediet overholder alle
retningslinjer i dette afsnit, og alligevel ikke giver tilfredsstillende
resultater. Dette kan skyldes forkert håndtering, temperaturer
og fugtighedsniveauer over det anbefalede eller andre faktorer,
som Dell ikke har indflydelse på.
• Inden du køber større mængder af et bestemt udskriftsmedie,
skal du sikre dig, at det opfylder de krav, der er angivet i denne
brugerhåndbog.
Anvendelse af udskriftsmedier, der ikke overholder disse specifikationer,
kan medføre problemer, der nødvendiggør reparation. Reparationer
af denne type er ikke omfattet af Dell garanti eller serviceaftaler.26 | Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier
Specifikationer for udskriftsmedie
TYPE STØRRELSE MÅL VÆGT
a
KAPACITET
b
Almindeligt papir Letter 216 x 279 mm • 60 til 105 g/m2
i bakken
• 60 til 163 g/m2
i
universalbakken
• 250 ark 75 g/m2
kontraktpapir
i papirbakken
• 100 ark 75 g/m2
i universalbakken
• 500 ark 75 g/m2
kontraktpapir i valgfribakke
Legal 216 x 356 mm
US Folio 216 x 330 mm
A4 210 x 297 mm
Oficio 216 x 343 mm
JIS B5 182 x 257 mm
ISO B5 176 x 250 mm
Executive 184 x 267 mm
A5 148 x 210 mm • 60 til 105 g/m2
i bakken
• 60 til 163 g/m2
i
universalbakken
• 150 ark 75 g/m2
kontraktpapir
i papirbakken
• 100 ark 75 g/m2
i universalbakken
Statement 140 x 216 mm
A6 105 x 148 mm
Konvolut Monarch-konvolut 98 x 191 mm 75 to 105 g/m2
kontraktpapir 10 ark 75 g/m2
i universalbakken
Konvolut 6 3/4 92 x 165 mm
Konvolut nr. 10 105 x 241 mm
Konvolut nr. 9 98 x 225 mm
DL-konvolut 110 x 220 mm
C5-konvolut 162 x 229 mm
C6-konvolut 114 x 162 mm
Etiketter Letter, Legal, Folio,
A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,
Executive, A5,
Statement
Se afsnittet om almindeligt papir 120 til 150 g/m2
10 ark 75 g/m2
papir
i universalbakken
Karton Letter, Legal, Folio,
A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,
Executive, A5,
Statement
Se afsnittet om almindeligt papir 90 til 163 g/m2
10 ark 75 g/m2
papir
i universalbakken
Minimumstørrelse (brugerdefineret) 76 x 127 mm 60 til 163 g/m2
Maksimumstørrelse (brugerdefineret) 216 x 356 mm
a. Hvis papirets vægt er over 105 g/m2
, skal du bruge universalbakken.
b. Den maksimale kapacitet kan variere alt afhængigt af materialets vægt, tykkelse og af de omgivende forhold.Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier | 27
Mediestørrelser, der understøttes i de forskellige
tilstande
Retningslinjer for specielle udskriftsmedier
TILSTAND STØRRELSE KILDE
Kopieringstilstand Letter, A4, Legal,
Oficio, Folio, Executive,
JIS B5, A5, A6
• bakke 1
• ekstra bakke 2
• universalbakke
Udskrivningstilstand Alle størrelser
understøttes af
maskinen
• bakke 1
• ekstra bakke 2
• universalbakke
Faxtilstand Letter, A4, Legal • bakke 1
• ekstra bakke 2
Duplexudskrivning
a
a. Kun 75 til 105 g/m2
.
Letter, A4, Legal, Folio,
Oficio
• bakke 1
• ekstra bakke 2
• universalbakke
MEDIETYPE RETNINGSLINJER
Konvolutter • Vellykket udskrivning på konvolutter er afhængig
af konvolutternes kvalitet. Ved valg af konvolutter
skal du tage følgende faktorer i betragtning:
- Vægt: Konvolutpapiret bør ikke veje mere end
90 g/m2
, da der ellers kan opstå papirstop.
- Udformning: Inden udskrivningen skal konvolutterne
ligge fladt med mindre end 6 mm rulning, og de må
ikke indeholde luft.
- Tilstand: Konvolutter bør ikke være krøllede, revet
i stykker eller på anden måde beskadiget.
- Temperatur: Brug altid konvolutter, der kan klare
den varme og det tryk, der opstår i maskinen.
• Brug kun kvalitetskonvolutter med skarpe og helt
pressede kanter.
• Brug ikke konvolutter med frimærker.
• Brug ikke konvolutter med lukkeanordninger, ruder,
belægninger, selvklæbende lukning eller andre
syntetiske materialer.
• Brug ikke beskadigede konvolutter eller konvolutter
af dårlig kvalitet.
• Kontroller, at sammenføjningerne i begge konvoluttens
ender når helt ud til konvoluttens hjørner.
1 Acceptabelt
2 Uacceptabelt
Konvolutter
(fortsat)
• Hvis du bruger konvolutter med en selvklæbende
strimmel, eller hvor mere end én flap skal foldes
over for at lukke konvolutten, skal du sikre dig,
at det selvklæbende middel kan tåle maskinens
fikseringstemperatur i 0,1 sekund. Kontroller
maskinens specifikationer for at se
fikseringstemperaturen på side 91. Ekstra flapper
og strimler kan betyde, at konvolutten krøller eller
bukker, at der opstår papirstop, og i værste fald kan
det beskadige fikseringsenheden.
• Det giver det bedste resultat, hvis margenerne ikke
placeres tættere end 15 mm på konvoluttens kanter.
• Undgå at udskrive i det område, hvor konvoluttens
sammenføjninger mødes.
Etiketter • Brug kun etiketter, der er beregnet til lasermaskiner,
så maskinen ikke beskadiges.
Ved valg af etiketter skal du tage følgende faktorer i
betragtning:
- Klæbemiddel: Klæbemidlet skal være stabilt ved
maskinens fikseringstemperatur. Kontroller
maskinens specifikationer for at se
fikseringstemperaturen på side 91.
- Placering på arket: Brug kun etiketark, hvor arket
ikke er synligt mellem de enkelte etiketter.
Etiketter kan løsne sig fra ark, hvis der er afstand
mellem dem, hvilket kan medføre alvorlige
papirstop.
- Krøl: Inden udskrivningen skal etiketarket ligge
fladt uden mere end 13 mm krøl i nogen retning.
- Tilstand: Brug ikke etiketter med rynker, bobler
eller andre tegn på manglende klæbeevne.
• Sørg for, at der ikke sidder noget udækket
klæbemateriale mellem etiketterne. Synlige områder
på arket kan medføre, at etiketterne løsnes under
udskriften, hvilket kan forårsage papirstop. Synligt
klæbemateriale kan også beskadige maskindele.
• Kør aldrig et etiketark gennem maskinen mere end
én gang. Den selvklæbende bagside er kun beregnet
til at skulle igennem maskinen én gang.
• Brug ikke etiketter, der har løsnet sig fra arket,
er krøllede, har bobler eller på anden måde
er beskadiget.
Karton eller
materialer i
brugerdefinere
de størrelser
• Udskriv aldrig på medier med en bredde på mindre
end 76 mm eller en længde på mere end 356 mm.
• Indstil margenen i programmet, så den er mindst
6,4 mm fra materialets kant.
MEDIETYPE RETNINGSLINJER28 | Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier
ÆNDRING AF PAPIRSTØRRELSEN
I PAPIRBAKKEN
Hvis du vil anvende længere papir, f.eks. papir i Legal-størrelse, skal du justere
papirstyrene for at forlænge papirbakken.
1. Juster papirlængdestyret i henhold til den ønskede papirlængde. Den
er forudindstillet til Letter- eller A4-størrelse, afhængigt af hvilket land
den bruges i.
2. Når der er lagt papir i bakken, skal du, mens du klemmer papirbreddestyret
sammen som vist, flytte det mod stakken af papir, indtil det berører siden
af stakken let. Klem ikke papirstyret for tæt imod papirkanten, da det kan
bøje papiret.
Hvis du bruger papir i formatet legal, skal du udvide bakkens længde.
3. Tryk på det grønne greb på bagsiden af bakken, og hold det nede. Mens
du holder grebet nede, skal du udvide bakken til den tilsvarende position.
4. Læg papir i papirbakken.
5. Sæt bakken ind i maskinen.
6. Indstil papirstørrelsen fra din computer.
Fortrykt papir • Brevpapir skal være trykt med varmebestandigt
blæk, der ikke smelter, fordamper eller afgiver
giftige gasser, når det udsættes for printerens
fikseringstemperatur i 0,1 sekund. Kontroller
maskinens specifikationer for at se
fikseringstemperaturen på side 91.
• Blækket på brevpapiret skal være ikke-brændbart
og må ikke have nogen form for negativ virkning
på printerens ruller.
• Formularer og brevpapir bør opbevares i forseglet
og fugtsikker emballage for at forhindre forandringer
under opbevaring.
• Kontroller, at blækket på papiret er tørt, før du
lægger fortrykt papir som f.eks. formularer eller
brevpapir i printeren. Under fikseringsprocessen
kan fugtigt blæk løsnes fra fortrykt papir og forringe
udskriftskvaliteten.
1 Bakkeudvidelsesgreb
2 Papirlængdestyr
3 Papirbreddestyr
MEDIETYPE RETNINGSLINJER
• Du må ikke skubbe styrene til indstilling af papirbredden
så tæt ind mod stakken, at den begynder at bøje.
• Det kan medføre papirstop, hvis du ikke indstiller styrene
til papirbredden.Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier | 29
PLACERING AF PAPIR
Placering af papir i bakke 1 eller den valgfri bakke
Læg det udskriftsmedie, du oftest bruger, i bakke 1. Bakke 1 kan maksimalt
indeholde 250 ark 75 g/m2
almindeligt papir.
Du kan købe en ekstra bakke og sætte den i maskinen under standardbakken.
Den rummer 500 ark papir ekstra (se ”Ekstraudstyr” på side 85).
1. Træk bakken ud. Juster bakkens størrelse til det medie, du lægger i.
2. Læg papiret med den side, der skal udskrives på, opad.
3. Når du udskriver et dokument, vælger du papirkilde og type i
programmet. Se Software section, hvis du vil have oplysninger om pcudskrivning.
Ilægning af papir i universalbakken
Universalbakken kan indeholde specielle størrelser og typer af udskriftsmateriale,
f.eks. postkort, notekort og konvolutter. Det er nyttigt ved udskrivning
af en enkelt side på brevpapir eller farvet papir.
Tips om brug af universalbakken
• Læg kun udskriftsmedier i ét format i universalbakken ad gangen.
• Læg ikke mere papir i universalbakken, så længe der er papir i den,
da der ellers kan opstå papirstop. Det gælder også andre typer
udskriftsmedier.
• Udskriftsmedier skal lægges midt i universalbakken med forsiden
nedad, så den øverste kant føres ind i universalbakken først.
• Brug altid kun de angivne udskriftsmedier, så du undgår papirstop
og problemer med udskriftskvaliteten (se ”Valg af udskriftsmedier”
på side 25).
• Sørg for at glatte evt. krøller på postkort, konvolutter og etiketter ud,
før du lægger dem i universalbakken.
1. Hold i håndtaget på universalbakken, og træk nedad for at åbne den.
2. Læg papiret i.
Brug af fotopapir eller coated papir kan skabe problemer, der kræver
reparation. Sådanne reparationer er ikke dækket af Dells garanti eller
serviceaftaler.
1 Fuld
2 Tom
• Hvis papirindføringen giver problemer, skal du lægge ét ark ad gangen
i universalbakken.
• Du kan ilægge papir, der allerede er skrevet på. Den trykte side skal
vende opad med en ukrøllet kant forrest. Hvis du støder på problemer
med papirindføringen, så prøv at vende papiret om. Bemærk,
at udskriftskvaliteten ikke kan garanteres.
• Hvis du vil bruge allerede anvendt papir, skal du placere papiret
med den trykte side nedad.
• Hvis du benytter papir, så bøj papirstakken frem og tilbage for
at adskille sammenhængende ark, før de lægges i bakken.30 | Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier
3. Klem styrene til indstilling af papirbredden i universalbakken ind mod
papiret. Pres dem ikke for langt ind, da det kan få papiret til at bøje.
Det kan medføre papirstop, eller at papiret føres skævt ind.
4. Når du har lagt papir i bakken, skal du angive papirtype og -størrelse
til universalbakken. Se Software section, hvis du vil have oplysninger
om pc-udskrivning.
5. Luk universalbakken, når udskrivningen er færdig.
JUSTERING AF OUTPUTSUPPORTEN
Den udskrevne stak på ud bakken og outputsupporten medvirker til at
justere de udskrevne sider. Træk outputsupporten ud i henhold til papiret
størrelse, så den kan justere siderne korrekt.
Ved papir i Letter-størrelse
Træk outputsupporten ud til stedet markeret med LTR som vist, og fold
forlængeren ud.
Ved papir i A4- eller Legal-størrelse
Træk outputsupporten ud til stedet markeret med A4, LGL som vist, og fold
forlængeren ud.
Afhængigt af hvilken medietype du bruger, skal du følge disse
retningslinjer, når du lægger papir i maskinen:
• Konvolutter: Vend siden med flappen nedad. Frimærkesiden
skal vende opad, med frimærkeenden mod venstre.
• Etiketter: Vend udskriftssiden opad, og vend arket, så det
føres ind i maskinen på den korte led med toppen af arket
først.
• Fortrykt papir: Vend designsiden opad, og vend papiret,
så det føres ind i maskinen på den korte led.
• Karton: Vend udskriftssiden opad, og vend arket, så det føres
ind i maskinen på den korte led.
• Papir, der tidligere er udskrevet på: Vend siden med den
eksisterende udskrift nedad, og vend det, så det føres ind
i maskinen på den korte led. Den kant, der føres ind først,
må hverken være krøllet eller foldet.
De indstillinger, der foretages fra printerdriveren, tilsidesætter
indstillingerne på kontrolpanelet.
1 Outputsupport
2 Forlængeren
• Hvis outputsupporten ikke er korrekt anbragt, justeres siderne
forkert eller falder ud.
• Hvis der udskrives mange sider lige efter hinanden, kan udbakken
blive varm. Pas på ikke at berøre overfladen, og sørg især for, at
børn ikke kommer inden for rækkevidde.Ilægning af originaler og udskriftsmedier | 31
INDSTILLING AF PAPIRSTØRRELSE OG TYPE
Når du har lagt papir i papirbakken, skal du bruge tasterne på kontrolpanelet
og indstille papirstørrelse og -type. De valgte indstillinger gælder for
kopierings- og faxtilstand. Ved udskrivning fra pc skal du vælge
papirstørrelse og -type i det program, du bruger på pc’en.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Paper Setup vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Paper Size
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede papirbakke vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den papirstørrelse, du bruger, vises,
og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på Tilbage ( ) for at vende tilbage til det øverste niveau.
7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Paper Type vises, og tryk på OK.
8. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den papirtype, du bruger, vises, og tryk på OK.
9. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.32 | Kopiering
:
kopiering
Dette kapitel indeholder trinvise instruktioner til kopiering af dokumenter.
Kapitlet omfatter:
• Valg af papirbakke
• Kopiering
• Ændring af indstillingerne for hver kopi
• Ændring af scanningsstørrelsesindstillingerne
• Ændring af standardindstillingerne for kopiering
• Kopiering af ID-kort
• Brug af de specielle kopifunktioner
• Udskrivning på begge sider af papiret
• Indstilling af timeout for kopiering
VALG AF PAPIRBAKKE
Når du har lagt udskriftsmedier til kopier i, skal du vælge den papirbakke,
du vil bruge til kopijob.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Paper Setup vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Paper Source vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Copy Tray.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede papirbakke vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
KOPIERING
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
Der vises Ready to Copy på den øverste linje af displayet.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.
3. Brug taltasterne, og indtast kopiantallet, hvis du vil tage flere kopier.
4. Du kan tilpasse kopiindstillingerne, bl.a. kopistørrelse, lysstyrke
og originaltype, ved at bruge tasterne på kontrolpanelet. Se ”Ændring af
indstillingerne for hver kopi” på side 32.
Hvis det er nødvendigt, kan du bruge specielle kopieringsfunktioner som
posterkopiering eller 2- eller 4 op-kopiering. Se ”Kopiering af ID-kort” på
side 33.
5. Tryk på Color Start ( ) for at starte farvekopieringen.
Eller tryk på Black Start ( ) for at begynde sort/hvid kopiering.
ÆNDRING AF INDSTILLINGERNE FOR HVER KOPI
Det er hurtigt og nemt at kopiere med maskinens standardindstillinger. Men
du kan også bruge funktionstasterne til kopiering på kontrolpanelet og ændre
indstillingerne for hver ny kopi.
Mørkhed
Hvis du har en original, der indeholder svage markeringer og mørke billeder,
kan du justere lysstyrken, så kopien bliver lettere at læse.
Hvis du vil justere lysstyrken for kopier, skal du trykke på Mørkhed ( ).
Hver gang du trykker på denne tast, kan du vælge mellem følgende
indstillinger:
• Lightest: Velegnet til mørkere tryk.
• Light: Velegnet til mørkt trykt.
• Normal: Velegnet til almindelige maskinskrevne eller udskrevne originaler.
• Dark: Velegnet til lysere tryk.
• Darkest: Velegnet til lysere tryk og til svage blyantsmarkeringer.
Originaltype
Indstillingen Originaltype bruges til at forbedre kopikvaliteten ved at angive
dokumenttype for det aktuelle kopijob.
Tryk på Originaltype ( ) for at vælge dokumenttype. Hver gang du trykker
på denne tast, kan du vælge mellem følgende indstillinger:
• Text: Bruges til originaler, der hovedsageligt indeholder tekst.
• Text/Photo: Bruges til originaler med en blanding af tekst og
fotografier.
• Photo: Bruges, hvis originalerne er fotografier.
• Magazine: Bruges, hvis originalerne er magasiner.
Formindsket eller forstørret kopi
Hvis du trykker på tasten Formindsk/Forstør ( ), kan du forstørre eller
formindske det kopierede billede fra 25 % til 400 %, når du kopierer
originaldokumenter fra scannerglaspladen, eller fra 25 % til 100 % fra
DADF’en.
Sådan vælger du blandt de foruddefinerede
kopistørrelser:
1. Tryk på Formindsk/Forstør ( ).
2. Tryk på Formindsk/Forstør ( ) eller venstre/højre pil, indtil den
ønskede tidsindstilling vises, og tryk på OK.
Du kan skalere kopien ved at indtaste
skaleringsforholdet direkte:
1. Tryk på Formindsk/Forstør ( ).
2. Tryk på Formindsk/Forstør ( ) eller venstre/højre pil, indtil
Custom vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Angiv skaleringsforholdet, og tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg.
Du kan annullere kopijobbet, mens maskinen er i gang. Tryk på
Stop/Slet ( ), så stopper kopieringen.
Hvis du trykker på Stop/Slet ( ), mens du angiver
kopieringsindstillingerne, nulstilles alle de indstillinger, du har angivet
for det aktuelle kopijob, og vender tilbage til deres standardværdier.
Ellers indstilles de automatisk til deres standardværdier igen, når maskinen
har afsluttet kopieringen.
Når du formindsker en kopi, kan der forekomme sorte streger
nederst på kopien.
hKopiering | 33
ÆNDRING AF
SCANNINGSSTØRRELSESINDSTILLINGERNE
Du kan justere scanningsstørrelsen for originalpapiret. Hvis du for eksempel
scanner en original i A4-størrelse og indstiller scanningsstørrelsen til A5,
scanner maskinen kun A5-området (148 x 210 mm). Vi anbefaler, at du
skifter til den rigtige scanningsstørrelse for originalpapiret.
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Scan Size.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede indstilling vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
ÆNDRING AF STANDARDINDSTILLINGERNE
FOR KOPIERING
Kopieringsindstillingerne, herunder mørkhed, originaltype og antal kopier, kan
indstilles til de værdier, som bruges hyppigst. Når du kopierer et dokument,
bruges standardindstillingerne, medmindre de ændres ved hjælp af de
tilsvarende knapper på kontrolpanelet.
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Change Default.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede konfigurationsindstilling
vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede indstilling vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Gentag trin 4 til 5 efter behov.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
KOPIERING AF ID-KORT
Maskinen kan udskrive 2-sidede originaler på ét ark papir i A4-, Letter-,
Legal-, Folio-, Oficio-, Executive-, B5-, A5- eller A6-størrelse.
Når du kopierer med denne funktion, udskriver maskinen den ene side
af originalen på den øverste halvdel af papiret og den anden side på den
nederste halvdel uden at formindske originalens størrelse. Denne funktion
er velegnet til kopiering af små originaler, f.eks. navneskilte.
Denne kopifunktion kan kun vælges, hvis du lægger originalen
på scannerglaspladen.
1. Tryk på Id-kopi ( ).
2. Læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad
på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning
af originaler på side 24.
3. Place Front Side and Press[Start], vises på
displayet.
4. Tryk på Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ).
Maskinen begynder at scanne forsiden, og der vises
Place Back Side and Press[Start] på displayet.
5. Åbn scannerlåget, og vend originalen om.
6. Tryk på Color Start ( ) for at starte farvekopieringen.
Eller tryk på Black Start ( ) for at begynde sort/hvid kopiering.
BRUG AF DE SPECIELLE KOPIFUNKTIONER
Du kan bruge følgende kopifunktioner:
Sortering
Du kan indstille maskinen, så kopieringsjob sorteres. Hvis du f.eks. opretter 2
kopier af en original på 3 sider, udskrives der et komplet dokument på 3 sider
efterfulgt af endnu et komplet dokument.
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller
læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på
scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning
af originaler på side 24.
3. Indtast det ønskede antal kopier på taltastaturet.
4. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på
den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på OK, når der vises Copy Collation.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge den ønskede farvetilstand.
Der er to muligheder:
• Yes-Color: Farvekopi
• Yes-Mono: Sort/hvid kopiering
7. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen.
Der udskrives et komplet dokument efterfulgt af det næste komplette
dokument.
Når du har brugt denne valgmulighed, vender maskinen automatisk
tilbage til standardindstillingen.
Hvis du trykker på Stop/Slet ( ), mens du angiver
kopieringsindstillinger, annulleres de valgte indstillinger,
og standardindstillingerne gendannes.
Hvis du trykker på Stop/Slet ( ), eller hvis du ikke trykker på
andre knapper i ca. 30 sekunder, annullerer maskinen kopijobbet
og vender tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Hvis originalen er større end det område, der kan udskrives på, er det
ikke sikkert, at alle dele af originalen kan kopieres.
Hvis du trykker på Stop/Slet ( ), eller hvis du ikke trykker på andre
knapper i ca. 30 sekunder, annullerer maskinen kopijobbet og vender
tilbage til klar-tilstand.34 | Kopiering
2- eller 4-op-kopiering
Maskinen kan udskrive 2 eller 4 originalbilleder formindsket, så de kan være
på ét enkelt ark papir.
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller
læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på
scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning
af originaler på side 24.
3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på
den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil indtil 2-Up eller 4-Up vises, og
tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge den ønskede
farvetilstand.
Der er to muligheder:
• Yes-Color: Farvekopi
• Yes-Mono: Sort/hvid kopiering
6. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen.
Plakatkopiering
Maskinen kan udskrive et billede på op til 9 ark papir (3 x 3). Du kan derefter
føje de kopierede sider sammen til ét dokument i plakatstørrelse.
Denne kopifunktion kan kun vælges, hvis du lægger originalen
på scannerglaspladen.
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
2. Læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad
på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning
af originaler på side 24.
3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på
den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Poster Copy vises,
og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge den ønskede
farvetilstand.
Der er to muligheder:
• Yes-Color: Farvekopi
• Yes-Mono: Sort/hvid kopiering
6. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen.
Originalen deles op i 9 dele. Hver af disse dele scannes
og kopieres en efter en i følgende rækkefølge:
Klonkopiering
Maskinen kan udskrive flere kopier af et billede fra en original på en enkelt
side. Antallet af kopier på siden bestemmes automatisk af originalen og
papirstørrelsen.
Denne kopifunktion kan kun vælges, hvis du lægger originalen
på scannerglaspladen.
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
2. Læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad
på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning
af originaler på side 24.
3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på
den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Clone Copy vises, og
tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge den ønskede farvetilstand.
Der er to muligheder:
• Yes-Color: Farvekopi
• Yes-Mono: Sort/hvid kopiering
6. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen.
Sletning af baggrundsbilleder
Du kan indstille maskinen til at udskrive et billede uden den tilhørende baggrund.
Denne kopifunktion fjerner baggrundsfarven og kan være praktisk, når du f.eks.
kopierer en avis eller et katalog med farve i baggrunden.
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.
3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Adjust Bkgd. vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises.
• Off: Bruger ikke denne funktion.
• Auto: Optimerer baggrunden.
• Enhance 1~2: Jo højere værdien er, jo mere naturtro er
baggrunden.
• Erase 1~4: Jo højere tallet er, desto lysere er baggrunden.
6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Bogkopiering
Funktionen Book Copy giver dig mulighed for at kopiere en hel bog. Hvis
bogen er for tyk, skal du løfte dækslet, indtil det bremses af hængslerne, og
derefter lukke dækslet. Hvis bogen eller magasinet er tykkere end 3 cm, er
du nødt til at kopiere med låget åbent.
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
2. Læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad
på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning
af originaler på side 24.
3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på
den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Book Copy.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises.
• Off: Bruger ikke denne funktion.
• Left Page: Brug denne indstilling til at udskrive venstre side af bogen.
• Right Page: Brug denne indstilling til at udskrive højre side af bogen.
• Both Page: Brug denne indstilling til at udskrive begge sider af bogen.
Du kan ikke justere kopistørrelsen med knappen Formindsk/Forstør
( ), når du bruger 2- eller 4-op-kopiering.
1 2
1 2
3 4
Du kan ikke justere kopistørrelsen ved hjælp af knappen Formindsk/
Forstør ( ), mens du opretter en klonkopi.Kopiering | 35
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge den ønskede farvetilstand.
Der er to muligheder:
• Yes-Color: Farvekopi
• Yes-Mono: Sort/hvid kopiering
7. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen.
Margenskift
Funktionen Margin Shift giver dig mulighed for at oprette en indbindingskant
for et dokument. Billedet kan justeres op eller ned på siden og/eller forskydes
mod højre eller venstre.
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller
læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på
scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning
af originaler på side 24.
3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på
den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Margin Shift.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises.
• Off: Denne funktion er deaktiveret.
• Auto Center: Kopierer automatisk midt på papiret.
• Custom Margin: Indtast venstre, højre, top- eller bundmargen
fra taltastaturet.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge Yes.
7. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen.
8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Slet kant
Med Slet kant kan du slette mærker, borehuller, foldemærker og mærker
efter hæfteklammer langs alle fire sider af et dokument.
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller
læg en enkelt original med forsiden nedad på
scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af
originaler på side 24.
3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på
den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Edge Erase.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises.
• Off: Angiver ikke indbindingsindstillingen.
• Small Original: Sletter kanten af originalen, hvis den er lille.
• Hole Punch: Sletter mærkerne efter bogbindingshuller.
• Book Center: Sletter den midterste del af papiret, der er sort og
vandret, når du kopierer en bog.
• Border Erase: Sletter en bestemt mængde af kanten af udskriften.
6. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Justering af gråtone ved kopiering
Når du kopierer en original i sort/hvid, kan du justere gråtoneskalaen og
optimere kvaliteten af kopien ved hjælp af denne funktion. Funktionen er
udelukkende tilgængelig i forbindelse med gråtonekopier.
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.
3. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Copy Feature på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Gray Enhance.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge Yes.
6. Tryk på OK for at starte kopieringen.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
UDSKRIVNING PÅ BEGGE SIDER AF PAPIRET
Hvis du trykker på tasten Duplex ( ) på maskinen, kan du få adgang til at
udskrive dokumenter på begge sider af papiret.
1. Tryk på Kopiering.
2. Tryk på Duplex ( ).
3. Hold knappen left/right arrow inde, indtil den ønskede
indbindingsindstilling vises.
• Off: Kopierer i normal tilstand.
• 1->2Side Short: Kopierer siderne, så de skal læses, ligesom når
man vipper siderne op på en notesblok.
• 1->2Side Long: Kopierer siderne, så de skal læses som i en bog.
• 2 ->1Side: Kopierer begge sider af originalerne og udskriver hver
side på et separat ark.
• 2 ->2Side: Kopierer begge sider af originalerne og udskriver siderne
på begge sider af papiret. Med denne funktion udskrives kopierne
Funktionen Margin Shift kan bruges enten sammen med scannerglaspladen
eller DADF'en, afhængigt at den enkelte konfiguration.
- Auto Center: Scannerglasplade
- Custom Margin: Scannerglasplade, DADF
Funktionen Edge Erase kan bruges enten sammen med scannerglaspladen
eller DADF'en, afhængigt at den enkelte konfiguration.
- Small Original: Scannerglasplade
- Hole Punch: Scannerglasplade, DADF
- Book Center: Scannerglasplade
- Border Erase: Scannerglasplade, DADF
X
Y
X
Y36 | Kopiering
som en nøjagtig gengivelse af originalerne.
• 2 ->1Side ROT2: Kopierer begge sider af originalerne og udskriver
hver side på et separat ark, mens oplysningerne på bagsiden af
udskriften roteres 180°.
4. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg.
Hvis tilstanden er aktiveret, er tasten Duplex ( ) baggrundsbelyst.
INDSTILLING AF TIMEOUT FOR KOPIERING
Du kan indstille det tidsrum, maskinen venter, før den genopretter
standardkopieringsindstillingerne, hvis du ikke begynder at kopiere efter
at have ændret indstillingerne på kontrolpanelet.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Timeout vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede tidsindstilling vises.
Hvis du vælger Off, betyder det, at maskinen ikke gendanner
standardindstillingerne, før du trykker på Black Start eller Color Start
( ) for at starte kopieringen, eller Stop/Slet ( ) for at annullere.
5. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg.
6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
X
YScanning | 37
scanning
Du kan scanne billeder og tekst på maskinen, så de kan gemmes som digitale filer på computeren.
Kapitlet omfatter:
• Grundlæggende om scanning
• Scanning fra kontrolpanelet
• Scanning ved hjælp af en netværksforbindelse
• Ændring af indstillingerne for hvert scanningsjob
• Automatisk udskrivning af scanningsbekræftelse
• Konfiguration af adressekartoteket
GRUNDLÆGGENDE OM SCANNING
Du kan scanne originalerne på maskinen via et USB-kabel eller netværket.
• Dell Scan Manager: Du skal blot gå hen til maskinen, scanne
originalerne fra kontrolpanelet, hvorefter de scannede data gemmes i
mappen Dokumenter på den computer, der er sluttet til maskinen. Når
installationen er fuldført, er Dell Scan Manager installeret på
computeren. Funktionen kan bruges sammen med en lokal forbindelse
eller netværksforbindelse. Se næste afsnit.
• TWAIN: TWAIN er et af de foruddefinerede programmer til
billedbehandling. Når du scanner et billede, startes det valgte program,
så du selv kan styre scanningsprocessen. Se afsnittet Software.
Funktionen kan bruges sammen med en lokal forbindelse eller
netværksforbindelse. Se Software section.
• Dell SmarThru Office: Denne funktion udgør den software, der følger
med maskinen. Programmet kan bruges til scanning af billeder eller
dokumenter, og funktionen kan bruges via en lokal forbindelse eller
netværksforbindelse. Se Software section.
• WIA: WIA er en forkortelse for Windows Images Acquisition. Hvis du vil
have adgang til at bruge denne funktion, skal computeren være sluttet
direkte til maskinen via et USB-kabel. Se Software section.
• E-mail: Du kan sende det scannede billede som en fil vedhæftet en email. Se side 39.
• FTP: Du kan scanne et billede og overføre det til en FTP-server. Se
side 40.
• SMB: Du kan scanne et billede og sende det til en delt mappe på en
SMB-server. Se side 40.
SCANNING FRA KONTROLPANELET
Maskinen giver dig nem adgang til at scanne fra kontrolpanelet og sende
det scannede dokument til mappen Dokumenter på den tilsluttede
computer. Hvis du vil have adgang til at bruge denne funktion, skal
maskinen være sluttet til computeren via et USB-kabel, eller de to enheder
skal være forbundet via netværket.
Med det medfølgende program Dell Scan Manager får du endvidere
adgang til at åbne scannede dokumenter med det program, du tidligere har
konfigureret. Microsoft Paint, Email, SmarThru Office, OCR kan
eksempelvis føjes til programmet. Se ”Angivelse af scanningsoplysninger i
Dell Scan Manager.” på side 37.
Det er muligt at gemme scannede billeder som BMP-, JEPG-, TIFF- eller
PDF-filer.
Angivelse af scanningsoplysninger i Dell Scan
Manager.
Du kan finde oplysninger om programmet Dell Scan Manager og om status
for den installerede scannerdriver. Du kan også ændre
scanningsindstillinger samt tilføje og slette de mapper, hvor de dokumenter
der scannes og sendes til computeren, gemmes, i programmet Dell Scan
Manager.
1. Tryk på Start → Kontrolpanel → Dell Scan Manager.
Dell Scan Manager Administration vises.
2. Vælg den relevante maskine under Dell Scan Manager.
3. Tryk på Scan Property.
4. Set Scan Button giver dig adgang til at ændre scanningsindstillinger og
det sted, hvor filerne gemmes, samt til at tilføje eller slette programmet
og formatere filer.
Du kan foretage ændringer på scannerenheden ved hjælp af Change
Port. Lokal forbindelse eller netværk.
Tryk på OK, når indstillingen er fuldført.
Scanning til programmer
1. Kontroller, at maskinen og computeren er tændt og korrekt forbundet
med hinanden.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du kan finde flere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 37.
3. Tryk på Scan/Email.
Ready to Scan vises på den øverste linje i displayet.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Scan to PC vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indstilling vises, og tryk
på OK.
6. Der vises forskellige meddelelser, afhængigt af portforbindelsen.
Kontroller, hvilken af følgende meddelelser der vises, og gå videre til det
angivne trin.
• Scan Destination: Tilsluttet via USB. Gå videre til trin 7.
• Id: Forbindelsen er blevet oprettet via netværket, og brugeren er
blevet registreret. Gå videre til trin 8.
• W Local PC X: Vælg USB eller netværk til scanning. Hvis du
opretter tilslutning via USB, skal du gå til trin 7. Hvis du opretter
tilslutning via netværk, skal du gå til trin 8.
• Not Available: Er ikke hverken tilsluttet via USB eller forbundet via
netværket. Kontroller portforbindelsen.
7. Hold left/right arrow inde, indtil den ønskede port vises i displayet.
Den maksimale opløsning, der kan opnås, afhænger af forskellige
faktorer, herunder computerhastighed, tilgængelig diskplads,
hukommelse, størrelsen af det scannede billede og indstillinger for
bitdybde. Alt afhængigt af systemet og af, hvad du scanner, kan du
muligvis ikke scanne ved bestemte opløsninger, især ikke, hvis du
bruger forbedret opløsning.
Programmet Dell Scan Manager kan udelukkende bruges sammen
med Windows.38 | Scanning
8. Indtast det registrerede bruger-id og PIN-koden, og klik på OK.
9. Under Scan Destination skal du trykke på left/right arrow, indtil
programmet vises. Tryk derefter på OK.
Standardindstillingen er Dokumenter.
10. Du kan scanne fra standardindstillingen ved at trykke på Color Start
( ) eller Black Start ( ). Tryk på venstre/højre piletast, indtil den
ønskede indstilling vises, og tryk derefter på OK.
11. Scanning påbegyndes.
SCANNING VED HJÆLP AF EN NETVÆRKSFORBINDELSE
Hvis din maskine er tilsluttet et netværk, og du har valgt de rigtige
netværksparametre, kan du scanne og sende billeder over netværket.
Klargøring til netværksscanning
Inden du begynder at bruge maskinens netværksscanningsfunktioner, skal
du konfigurere følgende indstillinger afhængigt af scanningsdestinationen:
• Der skal oprettes autoriserede brugere, så der kan scannes til e-mail,
FTP og SMB.
• Der skal oprettes en SMTP-server, så der kan scannes til e-mail.
• Der skal oprettes FTP-servere, så der kan scannes til FTP.
• Der skal oprettes SMB-servere, så der kan scannes til SMB.
Brugergodkendelse til netværksscanning
Du skal registrere lokale brugere eller godkendte netværksbrugere ved
hjælp af Embedded Web Service for at kunne sende en e-mail, til FTP
eller SMB.
• Hvis brugergodkendelsen er aktiveret, er det kun godkendte brugere
på lokale databaser eller serverdatabaser (SMB, LDAP, Kerberos),
der kan sende scannede data til netværket (e-mail, FTP, SMB) ved
hjælp af maskinen.
• Du skal registrere godkendelseskonfigurationen til netværket eller
den lokale godkendelse ved hjælp af Embedded Web Service for
at kunne bruge brugergodkendelse til netværksscanning.
• Der findes 3 typer brugergodkendelser: ingen godkendelse
(standard), netværksgodkendelse og lokal godkendelse.
Registrering af lokale autoriserede brugere
1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser,
og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted.
2. Klik på Machine Settings.
3. Vælg Local Authentication på General Setup på User
Authentication-websiden.
4. Klik på Add.
5. Vælg det indeksnummer, hvor den tilsvarende indtastning skal
gemmes, fra 1 til 50.
6. Indtast dit navn, dit godkendelses-id, din adgangskode, din
e-mail-adresse og dit telefonnr.
Du skal indtaste det registrerede bruger-id og adgangskoden, når
du begynder at scanne til e-mail fra kontrolpanelet.
7. Klik på Apply.
Registrering af godkendte netværksbrugere
1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser,
og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted.
2. Klik på Machine Settings.
3. Vælg Network Authentication på General Setup på User
Authentication-websiden.
4. Klik på Apply og OK.
5. Vælg den Authentication Type, du ønsker.
6. Konfigurer en korrekt værdi for hver tjeneste, på følgende måde:
7. Klik på Apply.
Netværksbrugere, der er godkendt af Kerberos
1. Indtast den ressource, der bruges til Kerberos-login.
2. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name.
3. Indtast IP-adressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som
et værtsnavn.
4. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535.
Som standard er portnummeret 88.
5. Du kan tilføje et backupdomæne som i tidligere trin.
6. Klik på Apply.
Netværksbrugere, der er godkendt af SMB
1. Indtast det domæne, der bruges til SMB-login.
2. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name.
3. Indtast IP-adressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som
et værtsnavn.
4. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535.
Standardportnummeret er 139.
5. Brugeren kan tilføje et backupdomæne som i tidligere trin.
6. Klik på Apply.
Netværksbruger, der er godkendt af LDAP
1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser,
og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted.
2. Klik på Machine Settings og LDAP Server Setup.
3. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name.
4. Indtast IP-adressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som
et værtsnavn.
5. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535.
Som standard er portnummeret 389.
6. Indtast Search Root Directory. Det øverste søgeniveau i LDAPbibliotekstræet.
7. Vælg Authentication method. Metode til login på LDAP-server.
Anonymous: Den bruges til binde med NULL-adgangskode
og login-id (adgangskode og login-id er nedtonet i Embedded Web
Service).
Simple: Den bruges til at binde med login-id og adgangskode i
Embedded Web Service.
8. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet for Append Root to Base DN.
• Id'et er det samme som det id, der er registreret for Dell Scan
Manager.
• PIN-koden er det firecifrede tal, der er registreret for Dell Scan
Manager.
Du kan tilføje eller slette den mappe, hvor den scannede fil
gemmes, ved at tilføje eller slette programmet i Dell Scan Manager → Set Scan Button.
• De scannede billeder gemmes i mappen Dokumenter → My
Pictures → Dell på computeren.
• Du kan foretage en hurtig scanning i programmet Dell Scan
Manager ved hjælp af Twain-driveren.
• Du kan også foretage scanningen ved at trykke på Start →
Kontrolpanel → Dell Scan Manager → Hurtig scanning
i Windows.
Brugeren kan tilføje op til 6 alternative domæner.Scanning | 39
9. Vælg Match User’s Login ID to the following LDAP attribute
mellem CN, UID eller UserPrincipalName.
10. Indtast loginnavnet, adgangskoden, det maksimale antal
søgeresultater og søgningens timeout-værdi.
11. Vælg den Serach Name Order, du ønsker.
12. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet for "From:" Field Security Options.
13. Klik på Apply.
Konfiguration af en e-mail-konto
Hvis du vil scanne og sende et billede som en fil vedhæftet en e-mail,
skal du bruge Embedded Web Service og angive netværksparametre.
1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser,
og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted.
2. Klik på Machine Settings og E-mail Setup.
3. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name.
4. Indtast IP-adressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som
et værtsnavn.
5. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535.
Som standard er portnummeret 25.
6. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet SMTP Requires Authentication, så der
kræves godkendelse.
7. Indtast logonnavn og adgangskode til SMTP-serveren.
8. Klik på Apply.
Oprettelse af en FTP-server
Hvis du vil bruge en FTP-server, skal du bruge Embedded Web Service
og angive parametre, så du kan få adgang til FTP-servere.
1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser,
og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted.
2. Klik på Machine Settings og FTP Setup.
3. Klik på Server List.
4. Klik på Add.
5. Vælg indeksnummeret, fra 1 til 20.
6. Indtast et navn i Alias for the Setup til den tilsvarende angivelse
på serverlisten. Dette navn vises på maskinen.
7. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name.
8. Indtast serveradressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller
som et værtsnavn.
9. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535.
Som standard er portnummeret 21.
10. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet Anonymous, hvis uautoriserede personer
skal kunne få adgang til FTP-serveren.
Dette felt er ikke markeret som standard.
11. Indtast logonnavnet og adgangskoden.
12. Indtast Scan File Folder under FTP-mappen til lagring af det
scannede billede.
13. Klik på Apply.
Oprettelse af en SMB-server
Hvis du vil bruge en SMB-server, skal du bruge Embedded Web Service
og angive parametre, så du kan få adgang til FTP-servere.
1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser,
og klik på Go for at få adgang til maskinens websted.
2. Klik på Machine Settings og SMB Setup.
3. Klik på Server List.
4. Klik på Add.
5. Vælg indeksnummeret, fra 1 til 20.
6. Indtast et navn i Alias for the Setup til den tilsvarende angivelse
på serverlisten. Dette navn vises på maskinen.
7. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name.
8. Indtast serveradressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller
som et værtsnavn.
9. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535.
Standardportnummeret er 139.
10. Indtast Share name for serveren.
11. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet Anonymous, hvis uautoriserede personer
skal kunne få adgang til SMB-serveren.
Dette felt er ikke markeret som standard.
12. Indtast logonnavnet og adgangskoden.
13. Indtast SMB-serverens domænenavn.
14. Indtast Scan File Folder under delt mappe til lagring af det
scannede billede.
15. Klik på Apply.
Scanning til e-mail
Du kan scanne et billede og sende det som en fil vedhæftet en e-mail. Men
først skal du oprette din e-mail-konto i Embedded Web Service.
Se ”Konfiguration af en e-mail-konto” på side 39.
Inden du begynder at scanne, kan du angive scanningsindstillingerne for
scanningsjobbet. Se ”Ændring af indstillingerne for hvert scanningsjob” på
side 40.
1. Maskinen skal være tilsluttet et netværk.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.
3. Tryk på Scan/Email.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil der vises Scan to Email på nederste linje
i displayet, og tryk derefter på OK.
5. Indtast modtagerens e-mail-adresse, og tryk på OK.
Hvis du har oprettet et adressekartotek, kan du hente en adresse fra
hukommelsen ved at trykke på en genvejstast, hurtigopkaldstast eller
gruppeopkaldstast. Se ”Konfiguration af adressekartoteket” på side 41.
6. Hvis du vil indtaste flere adresser, skal du trykke på OK, når Yes vises
og derefter gentage trin 5.
Hvis du vil fortsætte til næste trin, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for
at vælge No og derefter trykke på OK.
7. Hvis der vises en meddelelse i displayet, hvor du bliver spurgt, om du vil
sende en e-mail til din konto, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge
Yes eller No og derefter trykke på OK.
8. Indtast et emne til e-mailen, og tryk på OK.
LDAP Referral: LDAP-klienten søger på henvisningsserveren,
hvis LDAP-serveren ikke indeholder data, der kan besvare
forespørgslen, og LDAP-serveren har en henvisningsserver.
Denne indstilling vises kun, når du har valgt indstillingen
Netværksgodkendelse i indstillingen for brugergodkendelse.
Hvis du vil søge efter oplysninger i en standard-e-mailadressegruppe, skal du markere denne indstilling.
Hvis godkendelsesmetoden for SMTP-serveren er
POP3beforeSMTP, skal du markere afkrydsningsfeltet for SMTP
Requires POP3 Before SMTP Authentication.
a. Indtast IP-adressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer
eller som et værtsnavn.
b. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535. Som standard
er portnummeret 25.
Denne prompt vises ikke, hvis du har aktiveret indstillingen Send
til selv i opsætningen af e-mail-kontoen.40 | Scanning
9. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede filformat vises, og tryk
derefter på OK eller Start.
Maskinen begynder at scanne og sender derefter e-mailen.
10. Hvis der vises en meddelelse i displayet, hvor du bliver spurgt, om du vil
logge af din konto, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge Yes
eller No og derefter trykke på OK.
11. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Scanning til en FTP-server
Du kan scanne et billede og derefter overføre det til en FTP-server. Du skal
angive parametre fra Embedded Web Service, så du kan få adgang til FTPservere. Se ”Oprettelse af en FTP-server” på side 39.
Inden du begynder at scanne, kan du angive scanningsindstillingerne for
scanningsjobbet. Se ”Ændring af indstillingerne for hvert scanningsjob” på
side 40.
1. Maskinen skal være tilsluttet et netværk.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.
3. Tryk på Scan/Email.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil der vises Scan to FTP på nederste linje
i displayet, og tryk derefter på OK.
5. Indtast bruger-id’et, og tryk på OK.
6. Indtast adgangskoden, og tryk på OK.
7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede FTP-server vises, og tryk
derefter på OK eller Start.
8. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede filtype vises, og tryk derefter
på OK eller Start.
Maskinen begynder at scanne og sender derefter filen til den angivne
server.
Scanning til en SMB-server
Du kan scanne et billede og derefter sende det til en SMB-server. Du skal
angive parametre fra Embedded Web Service, så du kan få adgang til SMBservere. Se ”Oprettelse af en SMB-server” på side 39.
Inden du begynder at scanne, kan du angive scanningsindstillingerne for
scanningsjobbet. Se ”Ændring af indstillingerne for hvert scanningsjob” på
side 40.
1. Maskinen skal være tilsluttet et netværk.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.
3. Tryk på Scan/Email.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil der vises Scan to SMB på nederste linje
i displayet, og tryk derefter på OK.
5. Indtast bruger-id’et, og tryk på OK.
6. Indtast adgangskoden, og tryk på OK.
7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede SMB-server vises, og tryk
derefter på OK eller Start.
8. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede filformat vises, og tryk
derefter på OK eller Start.
Maskinen begynder at scanne og sender derefter filen til den angivne
server.
ÆNDRING AF INDSTILLINGERNE FOR HVERT
SCANNINGSJOB
Du kan tilpasse scanningsjob ved at bruge følgende indstillinger på maskinen.
• Scan Size: Angiver billedstørrelsen.
• Original Type: Angiver originaldokumentets type.
• Resolution: Angiver billedopløsningen.
• Scan Color: Angiver farvetilstanden.
• Scan Format: Angiver det filformat, som billedet skal gemmes i. Hvis
du vælger TIFF eller PDF, kan du vælge at scanne flere sider. Den
valgte scanningstype bestemmer, om denne indstilling vises eller ej.
Sådan tilpasser du indstillingerne, før du begynder at scanne:
1. Tryk på Scan/Email.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Scan Feature på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede scanningstype vises,
og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede scanningsindstilling vises,
og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede status vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Gentag trin 4 og 5, hvis du vil angive andre indstillinger.
7. Når du er færdig, skal du trykke på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til
klar-tilstand.
ÆNDRING AF
STANDARDSCANNINGSINDSTILLINGER
Du kan undgå at skulle ændre indstillingerne, hver gang du scanner. I stedet
kan du angive standardscanningsindstillinger, der for hver scanningstype.
1. Tryk på Scan/Email.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Scan Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Change Default.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede scanningstype vises,
og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede scanningsindstilling vises,
og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede status vises, og tryk på OK.
7. Gentag trin 5 og 6, hvis du vil ændre andre indstillinger.
8. Hvis du vil ændre standardindstillingerne for andre scanningstyper, skal
du trykke på Tilbage ( ) og gentage vejledningen fra trin 4.
9. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
AUTOMATISK UDSKRIVNING AF
SCANNINGSBEKRÆFTELSE
Du kan indstille maskinen, så den udskriver en bekræftelsesrapport, der
viser, om en transmission lykkedes, hvor mange sider der blev sendt m.m.
Rapporten viser scanningsjobbet, og sender det via SMB og FTP.
1. Tryk på Scan/Email.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Scan Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Send Report.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede scanningstype vises,
og tryk på OK.
• On-Error: Maskinen udskriver kun rapporten, hvis der opstår en fejl.
• On: Rapporten udskrives, uanset om et job fuldføres eller
mislykkes.
• Off: Der udskrives ingen rapport efter fuldførelse af et job.
5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.Scanning | 41
KONFIGURATION AF ADRESSEKARTOTEKET
Du kan oprette et adressekartotek med de e-mail-adresser, du oftest bruger,
via Embedded Web Service og derefter angive en e-mail-adresse hurtigt og
nemt ved at indtaste det nummer, den har fået tildelt i adressekartoteket.
Registrering af hurtignumre til e-mail-adresser
1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser, og klik på Go
for at få adgang til maskinens websted.
2. Klik på Machine Settings og E-mail Setup.
3. Klik på Individual Address Book og Add.
4. Vælg et nummer i adressekartoteket, og indtast det brugernavn og den
e-mail-adresse, du vil gemme.
5. Klik på Apply.
Konfiguration af gruppenumre til e-mail-adresser
Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser, og klik på Go
for at få adgang til maskinens websted.
1. Klik på Machine Settings og E-mail Setup.
2. Klik på Group Address Book og Add.
3. Vælg et gruppenummer, og indtast det ønskede gruppenavn.
4. Vælg de hurtignumre til e-mail-adresser, der skal indgå i gruppen.
5. Klik på Apply.
Hentning af globale e-mail-adresser fra LDAPserveren
Du kan ikke blot bruge lokale adresser, der er gemt i maskinens hukommelse,
men også adresser på LDAP-serveren. Hvis du vil kunne bruge globale adresser,
skal du først konfigurere LDAP-serveren via Embedded Web Service:
1. Indtast maskinens IP-adresse som URL-adresse i en browser, og klik på Go
for at få adgang til maskinens websted.
2. Klik på Machine Settings, LDAP Server Setup.
3. Vælg IP Address eller Host Name.
4. Indtast IP-adressen som decimaler adskilt af punktummer eller som
et værtsnavn.
5. Indtast serverens portnummer, fra 1 til 65535.
Som standard er portnummeret 389.
6. Indtast Search Root Directory. Det øverste søgeniveau i LDAPbibliotekstræet
7. Vælg Authentication method. Metode til login på LDAP-server.
Anonymous: Den bruges til binde med NULL-adgangskode og login-id
(adgangskode og login-id er nedtonet i Embedded Web Service).
Simple: Den bruges til at binde med login-id og adgangskode i
Embedded Web Service.
8. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet for Append Root to Base DN.
9. Indtast loginnavnet, adgangskoden, det maksimale antal søgeresultater
og søgningens timeout-værdi.
10. Vælg den Serach Name Order, du ønsker.
11. Marker afkrydsningsfeltet for "From:" Field Security Options.
12. Klik på Add.
Brug af poster fra adressekartoteket
Du kan hente en e-mail-adresse fra adressekartoteket på flere måder:
Hurtignumre til e-mail-adresser
Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste en destinationsadresse, når du skal
sende en e-mail, kan du indtaste det hurtignummer, hvor du har gemt
den pågældende e-mail-adresse.
• Hvis e-mail-adressen er gemt i et hurtignummer på ét ciffer, skal
du trykke på den tilsvarende taltast på taltastaturet og holde den nede.
• Hvis e-mail-adressen er gemt i et hurtignummer på to eller tre cifre,
skal du trykke på den eller de første taltaster og derefter holde den
sidste taltast nede.
Du kan også søge efter en post i hukommelsen ved at trykke på
Adressekartotek ( ). Se ”Søgning efter en adresse i
adressekartoteket” på side 41.
Gruppenumre til e-mail-adresser
Hvis du vil bruge en e-mail-adresse, der er gemt i et gruppenummer,
skal du søge efter den i hukommelsen og vælge den derfra.
Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste en destinationsadresse, når du skal
sende en e-mail, skal du trykke på Adressekartotek ( ). Se ”Søgning
efter en adresse i adressekartoteket” på side 41.
Globale e-mail-adresser
Hvis du vil bruge en global e-mail-adresse, der er gemt på LDAPserveren, skal du søge efter den i hukommelsen og vælge den derfra.
Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste en destinationsadresse, når du skal
sende en e-mail, skal du trykke på Adressekartotek ( ). Se ”Søgning
efter en adresse i adressekartoteket” på side 41.
Søgning efter en adresse i adressekartoteket
Du kan søge efter en adresse i hukommelsen på to måder. Du kan enten søge
systematisk i alfabetisk orden eller søge ved at indtaste de første bogstaver
i det navn, der hører til adressen.
Systematisk søgning i hukommelsen
1. Tryk om nødvendigt på Scan/Email.
2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Search & Send på
den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede nummerkategori vises,
og tryk derefter på OK.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises All.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede navn og den ønskede
adresse vises. Du kan søge opad og nedad gennem hele
hukommelsen i alfabetisk orden.
Søgning efter de første bogstaver i et navn
1. Tryk om nødvendigt på Scan/Email.
2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Search & Send på den
nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede nummerkategori vises,
og tryk derefter på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil ID vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Indtast de første par bogstaver i det navn, du søger efter, og tryk
derefter på OK.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede navn vises, og tryk på OK.
Du kan også klikke på Importer og hente adressekartoteket fra
computeren.
LDAP Referral: LDAP-klienten søger på henvisningsserveren,
hvis LDAP-serveren ikke indeholder data, der kan besvare
forespørgslen, og LDAP-serveren har en henvisningsserver.42 | Scanning
Udskrivning af adressekartoteket
Du kan kontrollere indstillingerne for adressekartoteket ved at udskrive en liste.
1. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Print på nederste linje af
displayet.
2. Tryk på OK.
Der udskrives en liste over dine genvejstastindstillinger og hurtig/
gruppenumre til e-mail-adresser.
SCANNING AF BEGGE SIDER AF PAPIRET
Hvis du trykker på tasten Duplex ( ) på maskinen, kan du indstille den til at
scanne begge sider af papiret.
1. Tryk om nødvendigt på Scan/Email.
2. Tryk på Duplex ( ).
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises.
• Off: Udskriver i normal tilstand.
• 2 Side: Scanner begge sider af originalen og udskriver siderne på
begge sider af arket. Med denne funktion er udskriften en nøjagtig
gengivelse af originalen.
• 2 ->1Side ROT2: Scanner begge sider af originalerne og udskriver
hver side på et separat ark, mens oplysningerne på bagsiden af
udskriften roteres 180°.
4. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg.
Hvis tilstanden er aktiveret, er tasten Duplex ( ) baggrundsbelyst.
X
Y
X
Y
X
YGrundlæggende udskrivning | 43
grundlæggende udskrivning
Dette kapitel forklarer almindelige udskrivningsopgaver.
Kapitlet omfatter:
• Sådan udskriver du et dokument • Annullering af et udskriftsjob
SÅDAN UDSKRIVER DU ET DOKUMENT
Du kan bruge maskinen til at udskrive fra forskellige Windows-, Macintosh- eller
Linux-baserede programmer. De præcise trin, du skal følge, når du udskriver
et dokument, kan være forskellige, afhængigt af hvilket program du benytter.
Detaljerede oplysninger om udskrivning finder du i Softwareafsnit.
ANNULLERING AF ET UDSKRIFTSJOB
Hvis udskriftsjobbet venter i en printerkø eller en printspooler, f.eks.
gruppen Printere i Windows, skal du slette jobbet på følgende måde:
1. Klik på menuen Start i Windows.
2. I Windows 2000 skal du vælge Indstillinger og derefter Printere.
I Windows XP/2003 skal du vælge Printere og faxenheder.
I Windows Vista/2008 skal du vælge Kontrolpanel → Hardware og lyd
→ Printere.
3. Dobbeltklik på ikonet Dell 2145cn Color Laser MFP.
4. Vælg Annuller i menuen Dokument.
Du kan også annullere det aktuelle job ved at trykke på Stop/Slet ( )
på kontrolpanelet.
Du får adgang til dette vindue ved at dobbeltklikke på printerikonet
i nederste højre hjørne af skrivebordet i Windows.44 | Fax
fax
I dette kapitel får du oplysninger om, hvordan du benytter maskinen som faxmaskine.
Kapitlet omfatter:
• Afsendelse af en fax
• Modtagelse af en fax
• Andre måder at faxe på
• Faxopsætning
AFSENDELSE AF EN FAX
Indstilling af faxhovedet
I nogle lande er det lovpligtigt at angive afsenderens faxnummer på alle faxer,
der sendes. Maskinens ID, som indeholder telefonnummer og navn eller
firmanavn, bliver udskrevet øverst på hver side, som afsendes fra maskinen.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine ID.
4. Indtast navn eller firmanavn ved hjælp af taltastaturet. Du kan indtaste
alfanumeriske tegn ved hjælp af taltastaturet og indsætte forskellige tegn
ved at trykke på knappen 0. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om indtastning
af alfanumeriske tegn på side 21.
5. Tryk på OK for at gemme id’et.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Machine Fax No vises, og tryk på OK.
7. Indtast dit faxnummer ved hjælp af taltastaturet, og tryk på OK.
8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Justering af dokumentindstillinger
Inden du begynder at faxe, skal du ændre følgende indstillinger, så de passer
til originalens status. På den måde opnår du den bedste kvalitet.
Opløsning
Standardindstillingerne for dokumenter giver et godt resultat, når der
anvendes almindelige tekstbaserede originaler. Men hvis du sender
originaler, som er i dårlig kvalitet eller indeholder billeder, kan du opnå
en bedre faxkvalitet ved at justere opløsningen.
1. Tryk på Opløsning ( ).
2. Tryk på Opløsning ( ) eller på venstre/højre pil, indtil den
ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises.
3. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg.
De anbefalede opløsningsindstillinger for forskellige typer originaler
er beskrevet i tabellen nedenfor:
Mørkhed
Du kan vælge standardkontrasten og på den måde gøre dine faxer
lysere eller mørkere.
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), og tryk derefter på OK, når Fax Feature vises
på nederste linje i displayet.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Darkness.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indstilling vises, og tryk
på OK.
Vi anbefaler brug af de traditionelle, analoge telefontjenester (PSTN:
offentlige telefonnetværk), når der skal sluttes en fax til telefonlinjen.
Hvis du bruger andre internettjenester (DSL, ISDN, VolP), kan du
forbedre forbindelseskvaliteten ved hjælp af et mikrofilter. Mikrofilteret
eliminerer unødvendige støjsignaler og forbedrer forbindelses- eller
internetkvaliteten. Eftersom DSL-mikrofilteret ikke leveres sammen
med maskinen, skal du kontakte din internetudbyder for at få flere
oplysninger om brug af DSL-mikrofilteret.
1 Linjeport
2 Mikrofilter
3 DSL-modem / telefonlinje
TILSTAND ANBEFALES TIL:
Standard Originaler med tegn i normal størrelse.
Fine Originaler med små tegn eller tynde linjer, eller
originaler der er udskrevet på en matrixprinter.
Super Fine Originaler med mange fine detaljer. Tilstanden
Super fin kan kun aktiveres, hvis den maskine,
der kommunikeres med, også understøtter
denne tilstand.
• Ved hukommelsestransmission er
tilstanden Super Fine ikke tilgængelig.
Opløsningsindstillingen ændres
automatisk til Fine.
• Når maskinen er indstillet til opløsningen
Super Fine, og den faxmaskine, der
kommunikeres med, ikke understøtter
opløsningen Super Fine, afsender
maskinen faxen med den højeste
opløsningsgrad, der understøttes af
den modtagende faxmaskine.
Photo Fax Originaler med gråtoner eller fotografier.
Indstillingen for opløsning anvendes på det igangværende faxjob.
På side 50 kan du se, hvordan du ændrer standardindstillingen.Fax | 45
5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Automatisk afsendelse af en fax
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.Der
vises Ready to Fax på den øverste linje af displayet.
3. Juster indstillingerne for opløsning og mørkhed, så de passer til den fax,
du skal sende.
4. Indtast nummeret på modtagerens faxmaskine.
Du kan bruge genvejstaster, hurtigopkaldstaster eller
gruppeopkaldstaster. På side 50 kan du finde yderligere oplysninger om,
hvordan du gemmer og søger efter numre.
5. Tryk på Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ).
6. Hvis der ligger en original på scannerglaspladen, skal du vælge Yes for
at lægge endnu en side i maskinen. Læg endnu en original i, og tryk på OK.
7. Når du er færdig, skal du vælge No efter prompten Another Page?.
Når der er ringet op til nummeret, begynder maskinen at sende faxen,
når modtagerens maskine svarer.
Manuel afsendelse af en fax
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.
3. Juster indstillingerne for opløsning og mørkhed, så de passer til den fax,
du skal sende. Se ”Justering af dokumentindstillinger” på side 44
4. Tryk på Håndfrit kald ( ). Du kan høre en klartone.
5. Indtast nummeret på modtagerens faxmaskine.
Du kan bruge genvejstaster, hurtigopkaldstaster eller
gruppeopkaldstaster. På side 50 kan du finde yderligere oplysninger om,
hvordan du gemmer og søger efter numre.
6. Tryk på Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ), når du hører en skinger
faxtone fra den anden maskine.
Bekræftelse af en transmission
Når den sidste side i originalen er afsendt korrekt, bipper maskinen og
vender tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Hvis noget går galt under afsendelsen, vises der en fejlmeddelelse i displayet.
Du kan finde en liste over fejlmeddelelser og deres betydning på side 71.
Hvis der vises en fejlmeddelelse, skal du trykke på Stop/Slet ( )for at
slette meddelelsen og prøve at sende faxen igen.
Maskinen kan indstilles til at udskrive en bekræftelsesrapport, hver gang
den har afsluttet afsendelsen af en fax. Du kan finde yderligere oplysninger
på side 49.
Automatisk genkald
Når det nummer, du har ringet op, er optaget, eller der ikke svares, når du sender
en fax, foretager maskinen automatisk et genkald hvert tredje minut op til
syv gange (i henhold til producentens standardindstillingerne).
Når der vises Retry Redial? i displayet, skal du trykke på OK for at kalde op
til nummeret igen med det samme. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ), hvis du vil
afbryde det automatiske genkald.
Ændring af tidsintervallet mellem genkald og antallet af genkaldsforsøg.
Se ”Receiving-indstillinger” på side 49
Genopkald til det senest kaldte nummer
Sådan ringer du op igen til det nummer, du senest har kaldt:
1. Tryk på Genopkald/Pause ( ).
2. Når originalen er lagt i DADF’en, begynder maskinen automatisk at
sende.
Hvis der ligger en original på scannerglaspladen, skal du vælge Yes for
at lægge endnu en side i maskinen. Læg endnu en original i, og tryk på OK.
Når du er færdig, skal du vælge No efter prompten Another Page?.
Sender faxer på begge sider af papiret
Du kan indstille maskinen til at udskrive modtagne faxer på begge sider af
papiret .
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Duplex ( ).
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indbindingsindstilling vises.
• Off: Sender faxer i normal tilstand.
• 2 Side: Sender faxer på begge sider af originalen.
• 2 ->1Side ROT2: Sender faxer begge sider af originalerne og
udskriver hver af dem på separate ark, men oplysningerne på
bagsiden af udskriften roteres 180°.
4. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg.
Hvis tilstanden er aktiveret, er tasten Duplex ( ) baggrundsbelyst.
MODTAGELSE AF EN FAX
Valg af papirbakke
Når du har lagt de udskriftsmedier, du vil bruge til modtagelse af faxer,
i maskinen, skal du vælge den papirbakke, du vil bruge til faxmodtagelse.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Paper Setup vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Paper Source vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Fax Tray vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede papirbakke vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Ændring af modtagetilstand
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Receiving vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Receive Mode.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede tilstand for faxmodtagelse vises.
• I tilstanden Fax besvarer maskinen et indgående opkald og skifter
øjeblikkeligt til fax-modtagetilstand.
Indstillingen for mørkhed anvendes til det igangværende faxjob.
På side 50 kan du se, hvordan du ændrer standardindstillingen.
Hvis du ønsker at annullere et faxjob, skal du trykke på Stop/Slet ( )
på et vilkårligt tidspunkt under afsendelsen.
Hvis du ønsker at annullere et faxjob, skal du trykke på Stop/Slet ( )
på et vilkårligt tidspunkt under afsendelsen.
X
Y
X
Y46 | Fax
• I tilstanden Tel kan du modtage en fax ved at trykke på Håndfrit kald
( ) og derefter på Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ). Du kan
også løfte røret på den eksterne telefon og derefter indtaste koden til
ekstern modtagelse. Se ”Manuel modtagelse med en ekstern
telefon” på side 46
• I tilstanden Ans/Fax besvarer en telefonsvarer, der er tilsluttet maskinen,
et indgående opkald, så den, der ringer op, kan indtale en besked.
Hvis faxmaskinen registrerer en faxtone på linjen, skifter maskinen
automatisk til Faxtilstand for at modtage faxen. Se ”Automatisk
modtagelse i tilstanden Ans/Fax” på side 46
• I tilstanden DRPD kan du modtage et opkald ved hjælp af funktionen
DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection). DRPD-funktionen registrerer
bestemte ringetonesekvenser og er en tjeneste, der leveres af
telefonselskaberne. Den gør det muligt for en bruger at besvare
opkald til flere forskellige telefonnumre fra én enkelt telefonlinje.
Du kan finde yderligere oplysninger på side 46.
6. Tryk på OK for at gemme dit valg.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Automatisk modtagelse i tilstanden Fax
Maskinen er forudindstillet til tilstanden Fax fra producenten. Når du modtager
en fax, besvarer maskinen opkaldet efter et bestemt antal ring og modtager
automatisk faxen.
For at ændre antallet af ring, se side 50.
Manuel modtagelse i tilstanden Tel
Du kan modtage et faxopkald ved at trykke på Håndfrit kald ( ) og derefter
trykke på Black Start ( ) eller Color Start ( ), når du hører en faxtone fra
afsendermaskinen.
Maskinen begynder at modtage en fax og vender tilbage til klar-tilstand, når
modtagelsen er afsluttet.
Manuel modtagelse med en ekstern telefon
Denne funktion fungerer bedst, når du anvender en ekstern telefon, der
er tilsluttet EXT-stikket på maskinens bagside. Du kan modtage en fax
fra en person, du taler med på den eksterne telefon, uden at skulle gå hen
til faxmaskinen.
Når du modtager et opkald på den eksterne telefon, og du kan høre faxtonen,
skal du trykke på knapperne *9* på den eksterne telefon. Så begynder
maskinen at modtage faxen.
Tryk langsomt på tasterne i den angivne rækkefølge. Prøv at trykke *9*
en gang til, hvis du stadig hører faxtonen fra den eksterne maskine.
*9* er den eksterne modtagekode, maskinen leveres med fra fabrikken.
Den første og sidste stjerne er faste, men du kan ændre det midterste tal.
På side 50 kan du finde yderligere oplysninger om, hvordan du ændrer koden.
Automatisk modtagelse i tilstanden Ans/Fax
Hvis du vil bruge denne tilstand, skal der sættes en telefonsvarer i EXT-stikket
bag på maskinen.
Hvis den, der ringer, efterlader en besked, gemmer telefonsvareren
beskeden som normalt. Hvis maskinen registrerer en faxtone på linjen,
begynder den automatisk at modtage faxen.
Modtagelse af faxer i tilstanden DRPD
DRPD-funktionen registrerer bestemte ringetonesekvenser og er en tjeneste,
der leveres af telefonselskaberne. Den gør det muligt for en bruger at besvare
opkald til flere forskellige telefonnumre fra én enkelt telefonlinje. Det nummer,
som en person ringer til dig fra, identificeres med forskellige ringemønstre,
der består af forskellige kombinationer af lange og korte ringelyde. Denne
funktion bruges ofte af svartjenester, der besvarer telefoner for mange
forskellige klienter, og som derfor har behov for at vide, hvilket nummer
en given person ringer ind fra, for at kunne besvare opkaldet korrekt.
Hvis du bruger DRPD-funktionen (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection), kan
faxmaskinen lære at genkende den ringetonesekvens, som du angiver,
at faxmaskinen skal besvare. Medmindre du ændrer den, vil denne
ringetonesekvens fortsat registreres og besvares som et faxopkald, mens
alle andre ringetonesekvenser dirigeres videre til den eksterne telefon eller
den telefonsvarer, der er sat i EXT-stikket. Du kan når som helst slå DRPDfunktionen fra eller ændre den.
Du kan først bruge DRPD-funktionen, når tjenesten er oprettet på din telefonlinje
af telefonselskabet. Hvis du vil opsætte DRPD, skal du have en anden
telefonlinje på stedet eller få en person til at ringe til dit faxnummer udefra.
Sådan opsættes tilstanden DRPD:
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Receiving vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil DRPD Mode vises, og tryk på OK.
Waiting Ring, vises på displayet.
5. Ring til dit faxnummer fra en anden telefon. Det er ikke nødvendigt
at foretage opkaldet fra en faxmaskine.
6. Når maskinen begynder at ringe, skal du ikke besvare opkaldet.
Maskinen skal registrere adskillige ring for at lære mønstret.
Når maskinen kan genkende sekvensen, vises der Completed DRPD
Setup i displayet. Hvis opsætningen af DRPD mislykkes, vises der
Error DRPD Ring. Tryk på OK, når DRPD Mode vises, og begynd forfra
fra trin 4.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
• Når der ikke er mere plads i hukommelsen, kan printeren ikke mere
modtage indgående faxer. Sørg for, at der er ledig hukommelse
ved at fjerne data, der er lagret i hukommelsen, for at kunne
genoptage funktionen.
• Hvis du vil bruge tilstanden Ans/Fax, skal du sætte en telefonsvarer
i EXT-stikket bag på maskinen.
• Hvis du vil undgå, at andre skal kunne se de dokumenter, du modtager,
kan du bruge tilstanden til sikker modtagelse. I denne tilstand
gemmes alle modtagne faxer i hukommelsen. Du kan finde
yderligere oplysninger på side 47.
• Hvis du har indstillet maskinen til tilstanden Ans/Fax,
og telefonsvareren er slået fra, eller der ikke er sat en telefonsvarer
i EXT-stikket, skifter maskinen automatisk til tilstanden Fax efter
et foruddefineret antal ring.
• Hvis din telefonsvarer har en brugerindstillet ringetæller, skal
du indstille maskinen til at besvare indgående opkald efter 1 ring.
• Hvis du har valgt tilstanden Tel (manuel modtagelse),
og telefonsvareren er tilsluttet maskinen, skal du slå
telefonsvareren fra. Ellers griber meddelelsen fra telefonsvareren
forstyrrende ind i telefonsamtalen.Fax | 47
Modtagelse i sikker modtagetilstand
Du kan få brug for at forhindre, at uvedkommende personer har adgang til
de faxer, du modtager. Du kan skifte til sikker modtagetilstand, så udskriften
af modtagne faxer begrænses, når maskinen ikke er overvåget. I sikker
modtagetilstand gemmes alle indgående faxer i hukommelsen. Når tilstanden
er deaktiveret, udskrives eventuelle gemte faxer.
Aktivering af sikker modtagetilstand
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), og tryk derefter på OK, når Fax Feature vises på
nederste linje i displayet.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Secure Receive vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil On vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Indtast en adgangskode på fire cifre, som du vil bruge, og tryk på OK.
6. Indtast adgangskoden igen for at bekræfte den, og tryk på OK.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Når en fax modtages i sikker modtagetilstand, gemmes den i hukommelsen
og meddelelsen Secure Receive vises, så du ved, at der er modtaget en
fax.
Udskrivning af modtagne faxer
1. Åbn menuen Secure Receive ved at følge vejledningen i trin 1 til
og med 3 i ”Aktivering af sikker modtagetilstand”.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Print vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Indtast den firecifrede adgangskode, og tryk på OK.
Maskinen udskriver alle faxer, der er gemt i hukommelsen.
Deaktivering af sikker modtagetilstand
1. Åbn menuen Secure Receive ved at følge vejledningen i trin 1 til og
med 3 i ”Aktivering af sikker modtagetilstand”.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Off vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Indtast den firecifrede adgangskode, og tryk på OK.
Tilstanden deaktiveres, og maskinen udskriver alle faxer, der er gemt
i hukommelsen.
4. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Modtagelse af faxer i hukommelsen
Da maskinen er en multitaskingenhed, kan den modtage faxer samtidig med,
at den kopierer eller udskriver. Hvis du modtager en fax, mens du kopierer
eller udskriver, gemmer maskinen indgående faxer i hukommelsen. Så snart
kopieringen eller udskrivningen er afsluttet, udskriver maskinen automatisk
faxerne.
Maskinen modtager også fax og lagrer dem i hukommelsen, når der ikke
er papir i bakken, eller der ikke er toner i tonerpatronen.
ANDRE MÅDER AT FAXE PÅ
Afsendelse af en fax til flere destinationer
Du kan bruge funktionen til afsendelse af fax til flere destinationer.
Originalerne gemmes automatisk i hukommelsen og sendes til en ekstern
maskine. Efter transmissionen slettes originalerne automatisk fra hukommelsen.
Du kan ikke sende en farvefax ved brug af denne funktion.
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.
3. Juster indstillingerne for opløsning og mørkhed for dokumentet, så du får
det bedst mulige faxresultat. Se ”Justering af dokumentindstillinger” på
side 44
4. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Multi Send vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Indtast nummeret på den første modtagerfaxmaskine, og tryk på OK.
Du kan bruge genvejstaster eller hurtigopkaldsnumre. Du kan indtaste
gruppeopkaldsnumre ved hjælp af knappen Adressekartotek ( ). Se
side 50, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger.
7. Indtast det næste faxnummer, og tryk på OK.
Du bliver i displayet bedt om at indtaste endnu et faxnummer for
at afsende dokumentet.
8. Hvis du vil indtaste flere faxnumre, skal du trykke på OK, når Yes vises,
og gentage trin 6 og 7. Du kan tilføje op til 10 destinationer.
9. Når du har indtastet alle faxnumre, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for
at vælge No efter prompten Another No.? og derefter trykke på OK.
Originalen scannes ind i hukommelsen, før den sendes. Displayet viser
hukommelsens kapacitet og det antal sider, der gemmes i hukommelsen.
10. Hvis der ligger en original på scannerglaspladen, skal du vælge Yes for
at lægge endnu en side i maskinen. Læg endnu en original i, og tryk på
OK.
Når du er færdig, skal du vælge No efter prompten Another Page?.
Maskinen begynder at sende faxen til de numre, du har indtastet, i den
rækkefølge, du har indtastet dem.
Afsendelse af en udskudt fax
Du kan indstille maskinen, så den sender en fax på et senere tidspunkt,
hvor du ikke selv er til stede. Du kan ikke sende en farvefax ved brug af
denne funktion.
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.
3. Juster indstillingerne for opløsning og mørkhed for dokumentet, så du får
det bedst mulige faxresultat. Se ”Justering af dokumentindstillinger” på
side 44
4. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Delay Send vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Indtast nummeret på den modtagende maskine ved hjælp af taltastaturet.
Du kan bruge genvejstaster eller hurtigopkaldsnumre. Du kan indtaste
• DRPD-funktionen skal konfigureres igen, hvis du tildeler faxnummeret
igen eller slutter maskinen til en anden telefonlinje.
• Når DRPD-funktionen er oprettet, skal du ringe dit faxnummer op igen
for at bekræfte, at maskinen svarer med en faxtone. Derefter skal
du sørge for, at der ringes op til et andet nummer, som er registreret
på samme linje, så du er sikker på, at opkaldet dirigeres videre til
den eksterne telefon eller telefonsvarer, der er sat i EXT-stikket.
Du kan aktivere sikker modtagetilstand uden at angive en
adgangskode, men så kan du ikke beskytte dine faxer.
Når først du har indtastet et gruppeopkaldsnummer, kan du ikke
senere indtaste et andet gruppeopkaldsnummer.48 | Fax
gruppeopkaldsnumre ved hjælp af knappen Adressekartotek ( ).
Se ”Oprettelse af et adressekartotek” på side 50, hvis du ønsker
yderligere oplysninger.
7. Tryk på OK for at bekræfte det valgte nummer. Du bliver i displayet bedt
om at indtaste endnu et faxnummer for at afsende dokumentet.
8. Hvis du vil indtaste flere faxnumre, skal du trykke på OK, når Yes vises,
og gentage trin 6 og 7. Du kan tilføje op til 10 destinationer.
9. Når du har indtastet alle faxnumre, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for
at vælge No efter prompten Another No.? og derefter trykke på OK.
10. Indtast det ønskede jobnavn, og tryk på OK.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om indtastning af alfanumeriske tegn
på side 21.
Hvis du ikke ønsker at indtaste et navn, skal du blot springe dette trin over.
11. Brug taltasterne, og indtast klokkeslættet. Tryk derefter på OK eller
Black Start.
Originalen scannes ind i hukommelsen, før den sendes. Displayet viser
hukommelsens kapacitet og det antal sider, der gemmes i hukommelsen.
12. Hvis der ligger en original på scannerglaspladen, skal du vælge Yes for
at lægge endnu en side i maskinen. Læg endnu en original i, og tryk på
OK.
Når du er færdig, skal du vælge No efter prompten Another Page?.
Maskinen vender tilbage til klar-tilstand. Displayet minder dig om, at maskinen
befinder sig i klar-tilstand, og at den er indstillet til at sende en udskudt fax.
Tilføjelse af sider til en udskudt fax
Du kan føje flere sider til de faxer, der er gemt i maskinens hukommelse
som udskudte faxer.
1. Læg de originaler, der skal tilføjes, i maskinen, og juster
dokumentindstillingerne.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste
linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Add Page.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede faxjob vises, og tryk
derefter på OK.
Maskinen scanner originalen ind i hukommelsen og viser både det
samlede antal sider og det tilføjede antal sider.
Annullering af en udskudt fax
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste
linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Cancel Job vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede faxjob vises, og tryk
derefter på OK.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes.
Den valgte fax slettes fra hukommelsen.
Afsendelse af en prioriteret fax
Du kan bruge denne funktion, hvis du vil sende en fax med høj prioritet før andre
reserverede handlinger. Originalen scannes ind i hukommelsen og sendes
med det samme, når den igangværende handling er afsluttet. Afsendelse
af en prioriteret fax afbryder også afsendelse til flere destinationer midt mellem
afsendelserne (dvs. når afsendelsen til maskine A er afsluttet, og før
afsendelsen til maskine B starter) eller mellem opkaldsforsøg.
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.
3. Juster indstillingerne for opløsning og mørkhed for dokumentet, så du får
det bedst mulige faxresultat. Se ”Justering af dokumentindstillinger” på
side 44.
4. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Priority Send vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Indtast nummeret på modtagerens faxmaskine.
Du kan bruge genvejstaster, hurtigopkaldstaster eller gruppeopkaldstaster.
Se side 50, hvis du ønsker yderligere oplysninger.
7. Tryk på OK for at bekræfte det valgte nummer.
8. Indtast det ønskede jobnavn, og tryk på OK.
Originalen scannes ind i hukommelsen, før den sendes. Displayet viser
hukommelsens kapacitet og det antal sider, der gemmes i hukommelsen.
9. Hvis der ligger en original på scannerglaspladen, skal du vælge Yes for
at lægge endnu en side i maskinen. Læg endnu en original i, og tryk på
OK.
Når du er færdig, skal du vælge No efter prompten Another Page?.
Maskinen viser det nummer, der ringes op til, og begynder at sende faxen.
Videresendelse af faxer
Du kan videresende indkommende og udgående faxer til en anden fax eller
email-adresse.
Videresendelse af afsendte faxer til en anden fax
Du kan indstille maskinen til at sende kopier af alle udgående faxer til
en nærmere angivet destination ud over de faxnumre, du har indtastet.
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste
linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Forward vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Fax.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Send Forward vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge On, og tryk på OK.
7. Indtast nummeret på den faxmaskine, faxerne skal videresendes til,
og tryk derefter på OK.
8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Senere afsendte faxer videresendes til den angivne faxmaskine.
Videresendelse af faxer til e-mail-adresser
Du kan indstille maskinen til at sende kopier af alle udgående faxer til
en angivet destination ud over de e-mail-adresser, du har indtastet.
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste
linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Forward vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil E-mail vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Send Forward vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge On, og tryk på OK.
7. Indtast din e-mail-adresse, og tryk på OK.
8. Indtast email-adressen, som faxerne skal sendes til, og tryk på OK.
9. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Senere afsendte faxer videresendes til den angivne e-mail-adresse.
Når først du har indtastet et gruppeopkaldsnummer, kan du ikke
senere indtaste et andet gruppeopkaldsnummer.
Hvis du angiver et klokkeslæt, der ligger før det nuværende
tidspunkt, sendes faxen på dette tidspunkt dagen efter. Fax | 49
Videresendelse af modtagne faxer til en anden fax
Du kan indstille maskinen til at videresende modtagne faxer til et andet
faxnummer inden for et givet tidsrum. Når maskinen modtager en fax,
gemmes den i hukommelsen. Derefter ringer maskinen til det nummer,
du har angivet, og sender faxen.
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste
linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Forward vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Fax.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Rcv. Forward vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Forward vises, og tryk på OK.
Hvis maskinen skal indstilles til at udskrive en fax, når videresendelse
af faxer er fuldført, skal du vælge Forward&Print
7. Indtast nummeret på den faxmaskine, faxerne skal videresendes til,
og tryk derefter på OK.
8. Indtast starttidspunktet, og tryk på OK.
9. Indtast sluttidspunktet, og tryk på OK.
10. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Senere modtagne faxer videresendes til den angivne faxmaskine.
Videresendelse af modtagne faxer til e-mail-adresser
Du kan indstille din maskine til at videresende indgående faxer til den
indtastede e-mail-adresse.
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Feature på den nederste
linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Forward vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil E-mail vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Rcv. Forward vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Forward vises, og tryk på OK.
Hvis maskinen skal indstilles til at udskrive en fax, når videresendelse
af faxer er fuldført, skal du vælge Forward&Print
7. Indtast din e-mail-adresse, og tryk på OK.
8. Indtast email-adressen, som faxerne skal sendes til, og tryk på OK.
9. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Senere afsendte faxer videresendes til den angivne e-mail-adresse.
FAXOPSÆTNING
Ændring af faxindstillingerne
Maskinen er udstyret med forskellige indstillinger, som kan vælges af brugeren
som et led i opsætningen af faxsystemet. Du kan ændre standardindstillingerne,
så de passer til det, du har brug for.
Sådan ændres indstillingerne for faxopsætning:
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Setup på den nederste linje af
displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge Sending eller Receiving, og tryk
på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede menupunkt vises, og tryk
derefter på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede status vises, eller indtast
værdien for den indstilling, du har valgt, og tryk på OK.
6. Gentag om nødvendigt trin 4 til og med 5.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Sending-indstillinger
Receiving-indstillinger
INDSTILLING BESKRIVELSE
Redial Times Du kan angive, hvor mange gange maskinen skal
forsøge at kalde op til et nummer igen. Hvis du
indtaster 0, ringer maskinen ikke op igen.
Redial Term Maskinen kan automatisk foretage genkald til
en anden fax, hvis den var optaget første gang.
Du kan angive et interval mellem forsøgene.
Prefix Dial Du kan angive et præfiks på op til fem cifre.
Maskinen vil så ringe dette opkaldspræfiks først, hver
gang den ringer et automatisk opkaldsnummer.
Dette er nyttigt, hvis du skal have adgang til
en PABX-omstilling.
ECM Mode Denne tilstand er en hjælp, hvis forbindelsen er dårlig.
Den sørger for, at alle faxer, du sender, sendes
uden problemer til en anden fax, der også er udstyret
med ECM-funktion. Det kan tage længere tid
at sende en fax med ECM-funktion.
Send Report Du kan indstille maskinen, så den udskriver en
bekræftelsesrapport, der viser, om en transmission
lykkedes, hvor mange sider der blev sendt m.m.
De tilgængelige indstillinger er On, Off og OnError, der kun udskriver en rapport, når
transmissionen ikke lykkes.
Image TCR Denne funktion underretter brugere om, hvilke
faxmeddelelser der er blevet sendt, ved at vise
sendte meddelelser i transmissionsrapporten.
Første side i meddelelsen omdannes til en billedfil,
der printes på transmissionsrapporten, så
brugeren kan se, hvilke meddelelser der er blevet
sendt.
Du kan ikke bruge denne funktion uden at gemme
data i hukommelsen.
Dial Mode Alt afhængigt af dit land er det ikke sikkert, at denne
indstilling er tilgængelig. Hvis du ikke kan få adgang
til denne indstilling, understøtter maskinen ikke
denne funktion.
Du kan indstille opkaldstilstanden for maskinen til
toneopkald eller impulsopkald. Hvis du har
et offentligt telefonsystem eller et privat
omstillingssystem (PBX), skal du muligvis vælge
Pulse. Kontakt telefonselskabet, hvis du ikke er
sikker på, hvilken opkaldstilstand du skal bruge.
Hvis du vælger Pulse, vil nogle
af telefonsystemets funktioner måske ikke være
tilgængelige. Det kan også tage længere tid at
kalde op til et fax- eller et telefonnummer.
INDSTILLING BESKRIVELSE
Receive Mode Du kan vælge faxens standardmodtagetilstand.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om modtagelse
af faxer i de forskellige tilstande på side 45.50 | Fax
Ændring af standarddokumentindstillingerne
Faxindstillingerne, bl.a. opløsning og mørkhed, kan indstilles til de oftest
brugte tilstande. Når du sender en fax, bruges standardindstillingerne, hvis
du ikke har ændret dem ved at bruge den tilsvarende tast og menu.
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Setup på den nederste linje af
displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Change Default vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Resolution.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede opløsning vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Darkness vises, og tryk på OK.
7. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede mørkhed vises, og tryk på OK.
8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Automatisk udskrivning af en rapport over afsendte
faxer
Du kan indstille maskinen, så der udskrives en rapport med detaljerede
oplysninger om de foregående 50 transmissioner, bl.a. klokkeslæt og dato.
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises Fax Setup på den nederste linje af
displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Auto Report vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil On vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Oprettelse af et adressekartotek
Du kan opsætte et adressekartotek med de faxnumre, du bruger oftest. Du
kan bruge følgende funktioner, når du opsætter et adressekartotek:
• Genvejstaster
• Hurtig/gruppeopkaldsnumre
Genvejstaster
Du kan gemme faxnumre, du ofte bruger, i de 15 genvejstaster
på kontrolpanelet. Derefter kan du indtaste et faxnummer ved bare at trykke
på en tast. Med tasten Shift kan du gemme op til 30 numre i genvejstasterne.
Du kan gemme numre i genvejstasterne på to måder. Se fremgangsmåderne
nedenfor, og brug derefter den metode, der passer dig bedst:
Registrering, efter at du har trykket på en genvejstast
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på en af genvejstasterne.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes.
4. Indtast det ønskede navn, og tryk på OK.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om indtastning af alfanumeriske
Ring To Answer Du kan angive, hvor mange gange maskinen skal
ringe, før den besvarer et indgående opkald.
Stamp RCV
Name
Denne indstilling bevirker, at der automatisk udskrives
sidetal samt dato og klokkeslæt for modtagelsen
nederst på hver side af en modtaget fax.
Rcv Start Code Denne kode giver dig mulighed for at starte
faxmodtagelsen fra en ekstern telefon, der er sat
i EXT-stikket bag på maskinen. Hvis du tager den
eksterne telefon og kan høre faxtoner, skal
du indtaste koden. Fabriksindstillingen er *9*.
Auto Reduction Når du modtager en fax, der indeholder sider,
der er lige så lange som det papir, der ligger
i papirbakken, eller længere, kan maskinen
formindske originalstørrelsen, så den passer til
det papir, der ligger i maskinen. Slå denne funktion
til, hvis en indgående side skal formindskes
automatisk.
Hvis denne funktion er indstillet til Off, kan maskinen
ikke formindske originalen, så den kan være
på en enkelt side. Originalen opdeles og udskrives
i den faktiske størrelse på to eller flere sider.
Discard Size Når du modtager en fax, der indeholder sider, der
er lige så lange som det papir, der ligger i maskinen,
eller længere, kan du indstille maskinen, så der ses
bort fra en bestemt længde fra slutningen af den
modtagne fax. Maskinen udskriver den modtagne
fax på et eller flere ark papir, minus de data, der
ellers ville være udskrevet i det segment, der nu
ses bort fra.
Når den modtagne fax indeholder sider, der er større
end papiret i maskinen, og Auto Reduction
er aktiveret, formindsker maskinen faxen, så den
passer til papiret, uden at der ses bort fra visse
segmenter.
Junk Fax Setup Alt afhængigt af dit land er det ikke sikkert, at denne
indstilling er tilgængelig. Når denne funktion
er aktiveret, vil systemet ikke modtage faxer, der
er sendt fra eksterne faxer med faxnumre, der
er gemt i hukommelsen som uønskede faxnumre.
Denne funktion er nyttig, hvis du vil blokere
uønskede faxer.
Når du aktiverer denne funktion, kan du få adgang
til følgende indstillinger og angive uønskede
faxnumre.
• Add: Giver dig mulighed for at angive op til 10
faxnumre.
• Delete: Giver dig mulighed for at slette et
uønsket faxnummer.
• Delete All: Giver dig mulighed for at slette
alle uønskede faxnumre.
DRPD Mode Denne tilstand sætter en bruger i stand til at besvare
opkald til flere forskellige telefonnumre via en enkelt
telefonlinje. I denne menu kan du indstille maskinen,
så den registrerer hvilke ringemønstre, den skal
besvare. Du finder yderligere oplysninger om denne
funktion på side 46.
INDSTILLING BESKRIVELSE
Duplex Print
• Long Edge: Udskriver siderne, så de skal
læses som i en bog.
• Short Edge: Udskriver siderne, så de skal
læses, ligesom når man vipper siderne op på
en notesblok.
• Off: Udskriver den modtagne fax på en side af
papiret.
Inden du begynder at gemme faxnumre, skal du kontrollere,
at maskinen er i faxtilstand.
INDSTILLING BESKRIVELSEFax | 51
tegn på side 21.
5. Indtast det faxnummer, du vil gemme, og tryk på OK.
Registrering, efter at du først har indtastet et nummer
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Indtast det faxnummer, du vil gemme.
3. Tryk på en af genvejstasterne.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes.
5. Indtast det ønskede navn, og tryk på OK.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om indtastning af alfanumeriske
tegn på side 21.
6. Tryk på OK for at bekræfte det valgte nummer.
Brug af genvejstaster
Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste et faxnummer, mens du er ved at sende
en fax:
• Hvis du vil hente et nummer fra genvejstast 1 til 15, skal du trykke på den
tilsvarende genvejstast og trykke på OK.
• Hvis du vil hente et nummer fra genvejstast 16 til 30, skal du trykke
på Shift og derefter på den tilsvarende genvejstast. Tryk derefter på OK.
Hurtigopkaldstaster
Du kan gemme op til 240 faxnumre, som du ofte bruger, som
hurtigopkaldstaster.
Registrering af et hurtigopkaldsnummer
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises New & Edit på den
nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Speed Dial.
4. Indtast et hurtigopkaldsnummer mellem 0 og 239, og tryk på OK.
Hvis det hurtigopkaldsnummer, du vælger, allerede er i brug, vises
navnet på displayet, så du kan ændre det. Hvis du vil begynde forfra
med et andet hurtigopkaldsnummer, skal du trykke på Tilbage ( ).
5. Indtast det ønskede navn, og tryk på OK.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om indtastning af alfanumeriske
tegn på side 21.
6. Indtast det ønskede faxnummer, og tryk på OK.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Redigering af hurtigopkaldsnumre
1. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises New & Edit på den
nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Speed Dial.
3. Indtast det hurtigopkaldsnummer, du vil redigere, og tryk på OK.
4. Ret navnet, og tryk på OK.
5. Ret faxnummeret, og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Brug af hurtigopkaldsnumre
Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste et destinationsnummer, mens du er ved
at sende en fax, skal du indtaste det hurtigopkaldsnummer, som du gemte
det ønskede faxnummer under.
• Hvis hurtigopkaldsnummeret er på ét ciffer (0-9), skal du trykke på den
tilsvarende taltast på taltastaturet og holde den nede.
• Hvis hurtigopkaldsnummeret er på to eller tre cifre, skal du trykke
på tasten eller tasterne med det eller de første cifre og derefter holde
tasten med det sidste ciffer nede.
Du kan også søge efter en post i hukommelsen ved at trykke
på Adressekartotek ( ). Se ”Søgning efter en adresse i
adressekartoteket” på side 51.
Gruppeopkaldsnumre
Hvis du ofte skal sende det samme dokument til flere destinationer, kan du
gruppere disse destinationer og angive dem under et gruppeopkaldsnummer.
Du kan derefter bruge gruppeopkaldsnummeret og sende dokumentet til
alle destinationerne i gruppen. Du kan angive op til 200 (0 til og med 199)
gruppeopkaldsnumre ved at bruge destinationens eksisterende
hurtigopkaldsnumre.
Registrering af et gruppeopkaldsnummer
1. Tryk på Fax.
2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises New & Edit på den
nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Group Dial vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Indtast et gruppeopkaldsnummer mellem 0 og 199, og tryk på OK.
5. Indtast et hurtigopkaldsnummer, og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på OK, når hurtigopkaldsoplysningerne vises korrekt.
7. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes.
8. Gentag trin 5 og 6, hvis du vil indsætte flere hurtigopkaldsnumre i gruppen.
9. Når du har indtastet alle faxnumre, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil
for at vælge No efter prompten Another No.? og derefter trykke på OK.
10. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Redigering af et gruppeopkaldsnummer
Du kan slette et bestemt nummer fra en gruppe eller indsætte et nyt
nummer i den valgte gruppe.
1. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises New & Edit på den
nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Group Dial vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Indtast det gruppeopkaldsnummer, du vil redigere, og tryk derefter på OK.
4. Indtast det hurtigopkaldsnummer, du vil tilføje eller slette, og tryk på OK.
Hvis du har indtastet et nyt hurtigopkaldsnummer, vises Add?.
Hvis du indtaster et hurtigopkaldsnummer, der er gemt i en gruppe,
vises der Delete?.
5. Tryk på OK for at tilføje eller slette nummeret.
6. Tryk på OK, når Yes vises, hvis du vil tilføje eller slette flere numre,
og gentag derefter fremgangsmåden fra trin 4 og 5.
7. Når du har indtastet alle faxnumre, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil
for at vælge No efter prompten Another No.? og derefter trykke på OK.
8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Brug af gruppeopkaldsnumre
Hvis du vil bruge et gruppeopkaldsnummer, skal du søge efter det og vælge
det i hukommelsen.
Når du bliver bedt om at indtaste et faxnummer, mens du er ved at sende
en fax, skal du trykke på Adressekartotek ( ). Se nedenfor.
Søgning efter en adresse i adressekartoteket
Du kan søge efter et nummer i hukommelsen på to måder. Du kan enten
søge systematisk i alfabetisk rækkefølge, eller du kan søge ved at indtaste
de første bogstaver i det navn, der hører til nummeret.
Hvis du trykker på en genvejstast, hvor der allerede er gemt
et nummer, vises en meddelelse på displayet, hvor du bliver
spurgt, om du vil overskrive det gemte nummer. Tryk på OK for
at bekræfte Yes og fortsætte. Hvis du vil starte forfra med en
anden genvejstast, skal du vælge No.52 | Fax
Sekventiel søgning i hukommelsen
1. Tryk om nødvendigt på Fax.
2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Search & Dial på
den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede nummerkategori vises,
og tryk derefter på OK.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises All.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede navn og nummer vises.
Du kan søge opad og nedad gennem hele hukommelsen i alfabetisk
orden.
Søgning efter de første bogstaver i et navn
1. Tryk om nødvendigt på Fax.
2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Search & Dial på
den nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede nummerkategori vises,
og tryk derefter på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil ID vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Indtast de første par bogstaver i det navn, du søger efter, og tryk
derefter på OK.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede navn vises, og tryk på OK.
Sletning af en post i adressekartoteket
Du kan slette numre i adressekartoteket ét ad gangen.
1. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Delete på den
nederste linje af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede nummerkategori vises,
og tryk derefter på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede søgemetode vises, og
tryk derefter på OK.
Vælg Search All, hvis du vil søge efter et nummer ved at blade
gennem alle poster i adressekartoteket.
Vælg Search ID, hvis du vil søge efter et nummer ved at indtaste de
første par bogstaver i navnet.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det ønskede navn vises, og tryk på OK.
Eller indtast de første bogstaver, og tryk på OK. Tryk på venstre/
højre pil, indtil det ønskede navn vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på OK, når Yes vises for at bekræfte sletningen.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Udskrivning af adressekartoteket
1. Du kan kontrollere indstillingerne for adressekartoteket ved
at udskrive en liste.
2. Tryk på Adressekartotek ( ), indtil der vises Print på nederste
linje af displayet.
3. Tryk på OK. Der udskrives en oversigt over dine genvejstastindstillinger
og gemte hurtig- og gruppeopkaldsnumre.Brug af USB-flash-hukommelse | 53
brug af USB-flash-hukommelse
I dette kapitel beskrives det, hvordan du bruger en USB-hukommelsesenhed sammen med maskinen.
Kapitlet omfatter:
• Om USB-hukommelse
• Tilslutning af en USB-hukommelsesenhed
• Scanning til en USB-hukommelsesenhed
• Udskrivning fra en USB-hukommelsesenhed
• Sikkerhedskopiering af data
• Håndtering af USB-hukommelse
OM USB-HUKOMMELSE
USB-hukommelsesenheder fås i flere forskellige størrelser, så du får
tilstrækkelig plads til lagring af dokumenter og præsentationer og download
af musik og hele videoer, fotografier med høj opløsning og et utal af andre
filer, som du vil gemme eller overføre.
Du kan bruge en USB-hukommelsesenhed til flere forskellige ting på denne
maskine. Du kan f.eks.:
• Scanne dokumenter og gemme dem på USB-enheden.
• Udskrive data, der er gemt på USB-enheden.
• Sikkerhedskopier Adressekartotek /Phone Book-poster og
maskinens systemindstillinger.
• Gendanne sikkerhedskopifiler i maskinens hukommelse.
• Formatere USB-enheden.
• Kontrollere, hvor meget hukommelse der er til rådighed.
TILSLUTNING AF EN USB-HUKOMMELSESENHED
USB-porten foran på maskinen er beregnet til en hukommelsesenhed af typen
USB V1.1 og USB V2.0. Maskinen understøtter USB-hukommelsesenheder
med FAT16/FAT32 og en sektorstørrelse på 512 byte.
Kontroller USB-hukommelsesenhedens filsystem hos en forhandler.
Du må kun bruge en godkendt USB-enhed med et tilslutningsstik af type A.
Brug kun en USB-hukommelsesenhed af metal eller med afskærmning.
Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten foran på maskinen.
SCANNING TIL EN USB-HUKOMMELSESENHED
Du kan scanne et dokument og gemme det på en USB-hukommelsesenhed.
Der er to måder at gøre dette på: Du kan scanne til enheden ved hjælp
af standardindstillingerne, eller du kan vælge dine egne scanningsindstillinger.
Scanning
1. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten på maskinen.
2. Læg originalerne i DADF’en med forsiden opad, eller læg en enkelt
original med forsiden nedad på scannerglaspladen.
Du finder yderligere oplysninger om ilægning af originaler på side 24.
3. Tryk på Scan/Email.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Scan to USB på nederste linje i displayet.
5. Tryk på OK, Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ), når der vises USB.
Uanset hvilken knap, du trykker på, vælges farvetilstanden ud fra det,
den er tilpasset til. Se ”Tilpasning af scanning til USB” på side 54.
Maskinen begynder at scanne originalen, og du bliver derefter spurgt,
om du vil scanne en side til.
6. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes, hvis du vil scanne flere sider. Læg en
original i maskinen, og tryk på Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ).
• Du må ikke fjerne USB-enheden, mens maskinen er i gang,
eller mens der skrives til eller læses fra USB-hukommelsen.
Maskinens garanti dækker ikke skader forårsaget af brugerens
forkerte brug.
• Hvis USB-enheden har visse funktioner, f.eks. sikkerhedsindstillinger
og adgangskodeindstillinger, er det ikke sikkert, at den kan
registreres automatisk af maskinen. Du kan finde flere
oplysninger om disse funktioner i brugerhåndbogen til enheden.54 | Brug af USB-flash-hukommelse
Uanset hvilken knap, du trykker på, vælges farvetilstanden ud fra det,
den er tilpasset til. Se ”Tilpasning af scanning til USB” på side 54.
Ellers skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge No og trykke på OK.
Når scanningen er udført, kan du fjerne USB-enheden fra maskinen.
Tilpasning af scanning til USB
Du kan angive billedstørrelse, filformat og farvetilstand, hver gang du scanner
til en USB-enhed.
1. Tryk på Scan/Email.
2. Tryk på ( ), indtil der vises Scan Feature på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises USB Memory
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indstilling vises, og tryk på OK.
Du kan angive følgende indstillinger:
• Scan Size: Angiver billedstørrelsen.
• Original Type: Angiver originaldokumentets type.
• Resolution: Angiver billedopløsningen.
• Scan Color: Angiver farvetilstanden. Hvis du vælger Mono her, kan
du ikke vælge JPEG i Scan Format.
• Scan Format: Angiver det filformat, som billedet skal gemmes i.
Hvis du vælger TIFF eller PDF, kan du vælge at scanne flere sider.
Hvis du vælger JPEG her, kan du ikke vælge Mono Scan Color.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede status vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Gentag trin 4 og 5, hvis du vil angive andre indstillinger.
7. Når du er færdig, skal du trykke på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage
til klar-tilstand.
Du kan ændre standardindstillingerne for scanning. Se side 40, hvis du ønsker
yderligere oplysninger.
UDSKRIVNING FRA EN USBHUKOMMELSESENHED
Du kan udskrive filer, der er gemt på en USB-hukommelsesenhed, direkte.
Du kan udskrive TIFF-, BMP-, JPEG-, PDF- og PRN-filer.
Følgende filtyper understøttes af funktionen til direkte udskrivning:
• PRN: Dell PCL 6-kompatible.
• Du kan oprette PRN-filer ved at markere afkrydsningsfeltet Udskriv til fil,
når du udskriver et dokument. Dokumentet gemmes som en PRN-fil i stedet
for at blive udskrevet på papir. Kun PRN-filer, der oprettes på denne måde,
kan udskrives direkte fra USB-hukommelsen. Læs i Softwareafsnittet,
hvordan du opretter en PRN-fil.
• BMP: BMP, ukomprimeret
• TIFF: TIFF 6.0-baseline
• JPEG: JPEG-baseline
• PDF: PDF 1.4 og tidligere versioner
Sådan udskrives et dokument fra en USBhukommelsesenhed
1. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten på maskinen. Hvis enheden allerede
sidder i porten, skal du trykke på USB-udskrivning ( ).
Maskinen registrerer automatisk enheden og læser de data, der er gemt
på den.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede mappe eller fil vises, og tryk
derefter på OK.
Hvis der vises et D foran et mappenavn, er der en eller flere filer eller
mapper i den markerede mappe.
3. Hvis du vælger en fil, skal du gå videre til næste trin.
Hvis du vælger en mappe, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil, indtil den
ønskede fil vises.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge det antal kopier, der skal udskrives,
eller indtast antallet.
5. Tryk på OK, Color Start ( ) eller Black Start ( ) for at starte
udskrivning af den valgte fil.
Der er to muligheder:
• OK eller Color Start ( ): Farveudskrift
• Black Start ( ): Sort/hvid udskrift
Når filen er udskrevet, bliver du i displayet spurgt, om du vil udskrive
et andet job.
6. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes, hvis du vil udskrive et andet job, og
gentag vejledningen fra trin 2.
Ellers skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil for at vælge No og trykke på OK.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
SIKKERHEDSKOPIERING AF DATA
Data i maskinens hukommelse kan slettes ved en fejltagelse i forbindelse med
et strømsvigt eller lagerfejl. Sikkerhedskopier hjælper dig med at beskytte
posteringerne i adressekartotek og systemindstillingerne ved at lagre dem
som sikkerhedskopifiler på en USB-hukommelsesenhed.
Sikkerhedskopiering af data
1. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten på maskinen.
2. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Export Setting vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede indstilling vises.
• Adressekartotek: Sikkerhedskopierer alle posteringer i
adressekartotek.
• Setup Data: Sikkerhedskopierer alle systemindstillinger.
6. Tryk på OK for at begynde at sikkerhedskopiere.
Dataene sikkerhedskopieres til USB-hukommelsen.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Gendannelse af data
1. Sæt den USB-hukommelsesenhed, som de sikkerhedskopierede data
er gemt på, i USB-porten.
2. Tryk på Menu( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Machine Setup.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Import Setting vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede datatype vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den fil, der indeholder de data, du vil
gendanne, vises, og tryk derefter på OK.
7. Tryk på OK, når Yes vises for at gendanne de sikkerhedskopierede data
på maskinen.
8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Can choose paper size and tray when printing. Se ”Indstilling af
papirstørrelse og type” på side 31.Brug af USB-flash-hukommelse | 55
HÅNDTERING AF USB-HUKOMMELSE
Du kan slette billedfiler, der er gemt på en USB-hukommelsesenhed,
en ad gangen eller alle på én gang ved at omformatere enheden.
Sletning af en billedfil
1. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten på maskinen.
2. Tryk på Scan/Email.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Scan to USB på nederste linje i displayet.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil File Manage vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på OK, når der vises Delete.
6. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede mappe eller fil vises, og tryk
derefter på OK.
Hvis du har valgt en fil, vises filstørrelsen i displayet i ca. 2 sekunder.
Gå videre til næste trin.
Hvis du har valgt en mappe, skal du trykke på venstre/højre pil, indtil den fil,
du vil slette, vises. Tryk derefter på OK.
7. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes for at bekræfte dit valg.
8. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Formatering af en USB-hukommelsesenhed
1. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten på maskinen.
2. Tryk på Scan/Email.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Scan to USB på nederste linje i displayet.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil File Manage vises, og tryk på OK.
5. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Format vises, og tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes for at bekræfte dit valg.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
Visning af USB-hukommelsesstatus
Du kan kontrollere mængden af hukommelse, der er tilgængelig til scanning
og lagring af dokumenter.
1. Sæt USB-enheden i USB-porten på maskinen.
2. Tryk på Scan/Email.
3. Tryk på OK, når der vises Scan to USB på den nederste linje i displayet.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Check Space vises, og tryk på OK.
Den ledige hukommelse vises i displayet.
5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstanden.
Når du har slettet filer eller omformateret en USBhukommelsesenhed, kan filerne ikke længere gendannes. Inden du
sletter filerne, skal du derfor være helt sikker på, at du ikke længere
har brug for filerne.
Hvis der vises et D foran et mappenavn, er der en eller flere filer
eller mapper i den markerede mappe.56 | Vedligeholdelse
vedligeholdelse
Dette kapitel indeholder oplysninger om, hvordan du vedligeholder maskinen og tonerpatronen.
Kapitlet omfatter:
• Udskrivning af rapporter
• Justering af farvekontrasten
• Brug af Advarsel om lav toner
• Sådan slettes hukommelsen
• Rengøring af maskinen
• Vedligeholdelse af patronen
• Udskiftning af tonerpatronen
• Udskiftning af papiroverførselsbæltet
• Vedligeholdelsesdele
• Styring af maskinen fra webstedet
• Kontrol af maskinens serienummer
UDSKRIVNING AF RAPPORTER
Du kan få vist forskellige rapporter med nyttige oplysninger, som du har
brug for. Der findes følgende rapporter:
Udskrivning af en rapport
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Report vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil du får vist den rapport eller liste, du vil
udskrive, og tryk på OK.
Hvis du vil udskrive alle rapporter og lister, skal du vælge All Report.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes for at bekræfte udskrivningen.
De valgte oplysninger udskrives.
JUSTERING AF FARVEKONTRASTEN
Farvemenuen giver dig mulighed for at justere farveindstillingerne.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Maintenance.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Color vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil den ønskede farvemenu vises, og tryk
derefter på OK.
• Custom Color: Giver dig mulighed for at indstille kontrasten farve
for farve. Default optimerer farver automatisk. Manual Adjust giver
dig mulighed for manuelt at justere farvekontrasten for hver patron.
Nogle rapporter vises muligvis ikke på kontrolpanelet afhængigt
af instillinger eller modeller. Hvis det er tilfældet, kan de ikke anvendes
på denne maskine.
RAPPORT/LISTE BESKRIVELSE
Configuration Denne liste viser status for de brugerdefinerbare
indstillinger. Hvis du har foretaget ændringer,
kan du udskrive denne liste for at få bekræftet
ændringerne.
Supplies Info På listen kan du se den aktuelle status for
maskinens forbrugsstoffer.
Address Book På listen kan du se alle de faxnumre og e-mailadresser, der aktuelt er gemt i maskinens
hukommelse.
Send Report Denne rapport viser faxnummeret, antallet af sider,
hvor lang tid jobbet tog, den benyttede kommunikationstilstand og kommunikationens resultater for et
bestemt job.
Du kan indstille din maskine til automatisk at udskrive
en rapport, der bekræfter transmissionen, efter
hvert faxjob. Se ”Sending-indstillinger” på side 49.
Sent Report Denne rapport indeholder oplysninger om nyligt
afsendte faxer og e-mails.
Du kan indstille maskinen, så rapporten automatisk
udskrives, hver gang der har været
50 kommunikationer. Se ”Sending-indstillinger” på
side 49.
Fax RCV Report Denne rapport indeholder oplysninger om nyligt
afsendte faxer.
Schedule Jobs Denne liste viser de dokumenter, der aktuelt er
gemt til udskudt faxtransmission, sammen med
starttidspunktet og handlingstypen.
Junk Fax Report Denne liste viser de faxnumre, der er angivet som
uønskede faxnumre (junk). Hvis du vil føje numre til
eller slette numre fra listen, skal du åbne menuen
Junk Fax Setup Se ”Receiving-indstillinger” på
side 49.
Network Info. Denne liste viser oplysninger om maskinens
netværksforbindelse og konfiguration.
NetScan Report Denne rapport viser oplysninger vedrørende
Netværksscanningsposter, inklusive IP-adresse,
tidspunkt og dato, antal sider, der er scannet,
og resultater. Rapporten udskrives automatisk,
når der har været 50 netværksscanningsjob.
User Auth List Denne liste viser de godkendte brugere, der har
tilladelse til at bruge e-mail-funktionen.
PCL Font List Du kan udskrive PCL-skrifttypelisten.
PS3 Font List Du kan udskrive PS3-skrifttypelisten.
Stored Job På listen kan du se den aktuelle status for gemte
job på harddisken.
Completed Job Siden Gennemført job indeholder en liste over
fuldførte udskriftsjob. Listen indeholder op til 50
filer fra de seneste udskriftsjob.
Net Auth Log Denne liste viser de brugere, der er logget
på domænet, og deres id’er.
RAPPORT/LISTE BESKRIVELSEVedligeholdelse | 57
Default indstillingen er anbefalet for at få den bedste farvekvalitet.
• Auto Color Reg.: Giver dig mulighed for at indstille placeringen af
farvetekster eller grafik, så de svarer til den originale fil på skærmen.
5. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
BRUG AF ADVARSEL OM LAV TONER
Hvis toneren i patronen er brugt op, vises der en meddelelse til brugeren
om, at tonerpatronen skal skiftes. Du kan angive, hvorvidt denne
meddelelse skal vises eller ej.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på OK, når der vises Maintenance.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Toner Low Alert vises, og tryk på OK.
4. Tryk på venstre/højre pil for at vælge Off.
5. Tryk på OK.
6. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
SÅDAN SLETTES HUKOMMELSEN
Du kan slette selektivt blandt de oplysninger, der er gemt i maskinens
hukommelse.
1. Tryk på Menu ( ), indtil der vises System Setup på den nederste linje
af displayet, og tryk på OK.
2. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil Clear Setting vises, og tryk på OK.
3. Tryk på venstre/højre pil, indtil det element, du vil slette, vises.
4. Tryk på OK, når der vises Yes.
5. Tryk på OK igen for at bekræfte sletningen.
6. Gentag trin 3 til og med 5 for at slette endnu et element.
7. Tryk på Stop/Slet ( ) for at vende tilbage til klar-tilstand.
RENGØRING AF MASKINEN
Hvis du vil bevare udskrifts- og scanningskvaliteten, skal du følge nedenstående
procedurer, hver gang tonerpatronen udskiftes, eller hvis der opstår problemer
med udskrifts- og scanningskvaliteten.
Rengøring af maskinen udvendigt
Gør maskinens kabinet rent med en blød fnugfri klud. Du kan fugte kluden
med lidt vand, men pas på, at vandet ikke drypper på eller ind i maskinen.
Indvendig rengøring af maskinen
Under udskrivningen kan der samle sig papir-, toner- og støvpartikler inde
i maskinen. Denne ophobning kan give problemer med udskriftskvaliteten,
så som tonerpletter eller udtværet skrift. Rengøring af maskinen indvendigt
udbedrer eller formindsker disse problemer.
1. Sluk for maskinen, og træk netledningen ud. Vent, til maskinen er kølet ned.
2. Fjern frontdækslet helt ved hjælp af håndtaget.
Hvis du har flyttet maskinen, anbefales det kraftigt at betjene
menuen manuelt.
Før du rydder hukommelsen, skal du kontrollere, at alle faxjob er
udført. Ellers går disse job tabt.
Nogle menuer vises muligvis ikke på kontrolpanelet afhængigt
af instillinger eller modeller. Hvis det er tilfældet, kan de ikke anvendes
på denne maskine.
INDSTILLINGER BESKRIVELSE
All Settings Rydder alle data, der er gemt i hukommelsen,
og nulstiller alle indstillinger til fabriksindstillingerne.
Fax Setup Gendanner alle faxindstillinger
til fabriksindstillingerne.
Copy Setup Gendanner alle kopieringsindstillinger
til fabriksindstillingerne.
Scan Setup Gendanner alle scanningsindstillinger
til fabriksindstillingerne.
System Setup Gendanner alle systemindstillinger
til fabriksindstillingerne.
Network Gendanner alle netværksindstillinger
til fabriksindstillingerne.
Address Book Sletter alle faxnumre og email-adresser
i hukommelsen.
Sent Report Sletter alle fortegnelser over afsendte faxer og e-mails.
Fax RCV Report Sletter alle poster over modtagne faxer.
NetScan Report Sletter oplysninger om netværkscanningssessioner
i hukommelsen.
• Rengøring af maskinens kabinet med rengøringsmidler,
der indeholder store mængder alkohol, opløsningsmidler eller
andre stærke kemikalier, kan medføre misfarvning eller anden
skade på kabinettet.
• Hvis maskinen eller dens omgivelser er tilsmudset med toner,
anbefaler vi, at du bruger en klud fugtet med vand til at rense den.
Hvis du bruger en støvsuger, bliver toneren hvirvlet op i luften og kan
være skadelig for dig.
• Undlad at berøre den grønne overflade, OPC-tromlen eller forsiden
af tonerpatronen med hænderne eller med andre materialer. Brug
håndtaget på patronen, så du undgår at berøre dette område.
• Vær opmærksom på ikke at ridse overfladen
på papiroverførselsbæltet.
• Hvis du lader frontdækslet stå åbent i mere end et par minutter,
kan OPC-tromlen blive udsat for lys. Dette vil beskadige OPC-tromlen.
Luk frontdækslet, hvis monteringen skal afbrydes af nogen årsag.
INDSTILLINGER BESKRIVELSE58 | Vedligeholdelse
3. Tag fat i håndtagene på tonerpatronen, og træk patronen ud af maskinen.
4. Tryk på det grønne frigørelseshåndtag for at frigøre
papiroverførselsbæltet. Hold på håndtaget til papiroverførselsbæltet,
og løft bæltet ud af maskinen
5. Fjern støv og spildt toner fra området omkring tonerpatroner og deres
hulrum med en tør og fnugfri klud.
6. Find det lange stykke glas (LSU) i den øverste del af sektionen til
tonerpatronen, og tør forsigtigt glasset af for at se, om den hvide
bomuldsklud bliver sort af snavs.
7. Placer de forskellige enheder i maskinen igen, og luk frontlågen.
8. Sæt netledningen i, og tænd for maskinen.
Skal du passe på ikke at røre kontrolpanelets underside (den nederste
del af fikseringsenheden). Fikseringsenhedens temperatur kan blive
høj og kan beskadige huden.
Når du åbner frontlågen og arbejder inde i maskinen, anbefales det
kraftigt, at du først fjerner papiroverførselsbæltet. Det arbejde, du udfører,
kan forurene papiroverførselsbæltet.
Hvis du får toner på tøjet, skal du børste det af med en tør klud
og vaske det i koldt vand. Varmt vand opløser toneren i tøjet.
Maskinen fungerer ikke, hvis frontdækslet ikke er helt lukket.Vedligeholdelse | 59
Rengøring af scannerenheden
Regelmæssig rengøring af scannerenheden er med til at sikre de bedst
mulige kopier. Vi foreslår, at du rengør scannerenheden hver morgen samt
i løbet af dagen efter behov.
1. Fugt en blød fnugfri klud eller et stykke køkkenrulle med lidt vand.
2. Åbn scannerlåget.
3. Tør overfladen af scannerglaspladen og DADF glaspladen af, indtil den
er ren og tør.
4. Tør undersiden af scannerlåget og den hvide flade af, indtil de er rene
og tørre.
5. Luk scannerlåget.
VEDLIGEHOLDELSE AF PATRONEN
Opbevaring af tonerpatroner
Hvis du vil have mest muligt ud af tonerpatronen, skal du være opmærksom
på følgende:
• Tag ikke tonerpatronen ud af emballagen, før den skal bruges.
• Undlad at genopfylde tonerpatronen. Maskinens garanti dækker ikke
skader forårsaget af en genopfyldt tonerpatron.
• Opbevar tonerpatroner i de samme omgivelser som maskinen.
• For at undgå beskadigelse af tonerpatronen må den ikke udsættes
for lyspåvirkning i mere end et par minutter.
Forventet patronlevetid
Tonerpatronens levetid afhænger af, hvor meget toner udskriftsjobbene
kræver. Det reelle tal kan også variere afhængigt af den udskriftstæthed,
der bruges, ligesom antallet af sider kan være påvirket af driftsmiljø,
udskrivningsinterval, medietype og mediestørrelse. Hvis du udskriver meget
grafik, kan det være nødvendigt at udskifte patronen oftere.
Fordeling af toner
Når toneren er ved at være opbrugt, kan der optræde svage eller lyse områder.
Farvebilleder kan blive udskrevet med forkerte farver på grund af forkert
blanding af tonerfarver, når en af tonerpatronerne er ved at være tom.
Du kan midlertidigt forbedre udskriftskvaliteten ved at fordele den
resterende toner.
• Tonermeddelelsen om, at der er meget lidt toner tilbage, vises muligvis
på displayet.
1. Fjern frontdækslet helt ved hjælp af håndtaget.
2. Tag fat i håndtagene på tonerpatronen, og træk patronen ud af maskinen.
1 Scannerlåg
2 Scannerglasplade
3 Hvid flade
4 ADF-glas
• Undlad at berøre den grønne overflade, OPC-tromlen eller forsiden
af tonerpatronen med hænderne eller med andre materialer. Brug
håndtaget på patronen, så du undgår at berøre dette område.
• Vær opmærksom på ikke at ridse overfladen
på papiroverførselsbæltet.
• Hvis du lader frontdækslet stå åbent i mere end et par minutter,
kan OPC-tromlen blive udsat for lys. Dette vil beskadige OPCtromlen. Luk frontdækslet, hvis monteringen skal afbrydes af
nogen årsag.
Skal du passe på ikke at røre kontrolpanelets underside (den nederste
del af fikseringsenheden). Fikseringsenhedens temperatur kan blive
høj og kan beskadige huden.
Når du åbner frontlågen og arbejder inde i maskinen, anbefales det kraftigt,
at du først fjerner papiroverførselsbæltet. Det arbejde, du udfører, kan
forurene papiroverførselsbæltet.60 | Vedligeholdelse
3. Hold fast i begge håndtag på tonerpatronen, og ryst den fra side til side
for at fordele toneren ligeligt.
4. Skub tonerpatronen ind i maskinen igen.
5. Luk frontlågen. Kontroller, at lågen er ordentligt lukket.
UDSKIFTNING AF TONERPATRONEN
Maskinen benytter fire farver og har en tonerpatron til hver farve: gul (Y),
magenta (M), cyan (C) og sort (K).
• Statuslampen og den tonerrelaterede meddelelse på displayet angiver,
hvornår hver enkelt tonerpatron skal udskiftes.
• Indgående faxer gemmes i hukommelsen.
Så er det nødvendigt at udskifte tonerpatronen. Kontroller, hvilken type
tonerpatron der bruges til maskinen. Se ”Ekstraudstyr” på side 85.
1. Sluk for maskinen, og vent et par minutter, til den er kølet af.
2. Fjern frontdækslet helt ved hjælp af håndtaget.
3. Tag fat i håndtagene på tonerpatronen, og træk patronen ud af maskinen.
Hvis du får toner på tøjet, skal du børste det af med en tør klud
og vaske det i koldt vand. Varmt vand opløser toneren i tøjet.
Maskinen fungerer ikke, hvis frontdækslet ikke er helt lukket.
• Undlad at berøre den grønne overflade, OPC-tromlen eller
forsiden af de enkelte tonerpatroner med hænderne eller med
andre materialer. Brug håndtaget på patronen, så du undgår
at berøre dette område.
Adresses complètes sur CD ROM, téléphone, Fax, emails, nom du dirigeant, etc. Exports illimités ! CLIQUEZ ICI
